The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink About2025-06-10; City Council; 09; Adoption of Plans, Specifications and Contract Documents, Authorization to Advertise for Bids and Appropriate Funds for the Police & FireCA Review CKM Meeting Date: June 10, 2025 To: Mayor and City Council From: Geoff Patnoe, City Manager Staff Contact: Brian Bacardi, Public Works Superintendent brian.bacardi@carlsbadca.gov, 442-339-2944 Subject: Adoption of Plans, Specifications and Contract Documents, Authorization to Advertise for Bids and Appropriate Funds for the Police & Fire Headquarters Central Plant Repair Project District: 2 Recommended Action Adopt a resolution adopting the plans, specifications and contract documents, authorizing the City Clerk to advertise for bids and appropriating funds for the Police & Fire Headquarters Central Plant Repair Project. Executive Summary The Police & Fire Headquarters Central Plant Repair Project includes replacing the chiller that serves the heating, ventilation and air conditioning system, replacing the electrical distribution panel for the central plant and concrete modifications to accommodate the new chiller equipment and drainage issues in the exterior portion of the central plant. Carlsbad Municipal Code Section 3.28.080(E) requires City Council adoption of plans, specifications and contract documents of projects when the expected value of work is more than $220,000. The estimated cost for the project is $573,330, thus requiring City Council approval. Staff recommend that the City Council adopt the plans, specifications and contract documents, authorize the City Clerk to advertise the project and appropriate funds in an amount not to exceed $573,330. Explanation & Analysis The Police & Fire Headquarters, located at 2560 Orion Way, as shown in Exhibit 3, was originally constructed in 1986 and uses a central plant system as a means of conditioning the air within the facility. Depending on the demand for warm or cool air in a specific zone, the system generates and delivers very hot or cold water to satisfy the demand. Hot water is produced by way of a boiler while cold water is generated by a chiller. June 10, 2025 Item #9 Page 1 of 7 Docusign Envelope ID: 3200D42E-7261-4E41-96CF-D60758B844E5 A facility condition assessment was conducted on the Police & Fire Headquarters building in 2023. The consultant’s report included an evaluation of the existing 100-ton chiller, which has been in service since June 2006, and the electrical distribution panel that serves the facility’s central plant, which was installed when the facility was originally constructed in 1986. The report indicated the expected useful life of the chiller is 20 years, and the consultant recommended budgeting for its replacement in 2026. The electrical distribution equipment was identified as being near the end of its useful life, and it was recommended to be replaced within the next few years. Near the end of summer 2024, the chiller experienced a failure in one of its two compressors causing the unit to run at 50% capacity. Given the expense of the repair, coupled with the recommended schedule for retirement, staff engaged an engineering firm to evaluate replacement options. The firm proposed a design that incorporates replacing the 100-ton chiller with two 50-ton chillers, which would provide redundancy and significantly reduce the possibility of a scenario in which the facility would not have cooling. The new chiller design requires replacement of the electrical distribution panel to satisfy the additional equipment needs and to achieve redundancy. After considering the consultant’s recommendations in the facility condition assessment for the electrical distribution panel replacement, staff determined that the proposed design would deliver the best value and solution for the facility. To accommodate the new design, the concrete pad that the existing chiller is installed on requires a slight modification. Since a concrete specialty contractor would be used for the project, staff determined that a chronic drainage issue in the central plant area could be remedied at the same time as the work for the chiller replacement project. This would provide a cost-savings benefit to the city by having this work done while a contractor is already on the site. As previously mentioned, the system is currently running at 50% capacity. While the chiller has been able to keep up with demand so far, should the second compressor fail, the system would lose the ability to cool the building. A temporary chiller could be installed but it would take up to 30 days to mobilize, depending on chiller availability. Staff recommend that the City Council adopt the plans, specifications and contract documents, authorize the City Clerk to advertise the project and appropriate funds in an amount not to exceed $573,330, which will allow the urgent repairs to be addressed. Fiscal Analysis The mechanical failure of the chiller was unexpected so no funding for this project has been established. Staff recommend that the City Council authorize the appropriation of $573,330 from the Infrastructure Repair and Replacement fund to fund the project, as shown in the table below: June 10, 2025 Item #9 Page 2 of 7 Docusign Envelope ID: 3200D42E-7261-4E41-96CF-D60758B844E5 Police & Fire Headquarters Central Plant Repair Project Engineer’s estimate -$445,500 Rental chiller and equipment during construction -$37,680 Construction management services (estimated) -$45,600 Construction contingency (estimated) -$44,550 Total estimated project costs -$573,330 Appropriations requested $573,330 Next Steps Upon the City Council’s approval, the City Manager or designee will initiate a project number and appropriate $573,330 from the Infrastructure Repair and Replacement Fund to the project, and the City Clerk will advertise for bids to construct the project. Staff will evaluate the bids received and identify the lowest responsive and responsible bidder. Staff will then return to the City Council with a recommendation to award a construction contract to the identified bidder by late summer 2025. Environmental Evaluation The proposed action for replacement of an existing 100-ton chiller at the Police & Fire Headquarters central plant is categorically exempt from environmental review under California Environmental Quality Act, or CEQA, Guidelines Section 15301 because it involves the maintenance, repair or minor alteration of existing facilities with negligible or no expansion of the existing or former use. No exceptions to the categorical exemption as set forth in CEQA Guidelines Section 15300.2 or Carlsbad Municipal Code Section 19.04.070(C) apply. Exhibits 1. City Council resolution 2. Plans, specifications, and contract documents (on file at the Office of the City Clerk) 3. Location map June 10, 2025 Item #9 Page 3 of 7 Docusign Envelope ID: 3200D42E-7261-4E41-96CF-D60758B844E5 Exhibit 1 RESOLUTION NO. 2025-1244 A RESOLUTION OF THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF CARLSBAD, CALIFORNIA, ADOPTING THE PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, AUTHORIZING THE CITY CLERK TO ADVERTISE FOR BIDS AND APPROPRIATING FUNDS FOR THE POLICE & FIRE HEADQUARTERS CENTRAL PLANT REPAIR PROJECT WHEREAS, the City Council of the City of Carlsbad, California has determined it necessary, desirable and in the public interest to construct the Police & Fire Headquarters Central Plant Repair Project, or Project; and WHEREAS, staff recommend a design which incorporates replacing the 100-ton chiller with two 50-ton chillers to introduce redundancy and significantly reduce the possibility of a scenario where the facility would not have cooling; and WHEREAS, the new chiller design would require replacement of the electrical distribution panel to satisfy the additional equipment needs and to achieve redundancy; and WHEREAS, to accommodate the new design, the concrete housekeeping pad that the existing chiller is installed on requires a slight modification; and WHEREAS, the Project includes work to address a chronic drainage issue in the central plant area concurrently, thereby realizing cost savings with a concrete specialty contractor; and WHEREAS, the plans, specifications and contract documents for the Project are on file at the City Clerk’s Office and are incorporated by reference; and WHEREAS, staff request an appropriation in the amount of $573,330 from the Infrastructure Repair and Replacement Fund to fund construction of the Project. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED by the City Council of the City of Carlsbad, California, as follows: 1.That the above recitations are true and correct. 2.That the proposed action for replacement of an existing 100-ton chiller at the Police & Fire Headquarters central plant is categorically exempt from environmental review under California Environmental Quality Act, or CEQA, Guidelines Section 15301 because it involves the maintenance, repair or minor alteration of existing facilities with negligible or no expansion of the existing or former use. No exceptions to the categorical June 10, 2025 Item #9 Page 4 of 7 Docusign Envelope ID: 3200D42E-7261-4E41-96CF-D60758B844E5 exemption as set forth in CEQA Guidelines Section 15300.2 or Carlsbad Municipal Code Section 19.04.070(C) apply. 3.That the plans, specifications and contract documents for the Police & Fire Headquarters Central Plant Repair Project are adopted, and the City Clerk is authorized to advertise for bids. 4.That the City Manager or designee is authorized to appropriate $573,330 from the Infrastructure Repair and Replacement Fund to fund construction of the Police & Fire Headquarters Central Plant Repair Project. PASSED, APPROVED AND ADOPTED at a Regular Meeting of the City Council of the City of Carlsbad on the 10th day of June, 2025, by the following vote, to wit: AYES: Blackburn, Bhat-Patel, Acosta, Burkholder, Shin. NAYS: None. ABSTAIN: None. ABSENT: None ______________________________________ KEITH BLACKBURN, Mayor ______________________________________ SHERRY FREISINGER, City Clerk (SEAL) June 10, 2025 Item #9 Page 5 of 7 Docusign Envelope ID: 3200D42E-7261-4E41-96CF-D60758B844E5 Exhibit 2 Plans, specifications and contract documents (on file in the Office of the City Clerk) June 10, 2025 Item #9 Page 6 of 7 Docusign Envelope ID: 3200D42E-7261-4E41-96CF-D60758B844E5 00 01 01 TITLE PAGE Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 CITY OF CARLSBAD CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR: POLICE & FIRE HEADQUARTERS CHILLER REPLACEMENT Project No. «PROJNUM» PWS25-3807FAC 1635 Faraday Ave, Carlsbad, CA 92008 Email: PWContractAdmin@carlsbadca.gov EXHIBIT 2 00 11 10 NOTICE INVITING BIDS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 1 Table of Contents SECTION 1 ....................................................................................................................................... 6 00 11 10 NOTICE INVITING BIDS ..................................................................................................... 6 1. RECEIPT OF BIDS. ......................................................................................................................... 6 2. DESCRIPTION OF WORK. ............................................................................................................. 6 3. COMPLETION OF WORK. ............................................................................................................. 6 4. OPENING AND AWARD OF BIDS. ................................................................................................ 6 5. PERIOD FOR AWARD. .................................................................................................................. 6 6. BIDDER QUALIFICATIONS. ........................................................................................................... 7 7. PRE-BID CONFERENCE. ................................................................................................................ 7 8. OBTAINING CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. ........................................................................................ 7 9. BID GUARANTEE AND BONDS. .................................................................................................... 7 10. PREVAILING WAGE RATES AND LABOR COMPLIANCE. ............................................................. 8 11. PROJECT ADMINISTRATION/QUESTIONS. ................................................................................. 8 00 21 10 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ............................................................................................. 9 1. SECURING CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. .......................................................................................... 9 2. EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. ............................................................. 9 3. INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS. ................................................................ 9 4. QUESTIONS. .............................................................................................................................. 10 5. PRE-BID CONFERENCE. .............................................................................................................. 10 6. ADDENDA. ................................................................................................................................. 11 7. ALTERNATE BIDS. ...................................................................................................................... 11 8. COMPLETION OF BID FORMS. ................................................................................................... 11 9. GOVERNING GENERAL PROVISIONS. ........................................................................................ 12 00 11 10 NOTICE INVITING BIDS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 2 10. MODIFICATIONS OF BIDS. ....................................................................................................... 12 11. BID GUARANTEE. ..................................................................................................................... 12 12. LABOR & MATERIAL BOND AND PERFORMANCE & WARRANTY BOND REQUIREMENTS...... 13 13. SUBSTITUTION OF SECURITY. .................................................................................................. 14 14. OPTIONAL ESCROW FOR SECURITY DEPOSIT. ......................................................................... 14 15. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS. ................................................................................................. 14 16. LICENSING REQUIREMENTS. ................................................................................................... 15 17. SUBCONTRACTORS. ................................................................................................................ 15 18. BIDDER INFORMATION AND EXPERIENCE FORM. .................................................................. 16 19. NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT. .................................................................................................. 17 20. IRAN CONTRACTING ACT OF 2010. ......................................................................................... 17 21. PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION CERTIFICATION. ............................................ 17 22. PREVAILING WAGES. ............................................................................................................... 18 23. DEBARMENT OF CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS. ................................................... 18 24. SIGNING OF BIDS. .................................................................................................................... 18 25. SUBMISSION OF SEALED BIDS. ................................................................................................ 19 26. OPENING OF BIDS. .................................................................................................................. 19 27. WITHDRAWAL OF BID. ............................................................................................................ 20 28. BIDDERS INTERESTED IN MORE THAN ONE BID. .................................................................... 20 29. SALES AND OTHER APPLICABLE TAXES, PERMITS, LICENSES, AND FEES. ............................... 20 30. PERMIT AND INSPECTION FEE ALLOWANCE. .......................................................................... 20 31. BASIS OF AWARD; BALANCED BID. ......................................................................................... 20 32. AWARD PROCESS. ................................................................................................................... 21 33. EXECUTION OF CONTRACT...................................................................................................... 21 00 11 10 NOTICE INVITING BIDS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 3 34. BUSINESS LICENSE ................................................................................................................... 21 35. PARTICIPATION OF MINORITY AND WOMEN-OWNED BUSINESSES. ..................................... 21 36. USE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS ................................................................................................ 21 37. STATUTORY REFERENCES ........................................................................................................ 21 00 41 00 BID FORM ....................................................................................................................... 23 1.BID SCHEDULE ................................................................................................................ 24 2.TOTAL BID PRICE ............................................................................................................ 24 3.RECITALS ........................................................................................................................ 25 00 43 10 BID BOND FORM ............................................................................................................ 31 00 43 20 BID SECURITY.................................................................................................................. 33 00 43 30 PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS FORM ........................................................................... 34 00 43 40 BIDDER INFORMATION AND EXPERIENCE FORM .......................................................... 36 1.INFORMATION ABOUT BIDDER ...................................................................................... 36 2.LIST OF CURRENT PROJECTS (BACKLOG) ....................................................................... 39 3.VERIFICATION AND EXECUTION ..................................................................................... 43 00 45 10 NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT .......................................................................................... 44 00 45 15 IRAN CONTRACTING ACT CERTIFICATION ...................................................................... 45 00 45 20 PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION CERTIFICATION ..................................... 46 00 45 25 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE .......................................................................................... 47 00 45 30 STATEMENT REGARDING DEBARMENT ......................................................................... 48 00 45 35 DISCLOSURE OF DISCIPLINE RECORD ............................................................................. 49 00 52 00 CONTRACT ...................................................................................................................... 51 00 61 10 LABOR AND MATERIALS BOND ...................................................................................... 55 00 61 20 FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE AND WARRANTY BOND ....................................................... 58 00 11 10 NOTICE INVITING BIDS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 4 00 61 30 OPTIONAL ESCROW AGREEMENT .................................................................................. 62 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS .......................................................... 66 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................. 66 00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS ..................................................... 149 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................... 149 PART 2 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS .......................................................................................... 149 SECTION 2 ................................................................................................................................... 166 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK ................................................................................................... 166 PART 1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 166 PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) .................................................................................................. 166 PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) ................................................................................................. 166 01 11 20 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT .................................................................................. 167 PART 1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................................... 167 PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) .................................................................................................. 171 PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) ................................................................................................. 171 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION .......................................................... 172 PART 1 CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE ................................................................. 172 01 32 00 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................. 173 PART 1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 173 PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) .................................................................................................. 178 PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) ................................................................................................. 178 01 33 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE (Not Used) ..................................................... 179 01 41 26 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................................. 179 PART 1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 179 00 11 10 NOTICE INVITING BIDS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 5 PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) .................................................................................................. 182 PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) ................................................................................................. 182 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS (Not Used ................................................... 183 PART 1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 183 1.05 SANITARY FACILITIES ........................................................................................................... 183 1.12 DAMAGE TO EXISTING PROPERTY ...................................................................................... 183 1.13 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION ........................................................................................... 183 1.14 SECURITY ............................................................................................................................. 184 1.16 PARKING .............................................................................................................................. 184 1.17 NOISE CONTROL .................................................................................................................. 184 1.18 DUST CONTROL ................................................................................................................... 184 1.19 TEMPORARY DRAINAGE PROVISIONS ................................................................................. 185 1.20 EROSION CONTROL ............................................................................................................. 185 1.21 POLLUTION CONTROL ......................................................................................................... 185 Project Manual………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………186 Appendix A – Fleet Compliance Form 00 11 10 NOTICE INVITING BIDS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 6 . SECTION 1 00 11 10 NOTICE INVITING BIDS 1. RECEIPT OF BIDS. The City of Carlsbad / Carlsbad Municipal Water District (“Agency”) will accept Bids via electronic format via the City of Carlsbad Electronic Bidding Site up to and no later than July 15, 2025 at 11 a.m. through the online bidding portal (Contracting & Purchasing | Carlsbad, CA (carlsbadca.gov)) for the construction of the Work entitled: Police & Fire Headquarters Chiller Replacement PWS25-3807FAC Project No. «PROJNUM» 2. DESCRIPTION OF WORK. The Work includes the provision of all equipment, labor, materials, tools, services, transportation, permits, utilities, and all other items necessary to complete the construction of the following, as specified and shown in the Construction Documents: The Police & Fire Headquarters Chiller Replacement, 2560 Orion Way in Carlsbad, CA 92010. The City desires to replace the HVAC chiller serving the Police and Fire Headquarters building, bringing the system up to current industry standards, including upgrading electrical, mechanical infrastructure, and appurtenances all as described and detailed in the contract documents. The Work Site is located in the City of Carlsbad, in the County of San Diego, California. 3. COMPLETION OF WORK. The Contract Time is established as ninety (90) working days. The Contract Time shall begin ten (10) working days from the date of issuance of the Notice to Proceed. The Engineers’ estimate for this Project is $572,011. 4. OPENING AND AWARD OF BIDS. Agency shall consider awarding the Contract for the Project to the lowest, responsive, responsible Bidder as determined by the Agency from the base Bid alone. The Agency has the right to reject any or all Bids or to waive any irregularities or informalities in any Bids or in the Bidding process. 5. PERIOD FOR AWARD. A period of ninety (90) Calendar Days from the time of Bid opening may be required to award the Contract. No Bidder may withdraw its Bid or Bid Guarantee during this period. Bidders shall assume full responsibility for their Bid Price during this period and shall make certain that such delay does not restrict the Bid Guarantee. 00 11 10 NOTICE INVITING BIDS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 7 6.BIDDER QUALIFICATIONS. Bidders shall be licensed contractors pursuant to Business and Professions Code Sections 7000 et seq. under the classification of Class B, General Building Contractor as of the date of submittal of the Bid Documents and shall maintain such license until final acceptance of the Work. Additional qualifications are included in the Contract Documents. 7.PRE-BID CONFERENCE. The Agency will conduct a Mandatory Pre-Bid Conference at the Agency’s office (address listed below) on June 24, 2025, at 10 a.m. Bidders will have the opportunity to walk the project area. Address: 2560 Orion Way in Carlsbad, CA 92010 Representatives of the Agency and consulting engineers, if any, will be present. Questions asked by Bidders at the Pre-Bid Conference not specifically addressed within the Contract Documents shall be answered in writing, and shall be sent to all Bidders present at the Pre-Bid Conference and be posted on the online bidding portal. Bids will not be accepted from any bidder who did not attend a mandatory Pre-Bid Conference. 8.OBTAINING CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. Bidders may obtain a copy of the Contract Documents from Agency’s website (Contracting & Purchasing | Carlsbad, CA (carlsbadca.gov)). To the extent required by Public Contract Code Section 20103.7, upon request from a contractor plan room service, the Agency shall provide an electronic copy of the Contract Documents at no charge to the contractor plan room. It is the responsibility of each prospective Bidder to download and print all Bid Documents for review and to verify the completeness of Bid Documents before submitting a Bid. All Addenda will be posted on the online bidding portal. It is the responsibility of each prospective Bidder to check the online bidding portal on a daily basis through the close of the bidding period for any applicable Addenda. The Agency does not assume any liability or responsibility for any defective or incomplete copying, excerpting, scanning, faxing, downloading or printing of the Bid Documents. Information on the online bidding portal may change without notice to prospective Bidders. The Contract Documents shall supersede any information posted or transmitted by the online bidding portal. No time extensions or other consideration will be given for non-receipt or other circumstance associated with the review or acquisition of Contract Documents. Bids must be submitted on the Agency’s Bid Forms in the Contract Documents. 9.BID GUARANTEE AND BONDS. Each Bid shall be accompanied by cash, a certified or cashier’s check or Bid Bond secured from a surety company satisfactory to the Agency, the amount of which shall not be less than 10% of the submitted Total Bid Price, made payable to the Agency as bid security. The bid security shall be provided as a guarantee that within 10 Working Days after the Agency provides the successful bidder the Notice of Award, the successful Bidder will enter into a contract and provide the necessary bonds and certificates of insurance. The bid security will be declared forfeited if the successful Bidder fails to comply within these 10 Working Days. No interest will be paid on funds deposited with the Agency. 00 11 10 NOTICE INVITING BIDS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 8 All Bidders must upload Bidder’s Bond to the online bidding portal. The original Bid Bond for the 3 apparent low Bidders must be submitted to the city within 2 Business Days of Bid opening. The successful Bidder will be required to furnish a Faithful Performance Bond and a Labor and Material Bond each in an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Price. Each bond shall be in the forms set forth in the Contract Documents, shall be secured from a surety company that meets all State of California bonding requirements, as defined in Code of Civil Procedure Section 995.120, and that is a California admitted surety insurer. Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 22300, the successful Bidder may substitute certain securities for funds withheld by Agency to ensure its performance under the Contract. 10.PREVAILING WAGE RATES AND LABOR COMPLIANCE. This Project is subject to prevailing wages and labor compliance per the Labor Code. To this end, Bidder shall sign and submit with its Bid the California Department of Industrial Relations (DIR) Public Works Contractor Registration Certification on the form 00 45 00 provided. Failure to submit this form may render the bid non-responsive. In addition, each Bidder shall provide the registration number for each listed Subcontractor in the space provided in the Proposed Subcontractors form. In bidding this Project, it shall be the Bidder’s sole responsibility to evaluate and include the cost of complying with all labor compliance requirements under this Contract and applicable law in its Bid. A copy of the prevailing wage rates may be obtained via the internet at: www.dir.ca.gov/dlsr/. 11.PROJECT ADMINISTRATION/QUESTIONS. Requests for Information (RFI) or interpretations of Bid Documents during the bid period shall be submitted via Online Q&A in the online bidding portal. The cutoff date and time to submit questions or substitution request regarding this Project via Online Q&A in the online bidding portal is June 26, 2025, at 5 p.m. No questions will be entertained after that date. The answers to questions submitted during the bidding period will be published in an addendum and provide to those bidding on the Project no later than July 7, 2025. For further information, see the online bidding portal. END OF SECTION 00 21 10 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 9 00 21 10 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. SECURING CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. Bids must be submitted to the Agency on the Bid Forms which are a part of the Contract Documents for the Project. The Contract Documents may be obtained from the Agency’s online bidding portal (Contracting & Purchasing | Carlsbad, CA (carlsbadca.gov)). Prospective bidders are encouraged to communicate with the Agency well in advance of the date and time bids are due to the Agency (“Bid Submission Deadline”) to determine the availability of Contract Documents. The Agency may also make the Contract Documents available for review at one or more plan rooms. Prospective Bidders who choose to review the Contract Documents at a plan room must contact the Agency to obtain the required Contract Documents if they decide to submit a Bid for the Project. Addenda will be posted on the online bidding portal. Failure to acknowledge all Addenda may make a Bid nonresponsive and ineligible for award of the Contract. Bidders are advised to verify the issuance of all Addenda and receipt of them 1 Working Day prior to bidding. Failure to acknowledge all Addenda may make a Bid nonresponsive and ineligible for award of the Contract. 2. EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The site of the work is a secured campus with restricted access. In order for bidders to visit the Site of the proposed Work and fully acquaint itself with the conditions relating to the construction and labor required so that the Bidder may fully understand the Work, including but not limited to, difficulties and restrictions attending the execution of the Work under the Contract, the bidder must attend the mandatory pre-bid conference described in 00 11 00 (7) above. Each Bidder shall carefully examine the Drawings, and shall read the Specifications, Contract Documents, and all other referenced documents. Each Bidder shall also determine the local conditions which may in any way affect the performance of the Work, including local tax structure, contractors’ licensing requirements, availability of required insurance, the prevailing wages and other relevant cost factors. Each Bidder shall also familiarize itself with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and codes affecting the performance of the Work, including the cost of permits and licenses required for the Work, and shall make such surveys and investigations, including investigations of subsurface or latent physical conditions at the Site or where Work is to be performed as may be required. Bidders are responsible for consulting the standards referenced in the Contract. The failure or omission of any Bidder to receive or examine any contract documents, forms, instruments, addenda, or other documents, or to visit the Site and acquaint itself with conditions there existing shall in no way relieve any Bidder from any obligation with respect to its Bid or to the Contract and no relief for error or omission will be given except as required under California law. The submission of a Bid shall be taken as conclusive evidence of compliance with this Section. 3. INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS. Prospective Bidders unclear as to the true meaning of any part of the Drawings, Specifications or other parts of the Contract Documents, or discrepancies in or omissions from the Drawings and 00 21 10 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 10 Specifications, may promptly submit a written request for information, interpretation, clarification, or correction (“RFI”) to the Bid Administrator, the Agencies designated representative for soliciting and conducting bids on the Agencies online ebidding portal. (defined below). The Agency may not respond to RFIs submitted past the Q&A Submission Deadline. The Bidder submitting the RFI is responsible for prompt delivery to the Bid Administrator. Responses to RFIs will be made only by duly issued written Addenda. The Agency shall not provide verbal responses to RFIs. Copies of written Addenda will be posted on the online bidding portal for each prospective Bidder who has downloaded a set of Contract Documents. The Agency will not be responsible for any other explanation or interpretations of the Drawings, Specifications or other parts of the Contract Documents. If any Prospective Bidder becomes aware of any errors or omissions in any part of the Contract Documents, the Prospective Bidder must promptly notify the Agency of such error or omission. Before award of the Contract, no addition to, modification of, or interpretation of any provision in the Contract Documents will be given by any agent, employee or contractor of the Agency except as otherwise specified in these Instructions to Bidders. No bidder may rely on verbal directions given by any agent, employee or contractor of the Agency except as specified in these Instructions to Bidders. 4. QUESTIONS. Questions regarding this Project must be submitted through the online ebidding portal. Questions shall be definite and certain, and shall reference applicable drawing sheets, notes, details or specification sections. The deadline to submit questions is identified in the Notice Inviting Bids. Questions received after the deadline may not be answered. Responses to questions submitted during the bidding period will be published in an Addendum and provided to those bidding on the Project no later than the date specified in the Notice Inviting Bids. Except for the Agency’s Bid Administrator, no other members of the Agency’s staff or Board should be contacted about this procurement during the bidding process. All inquiries and comments from Prospective Bidders regarding a proposed Bid must be communicated in writing, unless otherwise instructed by the Agency. The Agency may, in its sole discretion, disqualify any Prospective Bidder who engages in any prohibited communications. 5. PRE-BID CONFERENCE. The Notice Inviting Bids shall state whether a Pre-Bid Conference will be held and, if so, whether attendance is mandatory. Bids will not be accepted from any bidder who did not attend a Mandatory Pre-Bid Conference. The Conference will commence at the specified start time and the Site visit will begin at the conclusion of the Conference. Prospective Bidders who arrive late and who do not sign the “Sign-In” or attendance sheet, may be disqualified from the bidding process. Representatives of the Agency and its consultants, if any, will be present to the extent possible. Questions asked by Bidders at the Pre-Bid Conference not specifically addressed within the 00 21 10 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 11 Contract Documents shall be answered in writing and shall be sent to all Bidders present at the Pre-Bid Conference. 6.ADDENDA. The Agency may revise the Contract Documents before the Bid Submission Deadline. Revisions, if any, shall be made by written Addenda. All Addenda will be posted on the online bidding portal. All Addenda issued by the Agency shall be acknowledged by the Bidder on the online bidding portal and made part of the Contract Documents. The Bidder shall acknowledge the Addenda before submitting its Bid. Bidders are responsible for the receipt of all Addenda. The Agency may reject a Bid if the Bidder fails to acknowledge all Addenda. Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 4104.5, if the Agency issues an Addendum which includes material changes to the Project less than 72 hours before the Bid Submission Deadline, the Agency will extend the Bid Submission Deadline by no less than 72 hours. The Agency may determine, in its sole discretion, whether an Addendum warrants postponement of the Bid Submission Deadline. 7.ALTERNATE BIDS. If alternate Bid items are called for in the Notice Inviting Bids and the Contract Documents, the time required for completion of the Work for the alternate Bid items is factored into the Contract duration and no additional Contract time will be awarded. The Agency may elect to include one or more of the alternate Bid items, or to otherwise remove certain work from the Project scope of work. Accordingly, each Bidder must ensure that each Bid item contains a proportionate share of profit, overhead, and other costs or expenses which will be incurred by the Bidder. If the Agency utilizes alternate Bid items as described above, the Notice Inviting Bids will prescribe predetermined criteria for the Bid package selection or a selection process in which price information and Bidder identities are not revealed to the Agency before the Bid Submission Deadline. 8.COMPLETION OF BID FORMS. Bids shall only be prepared using the Bid Forms which are included in the Contract Documents. The use of substitute Bid Forms other than legible and correct photocopies of those provided by the Agency are prohibited. Bids shall be executed by an authorized signatory as described in these Instructions to Bidders. In addition, Bidders shall fill in all blank spaces (including inserting “N/A” where applicable), and initial all interlineations, alterations, or erasures to the Bid Forms. Bidders shall neither delete, modify, nor supplement the printed matter on the Bid Forms nor make substitutions thereon. Use of black or blue ink, indelible pencil, or a typewriter is required. Deviations from these instructions may result in the Bid being deemed non-responsive. The following documents must be completed and properly executed including notarization, where indicated, and submitted as a part of the complete Bid Package: 00 21 10 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 12 1.Bid Form (00 41 00) 2.Bid Bond (00 43 10) or Bid Security (00 43 20) with check/cash 3.Proposed Subcontractors Form (00 43 30) 4.Bidder Information and Experience Form (00 43 40) 5.Non-Collusion Affidavit (00 45 10) 6.Iran Contracting Act Certification (00 45 15) 7.Public Works Contractor Registration Certification (00 45 20) 8.Certificate of Insurance (00 45 25) 9.Statement Regarding Debarment (00 45 30) 10.Disclosure of Discipline Record (00 45 35) 11.Acknowledgement of ALL Addenda on the online bidding portal. 12.Optional Escrow Agreement, as applicable (00 61 30) 13.Fleet Compliance Certification Form (Appendix A) All Bids shall be computed on the basis of the given estimated quantities of work, as indicated in the Bid, multiplied by the unit price as submitted by the Bidder. When paper copies are submitted, all prices must be written in ink or typewritten. Changes or corrections may be crossed out and typed or written in with ink and must be initialed in ink by a person authorized to sign for the Contractor. 9. GOVERNING GENERAL PROVISIONS. The Specifications contained in the Agency Supplemental General Provisions (00 73 00) take precedence over the specification language contained in the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, “the Greenbook” latest edition and all errata. The Supplemental General Provisions address the unique conditions in the City of Carlsbad that are not addressed in the Greenbook. Therefore, if there is a conflict between the two, the Supplemental Provisions shall control over the Greenbook. The Greenbook may be purchased at Bidder’s/Contractor’s local technical bookstore, online or directly from the publisher. The Supplemental Provisions are available only for download from the online bidding portal with Contract Documents. The Agency does not provide hard copies. 10.MODIFICATIONS OF BIDS. Each Bidder shall submit its Bid in strict conformity with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Unauthorized additions, modifications, revisions, conditions, limitations, exclusions, or provisions attached to a Bid may render it non-responsive and may cause its rejection. Bidders shall not delete, modify, or supplement the printed matter on the Bid Forms, or make substitutions thereon. Oral, telephonic, and electronic modifications will not be considered. 11.BID GUARANTEE. Each Bid shall be accompanied by: (a) a cashier’s check; or, (b) a certified check made payable to Agency; or, (c) a Bid Bond secured from a surety company satisfactory to the Board, the amount of which shall not be less than 10% of the total bid price, made payable to Agency as bid security. Personal sureties and unregistered surety companies are unacceptable. The surety insurer shall 00 21 10 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 13 be a California admitted surety insurer, as defined in Code of Civil Procedure Section 995.120. The bid security shall be provided as a guarantee that within 10 Working Days after the Agency provides the successful Bidder the Notice of Award, the successful Bidder will enter into a contract and provide the necessary bonds and certificates of insurance. The bid security may be declared forfeited if the successful Bidder fails to enter into a contract and provide the necessary bonds and certificates of insurance. Any Bid received that does not comply with these Bid Guarantee instructions may be rejected as non-responsive, and Agency may enter into a contract with the next lowest, responsive, responsible Bidder, or may call for new Bids. No interest shall be paid on funds deposited with the Agency. Copies of Bid Bonds submitted to the Agency shall have the same force and effect as the original. The Bidder’s security of the second and third next lowest responsive Bidders may be withheld until the Contract has been fully executed. The security submitted by all other unsuccessful Bidders shall be returned to them, or deemed void, within 10 Working Days after the Contract is awarded The proceeds of the Bidder’s security may also become property of the Agency if the Bidder withdraws its Bid within 15 Calendar Days after the Bid opening date, unless otherwise required by law, including Public Contract Code Section 5100 et. seq., and notwithstanding the award of the Contract to another Bidder. The Bidder shall submit Bid Bond (00 43 10) or Bid Security (00 43 20) with properly certified check with the Bid Package. 12. LABOR & MATERIAL BOND AND PERFORMANCE & WARRANTY BOND REQUIREMENTS. The successful Bidder shall furnish Agency with a Labor and Material Payment Bond and a Performance and Warranty Bond, each in an amount equal to 100% of the Contract price. Each bond shall be secured from a surety company that meets all State of California bonding requirements, as defined in Code of Civil Procedure Section 995.120 and is admitted by the State of California, and whose assets exceed their liabilities in an amount equal to or in excess of the amount of the bond. The Agency shall not accept personal sureties and unregistered surety companies. Each bond shall be accompanied, upon the request of Agency, with all documents required by Code of Civil Procedure Section 995.660 to the extent required by law. All bonding and insurance requirements shall be completed and submitted to Agency within 10 Working Days from the date the Agency provides the successful Bidder with the Notice of Award. These bonds shall be kept in full force and effect during the course of this Project, and shall extend in full force and effect and be retained by the Agency until they are released as stated in the Contract. The Bonds are to be accompanied by an original, or a certified copy, of the unrevoked appointment, power of attorney, by laws, or other instrument entitling or authorizing the person who executed the bond to do so. 00 21 10 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 14 13. SUBSTITUTION OF SECURITY. The Contract Documents call for monthly progress payments based upon the percentage of the Work completed. The Agency will retain a percentage of each progress payment as provided by the Contract Documents. At the request and expense of the successful Bidder, the Agency will substitute securities for the amount so retained in accordance with Public Contract Code Section 22300. 14. OPTIONAL ESCROW FOR SECURITY DEPOSIT. Pursuant to applicable provisions of law (i.e., Public Contract Code Section 10263), appropriate securities may be substituted for any obligation required by these instructions or for any monies withheld by the Agency to ensure performance under the Contract. Public Contract Code Section 10263 requires monies or securities to be deposited with the Agency or a state or federally chartered bank in California as the escrow agent. The escrow agent shall maintain insurance to cover negligent acts and omissions of the agent in connection with the handling of retentions under this section in an amount not less than $100,000 per contract. 15. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS. Before commencing the Work, the successful Bidder shall purchase and maintain insurance as set forth in the Agency General Conditions. If the Bid is accepted, and if requested by the Agency, Contractor shall provide Agency or preferred vendor copies of the insurer’s most recent annual statement and quarterly statement filed with the Department of Insurance pursuant to Insurance Code Section 900 et seq. within 10 Calendar Days of the insurer’s receipt of a request to submit the statements. In accordance with the provisions of Labor Code Section 3700, Contractor shall secure the payment of compensation to its employees. Contractor shall sign and file with the Agency the following certificate before performing the Work under the Contract: I am aware of the provisions of Labor Code Section 3700, which require every employer to be insured against liability for workers’ compensation or to undertake self-insurance in accordance with the provisions of that code, and I will comply with such provisions before commencing the performance of the work of the Contract. The form of such, Certificate of Insurance (00 45 25), shall be submitted as a part of the Bid Package. Insurance must be placed with insurers that: 1) Have a rating in the most recent Best’s Key Rating Guide of at least A-:VII, or 2) Appear on the List of Approved Surplus Line Insurers, (“LASLI”) with a Best’s Key Rating Guide of at least A: X. 3) Are admitted to conduct the business of insurance in the State of California by the Insurance Commissioner. 4) Otherwise comply with all other aspects of City Council Policy No. 70. 00 21 10 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 15 Auto policies offered to meet the specification of this Contract must: 1) Meet the conditions stated above for all insurance companies. 2) Cover any vehicle used in the performance of the Contract, used onsite or offsite, whether owned, non-owned or hired, and whether scheduled or non-scheduled. Workers’ compensation insurance required under this Contract must be offered by a company meeting the above standards with the exception that the Best’s rating condition may be waived. The Agency does accept policies issued by the State Compensation Fund meeting the requirement for workers’ compensation insurance. The Contractor shall be required to maintain insurance as specified in the Contract. Any additional cost of the insurance shall be included in the Bid price. The award of the Contract by the Board is contingent upon the Contractor submitting the required bonds and insurance, as described in the Contract Documents, within 10 Working Days of bid opening. If the Contractor fails to comply with these requirements, the Agency may award the Contract to the second or third lowest Bidder and the bid security of the lowest Bidder may be forfeited. 16. LICENSING REQUIREMENTS. Pursuant to Business and Professions Code Section 7028.15 and Public Contract Code Section 3300, all Bidders must possess proper licenses for performance of the Contract. Subcontractors must possess the appropriate licenses for each specialty subcontracted. Pursuant to Business and Professions Code Section 7028.5, the Agency shall consider any Bid submitted by a contractor not currently licensed in accordance with California law and pursuant to the requirements found in the Contract Documents to be nonresponsive, and the Agency shall reject the Bid. The Agency shall have the right to request, and Bidders shall provide within 10 Calendar Days, evidence satisfactory to the Agency of all valid license(s) currently held by that Bidder and each of the Bidder’s Subcontractors, before awarding the Contract. Notwithstanding anything contained in this Contract, if the Work involves federal funds, the Contractor shall be properly licensed by the time the Contract is awarded, pursuant to the provisions of Public Contract Code Section 20103.5. 17. SUBCONTRACTORS. Bidder shall set forth the name, address of the place of business, and contractor license number of each Subcontractor who will perform work, labor, furnish materials or render services to the bidder on the Contract. This requirement includes each Subcontractor licensed by the State of California who, under subcontract to Bidder, specially fabricates and installs a portion of the Work described in the Drawings and Specifications in an amount in excess of one-half of one percent (0.5%) of the total Bid price. Additionally, the Bidder shall indicate the portion of the Work to be done by each Subcontractor in accordance with Public Contract Code Section 4104. Bidder shall submit Proposed Subcontractors Form (00 43 30) with the Bid Package. 00 21 10 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 16 This form will be used by the Agency to determine the percentage of work that the Bidder proposes to perform. Bidders are cautioned that failure to provide complete and correct information may result in rejection of the Bid as non-responsive. Any Bid that proposes performance of more than 50 percent of the Work by Subcontractors or performance by forces other than the Bidder’s own organization will be rejected as non-responsive. Specialty items of work that may be so designated on the Proposed Subcontractors Form (00 43 30) “Contractor’s Bid” will not be included in computing the percentage of work proposed to be performed by the Bidder. Suppliers of materials from sources outside the limits of Work are not Subcontractors. The value of materials and transport of materials from sources outside the limits of Work, as shown on the plans, shall be assigned to the Contractor or the Subcontractor, as the case may be, that the Bidder proposes as installer of the materials. The value of material incorporated in any Subcontractor-installed Bid item that is supplied by the Bidder shall be included as a part of the Work that the Bidder proposes to be performed by the Subcontractor installing the item. When the Bidder proposes to use a Subcontractor to construct or install less than 100 percent of a Bid item, the Bidder shall attach an explanation sheet to the Proposed Subcontractor Form (00 43 30). The explanation sheet shall clearly apprise the Agency of the specific facts that show the Bidder proposes to perform no less than fifty percent (50%) of the Work with its own forces. Determination of the subcontract amounts for purposes of award of the Contract shall be determined by the Board in conformance with the provisions of the Contract Documents. The decision of the Board shall be final. Contractor is prohibited from performing any Work on this Project with a Subcontractor who is ineligible to perform work on a public works project pursuant to Labor Code Section 1771.1 or 1777.7. Bidders shall make copies of the disclosure forms as may be necessary to provide the required information to Subcontractors. The page number and total number of additional form pages shall be entered in the location provided on each type of form so duplicated. 18. BIDDER INFORMATION AND EXPERIENCE FORM. Each Bidder shall complete the provided questionnaire and shall submit the questionnaire along with its Bid. Failure to provide all information requested within the questionnaire along with the Bid may cause the Bid to be rejected as non-responsive. The Agency may reject any Bid if an investigation of the information submitted does not satisfy the Agency that the Bidder is qualified to properly carry out the terms of the Contract. The Bidder shall submit Bidder Information and Experience Form (00 43 40) with the Bid Package. 00 21 10 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 17 19. NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT. Bidders on all public works contracts are required to submit an affidavit of non-collusion with their Bid. This form (00 45 10 Non-Collusion Affidavit) is included with the Bid Package and must be signed and dated under penalty of perjury. 20. IRAN CONTRACTING ACT OF 2010. In accordance with Public Contract Code Section 2200 et seq., the Agency requires that any person that submits a bid or proposal or otherwise proposes to enter into or renew a contract with the Agency with respect to goods or services of $1,000,000 or more, certify at the time the bid is submitted or the contract is renewed, that the person is not identified on a list created pursuant to subdivision (b) of Public Contract Code Section 2203 as a person engaging in investment activities in Iran described in subdivision (a) of Public Contract Code Section 2202.5, or as a person described in subdivision (b) of Public Contract Code Section 2202.5, as applicable. The form of such Iran Contracting Certificate is included with the Bid Package and must be signed and dated under penalty of perjury. 21. PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION CERTIFICATION. Pursuant to Labor Code Section 1773, the Agency has obtained the prevailing rate of per diem wages and the prevailing wage rate for holiday and overtime work applicable in San Diego County from the Director of the Department of Industrial Relations for each craft, classification, or type of worker needed to execute this Contract. A copy of these prevailing wage rates may be obtained via the internet at www.dir.ca.gov/dlsr/. In addition, a copy of the prevailing rate of per diem wages is available at the Agency and shall be made available to interested parties upon request. The successful Bidder shall post a copy of the prevailing wage rates at each job site. It shall be mandatory upon the Bidder to whom the Contract is awarded, and upon any Subcontractors, to comply with all Labor Code provisions, which include but are not limited to the payment of not less than the specified prevailing wage rates to all workers employed by them in the execution of the Contract, employment of apprentices, hours of labor and debarment of contractors and subcontractors. Pursuant to Labor Code Sections 1725.5 and 1771.1, all contractors and subcontractors that wish to bid on, be listed in a bid, or enter into a contract to perform public work must be registered with the Department of Industrial Relations. No bid will be accepted nor any contract entered into without proof of the contractor’s and subcontractors’ current registration with the Department of Industrial Relations to perform public work. If awarded the Contract, the Bidder and its Subcontractors, of any tier, shall maintain active registration with the Department of Industrial Relations for the duration of the Project. This Project is subject to compliance monitoring and enforcement by the Department of Industrial Relations. In bidding on this Project, it shall be the Bidder’s sole responsibility to evaluate and include the cost of complying with all labor compliance requirements under the Contract and applicable law in its Bid. 00 21 10 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 18 To this end, Bidder shall sign and submit with its Bid the Public Works Contractor Registration Certification on the form provided, attesting to the facts contained in the registration certificate. Failure to submit this certificate may render the Bid non-responsive. In addition, each Bidder shall provide the registration number for each listed Subcontractor in the space provided in the Proposed Subcontractors Form (00 43 30). 22. PREVAILING WAGES. Pursuant to Labor Code Sections 1720, et. seq. and 1770, et. seq., Contractor shall pay prevailing wages for all Work performed under the Contract. The Agency has obtained from the Director of the Department of Industrial Relations the general prevailing rate of per diem wages in the locality in which the Work will be performed for each craft or type of worker needed to execute the Contract. These rates are available at the Agency or may be obtained online at http://www.dir.ca.gov. Bidders are advised that a copy of these rates must be posted by the successful Bidder at the job site(s). 23. DEBARMENT OF CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS. In accordance with the provisions of the Labor Code, contractors or subcontractors may not perform work on a public works project with a subcontractor who is ineligible to perform work on a public project pursuant to Labor Code Section 1777.1 or 1777.7. Any contract on a public works project executed between a contractor and a debarred subcontractor is void as a matter of law. A debarred subcontractor may not receive any public money for performing work as a subcontractor on a public works contract. Any public money that is paid to a debarred subcontractor by the Contractor for the Project shall be returned to the Agency. The Contractor shall be responsible for the payment of wages to workers of a debarred Subcontractor who has been allowed to work on the Project. The Agency may disqualify a Contractor or Subcontractor from participating in bidding when a Contractor or Subcontractor has been debarred by the Agency or another jurisdiction in the State of California as an irresponsible bidder. 24. SIGNING OF BIDS. All Bids submitted shall be executed by the Bidder or its authorized representative. Bidders may be asked to provide evidence in the form of an authenticated resolution of its Board of Directors or a Power of Attorney evidencing the capacity of the person signing the Bid to bind the Bidder to each Bid and to any Contract arising therefrom. If a Bidder is a joint venture or partnership, it may be asked to submit an authenticated Power of Attorney executed by each joint venturer or partner appointing and designating one of the joint venturers or partners as a management sponsor to execute the Bid on behalf of Bidder. Only that joint venturer or partner shall execute the Bid. The Power of Attorney shall also: (1) authorize that particular joint venturer or partner to act for and bind Bidder in all matters relating to the Bid; and (2) provide that each venturer or partner shall be jointly and severally liable for any and all of the duties and obligations that the Bidder assumes under the Bid and under any Contract arising therefrom. The Bid shall be executed by the designated joint venturer or partner on behalf of the joint venture or partnership in its legal name. 00 21 10 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 19 25. SUBMISSION OF SEALED BIDS. Once the Bid and supporting documents have been completed and signed as set forth in these Instructions to Bidders, they shall be uploaded, along with other required materials, to the online bidding portal before the deadline for submitting bids. At the time of Bid submission, whether in the form of a cashier’s check, a properly certified check or an approved corporate surety bond payable to the Agency, Bidders must upload an electronic Portable Document Format (PDF) copy of the Bid Guarantee to the online bidding portal. The first 3 apparent low Bidders must provide the Agency with the original Bid Guarantee within 2 Business Days after the Bid opening date. Failure to submit the electronic version of the Bid Guarantee at time of bid submission shall cause the bid to be rejected and deemed non-responsive. Failure to provide the original within 2 business days may deem the bidder non-responsive. Original Bid Bond shall be submitted to: Public Works Contract Administration Attention: Janean Hawney, Contract Administrator 1635 Faraday Avenue Carlsbad, California, 92008 No oral or telephonic Bids will be considered. Pursuant to Public Contract Code Sections 1600 and 1601, only where expressly permitted in these Instructions to Bidders and the Notice Inviting Bids may Bidders submit their Bids via electronic transmission (the online bidding portal). Bids received after the Bid Submission Deadline will not be accepted. Agency may reject any Bid not strictly complying with Agency’s designated methods for delivery. 26. OPENING OF BIDS. Bids submitted on the online bidding portal will be reviewed by the Agency. Once the Bid Submission Deadline has passed, Bidders, proposers, the general public, and Agency staff are able to immediately see the results online. Agency shall consider award of the Contract to the lowest, responsive, responsible Bidder as determined by the Agency consistent with Section 32 below. In case of a discrepancy between the line item entries submitted in the online bidding portal and the Bid Form, the online bidding portal shall prevail. In the event of any discrepancies, written numbers (e.g., fifty, hundred) will govern over numerical numbers (e.g., 50, 100) on the Bid Form. In the event of any discrepancies, written numbers (e.g., fifty, hundred) will govern over numerical numbers (e.g., 50, 100) on the Price Proposal Form. Also, the sum of all lump sum line items will govern over the “Total Proposed Lump Sum Price” line item. The Agency may reject any or all Bids or waive any irregularities or informalities in any Bids or in the Bidding process. 00 21 10 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 20 The Bid and the terms of the Contract Documents constitute an irrevocable offer that shall remain valid and in full force for a period of 90 Calendar Days from the Bid Submission Deadline and such additional time as may be mutually agreed upon by the Agency and the Bidder. 27. WITHDRAWAL OF BID. Any Bid may be withdrawn via written letter, incurring no penalty, at any time before the scheduled closing time for receipt of Bids. Requests to withdraw Bids shall be worded to not reveal the amount of the original Bid. Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted until the Bid Submission Deadline, provided that resubmitted Bids are in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. Bids may be withdrawn after bid opening only by providing written notice to Agency within five (5) Working Days of the bid opening and in compliance with Public Contract Code Section 5100 et seq., or as otherwise may be allowed with the consent of the Agency. 28. BIDDERS INTERESTED IN MORE THAN ONE BID. No Bidder shall be allowed to make, file or be interested in more than 1 Bid for the same work unless alternate Bids are specifically called for. If the Notice Inviting Bids provides for alternate Bids, a person, firm or corporation that has submitted a sub-proposal to a Bidder, or that has quoted prices of materials to a Bidder, is not disqualified from submitting a sub-proposal or quoting prices to other Bidders. No person, firm, corporation, or other entity may submit a sub- proposal to a Bidder, or quote prices of materials to a Bidder, when also submitting a prime Bid on the same Project. 29. SALES AND OTHER APPLICABLE TAXES, PERMITS, LICENSES, AND FEES. Contractor and its Subcontractors performing work under the Contract will be required to pay California sales tax and other applicable taxes, and to pay for permits, licenses and fees required by the agencies with authority in the jurisdiction in which the Work will be located, unless otherwise expressly provided by the Contract Documents. 30. PERMIT AND INSPECTION FEE ALLOWANCE. Notwithstanding anything contained in these Instructions to Bidders, the Bid Form contains an allowance for the Contractor’s cost of acquiring traffic control permits and for construction inspection fees that may be charged to the Contractor by the Agency. The allowance is included within the Bid Form to eliminate the need by Bidders to research or estimate the costs of traffic control permits and construction inspection fees before submitting a Bid. The allowance is specifically intended to account for the costs of traffic control permits and construction inspection fees charged by the Agency. No other costs payable by Contractor to the Agency are included within the allowance. If such cost is not contained or specified in the Bid Form, the Contractor shall include the costs in the other Bid items on the Bid Form. 31. BASIS OF AWARD; BALANCED BID. The Agency shall award the Contract to the lowest responsible Bidder submitting a responsive Bid. The lowest Bid will be determined on the basis of the total Bid price. In the event of any 00 21 10 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 21 discrepancies, written numbers (e.g., fifty, hundred) will govern over numerical numbers (e.g., 50, 100) on the Price Proposal Form. Also, the sum of all lump sum line items will govern over the “Total Proposed Lump Sum Price” line item. The Agency may reject any Bid which, in its opinion when compared to other Bids received or to the Agency’s internal estimates, does not accurately reflect the cost to perform the Work. The Agency may reject as non-responsive any Bid which unevenly weights or allocates costs, including but not limited to overhead and profit to 1 or more particular Bid items or otherwise violates Public Contract Code Section 9203. 32. AWARD PROCESS. Once all Bids are opened and reviewed to determine the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder, the Board may award the Contract. Once notified by Agency staff, the apparent successful Bidder should begin to prepare the following documents: (1) the Labor and Materials Bond; (2) the Performance and Warranty Bond; and (3) the required insurance certificates and endorsements. Once the Agency notifies the Bidder of the award, the Bidder will have 10 Working Days from the date of this notification to execute the Contract and supply the Agency with all of the required documents and certifications or the Bidder may forfeit the Bid security and the Agency may pursue award of the Contract to the next lowest, responsive, responsible Bidder. Once the Agency receives all properly drafted and executed documents and certifications from the Bidder, the Agency shall issue a Notice to Proceed to that Bidder. 33. EXECUTION OF CONTRACT. As required in these Instructions to Bidders, the Bidder to whom an award is made shall execute the Contract in the amount determined by the Contract Documents. The Agency may require appropriate evidence that the persons executing the Contract are duly empowered to do so. The Contract and bond forms to be executed by the successful Bidder are included within these Specifications and shall not be detached. 34. BUSINESS LICENSE The prime Contractor and all Subcontractors are required to have and maintain a valid City of Carlsbad Business License for the duration of the Contract. 35. PARTICIPATION OF MINORITY AND WOMEN-OWNED BUSINESSES. The Agency encourages the participation of minority and women-owned businesses. 36. USE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS The Agency encourages Bidders, suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators and contractors to utilize recycled and recyclable materials when available, appropriate and approved by the Agency’s Engineer. 37. STATUTORY REFERENCES All references in these Instructions to Bidders (00 21 10) to any statute, rule or regulation are to the statute, rule or regulation as amended, modified, supplemented or replaced from time to time by the corresponding legislative or regulatory body. 00 21 10 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 22 END OF SECTION {remainder of page intentionally left blank} 00 41 10 BID FORM Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 23 00 41 00 BID FORM NAME OF PROJECT: Police & Fire Headquarters Chiller Replacement CONTRACT NO.: PWS25-3807FAC NAME OF BIDDER: AGENCY: City of Carlsbad 1635 Faraday Ave Carlsbad, CA 92008 The undersigned declares that we have carefully examined the location of the proposed Work, and have read and examined the Contract Documents, including all Plans, Specifications, and Addenda, if any, for the above-mentioned Project. The undersigned has acknowledged receipt, understanding, and full consideration of ANY and ALL Addenda to the Contract Documents via the online bidding portal. We propose to furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, transportation, and services, and to discharge all duties and obligations necessary and required to perform and complete the Project, as described and in strict conformity with the Drawings, and these Specifications for TOTAL BID PRICE.  Attached is the required Bid Bond (00 43 10) or Bid Security (00 43 20) in the amount of not less than 10% of the Total Bid Price.  Attached is the completed Proposed Subcontractors form (00 43 30). (Upon Award only).  Attached is the completed Bidder Information and Experience form (00 45 40)  Attached is the fully executed Non-collusion Affidavit (00 45 10).  Attached is the completed Iran Contracting Act Certification form (00 45 15).  Attached is the completed Public Works Contractor Registration Certification form (00 45 20).  Attached is the completed Certificate of Insurance form (00 45 25).  Attached is the Statement of Regarding Debarment form (00 45 30)  Attached is the Disclosure of Discipline Record (00 45 35)  Attached is the Optional Escrow Agreement (if applicable) (00 61 30)  Attached is the Fleet Compliance Form (Appendix A) 00 41 10 BID FORM Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 24 1.BID SCHEDULE Schedule “A” per GENERAL AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS, PROJECT MANUAL AND PLANS Item No. Item Description Unit of Measure Unit Price Total Price A-1 Mobilization (See Contract Section 7-3.4) LS N/A A-2 General Provisions (including weekly clean up, debris removal and monthly schedule updates) to be billed monthly LS N/A A-3 Division 2 - Selective demolition LS N/A A-4 Division 3 – Concrete work LS N/A A-5 Division 22 - Plumbing LS N/A A-6 Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning LS N/A A-7 Division 26 - Electrical LS N/A The costs for any Work shown or required in the Contract Documents, but not specifically identified as a line item are to be included in the related line items and no additional compensation shall be due to Contractor for the performance of the Work. 2.TOTAL BID PRICE The undersigned agrees that this Bid Form constitutes a firm offer to the Agency which cannot be withdrawn for ninety (90) Calendar Days from and after the Bid opening, or until a Contract for the Work is fully executed by the Agency and the lowest responsible Bidder, whichever is later. The Undersigned has carefully checked all the above figures and understands that the Agency will not be responsible for any error or omission on the part of the Undersigned in preparing this Bid. The TOTAL BID PRICE on Bid Schedule total of Unit Prices: Total Bid Price in Numbers:________________________ Total Bid Price in Written Form: In case of discrepancy between the written price, the numerical price, or the price as submitted via the online bidding portal, the online bidding portal price shall prevail. 00 41 10 BID FORM Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 25 3. RECITALS The successful Bidder agrees to sign the Contract and furnish the necessary bonds and certificates of insurance within 10 Working Days after the Agency issues the Notice of Award to the successful Bidder. The Undersigned agrees that in case of failure to execute the required Contract with necessary bonds and insurance policies within this time period, the Agency may pursue awarding the Contract to the next lowest responsible Bidder and the Bid Security of the lowest Bidder may be forfeited. Upon receipt of the signed Contract and other required documents, the Agency will proceed to execute the Contract and issue a purchase order and the Notice to Proceed. The time of completion shall commence on the date of the Notice to Proceed, unless otherwise specified. The undersigned agrees to begin the Work within 10 Working Days of the date of the Notice to Proceed, unless otherwise specified. The Undersigned is aware of the provisions of Labor Code Section 3700, which requires every employer to be insured against liability for workers' compensation or to undertake self-insurance in accordance with the provisions of that code, and agrees to comply with such provisions before commencing the performance of the Work of this Contract and continue to comply until the Contract is complete. The Undersigned is aware of the provisions of Labor Code Section 1770 et seq. relative to the general prevailing rate of wages for each craft or type of worker needed to execute the Contract and agrees to comply with its provisions. The Undersigned Bidder declares, under penalty of perjury, that the undersigned is licensed to do business or act in the capacity of a contractor within the State of California and that this statement is true and correct and has the legal effect of an affidavit. The following are the Bidder’s applicable license number(s), with their expiration date(s) and class of license(s): ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ If the Bidder is a joint venture, each member of the joint venture must include the required licensing information. A Bid submitted to the Agency by a Contractor who is not licensed as a Contractor pursuant to the Business and Professions Code shall be considered nonresponsive and shall be rejected by the Agency. In all contracts where federal funds are involved, no Bid submitted shall be invalidated by the failure of the Bidder to be licensed in accordance with California law. However, at the time the Contract is awarded, the Contractor shall be properly licensed. 00 41 10 BID FORM Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 26 The Undersigned Bidder represents as follows: 1. That no elected or appointed official, officer, agent, or employee of the Agency is personally interested, directly or indirectly, in this Contract, or the compensation to be paid under it; that no representation, oral or in writing, of the Agency, its officers, agents, or employees has induced Bidder to enter into this Contract, excepting only those contained in this form of Contract and the papers made a part of this Contract by its terms; and 2. That this Bid is made without connection with any person, firm, or corporation making a Bid for the same Work, and is in all respects fair and without collusion or fraud. Accompanying this Bid is _________________________________ (Cash, Certified Check, Bidder’s Bond or Cashier's Check) for 10% of the amount Bid, payable to Agency as Bid Security and which is given as a guarantee that the undersigned will enter into a Contract and provide the necessary bonds and certificates of insurance if awarded the Contract. Organized under the laws of the State of ________________________.  an individual  a partnership  a corporation (Signatures continued on next page) 00 41 10 BID FORM Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 27 IF A SOLE OWNER OR SOLE CONTRACTOR SIGN HERE: I certify under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that all of the information submitted in connection with this Bid and all of the representations made in this Bid are true and correct. 1 Name under which business is conducted ______________________________________________________ 2 Signature (given and surname) of proprietor Printed/Typed Name ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 3 Place of Business (Full Address: street, number, city, state, zip) ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 4 Telephone Number ______________________________________________________ 5 Email ______________________________________________________ NOTARIAL ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF EXECUTION BY ALL SIGNATORIES MUST BE ATTACHED 00 41 10 BID FORM Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 28 IF A PARTNERSHIP, SIGN HERE: I certify under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that all of the information submitted in connection with this Bid and all of the representations made in this Bid are true and correct. 1 Name under which business is conducted ______________________________________________________ 2 Signature (given and surname and role) (Note: Signature must be made by a general partner) Printed/Typed Name ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 3 Place of Business (Full Address: street, number, city, state, zip) ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 4 Telephone Number ______________________________________________________ 5 Email ______________________________________________________ NOTARIAL ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF EXECUTION BY ALL SIGNATORIES MUST BE ATTACHED 00 41 10 BID FORM Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 29 IF A CORPORATION, SIGN HERE: I certify under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that all of the information submitted in connection with this Bid and all of the representations made in this Bid are true and correct. 1 Name under which business is conducted ______________________________________________________ 2 Signature (given and surname and Title) (Note: Signature must be made by a someone who can bind the corporation) Printed/Typed Name ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 3 Place of Business (Full Address: street, number, city, state, zip) ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 4 Telephone Number ______________________________________________________ 5 Email ______________________________________________________ NOTARIAL ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF EXECUTION BY ALL SIGNATORIES MUST BE ATTACHED 00 41 10 BID FORM Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 30 List below names of president, vice president, CFO, secretary and assistant secretary, if a corporation; if a partnership, list names of all general partners, and managing partners: END OF SECTION 00 43 10 BID BOND FORM Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 31 00 43 10 BID BOND FORM (Note: This form is not required when other form of Bidder’s Security, e.g. cash, certified check or cashier’s check, accompanies Bid. In that case, use form 00 43 20 Bid Security) NAME OF PROJECT: Police & Fire Headquarters Chiller Replacement CONTRACT NO.: PWS25-3807FAC NAME OF BIDDER: _______________________ The makers of this bond are, as Principal, and , as Surety and are held and firmly bound unto the City of Carlsbad (“Agency”) in the penal sum of 10% OF THE TOTAL BID PRICE of the Principal submitted to the Agency for the Work described below, for the payment of which sum in lawful money of the United States, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH that whereas the Principal has submitted the accompanying Bid dated . If the Principal does not withdraw its Bid within the time specified in the Contract Documents; and if the Principal provides all required documents to the Agency and is awarded the Contract; then this obligation shall be null and void. Otherwise, this bond will remain in full force and effect. Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract Documents shall affect its obligation under this bond, and Surety waives notice of any such changes. In the event a lawsuit is brought upon this bond by the Agency and judgment is recovered, the Surety shall pay all litigation expenses incurred by the Agency in such suit, including reasonable attorneys’ fees, court costs, expert witness fees and expenses. /// /// /// /// /// 00 43 10 BID BOND FORM Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 32 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above-bound parties have executed this instrument under their several seals this_____________ day of _____________________________, 20______, the name and corporate seal of each corporation. PRINCIPAL: ___________________________________ (Name of Principal) By: ___________________________________ (sign here) ___________________________________ (Print name here) ___________________________________ (Title and Organization of Signatory) Executed by SURETY this ______day of ________________, 20____ SURETY: _____________________________________ (name of Surety) _____________________________________ (address of Surety) _____________________________________ (telephone number of Surety) By: _____________________________________ (signature of Attorney-in-Fact) _____________________________________ (printed name of Attorney-in-Fact) Required Attachments:  Corporate resolution showing current power of attorney.  Proper execution by PRINCIPAL.  Proper notarial acknowledgment of execution by SURETY.  President or vice-president and CFO, secretary or assistant secretary must sign for corporations. If only 1 officer signs, the corporation must attach a resolution certified by the secretary or assistant secretary under corporate seal empowering that officer to bind the corporation. END OF SECTION 00 43 20 BID SECURITY Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 33 00 43 20 BID SECURITY (Note: This form is required when cash, certified check or cashier’s check, accompanies Bid. If Bid Bond is being provided, use form 00 43 10 Bid Bond) NAME OF PROJECT: Police & Fire Headquarters Chiller Replacement NAME OF BIDDER: ________________________ Accompanying this proposal is a Certified / Cashier’s check payable to the order of the City of Carlsbad (“Agency”), in the sum of dollars ($___________________), this amount being 10% of the total amount of the Bid. The proceeds of this check shall become the property of the Agency, provided this proposal shall be accepted by the Agency through action of its legally constituted contracting authorities and the Undersigned shall fail to execute a Contract and furnish the required Performance, Warranty and Payment Bonds and proof of insurance coverage within the stipulated time; otherwise, the check shall be returned to the Undersigned. The proceeds of this check shall also become the property of the Agency if the Undersigned shall withdraw his or her Bid within the period of 15 Calendar Days after the date set for the opening of the Bid, unless otherwise required by law, and notwithstanding the award of the Contract to another Bidder. _______________________________________ BIDDER Required Attachments:  Certified Check or Cashier’s Check END OF SECTION 00 43 30 PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS FORM Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 34 00 43 30 PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS FORM NAME OF PROJECT: Police & Fire Headquarters Chiller Replacement NAME OF BIDDER: __________________ In compliance with the Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act (Public Contract Code Section 4100 et seq.), Bidder shall set forth below: (a) the name and the location of the place of business, (b) the California contractor license number, (c) the DIR public works contractor registration number, and (d) the portion of the Work which will be done by each Subcontractor who will perform work or labor or render service to the Bidder in or about the construction of the Work or improvement to be performed under this Contract in an amount in excess of one- half of one percent (0.5%) of the Bidder’s Total Bid Price. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if the Work involves the construction of streets and highways, then the Bidder shall list each Subcontractor who will perform work or labor or render service to the Bidder in or about the Work in an amount in excess of one-half of one percent (0.5%) of the Bidder’s Total Bid Price or $10,000, whichever is greater. No additional time shall be granted to provide the below requested information. If a Bidder fails to specify a Subcontractor or if a Contractor specifies more than one Subcontractor for the same portion of Work, then the Bidder shall be deemed to have agreed that it is fully qualified to perform that portion of Work and that it shall perform that portion itself. No changes in the Subcontractor’s listed Work will be made without the prior approval of the Agency. Attach additional pages as required. (Signature of Bidder) 00 43 30 PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS FORM Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 35 Name of Subcontractor Location of Business CSLB Contractor License No./ Exp Date DIR Registration Number / Exp. Date Type of Work to be done by Subcontractor % of Work Amount of Work by Subcontractor in Dollars* Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 4104, subdivision (a)(3)(A), receipt of the information preceded by an asterisk (*) may be submitted by the Bidder up to 24 hours after the deadline for submitting bids contained in the “Notice Inviting Bids.” END OF SECTION 00 43 40 BIDDER INFORMATION AND EXPERIENCE FORM Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 36 00 43 40 BIDDER INFORMATION AND EXPERIENCE FORM NAME OF PROJECT: Police & Fire Headquarters Chiller Replacement CONTRACT NO.: PWS25-3807FAC NAME OF BIDDER: 1. INFORMATION ABOUT BIDDER (Indicate not applicable (“N/A”) where appropriate.) NOTE: Where Bidder is a joint venture, pages shall be duplicated, and information provided for all parties to the joint venture. 1. Type, if Entity: 2. Bidder Address: a. Facsimile Number b. Telephone Number c. Email Address 3. How many years has Bidder’s organization been in business as a contractor? 4. How many years has Bidder’s organization been in business under its present name? a. Under what other or former names has Bidder’s organization operated? 5. If Bidder’s organization is a corporation, answer the following: a. Date of Incorporation: b. State of Incorporation: c. President’s Name: d. Vice-President’s Name(s): e. Secretary’s Name: f. Treasurer’s Name: g. CFO’s Name: 00 43 40 BIDDER INFORMATION AND EXPERIENCE FORM Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 37 6. If an individual or a partnership, answer the following: a. Date of Organization: b. Name and address of all partners (state whether general or limited partnership): 7. If other than a corporation or partnership, describe organization and name principals: 8. List other states in which Bidder’s organization is legally qualified to do business. 9. What type of work does the Bidder normally perform with its own forces? 10. Has Bidder ever failed to complete any work awarded to it? If so, note when, where, and why: 11. Within the last 5 years, has any officer or partner of Bidder’s organization ever been an officer or partner of another organization when it failed to complete a contract? If so, attach a separate sheet of explanation: 12. List Trade/Client References: 3 trades (projects over $100k) and 3 clients (projects over $500k) attach additional sheet if needed. Company Name Contact Name Phone Number Email Address Trade >$100k Trade >$100k 00 43 40 BIDDER INFORMATION AND EXPERIENCE FORM Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 38 Trade >$100k Client > $500k Client > $500k Client > $500k 13. List Bank References (Bank and Branch Address): 14. Name of Bonding Company and Name and Address of Agent: [REMAINDER OF THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK] 00 43 40 BIDDER INFORMATION AND EXPERIENCE FORM Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 39 2. LIST OF CURRENT PROJECTS (BACKLOG) [**Duplicate or attach additional pages if needed for listing current projects.**] Project Name Sub or Prime? Description of Bidder’s Work Client Name Completion Date Cost of Bidder’s Work 00 43 40 BIDDER INFORMATION AND EXPERIENCE FORM Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 40 LIST OF COMPLETED PROJECTS (LAST 3 YEARS) [**Duplicate or attach additional pages if needed for listing completed projects. **] Please include only those projects which are similar enough to demonstrate Bidder’s ability to perform the required Work. Project Name Sub or Prime? Description of Bidder’s Work Client Name Completion Date Cost of Bidder’s Work 00 43 40 BIDDER INFORMATION AND EXPERIENCE FORM Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 41 EXPERIENCE AND TECHNICAL QUALIFICATIONS QUESTIONNAIRE Personnel: The Bidder shall identify the key personnel to be assigned to this Project in a management, construction supervision or engineering capacity. Add additional pages to identify ALL key personnel. Bidder may submit a 2-page resume of each key personnel mentioned above. Bidder agrees that personnel named in this Bid will remain on this Project until completion of all relevant Work, unless substituted by personnel of equivalent experience and qualifications approved in advance by the Agency. Job Title Name % time on this Project Specialized Education Years of construction experience relevant to the Project Summarize the experience 00 43 40 BIDDER INFORMATION AND EXPERIENCE FORM Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 42 Additional Bidder’s Statements: If the Bidder feels that there is additional information which has not been included in the questionnaire above, and which would contribute to the qualification review, it may add that information in a statement here or on an attached sheet, appropriately marked: 00 43 40 BIDDER INFORMATION AND EXPERIENCE FORM Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 43 3. VERIFICATION AND EXECUTION These Bid Forms shall be executed only by a duly authorized official of the Bidder: I declare under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing information is true and correct: Name of Bidder: Signature ________________________________________________________________ Name ______________________________________________________________________ Title ______________________________________________________________________ Date ______________________________________________________________________ END OF SECTION 00 45 10 NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 44 00 45 10 NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT NONCOLLUSION DECLARATION TO BE EXECUTED BY BIDDER AND SUBMITTED WITH BID NAME OF PROJECT: Police & Fire Headquarters Chiller Replacement NAME OF BIDDER: Consistent with Public Contract Code Section 7106, the undersigned declares: I am the of , the party making the foregoing Bid. The Bid is not made in the interest of, or on behalf of, any undisclosed person, partnership, company, association, organization, or corporation. The Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham. The Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder to put in a false or sham bid. The Bidder has not directly or indirectly colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed with any Bidder or anyone else to put in a sham bid, or to refrain from bidding. The Bidder has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement, communication, or conference with anyone to fix the Bid Price of the Bidder or any other Bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost element of the Bid Price, or of that of any other Bidder. All statements contained in the Bid are true. The Bidder has not, directly or indirectly, submitted his or her Bid Price or any breakdown of it, or the contents of it, or divulged information or data relative to it, to any corporation, partnership, company, association, organization, bid depository, or to any member or agent of these, to effectuate a collusive or sham bid, and has not paid, and will not pay, any person or entity for such purpose. Any person executing this declaration on behalf of a Bidder that is a corporation, partnership, joint venture, limited liability company, limited liability partnership, or any other entity, represents that he or she has full power to execute, and does execute, this declaration on behalf of the Bidder. I declare under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing is true and correct and that this declaration is executed ________________ 20 ____ at _______________ [city], _____ [state]. Signature Name _________________________________ Title END OF SECTION 00 45 15 IRAN CONTRACTING ACT CERTIFICATION Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 45 00 45 15 IRAN CONTRACTING ACT CERTIFICATION NAME OF PROJECT: Police & Fire Headquarters Chiller Replacement NAME OF BIDDER: As required by Public Contract Code Section 2204, the Contractor certifies subject to penalty of perjury that the option checked below relating to the Contractor’s status in regard to the Iran Contracting Act of 2010 (Public Contract Code Section 2200 et seq.) is true and correct:  The Contractor is not: 1) identified on the current list of persons and entities engaged in investment activities in Iran prepared by the California Department of General Services in accordance with subdivision (b) of Public Contract Code Section 2203; or 2) a financial instruction that extends, for 45 days or more, credit in the amount of $20,000,000 or more to any other person or entity identified on the current list of persons and entities engaging in investment activities in Iran prepared by the California Department of General Services in accordance with subdivision (b) of Public Contract Code Section 2203, if that person or entity uses or will use the credit to provide goods or services in the energy sector in Iran.  The Agency has exempted the Contractor from the requirements of the Iran Contracting Act of 2010 after making a public finding that, absent the exemption, the Agency will be unable to obtain the goods and/or services to be provided pursuant to the Contract.  The amount of the Contract payable to the Contractor for the Project does not exceed $1,000,000. Signature: Date: Name: Title: Note: In accordance with Public Contract Code Section 2205, false certification of this form shall be reported to the California Attorney General and may result in civil penalties equal to the greater of $250,000 or twice the Contract amount, termination of the Contract and/or ineligibility to bid on contracts for 3 years. END OF SECTION 00 45 20 PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION CERTIFICATION Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 46 00 45 20 PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION CERTIFICATION NAME OF PROJECT: Police & Fire Headquarters Chiller Replacement NAME OF BIDDER: Pursuant to Labor Code Sections 1725.5 and 1771.1, all Contractors and Subcontractors that wish to Bid on, be listed in a Bid proposal, or enter into a Contract to perform public work must be registered with the Department of Industrial Relations. See Public Works (ca.gov) for additional information. No Bid will be accepted, nor any Contract entered into without proof of the Contractor’s and Subcontractors’ current registration with the Department of Industrial Relations to perform public work. Bidder certifies that it is aware of the registration requirements set forth in Labor Code Sections 1725.5 and 1771.1 and is currently registered as a Contractor with the Department of Industrial Relations. Name of Bidder: DIR Registration Number: DIR Registration Expiration: Bidder further certifies: 1. Bidder shall maintain a current DIR registration for the duration of the Project. 2. Bidder shall include the requirements of Labor Code Sections 1725.5 and 1771.1 in its Contract with Subcontractors and ensure that all Subcontractors are registered at the time of Bid opening and maintain registration status for the duration of the Project. 3. Failure to submit this form or comply with any of the above requirements may result in a finding that the Bid is non-responsive. Signature: Date: Name: Title: END OF SECTION 00 45 25 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 47 00 45 25 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE NAME OF PROJECT: Police & Fire Headquarters Chiller Replacement NAME OF BIDDER: Bidder must attach either of the following to this page.  Certificates of insurance showing conformance with the requirements for each of: a. Comprehensive General Liability b. Automobile Liability c. Workers Compensation d. Employer’s Liability  Statement with an insurance carrier’s notarized signature stating that the carrier can, and upon payment of fees and/or premiums by the Bidder, will issue to the Bidder the required policies of insurance for Comprehensive General Liability, Automobile Liability, Workers Compensation and Employer’s Liability in conformance and the required Certificates of insurance to the Agency. END OF SECTION 00 45 30 STATEMENT REGARDING DEBARMENT Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 48 00 45 30 STATEMENT REGARDING DEBARMENT NAME OF PROJECT: Police & Fire Headquarters Chiller Replacement NAME OF BIDDER: 1. Have you or any of your Subcontractors ever been debarred as an irresponsible Bidder by another public agency in the State of California?  YES  NO 2. If yes, what was/were the name(s) of the public agency(ies) and what was/were the period(s) of debarment(s)? Attach additional copies of this page to accommodate more than 2 debarments. __________________________________ party debarred __________________________________ public agency __________________________________ period of debarment ___________________________________ party debarred ___________________________________ public agency ___________________________________ period of debarment BY CONTRACTOR: By: __________________________________ (sign here) ___________________________________ (print name/title) Page _____ of _____ pages of this Statement Regarding Debarment form END OF SECTION 00 45 35 DISCLOSURE OF DISCIPLINE RECORD Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 49 00 45 35 DISCLOSURE OF DISCIPLINE RECORD NAME OF PROJECT: Police & Fire Headquarters Chiller Replacement NAME OF BIDDER: Contractors are required by law to be licensed and regulated by the Contractors’ State License Board which has jurisdiction to investigate complaints against contractors if a complaint regarding a latent act or omission is filed within 4 years of the date of the alleged violation. A complaint regarding a latent act or omission pertaining to structural defects must be filed within 10 years of the date of the alleged violation. Any questions concerning a Contractor may be referred to the Registrar, Contractors’ State License Board, P.O. Box 26000, Sacramento, California 95826. 1. Have you ever had your contractor’s license suspended or revoked by the California Contractors’ State license Board 2 or more times within an 8-year period?  YES  NO 2. Has the suspension or revocation of your contractor’s license ever been stayed?  YES  NO  N/A 3. Have any Subcontractors that you propose to perform any portion of the Work ever had their contractor’s license suspended or revoked by the California Contractors’ State License Board 2 or more times within an 8-year period?  YES  NO 4. Has the suspension or revocation of the license of any Subcontractors that you propose to perform any portion of the Work ever been stayed?  YES  NO  N/A 00 45 35 DISCLOSURE OF DISCIPLINE RECORD Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 50 5. If the answer to either of 1 or 3 above is “yes,” fully identify, in each and every case, the party disciplined, the date of and violation that the disciplinary action pertains to, the nature of the violation and disciplinary action taken. (If needed attach additional sheets to provide full disclosure.) 6. If the answer to either of 2 or 4 above is “yes,” fully identify, in each and every case, the party whose discipline was stayed, the date of and the violation that the disciplinary action pertains to, the nature of the violation and the condition (if any) upon which the disciplinary action was stayed. (If needed attach additional sheets to provide full disclosure.) BY CONTRACTOR: By: __________________________________ (sign here) __________________________________ (print name and title) END OF SECTION 00 52 00 CONTRACT Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 51 00 52 00 CONTRACT This Project No. «PROJNUM» (“Contract”) is made and entered into this ____________ day of ________________________________, 20___, by and between the City of Carlsbad (“Agency”) and ____________________________________ (“Contractor”), whose principal place of business is _______________________________________________________. The parties agree: 1. SCOPE OF WORK. The Contractor shall perform all Work within the time stipulated in the Contract, and shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, tools, utility services, and transportation to complete all the Work required in strict compliance with the Contract Documents for the following Project: NAME OF PROJECT: Police & Fire Headquarters Chiller Replacement The Contractor and its surety shall be liable to the Agency for any damages arising as a result of the Contractor’s failure to comply with the obligation described in this Section 1. 2. TIME OF COMPLETION. Time is of the essence in the performance of the Work. The Work shall be commenced on the date stated in the Agency’s Notice to Proceed. The Contractor shall complete all Work required by the Contract Documents within ninety (90) working days from the commencement date stated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor agrees the time for completion set forth above is adequate and reasonable to complete the Work. 3. CONTRACT PRICE. The Agency shall pay to the Contractor as full compensation for the performance of the Contract, subject to any additions or deductions made in accordance with the Contract Documents, and including all applicable taxes and costs, the sum of ___________________________________ Dollars ($ _____________________________). Payment shall be made as set forth in the General Conditions. The Engineer will close the estimate of work completed for progress payments on the last working day of each month. The Agency shall withhold retention as required by Public Contract Code Section 9203. 4. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES. In accordance with Government Code Section 53069.85, it is agreed that the Contractor will pay the Agency the sum set forth in Section 00 73 00 Supplemental General Provisions for each and every Calendar Day of delay beyond the time of completion prescribed in this Contract as Liquidated Damages and not as a penalty or forfeiture. If this sum is not paid, the Contractor agrees the Agency may deduct that amount from any money due or that may become due the 00 52 00 CONTRACT Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 52 Contractor under the Contract. This Section does not exclude recovery of other damages specified in the Contract Documents. 5.CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The “Contract Documents” include the following: ●00 11 10 Notice Inviting Bids ●00 21 10 Instructions to Bidders ●00 41 00 Bid Form ●00 42 10 Bid Bond or 00 43 20 Bid Security ●00 43 30 Proposed Subcontractors ●00 43 40 Bidder Information and Experience ●00 45 10 Non-Collusion Affidavit ●00 45 15 Iran Contracting Act Certification ●00 45 20 Public Works Contractor Registration Certification ●00 45 30 Statement of Regarding Debarment ●00 45 35 Disclosure of Discipline Record ●00 52 10 Contract ●00 61 10 Labor and Materials Bond ●00 61 20 Faithful Performance and Warranty Bond ●00 61 30 Optional Escrow Agreement (if applicable) ●00 73 00 Supplemental General Provisions ●00 74 00 Project Manual / Supplemental Technical Specifications for the Project ●All Addenda ●Plans and Drawings ●Permits ● “Standard Specifications and Drawings,” as last revised ● Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction “Greenbook,” latest edition and including all errata o Part 1 General Provisions o Part 2 to Part 8 (Construction Materials, Construction Methods, Existing Improvements, Pipeline System Rehabilitation, Temporary Traffic Control, Street Lighting and Traffic Signal Systems, Landscaping and Irrigation) ●Standard Plans for Public Works Construction, latest edition and including all errata ●Applicable Local Agency Standards and Specifications, as last revised ●Approved and fully executed change orders 00 52 00 CONTRACT Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 53 ● Any other documents contained in or incorporated by reference into the Contract Documents The Contractor shall complete the Work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents. The requirements of the various sections or documents comprising the Contract Documents are intended to be complementary. Work required by 1 of the Contract Documents and not by others shall be done as if required by all. This Contract shall supersede any prior agreement of the parties. 6. PROVISIONS REQUIRED BY LAW AND CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE. Every provision of law required to be included in these Contract Documents shall be deemed to be included in these Contract Documents. The Contractor shall comply with all requirements of applicable federal, state and local laws, rules and regulations, including, but not limited to, the provisions of the Labor Code and Public Contract Code which are applicable to the Work. 7. INDEMNIFICATION. Contractor shall provide indemnification and defense as set forth in the 00 73 00 Agency Supplemental General Provisions. 8. PREVAILING WAGES. Contractor shall be required to pay the prevailing rate of wages in accordance with the Labor Code which such rates may be obtained online at http://www.dir.ca.gov and which must be posted at the job site. [REMAINDER OF PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK] 00 52 00 CONTRACT Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 54 NOTARIAL ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF EXECUTION BY ALL SIGNATORIES MUST BE ATTACHED (CORPORATE SEAL) CONTRACTOR City of Carlsbad By: By: (sign here) Keith Blackburn, Mayor (print name/title) ATTEST: By: (sign here) for Sherry Freisinger City Clerk (print name/title) If required by the Agency, proper notarial acknowledgment of execution by contractor must be attached. If a corporation, the Contract must be signed by 1 corporate officer from each of the following 2 groups. Group A Group B Chairman, Secretary, President, or Assistant Secretary, Vice-President CFO or Assistant Treasurer Otherwise, the corporation must attach a resolution certified by the secretary or assistant secretary under corporate seal empowering the officer(s) signing to bind the corporation. APPROVED AS TO FORM: CINDIE K. McMAHON, City Attorney BY: _____________________________ Assistant City Attorney END OF SECTION 00 61 10 LABOR AND MATERIALS BOND Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 55 00 61 10 LABOR AND MATERIALS BOND KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS THAT: WHEREAS, the City of Carlsbad ( “Agency”) has awarded to (“Principal,”) a Contract for the Work described as follows: Contract No PWS25-3807FAC Project No. «PROJNUM» Name of Project: Police & Fire Headquarters Chiller Replacement (the “Project”) in strict conformity with the drawings and specifications, and other Contract Documents now on file in the Office of the City Clerk of the City of Carlsbad and all of which are incorporated by this reference; and WHEREAS, Principal is required to furnish a bond in connection with the Contract providing that if Principal or any of its Subcontractors fail to pay (1) for any materials, provisions, provender, equipment, or other supplies used in, upon, for or about the performance of the Work contracted to be done, (2) for any Work or labor of any kind performed under the Contract, (3) for amounts due under the Unemployment Insurance Code for any Work or labor of any kind performed under the Contract, or (4) for any amounts required to be deducted, withheld, and paid over to the Employment Development Department under Unemployment Insurance Code Section 13020 or to the Franchise Tax Board under Revenue and Taxation Code Section 18663 from the wages of employees of Principal and its Subcontractors with respect to the Work or labor, the Surety on this bond will pay for the same to the extent set forth below. NOW THEREFORE, we, Principal and , as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the Agency in the penal sum of Dollars ($___________), for the payment of which sum being an amount equal to 100% of the total amount payable under the terms of the Contract by the Agency, and for which payment well and truly to be made we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors and administrators, successors, or assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH that if Principal, or its Subcontractors, heirs, executors, administrators, successors or assigns, shall fail to pay any of the persons named in Civil Code Section 9100; fail to pay for any materials, provisions, provender, equipment, or other supplies, used in, upon, for or about the performance of the Work contracted to be done; fail to pay for any Work or labor of any kind performed under the Contract; fail to pay amounts due under the Unemployment Insurance Code for any Work or labor of any kind performed under the Contract; or fail to pay for any amounts required to be deducted, withheld, and paid over to the Employment Development Department or Franchise Tax Board from the wages of employees of Principal or its Subcontractors pursuant to Unemployment Insurance Code Section 13020 or Revenue and Taxation Code Section 18663, with respect to the Work or labor, then the Surety will pay for the same, in an amount not exceeding the penal sum specified above, and also, in case suit is brought upon this bond, all litigation expenses incurred by the Agency in the suit, including reasonable attorneys’ fees, court costs, expert witness fees and investigation expenses to be fixed by the court consistent with Civil Code Section 9554. 00 61 10 LABOR AND MATERIALS BOND Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 56 This bond shall inure to the benefit of any of the persons named in Civil Code Section 9100 so as to give a right of action to such persons or their assigns in any suit brought upon this bond. The Surety stipulates and agrees that this bond shall not be exonerated or released from the obligation of this bond by: 1. Any change, extension of time for performance, addition, alteration or modification in, to, or of any Contract, Plans, Specifications, or agreement pertaining or relating to any scheme or Work of improvement described above, or the furnishing of labor, materials, or equipment pertaining or relating to any scheme or Work of improvement described above. 2. Any change or modification of any terms of payment or extension of the time for any payment pertaining or relating to any scheme or Work of improvement described above. 3. Any rescission or attempted rescission or attempted rescission of the Contract, agreement or bond. 4. Any conditions precedent or subsequent in the bond attempting to limit the right of recovery of claimants otherwise entitled to recover under any such Contract or agreement or under the bond. 5. Any fraud practiced by any person other than the claimant seeking to recover on the bond. The Surety also stipulates and agrees that this bond shall be construed most strongly against the Surety and in favor of all persons for whose benefit such bond is given, and under no circumstances shall Surety be released from liability to those for whose benefit this bond has been given by reason of any breach of contract between the Agency and Principal or on the part of any obligee named in this bond. Finally, the Surety waives notice of any such change, extension of time, addition, alteration or modification mentioned in this bond, including but not limited to the provisions of Civil Code Sections 2819 and 2845. If Principal is an individual, it is agreed that the death of any such Principal shall not exonerate the Surety from its obligations under this bond. This payment surety bond may be approved as to form by the Agency in counterpart, and the counterparts shall all constitute a single, original instrument. [REMAINDER OF PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK] 00 61 10 LABOR AND MATERIALS BOND Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 57 Executed by PRINCIPAL this _________ day of _______________________, 20____. PRINCIPAL: ____________________________________ (name of Contractor) By:_________________________________ (sign here) ____________________________________ (print name here) ____________________________________ (title and organization of signatory) Executed by SURETY this ____________ day of _______________________, 20____. SURETY: ____________________________________ (name of Surety) ____________________________________ (address of Surety) ____________________________________ (telephone number of Surety) By: ____________________________________ (signature of Attorney-in-Fact) ____________________________________ (printed name of Attorney-in-Fact) (attach corporate resolution showing current power of attorney) (Proper notarial acknowledgment of execution by CONTRACTOR and SURETY must be attached.) (President or vice-president and secretary or assistant secretary must sign for corporations. If only 1 officer signs, the corporation must attach a resolution certified by the secretary or assistant secretary under corporate seal empowering that officer to bind the corporation.) APPROVED AS TO FORM: CINDIE K. McMAHON, City Attorney BY: _____________________________ Deputy City Attorney END OF SECTION 00 61 20 FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE AND WARRANTY BOND Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 58 00 61 20 FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE AND WARRANTY BOND KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS THAT: WHEREAS, the City of Carlsbad ( “Agency”) has awarded to ________________ (“Principal,”) a Contract for the Work described as follows: Contract No PWS25-3807FAC Project No. «PROJNUM» Name of Project: Police & Fire Headquarters Chiller Replacement (the “Project”) in strict conformity with the drawings and specifications, and other Contract Documents now on file in the Office of the City Clerk of the City of Carlsbad and all of which are incorporated by this reference; and WHEREAS, the Work to be performed by the Principal is more particularly set forth in the Contract Documents for the Project dated ____________, (“Contract Documents”), the terms and conditions of which are incorporated by reference; and WHEREAS, the Principal is required by the Contract Documents to perform the terms of them and to furnish a bond for the faithful performance and warranty of the Contract Documents. NOW THEREFORE, we, Principal, and ,as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the Agency in the penal sum of dollars ($ ____________), which is equal to 100% of the total amount of the Contract, for which amount well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors and administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that, if Principal, its heirs, executors, administrators, successors or assigns, shall in all things stand to and abide by, and well and truly keep and perform the covenants, conditions and agreements in the Contract Documents and any alteration of the Contract Documents made as provided in the Contract Documents, on its part, to be kept and performed at the time and in the manner specified in the Contract Documents, and in all respects according to their true intent and meaning; and shall indemnify and save harmless the Agency, its Board, members of the Board, officers, directors, managers, employees, agents, and authorized volunteers, as stipulated in the Contract Documents, then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and effect. As a part of the obligation secured by this bond and in addition to the face amount specified in this bond, there shall be included costs and reasonable expenses and fees, including reasonable attorneys’ fees, incurred by Agency in enforcing such obligation, all to be taxed as costs and included in any judgment rendered. As a condition precedent to the satisfactory completion of the Work unless otherwise provided for in the Contract Documents, the above obligation shall hold good for a period of 1 year after the acceptance of the Work by the Agency. During this 1-year period, if Contractor fails to make full, complete, and satisfactory repair and replacements and totally protect the Agency from loss or damage resulting from or caused by defective materials or faulty workmanship in connection 00 61 20 FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE AND WARRANTY BOND Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 59 with Contractor’s Work on the Project, the obligations of Surety under this bond shall continue so long as any obligation of Principal remains to the Agency. Nothing in this bond shall limit the Agency’s rights or the Principal’s or Surety’s obligations under the Contract, law or equity, including, but not limited to, Code of Civil Procedure Section 337.15. Whenever Principal shall be, and is declared by the Agency to be, in default under the Contract Documents, the Surety shall remedy the default pursuant to the Contract Documents, or shall promptly, at the Agency’s option: i. Take over and complete the Project in accordance with all terms and conditions in the Contract Documents; ii. Obtain a bid or bids for completing the Project in accordance with all terms and conditions in the Contract Documents and upon determination by Surety of the lowest responsive and responsible bidder, arrange for a contract between such bidder, the Surety and the Agency, and make available as Work progresses sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion of the Project, less the balance of the Contract Price, including other costs and damages for which Surety may be liable. The term “balance of the Contract Price” as used in this paragraph shall mean the total amount payable to Principal by the Agency under the Contract and any modification to the Contract, less any amount previously paid by the Agency to the Principal and any other set offs pursuant to the Contract Documents. Or iii. Permit the Agency to complete the Project in any manner consistent with Applicable Law and make available as Work progresses sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion of the Project, less the balance of the Contract Price, including other costs and damages for which Surety may be liable. The term “balance of the Contract Price” as used in this paragraph shall mean the total amount payable to Principal by the Agency under the Contract and any modification to the Contract, less any amount previously paid by the Agency to the Principal and any other set offs pursuant to the Contract Documents. Surety expressly agrees that the Agency may reject any contractor or subcontractor which may be proposed by Surety in fulfillment of its obligations in the event of default by the Principal. Surety shall not utilize Principal in completing the Project, nor shall Surety accept a bid from Principal for completion of the Project, if the Agency, when declaring the Principal in default, notifies Surety of the Agency’s objection to Principal’s further participation in the completion of the Project. The Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract Documents or to the Project to be performed under the Contract Documents shall in any way affect Surety’s obligations on this bond, and Surety waives notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract Documents or to the Project. 00 61 20 FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE AND WARRANTY BOND Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 60 If Principal is an individual, it is agreed that the death of any such Principal shall not exonerate the Surety from its obligations under this bond. This faithful performance and warranty surety bond may be approved as to form by the City Attorney for the Agency in counterpart, and the counterparts shall all constitute a single, original instrument. [REMAINDER OF PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK] 00 61 20 FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE AND WARRANTY BOND Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 61 Executed by PRINCIPAL this _________ day of ________________________, 20___. PRINCIPAL: ____________________________________ (name of Contractor) By:_________________________________ (sign here) ____________________________________ (print name here) ____________________________________ (title and organization of signatory) Executed by SURETY this ____________ day of ________________________, 20___. SURETY: ____________________________________ (name of Surety) ____________________________________ (address of Surety) ____________________________________ (telephone number of Surety) By: _________________________________ (signature of Attorney-in-Fact) ____________________________________ (printed name of Attorney-in-Fact) (attach corporate resolution showing current power of attorney) (Proper notarial acknowledgment of execution by CONTRACTOR and SURETY must be attached.) (President or vice-president and secretary or assistant secretary must sign for corporations. If only 1 officer signs, the corporation must attach a resolution certified by the secretary or assistant secretary under corporate seal empowering that officer to bind the corporation.) APPROVED AS TO FORM: CINDIE K. McMAHON, City Attorney BY: _____________________________ Deputy City Attorney END OF SECTION 00 61 30 OPTIONAL ESCROW AGREEMENT Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 62 00 61 30 OPTIONAL ESCROW AGREEMENT NAME OF PROJECT: Police & Fire Headquarters Chiller Replacement NAME OF BIDDER: This Escrow Agreement is made and entered into by and between the City of Carlsbad, Carlsbad, California, 92008 ("Agency"), whose address is ("Contractor") and whose address is ("Escrow Agent"). Agency, Contractor and Escrow Agent agree as follows: 1. Pursuant Public Contract Code Section 22300, Contractor has the option to deposit securities with Escrow Agent as a substitute for retention earnings required to be withheld by Agency pursuant to the construction contract entered into between Agency and Contractor for the Police & Fire Headquarters Chiller Replacement in the amount of ___________ dated __________ ("Contract"). Alternatively, on written request of Contractor, Agency shall make payments of the retention earnings directly to Escrow Agent. When the Contractor deposits the securities as a substitute for Contract earnings, Escrow Agent shall notify Agency within 10 Calendar Days of the deposit. The market value of the securities at the time of the substitution shall be at least equal to the cash amount then required to be withheld as retention under the terms of the Contract. Securities shall be held in Agency’s name and shall designate Contractor as the beneficial owner. 2. Agency shall make progress payments to Contractor for those funds which otherwise would be withheld from progress payments pursuant to the Contract provisions, provided that Escrow Agent holds securities in the form and amount specified above. 3. When Agency makes payment of retentions earned directly to Escrow Agent, Escrow Agent shall hold them for the benefit of Contractor until the time that the escrow created under this Escrow Agreement is terminated. The Contractor may direct the investment of the payments into securities. All terms and conditions of this Escrow Agreement and the rights and responsibilities of the parties shall be equally applicable and binding when Agency pays Escrow Agent directly. 4. Contractor shall be responsible for paying all fees for the expenses incurred by Escrow Agent in administering the Escrow Account and all expenses of Agency. These expenses and payment terms shall be determined by Agency, Contractor, and Escrow Agent. 5. The interest earned on the securities or the money market accounts held in escrow and all interest earned on that interest shall be for the sole account of Contractor and shall be subject to withdrawal by Contractor at any time and from time to time without notice to Agency. 6. Contractor shall have the right to withdraw all or any part of the principal in the Escrow Account only by written notice to Escrow Agent accompanied by written authorization from Agency to Escrow Agent that Agency consents to the withdrawal of the amount sought to be withdrawn by Contractor. 00 61 30 OPTIONAL ESCROW AGREEMENT Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 63 7. Agency shall have a right to draw upon the securities in the event of default by the Contractor. Upon 7 Calendar Days' written notice to Escrow Agent from Agency of a default, Escrow Agent shall immediately convert the securities to cash and shall distribute the cash as instructed by Agency. 8. Upon receipt of written notification from the Agency certifying that the Work required by the Contract is final and complete and that Contractor has complied with all requirements and procedures applicable to the Contract, Escrow Agent shall release to Contractor all securities and interest on deposit less escrow fees and charges of Escrow Account. The escrow shall be closed immediately upon disbursement of all moneys and securities on deposit and payments of fees and charges. 9. Escrow Agent shall rely on the written notifications from Agency and Contractor pursuant to Sections (5) to (8), inclusive, of this Escrow Agreement and Agency and Contractor shall hold Escrow Agent harmless from Escrow Agent's release, conversion and disbursement of the securities and interest as set forth above. 10. The names of the persons who are authorized to give written notices or to receive written notice on behalf of Agency and on behalf of Contractor in connection with the foregoing, and exemplars of their respective signatures are as follows: For Agency (Finance Director) Title _________________________________________________________ Name _____________________________________________________________ Signature _____________________________________________________________ Address _____________________________________________________________ For Contractor Title _____________________________________________________________ Name _____________________________________________________________ Signature _____________________________________________________________ 00 61 30 OPTIONAL ESCROW AGREEMENT Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 64 Address _____________________________________________________________ For Escrow Agent Title _____________________________________________________________ Name _____________________________________________________________ Signature _____________________________________________________________ Address _____________________________________________________________ At the time the Escrow Account is opened, Agency and Contractor shall deliver to the Escrow Agent a fully executed counterpart of this Escrow Agreement. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Escrow Agreement by their proper officers on the date first set forth above. For Agency Title ______________________________________________________________ Name ______________________________________________________________ Signature ______________________________________________________________ Address ______________________________________________________________ For Contractor Title ______________________________________________________________ 00 61 30 OPTIONAL ESCROW AGREEMENT Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 65 Name ______________________________________________________________ Signature ______________________________________________________________ Address ______________________________________________________________ For Escrow Agent Title ______________________________________________________________ Name ______________________________________________________________ Signature ______________________________________________________________ Address ______________________________________________________________ APPROVED AS TO FORM: CINDIE K. McMAHON, City Attorney BY: _____________________________ Assistant City Attorney END OF SECTION 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 66 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS INTRODUCTION The specifications contained in this 00 73 00 Agency Supplemental General Provisions take precedence over the specification language contained in the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, “The Greenbook,” latest edition and all errata. This specification addresses the unique conditions in Carlsbad that are not addressed in The Greenbook. Therefore, if there is a conflict, these specifications shall control. The Greenbook may be purchased at Bidder’s/Contractor’s local technical bookstore or directly from the publisher. These Supplemental General Provisions are available only for download from the online bidding portal with Contract Documents. The Agency does not provide hard copies. When used in the Contract Documents, statements, or command phrases (active voice and imperative mood) refer to and are directed at the “Bidder” or “Contractor” as applicable. The specifications are written to the “Bidder” before award and the “Contractor” after award. Before award, interpret sentences written in the imperative mood as starting with “The Bidder shall.” Interpret the term “you” as “the Bidder” and interpret the term “your” as “the Bidder’s.” After award, interpret sentences written in the imperative mood starting with “The Contractor shall.” Interpret the term “you” as “the Contractor” and interpret the term “your” as “the Contractor’s.” PART 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 1 – GENERAL, TERMS, DEFINITIONS, ABBREVIATIONS, UNITS OF MEASURE, AND SYMBOLS GENERAL ADD the following: 1.The word “provide” shall mean “furnish and install,” unless otherwise stated. 2.In reference to Drawings, where words “shown,” “indicated,” “detailed,” “noted,” “scheduled,” or words of similar import are used, it shall be understood that reference is made to the Plans accompanying these provisions, unless stated otherwise. 3.Where the words “equal,” “approved equal,” “equivalent,” and words of similar import are used, it shall be understood such words are followed by the expression “in the opinion of the Engineer,” unless otherwise stated. 4.The word “perform” shall be understood to mean that the Contractor, at its expense, shall “perform all operations and furnish labor, tools and equipment,” and further, “furnish and install materials that are indicated, specified or required” shall be understood to mean that the Contractor, at its expense, shall “furnish and install the Work, complete in place and ready to use, including furnishing of necessary labor, materials, tools, equipment, and transportation.” 5.Where words “directed,” “designated,” “selected,” or words of similar import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, designation, or selection of the Engineer is intended, unless stated otherwise. The word “required” and words of similar import shall be understood to mean “as required to properly complete the Work as required and as approved by the Engineer,” unless stated otherwise. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 67 Where the words “approved,” “approval,” “acceptance,” or words of similar import are used, it shall be understood that the approval, acceptance, or similar import of the Engineer is intended. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS Where applicable ADD/REPLACE the following: 1. Agency - The City of Carlsbad or the Carlsbad Municipal Water District, the owner of the Project. 2. Agency Approval - Except where stated in this Contract to the contrary, the phrases “Agency approval,” and “Agency’s written approval” or such similar phrases shall mean approval by the City Manager for the City of Carlsbad or the Executive Manager for the Carlsbad Municipal Water District, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld. 3. Agency Forces – City of Carlsbad or Carlsbad Municipal Water District employees who perform construction work. 4. Agency Supplement - 00 73 00 Agency Supplemental General Provisions; and 00 74 00 Agency Supplemental Technical Provisions. 5. Allowance (AL) - Payment under Allowance Bid items, denoted as “AL,” shall be based on the actual expenditures and for pre-authorized items of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The unused portions of the Allowances shall revert to the Agency upon acceptance of the Project or Work. 6. Apparent Low Bidder - The Bidder whose Bid having been publicly opened, initially meets the material requirements of the Bid Documents and whose Bid price is the lowest received. 7. Applicable Laws - Laws, statutes, ordinances, rules, orders, and regulations of governmental authorities and courts having jurisdiction over the Project. 8. As-Builts - The CADD drawings prepared from the approved Red-lines for record keeping purposes. 9. Award of Contract (Award) - The date on which the Board or designee executes the Contract. 10. Bid - Any proposal submitted to the Agency in competitive bidding for the construction, alteration, repair, or improvement of any structure, building, road or other improvement of any kind. 11. Board – The officer or body constituting the awarding authority of the Agency, which is the City Council for the City of Carlsbad or the Board of Directors for the Carlsbad Municipal Water District. 12. Business Day - See Working Day. 13. Calendar Day – Every day on the calendar, including weekends and holidays. 14. City - The term “City” or “the City” means, City of Carlsbad. See also Agency. 15. City Council - The legislative body that governs the City of Carlsbad and has the authority to pass ordinances and appropriate funds. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 68 16. City Engineer - The term “City Engineer” is defined as the Transportation Director, or designee, and is the person authorized to perform the functions of the City Engineer as defined in Government Code Section 66416.5. The City Engineer is the City's "duly authorized officer" for the purposes of Public Contract Code Sections 4107 and 4107.5. 17. City Manager – The appointed official who directs the administration of the City of Carlsbad. 18. Construction Documents - Plans and details, including Plans showing installation of major systems, equipment, fixed furnishings and graphics, the technical specifications and all other technical drawings, schedules, diagrams and specifications, accepted Shop Drawings, Working Drawings, and submittals that are necessary to set forth in detail the requirements for the Project. 19. Construction Manager – The Project Inspector’s immediate supervisor and the Engineer’s designated representative for the first level of appeal for informal dispute resolution. 20. Construction Work - The portion of the Work to construct the Project as set forth in the Contract Documents in conformance with 2-1, “WORK TO BE DONE.” 21. Contract – The written agreement between the Agency and the Contractor covering the Work. 22. Contract Documents - Contract Documents include the following: The signed Contract, Addenda, Notice Inviting Bids, funding agency provisions, Bid including documentation accompanying the Bid and any post-Bid documentation submitted prior to the Notice of Award when attached as an exhibit to the Contract, Bonds, Permits, CEQA documents, Standard Specifications (the “Greenbook”), Agency Supplement, Plans, Standard Plans, Construction Documents, Reference Specifications, and Change Orders. Contract Documents, when applicable, shall also include Site and Coastal development permits, NEPA documents, re-vegetation plans, biological letters or technical reports, habitat mitigation plans, storm water documents, and local, state, and federal resource agency permits. 23. Contract Time - The number of Working Days to complete the Work as specified in the Contract Documents. 24. Contractor – The individual, partnership, corporation, joint venture, or other legal entity having a Contract with the Agency to perform the Work. In the case of Work being done under permit issued by the Agency, the permittee shall be constructed to be the Contractor. The term “prime contractor” shall mean Contractor. 25. Critical Path – In the Construction Schedule, the sequence of activities that represents the longest path through the Project network of activities and the shortest possible Project duration. 26. Days – Days shall mean consecutive calendar days unless otherwise specified in this Contract. 27. Defective Work - Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. 28. Delay Factor - The Delay Factor may be the basis for compensation for idle equipment time on an excusable delay. The factor has been calculated to include the ownership costs without including operating costs. The Delay Factor recovers all the Contractor’s non- operating costs in an 8-hour day. If payment is made for equipment on an excusable delay, it is limited to 8 hours per day or 40 hours per week maximum. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 69 29. Deputy City Engineer – The Public Works Manager of the Fleet & Facilities Construction Division and the Construction Manager’s immediate supervisor and the Engineer’s designated representative for the second level of appeal for informal dispute resolution. 30. Dispute Board – Persons designated by the City Manager of the City of Carlsbad or Executive Manager of the Carlsbad Municipal Water District, to hear and advise the City Manager or Executive Manager on claims submitted by the Contractor. The City Manager for the City of Carlsbad or the Executive Manager for the Carlsbad Municipal Water District is the last appeal level for informal dispute resolution. 31. Drawings - See Plans. 32. D-size Sheet - “D” size paper for engineering design applications refers to 22” x 34” paper. 33. Engineer - The Deputy City Manager, Public Works of the City of Carlsbad acting either directly or through designated representatives and the fourth level of appeal for informal dispute resolution. 34. Engineer of Record/Design Engineer – A registered Professional Engineer licensed in the State of California who is qualified to act as an agent of a Project Owner or to prepare Plans for facilities to be accepted by the City of Carlsbad or the Carlsbad Municipal Water District. The term includes persons licensed in the State of California as Civil Engineers or Structural Engineers, as well as other licensed professionals like Architects and Landscape Architects. 35. Executive Manager – The appointed official who directs the administration of the Carlsbad Municipal Water District. 36. Field Book - The Agency field maps showing sewer and water facilities. 37. Field Order - A Field Order is a written agreement by the Engineer to compensate the Contractor for work items in accordance with 2-8, “EXTRA WORK” or 2-9, “CHANGED CONDITIONS.” A Field Order does not change the Contract Price or Contract Time or the intent of the Contract. The unused portions of the Field Orders shall revert to the Agency upon acceptance of the Work. 38. Final Environmental Document - The CEQA and/or NEPA document issued for the Project, such as certified environmental impact reports, mitigated negative declarations (MNDs), negative declarations, or exemptions. 39. Final Payment - The last payment for the Contract made to the Contractor, excluding Retention. 40. Float – The number of days by which an activity in the Construction Schedule may be delayed from either its earliest start date or earliest completion date without extending the Contract Time (total float). Total float belongs to the Project and to any Party to accommodate changes in the Work or to mitigate the effect of events which may delay completion. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 70 41. Holiday - Holidays observed by the Agency are listed below: Holiday Observed On New Year’s Day January 1 Martin Luther King Day 3rd Monday in January Presidents’ Day 3rd Monday in February Memorial Day Last Monday in May Independence Day July 4 Labor Day 1st Monday in September Indigenous Peoples’ Day 2nd Monday in October Veteran’s Day November 11 Thanksgiving Day 4th Thursday/Friday in November Christmas Day December 25 If any Holiday listed falls on a Saturday, the Saturday and the preceding Friday are both legal Holidays. If the Holiday falls on a Sunday, both Sunday and the following Monday shall be legal Holidays. Unless specified otherwise in the Contract Documents or authorized by the Engineer, do not work on Holidays. 42. Limited Notice to Proceed (LNTP) - A written notice given from the Agency that authorizes the Contractor to start a limited amount of work that, as described in the notice, is not Construction Work. 43. Minor Bid Item – a single contract item constituting less than 10 percent (10%) of the original Contract Price bid. 44. Night Work - See Working Night. 45. Normal Working Hours - Unless specified otherwise, Normal Working Hours core periods shall be 7:00 AM to 5:00 PM, Monday through Friday, inclusive. Saturdays, Sundays, and Agency Holidays are excluded. For Traffic Control Permits, Normal Working Hours are defined as 8:30 AM to 3:30 PM, unless specified otherwise. 46. Notice of Completion (NOC) - A document recorded with the County of San Diego to signify that the Work has been completed and accepted by the Agency. 47. Party or Parties - The Agency, the Contractor, or both, their respective permitted successors or assigns, and any other future signatories to the Contract. 48. Plans – The drawings, profiles, cross sections, Standard Plans, working drawings, and shop drawings, or reproductions thereof, approved by the City Engineer, which show the location, character, dimensions or details of the Work. 49. Prime Contractor - See Contractor. 50. Project Inspector – the Engineer’s designated representative for inspection, Contract administration and the first level for informal dispute resolution. 51. Project Site (Site) - Areas where the Work is performed pursuant to the Contract. 52. Punchlist - A list of items of Work or corrections generated after a Walk-through that is conducted when the Contractor considers that the Work and Services are complete. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 71 53. Quality Control Standards and Procedures - The standards and procedures that are stated in a written manual that can be furnished to the Engineer upon request. The standards and procedures are followed by the Supplier in the production of materials supplied for the Work Site. 54. Red-lines - Plans with annotations of changes made during construction to reflect the actual improvements or facilities built during construction whether concealed or visible. 55. Retention - The amount withheld from the money due to the Contractor in accordance with 7-3.2, “PARTIAL AND FINAL PAYMENT.” 56. Samples - Physical examples of the materials, equipment, or workmanship specified or required and which conform with the standards and specifications in the Contract Documents and by which the Work shall be evaluated. 57. Schedule - A Critical Path Method (CPM) schedule of construction activities and their durations to be performed during the Contract Time and prepared by the Contractor in accordance with 6-1, “CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK,” and accepted by the Engineer. 58. Scope of Work (SOW) - Labor, materials, equipment, facilities, and services required to be performed or provided by the Contractor to complete the entire Project or the various separately identifiable parts of the Project pursuant to the provisions of the Contract Documents. 59. Services - Work performed in connection with the layout, construction, testing, inspection, and commissioning of the Work or administration of the Contract and which may include professional services such as engineering, surveying, construction management and legal services that are required in accordance with the Contract Documents. Services are incidental to the Work. 60. Separate Contractors - Those individuals or entities that have entered into arrangements with the Agency for the provision of labor, materials, or other services in connection with the Project who are not under contract with the Contractor. 61. Supplemental Provisions – See Agency Supplement. 62. Walk-through - The procedure the Agency uses to evaluate the status of the Project and to generate a Punchlist prior to acceptance of the Work. 63. Work – All labor, materials, equipment, tools, and services and other requirements of the Contract Documents as modified by Change Order, whether completed or partially completed, provided or to be provided by Contractor to fulfill Contractor’s obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. 64. Working Day - Any day within the period between the start of the Contract time as defined in Section 6-1 and the date provided for completion, or upon field acceptance by the Engineer for all work provided for in the Contract, whichever occurs first, other than: • Saturday; • Sunday; • any day designated as a holiday by the Agency; • any other day designated as a holiday in a Master Labor Agreement entered into by the Contractor or on behalf of the Contractor as an eligible member of a contractor association; 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 72 • any day the Contractor is prevented from working at the beginning of the workday for cause as defined in Section 6-6.1; or • any day the Contractor is prevented from working during the first 5 hours with at least 60 percent of the normal work force for cause as defined in Section 6- 6.1. 65. Work Site - See Project Site (Site). ABBREVIATIONS 1-3.2 Common Usage. ADD the following: AML Approved Material List CADD Computer Aided Design and Drafting CA MUTCD California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices CCT Correlated Color Temperature CEQA California Environmental Quality Act. CFR Code of Federal Regulations CGP Construction General Permit CIPM Cured-In-Place-Manhole CL Centerline CMS Content Management System Database CNC Computer Numerical Control CRI Color Rendering Index CSA Canadian Standards Association DBE Disadvantaged Business Enterprise DCE Data Computer Equipment DG Decomposed Granite DVBE Disabled Veteran Business Enterprise DWT Detectable Warning Tiles EOW Engineer of Work ESL Environmentally Sensitive Lands ESO Electrical Service Orders FRP Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic GFE Good Faith Effort GMT Greenwich Mean Time GPS Global Positioning System IDA International Dark Sky Association IP Ingress Protection LCD Liquid Crystal Display LD Laser Diode LER Luminaire Efficiency Rating MBE Minority Business Enterprise MDFT Minimum Dry Film Thickness MHPA Multiple Habitat Planning Area 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 73 MH Manhole MIL Military MJ Mechanical Joint M&M Maintenance and Monitoring MMC Mitigation and Monitoring Coordination MOV Metal Oxide Varistor NA Numerical Aperture NC Not Connected, Normally Closed NEPA National Environmental Policy Act of 1969 NEXT Near End Crosstalk NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program NOC Notice of Completion NPDES National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System NTP Notice to Proceed OC On Center ODP Open Drip Proof OFNR Optical Fiber Nonconductive Riser OTDR Optical Time Domain Reflectometer PB Pull Box PCMS Portable Changeable Message Signs PCU Photoelectric Control Unit PEP Plant Establishment Period PIC Polyethylene Insulated Cable PL Property Line RFP Request for Proposal RFI Request for Information RPMS Rubber Polymer Modified Slurry SIC Standard Industry Classification SMS Short Message Service SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SOW Statement of Work, Scope of Work SOV Schedule of Values SPDT Single Pole Double Throw SSD Surge Suppression Devices TDR Time Domain Reflectometer TEES Transportation Electrical Equipment Specifications TFFN Thermoplastic Flexible Fixture Wire Nylon Jacketed TIG Tungsten Inert Gas UF Underground Feeder UPRR Union Pacific Railroad Company VAC Volts AC VPC Vitrified Polymer Composite WBE Women Business Enterprise 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 74 1-3.3 Institutions. ADD the following: AMTRACK American Track National Railroad Passenger Corp. ANSI American National Standards Institute AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials AISC American Institute of Steel Construction ANSI American National Standards Institute API American Petroleum Institute AREA American Railway Engineering Association ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWPA American Wood Preservers Association AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association BNSF Burlington Northern Santa Fe Railway DSD Development Services Department FHWA Federal Highway Administration GRI Geosynthetic Research Institute IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association IES Illuminating Engineering Society (Photometric Data) ISO International Organization for Standardization MTS San Diego Metropolitan Transit System NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers NAFP National Association of Pipe Fabricators NCTD North County Transit District NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NOAA National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (Dept. of Commerce) NFPA National Fire Protection Association PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute SANDAG San Diego Association of Governments SD&AE San Diego & Arizona Eastern Railroad SDTI San Diego Trolley, Inc. UL Underwriters’ Laboratories Inc. USGS United States Geological Survey UPRR Union Pacific Railroad Company 1-6 BIDDING AND SUBMISSION OF THE BID 1-6.2 Subcontractor Listing. ADD the following: Each Bidder shall comply with the Chapter of the Public Contract Code including Sections 4100 through 4113. The use of Subcontractors in no way relieves the Contractor of any obligations or responsibilities under the Contract. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 75 The following excerpts or summaries of some of the requirements of this Chapter are included below for information: The Bidder shall set forth in the Bid, as provided in Section 4104: “(a) The name and location of the place of business of each Subcontractor who will perform Work or Labor or render service to the prime Contractor in or about the construction of the Work or improvements, or a Subcontractor licensed by the State of California who, under Subcontract to the prime Contractor, specially fabricates and installs a portion of the Work or improvement according to detailed Drawings contained in the Plans and Specifications, in an amount in excess of one-half of 1 percent of the prime Contractor’s total Bid, or, in the case of Bids or offers for the construction of streets or highways, including bridges, in excess of one-half of 1 percent of the prime Contractor’s total Bid or ten thousand dollars ($10,000), whichever is greater.” “(b) The portion of the Work which will be done by each such Subcontractor under this act. The prime Contractor shall list only one Subcontractor for each such portion as is defined by the prime Contractor in his Bid.” If the Contractor fails to specify a Subcontractor or specifies more than one Subcontractor for the same portion of the Work to be performed under the Contract (in excess of one-half of 1 percent of the Contractor’s total Bid), the Contractor shall be qualified to perform that portion itself, and shall perform that portion itself, except as otherwise provided in the Code. As provided in Section 4107, no Contractor whose Bid is accepted shall substitute any person as Subcontractor in place of the Subcontractor listed in the original Bid, except for causes and by procedures established in Section 4107.5. This section provides procedures to correct a clerical error in the listing of a Subcontractor. Section 4110 provides that a Contractor violating any of the provisions of the Chapter violates the Contract and the Board may exercise the option either to cancel the Contract or assess the Contractor a penalty in an amount of not more than 10 percent of the Subcontract involved, after a public hearing. 1-7 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT 1-7.1 General. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following: 1-7.1 Standard Contract Provisions. 1-7.1.1 Successor’s Obligations. All grants, covenants, provisions and claims, rights, powers, privileges and abilities contained in the Contract Documents shall be read and held as made by and with, and granted to and imposed upon, the Contractor, the Agency, and the Contractor’s and the Agency’s respective heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns. 1-7.1.2 Waiver of Legal Rights. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 76 1. The Agency’s failure to insist, in any 1 or more instances, upon the performance of any provision of the Contract, or to exercise any right therein, shall not be construed as a waiver or relinquishment of such provisions or rights. 2. Any waiver of any breach of the Contract shall not be held to be a waiver of any other or subsequent breach. 3. Any waiver the Agency issues to any provision of the Contract shall only be effective if it is agreed upon in writing by the Agency and if it is specific to the matter concerned. 1-7.1.3 Requests for Information (RFI). 1. Inquiries from the Contractor seeking clarification of the requirements of the Contract Documents shall be submitted in writing to the Agency as a Request for Information (RFI). 1-7.1.4 Assignment to Awarding Body. 1. In accordance with subdivision (b) of Public Contract Code Section 7103.5, the Contractor and the Contractor’s Subcontractors shall conform to the following requirements: a. In entering into a public works contract or a subcontract to supply goods, services, or materials pursuant to a public works contract, the Contractor or the Contractor’s Subcontractor offer and agree to assign to the awarding body all rights, title, and interest in and to all causes of action it may have under Section 4 of the Clayton Act (15 U.S.C. Sec. 15) or under the Cartwright Act (Business and Professions Code Section 16700 et seq.) arising from purchases of goods, services, or materials pursuant to the public works contract or the subcontract. b. This assignment shall be made and become effective at the time the awarding body tenders to the Contractor, without further acknowledgment by the Parties. 1-7.2 Contract Bonds. ADD the following: 1. Before execution of the Contract, the Bidder shall file surety bonds with the Agency to be approved by the Board in the amounts and for the purposes noted below. Bonds issued by a Surety, who is authorized to issue bonds in California, and whose bonding limitation shown in the circular is enough to provide bonds in the amount required by the Contract shall be deemed approved unless specifically rejected by the Agency. Bonds from all other sureties shall be accompanied by all documents enumerated in Code of Civil Procedure Section 995.660 (a). The Bidder shall pay all bond premiums, costs, and incidentals. 2. Each bond shall incorporate, by reference, the Contract and be signed by both the Bidder and Surety and the signature of the authorized agent of the Surety shall be notarized. 3. The faithful performance/warranty bond will be reduced to 25 percent of the original amount 30 Calendar Days after recordation of the Notice of Completion and will remain in full force and effect for the 1-year warranty period and until all warranty repairs are completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The bond to secure payment of laborers and materials suppliers shall be released 6 months plus 30 Calendar Days after recordation of the Notice of Completion if all claims have been paid. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 77 4. All bonds are to be placed with a Surety insurance carrier admitted and authorized to transact the business of insurance in California and whose assets exceed its liabilities in an amount equal to or in excess of the amount of the bond. The bonds are to contain the following documents: a. An original, or a certified copy, of the unrevoked appointment, power of attorney, bylaws, or other instrument entitling or authorizing the person who executed the bond to do so. b. A certified copy of the certificate of authority of the insurer issued by the insurance commissioner. 5. If the Bid is accepted, the Agency may require a financial statement of the assets and liabilities of the Surety for the quarter calendar year preceding the date of the execution of the bond. The financial statement shall be made by an officer’s certificate as defined in Corporations Code Section 173. In the case of a foreign Surety, the financial statement may be verified by the oath of the principal officer or manager residing within the United States. 6. If the Surety on any bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt, becomes insolvent, or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located, immediately notify the Engineer; and immediately substitute another bond and Surety acceptable to the Agency. 7. The Contractor shall require the Surety to mail its standard “Bond Status” form to the Agency. ADD the following: 1-7.2.1 Payment. 1. If enumerated in the Contract Documents, the Bid item for “Bonds (Payment and Performance)” includes full compensation for actual costs of payment and performance bonds. The Contractor may submit a request for payment of actual invoiced costs up to the Bid amount, but not to exceed 2.5% of the Contract Price, no less than 10 Working Days after the award of the Contract. 2. If enumerated in the Contract Documents, if the Bid item for “Bonds (Payment and Performance)” exceeds actual invoiced costs, any such differential amount up to the Bid amount shall be paid as a part of the Final Payment. SECTION 2 – SCOPE OF THE WORK 2-1 WORK TO BE DONE ADD the following: 1. Where approval or acceptance by the Agency is required, only a general approval is required. However, such approval does not relieve the Contractor from the Contractor’s responsibility for complying with all applicable laws, codes, and best industry practices. Contractor has its obligation to fulfill all conditions of the Contract. 2. In accordance with the provisions of California Law, the Contractor shall possess or require the Contractor’s Subcontractor(s) to possess valid appropriate license(s) for the Work being performed as conveyed in the Bidding Documents. 2-2 PERMITS DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following: 2-2 PERMITS, FEES, AND NOTICES 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 78 1. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all business taxes, business licenses, permits, and fees required for constructing the Project and licenses and inspections necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work, unless specified otherwise in the Contract Documents. a. Resource Agency Permits. [insert when applicable] b. To the extent that there is a change in the type or cost of any of such permits, fees, licenses, or inspection occurring after Award of Contract, there shall be an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price on account of such change under the Extra Work provisions. c. The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws. The Contractor is not entitled to damages or additional payment for delays attributable to the acquisition of permits. d. The Contractor shall pay the Agency for regulatory fees, fines, or penalties imposed on the Agency arising from the Contractor’s failure to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. Contractor shall not begin work until all permit’s incidental to the Work are obtained. This includes, and is not limited to, encroachment, right-of-way, grading and building permits necessary to perform Work for this Contract on Agency property, streets, or other rights- of-way. Permits for night work, overload, blasting, demolition, and disposal of all materials removed from the Project are also Contractor’s responsibility. 3. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits for the disposal of all materials removed from the Project. The cost of the permit(s) shall be included in the price Bid for the appropriate Bid item and the Agency shall not pay additional compensation for Contractor to obtain such permits. 4. Permits shall be maintained in valid status until acceptance of the Work by the Agency. 2-2.1 Building Permits. 1. The City has processed and paid permitting fees for the necessary city-issued building permit necessary to complete the contract work. The Contractor is required to complete the building permit application form and submit to the Building Department as necessary to obtain the required building permit issuance. 2. Request inspections in accordance with the building codes in effect on the permitted Plans and by City’s Development Services Department, Building Division or Construction Management and Inspection Department. Any Work performed without the benefit of the required permit and subsequent inspection shall be removed and replaced at the discretion of the City Building Inspector at no additional cost. 2-2.2 Caltrans Encroachment Permit. (Not Used) 2-3 RIGHT-OF-WAY ADD the following: 1. The Contractor shall coordinate access to private property with the property owners and the timing of accessing private property when the Agency has already obtained rights of entry. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall coordinate, pay for, and assume all responsibility for acquiring using, and disposing of additional work areas and facilities 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 79 temporarily required. The Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Agency harmless from all claims for damages caused by such actions. The Contractor shall protect any private and public improvements. 2-4 COOPERATION AND COLLATERAL WORK ADD the following: 1. The Contractor shall coordinate and cooperate with all the utility companies during the relocation or construction of their lines. The Contractor may be granted a time extension if, in the opinion of the Engineer, a delay is caused by the utility company. No additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for any such delay. 2. If work to be performed by the Agency or its separate Contractors is not shown or specified in the Contract Documents, the Engineer shall notify the Contractor in writing 10 Working Days prior to the start of such work and make available Plans or Specifications for work to be performed by others that may be pertinent to Contractor’s Work. If Contractor determines that the work to be performed by the Agency or its separate Contractors may interfere with or cause damage or delays to Contractor’s Work, notify the Engineer in writing within 3 Working Days of the Engineer’s notice. The Contractor shall diligently pursue with the Engineer resolution of potential conflicts with the work of others. 3. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer for approval a plan and schedule to integrate the work of Contractor or its Subcontractors, Agency or the work of others. The plan shall conform to the tasks identified in the Construction Schedule and identify additional tasks as necessary and the sequencing of interrelated activities. 2-5 THE CONTRACTOR’S EQUIPMENT AND FACILITIES 2-5.2 Temporary Utility Services. ADD the following: 1. The Contractor shall furnish, install, maintain, and remove all temporary utility services, such as light, power, electrical, gas, and water, at its own expense for construction and maintenance activities until acceptance of Work. These include piping, wiring, lamps, and other equipment necessary for the Work. 2. The Contractor shall obtain a construction meter for water used for the construction, testing, disinfection and flushing of new water or sewer facilities, vegetation establishment and maintenance, site maintenance, landscaping, cleanup, and all other work requiring water. The Contractor shall contact the water agency that serves the Project Site for requirements. 3. The Contractor shall pay all costs of temporary light, power and water including hookup, service, meter, and any, and all, other charges, deposits and/or fees. The costs shall be considered incidental to the items of Work that they are associated with and no additional payment will be made for them. 2-6 CHANGES REQUESTED BY THE CONTRACTOR ADD the following: 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 80 1. Any plan or method of work suggested to the Contractor by the Agency, but not specified or required by the Contract or Change Order, which is adopted or followed by the Contractor in whole or in part shall be done at the Contractor’s sole risk and responsibility. 2. The Contract Price is not subject to adjustment for any type of tax increases after the Award. ADD the following: 2-6.1 Cost Reduction Proposal. 1. The Contractor may submit to the Engineer in writing, proposals for modifying the Plans, Specifications, or other requirements of the Contract for the sole purpose of reducing the total cost of construction. 2. The cost reduction proposal shall not impair, in any manner, the essential functions or characteristics of the Project such as service life, economy of operation, ease of maintenance, quality, desired appearance, or design and safety standards. 3. The following information must be included in the cost reduction proposal: a. A description of both the existing Contract requirements for performing the Work and the proposed changes. b. An itemization of the Contract requirements that shall be changed if the proposal is adopted. c. A detailed estimate of the cost of performing the Work under the existing Contract and under the proposed change. d. A statement of the time within which the Engineer shall act on the cost reduction proposal. e. The Contract items of Work affected by the proposed changes, including any quantity variation attributable thereto. 4. This subsection does not require the Engineer to consider any cost reduction proposal. The Agency shall not be liable to the Contractor for not approving or acting upon any cost reduction proposal the Contractor submitted nor for any delays to the Work attributable to the cost reduction proposal. 5. If a cost reduction proposal is similar to the information included in the Contract Documents or adopted by the Agency after the advertisement and prior to Award of the Contract, the Engineer will not accept such proposal and reserves the right to make such changes without compensation to the Contractor under the provisions of this subsection. 6. The Contractor shall continue to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract until a Change Order incorporating the cost reduction proposal has been issued. 7. The Engineer is the sole judge of the acceptability of a cost reduction proposal and the estimated net savings. In determining the estimated net savings, the Agency has the right to disregard the Contract Bid prices if, in the judgment of the Engineer, such prices do not represent a fair measure of the value of the Work to be performed or to be deleted. 8. The Agency reserves the right to require the Contractor to share in the Agency’s costs of investigating the Contractor’s cost reduction proposal. When this is required, the Contractor shall indicate the Contractor’s acceptance in writing allowing the Agency to deduct amounts payable to the Contractor. 9. If the Engineer accepts the Contractor’s cost reduction proposal in whole or in part, the Engineer shall issue a Change Order to incorporate the changes in the Plans and Specifications which are necessary to permit the cost reduction proposal or such part of it as has been 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 81 accepted to be put into effect. If the Engineer’s approval is conditional, the Change Order shall include any conditions upon which the Engineer’s approval is based. 10. The Change Order also includes the estimated net savings in the cost of performing the Work due to the accepted cost reduction proposal and provides that the Contract cost be adjusted by crediting the Agency with 50% of estimated net savings amount. 11. The Contract Time shall not be extended by the acceptance of the cost reduction proposal and the performance of the Work unless specified otherwise in the Change Order. 12. The amount specified as payable to the Contractor in the Change Order is full compensation for the cost reduction proposal and the performance of the Work. 13. The Agency expressly reserves the right to adopt a cost reduction proposal for general use on contracts administered by the Agency when it determines that the proposal is suitable for application to other contracts. When an accepted cost reduction proposal is adopted for general use, only the Contractor who first submitted such proposal shall be eligible for compensation subject to this subsection, and in that case, only for contracts awarded prior to submission of the accepted cost reduction proposal. 14. The cost reduction proposals identical or similar to previously submitted proposals shall be eligible for consideration and compensation under the provisions of this subsection if the identical or similar previously submitted proposals were not adopted for general application to other contracts administered by the Agency. 15. Subject to the provisions contained in the Contract, the Agency or any other public agency shall have the right to use all or any part of any submitted cost reduction proposal without obligation or compensation of any kind to the Contractor. 16. The Contractor shall bear all costs to revise bonds for the Project to include the cost reduction incentive proposal work. 2-7 CHANGES INITIATED BY THE AGENCY 2-7.1 General. ADD the following: 1. The Agency may change the Plans, Specifications, character of the Work, or quantity of Work provided the total arithmetic dollar value of all such changes, both additive and deductive, does not exceed 25 percent of the Contract Price. Should it become necessary to exceed this limitation, the change shall be by written supplemental agreement between the Contractor and Agency, unless both parties agree to proceed with the change by Change Order. 2. Change Orders shall be in writing and state the dollar value of the change or established method of payment, any adjustment in Contract Time of completion, and when negotiated prices are involved, and shall provide for the Contractor’s signature indicating acceptance. 3. Unless expressly set forth in writing in a Change Order signed by the Agency and the Contractor, changes initiated by the Agency shall not be construed as the Agency directing the Contractor’s mean-and-methods in the execution of the Work. 2-7.2 Payment-Contract Unit Prices. 1. If a change is ordered in an item of work covered by a Contract Unit Price, and such change does not involve substantial change in character of the Work from that shown on the Plans or specified in the Specifications, then an adjustment in payment will be made. This 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 82 adjustment will be based upon the increase or decrease in quantity and the Contract Unit Price. 2. If the actual quantity of an item of work covered by a Contract Unit Price and constructed in conformance with the Plans and Specifications varies from the Bid quantity by 50 percent or less, payment will be made at the Contract Unit Price. If the actual quantity of the item of work varies from the Bid quantity by more than 50 percent, payment will be made per Section 2-7.3 or 2-7.4 as appropriate. 3. If a change is ordered in an item of work covered by a Contract Unit Price, and such change does involve a substantial change in the character of the Work from that shown on the Plans or specified in the Specifications, an adjustment in payment will be made per Section 2-7.6. 2-7.3 Payment – Increases of More than 50 Percent. 1. Should the actual quantity of an item of Work covered by a Contract Unit Price and constructed in conformance with the Plans and Specifications, exceed the Bid quantity by more than 50 percent, payment for the quantity in excess of 150 percent of the Bid quantity will be made on the basis of an adjustment in the Contract Unit Price mutually agreed to by the Contractor and the Agency, or at the option of the Engineer, on the basis of Extra Work per Section 2-8. The Extra Work per Section 2-8, basis of payment, shall not include fixed costs. Fixed costs shall be deemed to have been recovered by the Contractor through payment for 150 percent of the Bid quantity at the Contract Unit Price. 2-7.4 Payment – Decreases of More than 50 Percent Should the actual quantity of an item of Work covered by a Contract Unit Price, and constructed in conformance with the Plans and Specifications, be less than 50 percent of the Bid quantity, an adjustment in payment will not be made unless so requested in writing by the Contractor. If the Contractor so requests, payment will be made on the basis of an adjustment in the Contract Unit Price mutually agreed to by the Contractor and the Agency, or at the option of the Engineer, on the basis of Extra Work per Section 2-8; however, in no case will payment be less than would be made for the actual quantity at the Contract Unit Price nor more than would be made for 50 percent of the Bid quantity at the Contract Unit Price. 2-7.5 Stipulated Unit Prices. – not used. 2-7.6 Agreed Prices. Agreed Prices are prices for new or unforeseen Work, or adjustments in Contract Unit Prices per Section 2-7.2, established by mutual agreement between the Contractor and the Agency. If mutual agreement cannot be reached, the Engineer may direct the Contractor to proceed on the basis of Extra Work in accordance with Section 2-8, except as otherwise specified in Sections 2- 7.3 and 2-7.4. 2-7.7 Schedule of Values. Before construction, Contractor shall provide a schedule of values for all lump-sum Bid items that shall be used for the purpose of progress payments. The prices shall be valid for the purpose of Change Orders to the Project. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 83 2-7.8 Eliminated Items. Should any Bid item be eliminated in its entirety, payment will be made to the Contractor for its actual costs incurred in connection with the eliminated item prior to notification in writing from the Engineer so stating its elimination. If material conforming to the Plans and Specifications is ordered by the Contractor for use in the eliminated item prior to the date of notification of elimination by the Engineer, and if the order for that material cannot be canceled, payment will be made to the Contractor for the actual cost of the material. In this case, the material shall become the property of the Agency. Payment will be made to the Contractor for its actual costs for any further handling. If the material is returnable, the material shall be returned, and payment will be made to the Contractor for the actual cost of charges made by the supplier for returning the material and for handling by the Contractor. Actual costs, as used in this Agency Supplement, shall be computed on the basis of Extra Work per Section 2-8. 2-8 EXTRA WORK ADD the following: 1. New or unforeseen Work will be classified as “Extra Work” when the Engineer determines that it is not covered by Contract Unit Prices or stipulated unit prices. 2. Any request by the Contractor for Extra Work shall be in writing to the Engineer and shall include itemized estimates and in accordance with Section 7-4. The Contractor shall fully itemize the Extra Work cost estimates such as labor and payroll costs, quantities, crew composition, production rates, material costs, Subcontractor and Supplier costs, equipment costs, supplemental costs, and time impact. 2-9 CHANGED CONDITIONS ADD the following: The Contractor shall promptly notify the Engineer of the following Work Site conditions (“Changed Conditions”), in writing, upon their discovery and before they are disturbed: 1. Subsurface or latent physical conditions differing materially from those represented in the Contract; 2. Unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature differing materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character being performed; and 3. Material differing from that represented in the Contract which the Contractor believes may be hazardous waste, as defined in Health and Safety Code Section 25117, that is required to be removed to a Class I, Class II, or Class III disposal site in accordance with provisions of existing law. The Engineer will promptly investigate conditions which appear to be Changed Conditions. If the Engineer determines that conditions are Changed Conditions and they will materially affect performance time, the Contractor, upon submitting a written request, will be granted an extension of time subject to Section 6-4.2. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 84 If the Engineer determines that the conditions do not justify an adjustment in compensation, the Contractor will be notified in writing. This notice will also advise the Contractor of its obligation to notify the Engineer in writing if the Contractor disagrees. The Contractor’s failure to give notice of Changed Conditions promptly upon their discovery and before they are disturbed shall constitute a waiver of all claims in connection with them. 1. The Contractor shall not be entitled to the payment of any additional compensation for any act, or failure to act, by the Engineer, including failure or refusal to issue a Change Order, or for the occurrence of any event or other cause, unless the Contractor shall have first given the Engineer written notice of potential claim as specified in this Section 2-9. Compliance with this section shall not be required as a prerequisite to notice provisions in Section 6-4.2(4) Extensions of Time, nor to any claim that is based on differences in measurement or errors of computation as to Contract quantities. 2. The Contractor shall provide the Agency with a written document containing a description of the particular circumstances giving rise to the potential claim, the reasons for which the Contractor believes additional compensation may be due and the nature of any and all costs involved within 20 Working Days of the date of service of the written notice of potential claim for Changed Conditions. Verbal notifications will not be accepted. 3. The potential claim shall include the following certification relative to the California False Claims Act, Government Code Sections 12650-12656. “The undersigned certifies that the above statements are made in full awareness of the California False Claims Act, Government Code Sections 12650-12656. The undersigned further understands and agrees that this potential claim, unless resolved, must be restated as a claim in response to the Agency’s proposed final estimate for it to be further considered.” By: Title: Date: Company Name: 4. The Contractor’s estimate of costs may be updated when actual costs are known. The Contractor shall submit proof of its actual costs to the Engineer within 20 Working Days after the affected Work is completed. Failure to do so shall be cause to deny any later-filed claim regarding a potential claim described in this Section 2-9. 5. The intent of this Section 2-9 is to have differences between the parties arising under the Contract brought to the attention of the Engineer at the earliest possible time so that such matters can be settled, if possible, or other appropriate action promptly taken. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 85 2-10 DISPUTED WORK ADD 2-10.1 Claims. 1. A Claim is a written demand by the Contractor that seeks an adjustment in the Contract Price, Contract Time, or other relief associated with a dispute arising under or relating to the Contract, including a breach of any Contract provision. A voucher, invoice, or other routine request for payment is not a Claim. 2. A Claim shall conform to these specifications and may be considered after the Agency has previously denied a request by the Contractor for a Change Order seeking the demanded relief. 3. The Contractor shall submit a Claim to the Engineer if a dispute occurs that arises from or relates to the Contract. The Claim shall seek all relief to which the Contractor asserts the Contractor is entitled as a result of the event(s) giving rise to the dispute. The Contractor’s failure to process a Claim in accordance with these specifications shall constitute a waiver of all relief associated with the dispute. Claims are subject to 6-10, “Right to Audit.” 4. The Contractor shall continue to perform the Services and Work and shall maintain the Schedule during any dispute proceedings. The Engineer will continue to make payments for undisputed Services and Work. 5. The Agency’s Claims process specified in the Agency Supplement shall not relieve the Contractor of the Contractor’s statutory obligations to present Claims prior to any action under the Government Code. 6. Except for those final payment items disputed in the written statement required in Section 7-3.2, all Claims of any dollar amount shall be submitted in a written statement by the Contractor no later than the date of receipt of the final payment estimate. Those final payment items disputed in the written statement required in Section 7-3.2 shall be submitted no later than 30 Calendar Days after receipt of the Final Payment estimate. No Claim will be considered that was not included in this written statement, nor will any Claim be allowed for which written notice or protest is required under any provision of this Contract, including Sections 2-9 Changed Conditions, 2-10 Disputed Work, 4-1(22) Protection, 6-4.4 Written Notice and Report, or 6-4.2(4) Extensions of Time, unless the Contractor has complied with notice or protest requirements. 7. The Engineer will consider Contractor’s filed Claims, which must be detailed enough so the Engineer can determine the basis and amount of the Claims. Contractor shall provide the Engineer additional information to determine the facts or contentions involved in a Claim if requested by the Engineer. If additional information is needed, Contractor must provide Engineer with this information within a reasonable time of being asked for additional information. Failure to submit such information and details will be sufficient cause for denying the Claims. 8. Payment for Claims shall be processed by the next payment application of their resolution for those Claims approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall proceed with informal dispute resolution under Section 2-10, Disputed Work, for those Claims remaining in dispute. 2-10.1.1 Initiation of Claim. 1. A Claim is a written demand by the Contractor that seeks an adjustment in the Contract Price, Contract Time, or other relief associated with a dispute arising under or relating to the 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 86 Contract, including a breach of any provision of the Contract. A voucher, invoice, payment application or other routine request for payment is not a Claim. A Claim shall conform to these specifications and may be considered after the City has previously denied a request from the Contractor for a Change Order seeking the demanded relief. The Contractor shall, consistent with 2-10.1.2, give the Agency written notice of Claim prior to commencing any Disputed Work. Failure to give the notice shall constitute a waiver of all Claims in connection with the Disputed Work. If the Contractor and the Agency are unable to reach agreement on Disputed Work, the Agency may direct the Contractor to proceed with the Work and such direction shall not be construed as the Agency directing the Contractor’s mean-and-methods in the execution of the Work. After the Agency has rejected a Change Order request and prior to proceeding with dispute resolution pursuant to the Public Contract Code, applicable provisions of which are specified below, the Contractor shall attempt to resolve all disputes informally through the following dispute resolution chain of command: For claims with a monetary value of $50,000 or less: i. Project Inspector ii. Fleet & Facilities Project Manager iii. Public Works Manager For claims with a monetary value greater than $50,000: iv. Project Inspector v. Fleet & Facilities Project Manager vi. Public Works Manager vii. City Engineer viii. City Manager or Executive Manager 2. Consistent with Section 2-10.1.2, the Contractor shall submit a complete report within 20 Working Days after completion of the Disputed Work stating its position on the Claim, the contractual basis for the Claim, along with all documentation supporting the costs, Contract Time, and all other evidentiary materials. At each level of Claim or appeal of Claim the Agency will, within 10 Working Days of receipt of the Claim or appeal of Claim, review the Contractor’s report and respond with a position, request additional information or request that the Contractor meet and present its report. When additional information or a meeting is requested the Agency will provide its position within 10 Working Days of receipt of the additional information or Contractor’s presentation of its report. The Contractor may appeal each level’s position up to the Deputy City Engineer/Engineering Manager for claims less than $50,000 and/or up to the City Manager for the City of Carlsbad or Executive Manager for the Carlsbad Municipal Water District for claims greater than $50,000 after which the Contractor may proceed under the provisions of the Public Contract Code. The Agency’s failure to state a position or otherwise respond to a Claim within the timeframes set forth above shall be deemed a rejection of the Claim by the Agency. 3. The authority within the dispute resolution chain of command is limited to recommending a resolution to a Claim to the City Manager for the City of Carlsbad or Executive Manager for the Carlsbad Municipal Water District. Actual approval of the Claim is subject to the Change Order provisions in the Contract. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 87 4. Any remaining Claims not resolved by the informal dispute resolution process described above shall be resolved in accordance with Public Contract Code Section 9204, the relevant portion of which is included below: (d)(1)(A) Upon receipt of a Claim pursuant to this section, the public entity to which the Claim applies shall conduct a reasonable review of the Claim and, within a period not to exceed 45 days, shall provide the Claimant a written statement identifying what portion of the Claim is disputed and what portion is undisputed. Upon receipt of a Claim, a public entity and a Contractor may, by mutual agreement, extend the time period provided in this subdivision. (B) The Claimant shall furnish reasonable documentation to support the Claim. (C) If the public entity needs approval from its governing body to provide the Claimant a written statement identifying the disputed portion and the undisputed portion of the Claim, and the governing body does not meet within the 45 days or within the mutually agreed to extension of time following receipt of a Claim sent by registered mail or certified mail, return receipt requested, the public entity shall have up to three days following the next duly publicly noticed meeting of the governing body after the 45-day period, or extension, expires to provide the Claimant a written statement identifying the disputed portion and the undisputed portion. (D) Any payment due on an undisputed portion of the Claim shall be processed and made within 60 days after the public entity issues its written statement. If the public entity fails to issue a written statement, paragraph (3) shall apply. (2)(A) If the Claimant disputes the public entity's written response, or if the public entity fails to respond to a Claim issued pursuant to this section within the time prescribed, the Claimant may demand in writing an informal conference to meet and confer for settlement of the issues in dispute. Upon receipt of a demand in writing sent by registered mail or certified mail, return receipt requested, the public entity shall schedule a meet and confer conference within 30 days for settlement of the dispute. (B) Within 10 business days following the conclusion of the meet and confer conference, if the Claim or any portion of the Claim remains in dispute, the public entity shall provide the Claimant a written statement identifying the portion of the Claim that remains in dispute and the portion that is undisputed. Any payment due on an undisputed portion of the Claim shall be processed and made within 60 days after the public entity issues its written statement. Any disputed portion of the Claim, as identified by the Contractor in writing, shall be submitted to nonbinding mediation, with the public entity and the Claimant sharing the associated costs equally. The public entity and Claimant shall mutually agree to a mediator within 10 business days after the disputed portion of the Claim has been identified in writing. If the parties cannot agree upon a mediator, each party shall select a mediator and those mediators 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 88 shall select a qualified neutral third party to mediate with regard to the disputed portion of the Claim. Each party shall bear the fees and costs charged by its respective mediator in connection with the selection of the neutral mediator. If mediation is unsuccessful, the parts of the Claim remaining in dispute shall be subject to applicable procedures outside this section. (C) For purposes of this section, mediation includes any nonbinding process, including, but not limited to, neutral evaluation or a dispute review board, in which an independent third party or board assists the parties in dispute resolution through negotiation or by issuance of an evaluation. Any mediation utilized shall conform to the timeframes in this section. (D) Unless otherwise agreed to by the public entity and the Contractor in writing, the mediation conducted pursuant to this section shall excuse any further obligation under Section 20104.4 to mediate after litigation has been commenced. (E) This section does not preclude a public entity from requiring arbitration of disputes under private arbitration or the Public Works Contract Arbitration Program if mediation under this section does not resolve the parties' dispute. (3) Failure by the public entity to respond to a Claim from a Contractor within the time periods described in this subdivision or to otherwise meet the time requirements of this section shall result in the Claim being deemed rejected in its entirety. A Claim that is denied by reason of the public entity's failure to have responded to a Claim, or its failure to otherwise meet the time requirements of this section, shall not constitute an adverse finding with regard to the merits of the Claim or the responsibility or qualifications of the Claimant. (4) Amounts not paid in a timely manner as required by this section shall bear interest at 7 percent per annum. (5) If a Subcontractor or a lower tier Subcontractor lacks legal standing to assert a Claim against a public entity because privity of Contract does not exist, the Contractor may present to the public entity a Claim on behalf of a Subcontractor or lower tier Subcontractor. A Subcontractor may request in writing, either on their own behalf or on behalf of a lower tier Subcontractor, that the Contractor present a Claim for work which was performed by the Subcontractor or by a lower tier Subcontractor on behalf of the Subcontractor. The Subcontractor requesting that the Claim be presented to the public entity shall furnish reasonable documentation to support the Claim. Within 45 days of receipt of this written request, the Contractor shall notify the Subcontractor in writing as to whether the Contractor presented the Claim to the public entity and, if the original Contractor did not present the Claim, provide the Subcontractor with a statement of the reasons for not having done so. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 89 (e) The text of this section or a summary of it shall be set forth in the Plans or Specifications for any Public Works Project that may give rise to a Claim under this section. (f) A waiver of the rights granted by this section is void and contrary to public policy, provided, however, that (1) upon receipt of a Claim, the parties may mutually agree to waive, in writing, mediation and proceed directly to the commencement of a civil action or binding arbitration, as applicable; and (2) a public entity may prescribe reasonable Change Order, Claim, and dispute resolution procedures and requirements in addition to the provisions of this section, so long as the contractual provisions do not conflict with or otherwise impair the timeframes and procedures set forth in this section. (g) This section applies to contracts entered into on or after January 1, 2017. (h) Nothing in this section shall impose liability upon a public entity that makes loans or grants available through a competitive application process, for the failure of an awardee to meet its contractual obligations. (i) This section shall remain in effect only until January 1, 2027, and as of that date is repealed, unless a later enacted statute that is enacted before January 1, 2027, deletes, or extends that date. In addition, all Claims by Contractor for $375,000 or less shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures in the Public Contract Code Section 20104 et seq., applicable provisions of which are included below: 20104.2 For any Claim subject to this article, the following requirements apply: (a) The Claim shall be in writing and include the documents necessary to substantiate the Claim. Claims must be filed on or before the date of final payment. Nothing in this subdivision is intended to extend the time limit or supersede notice requirements otherwise provided by contract for the filing of Claims. (b)(1) For Claims of less than fifty thousand dollars ($50,000), the local agency shall respond in writing to any written Claim within 45 days of receipt of the Claim, or may request, in writing, within 30 days of receipt of the Claim, any additional documentation supporting the Claim or relating to defenses to the Claim the local agency may have against the Claimant. (2) If additional information is thereafter required, it shall be requested and provided pursuant to this subdivision, upon mutual agreement of the local agency and the Claimant. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 90 (3) The local agency's written response to the Claim, as further documented, shall be submitted to the Claimant within 15 days after receipt of the further documentation or within a period of time no greater than that taken by the Claimant in producing the additional information, whichever is greater. (c)(1) For Claims of over fifty thousand dollars ($50,000) and less than or equal to three hundred seventy-five thousand dollars ($375,000), the local agency shall respond in writing to all written Claims within 60 days of receipt of the Claim, or may request, in writing, within 30 days of receipt of the Claim, any additional documentation supporting the Claim or relating to defenses to the Claim the local agency may have against the Claimant. (2) If additional information is thereafter required, it shall be requested and provided pursuant to this subdivision, upon mutual agreement of the local agency and the Claimant. (3) The local agency's written response to the Claim, as further documented, shall be submitted to the Claimant within 30 days after receipt of the further documentation, or within a period of time no greater than that taken by the Claimant in producing the additional information or requested documentation, whichever is greater. (d) If the Claimant disputes the local agency's written response, or the local agency fails to respond within the time prescribed, the Claimant may so notify the local agency, in writing, either within 15 days of receipt of the local agency's response or within 15 days of the local agency's failure to respond within the time prescribed, respectively, and demand an informal conference to meet and confer for settlement of the issues in dispute. Upon a demand, the local agency shall schedule a meet and confer conference within 30 days for settlement of the dispute. (e) Following the meet and confer conference, if the Claim or any portion remains in dispute, the Claimant may file a Claim as provided in Chapter 1 (commencing with Section 900) and Chapter 2 (commencing with Section 910) of Part 3 of Division 3.6 of Title 1 of the Government Code. For purposes of those provisions, the running of the period of time within which a Claim must be filed shall be tolled from the time the Claimant submits his or her written Claim pursuant to subdivision (a) until the time that Claim is denied as a result of the meet and confer process, including any period of time utilized by the meet and confer process. (f) This article does not apply to tort Claims and nothing in this article is intended nor shall be construed to change the time periods for filing tort Claims or actions specified by Chapter 1 (commencing with Section 900) and Chapter 2 (commencing with Section 910) of Part 3 of Division 3.6 of Title 1 of the Government Code. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 91 20104.4 The following procedures are established for all civil actions filed to resolve Claims subject to this article: (a) Within 60 days, but no earlier than 30 days, following the filing or responsive pleadings, the court shall submit the matter to nonbinding mediation unless waived by mutual stipulation of both parties. The mediation process shall provide for the selection within 15 days by both parties of a disinterested third person as mediator, shall be commenced within 30 days of the submittal, and shall be concluded within 15 days from the commencement of the mediation unless a time requirement is extended upon a good cause showing to the court or by stipulation of both parties. If the parties fail to select a mediator within the 15-day period, any party may petition the court to appoint the mediator. (b)(1) If the matter remains in dispute, the case shall be submitted to judicial arbitration pursuant to Chapter 2.5 (commencing with Section 1141.10) of Title 3 of Part 3 of the Code of Civil Procedure, notwithstanding Section 1141.11 of that code. The Civil Discovery Act (Title 4 (commencing with Section 2016.010) of Part 4 of the Code of Civil Procedure) shall apply to any proceeding brought under this subdivision consistent with the rules pertaining to judicial arbitration. (2) Notwithstanding any other provision of law, upon stipulation of the parties, arbitrators appointed for purposes of this article shall be experienced in construction law, and, upon stipulation of the parties, mediators and arbitrators shall be paid necessary and reasonable hourly rates of pay not to exceed their customary rate, and such fees and expenses shall be paid equally by the parties, except in the case of arbitration where the arbitrator, for good cause, determines a different division. In no event shall these fees or expenses be paid by state or county funds. (3) In addition to Chapter 2.5 (commencing with Section 1141.10) of Title 3 of Part 3 of the Code of Civil Procedure, any party who after receiving an arbitration award requests a trial de novo but does not obtain a more favorable judgment shall, in addition to payment of costs and fees under that chapter, pay the attorney's fees of the other party arising out of the trial de novo. (b) The court may, upon request by any party, order any witnesses to participate in the mediation or arbitration process. 20104.6 Payment on undisputed portion of Claim; interest on arbitration awards or judgments: (a) No local agency shall fail to pay money as to any portion of a Claim which is undisputed except as otherwise provided in the Contract. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 92 (b) In any suit filed under Section 20104.4, the local agency shall pay interest at the legal rate on any arbitration award or judgment. The interest shall begin to accrue on the date the suit is filed in a court of law. 5. Although not to be construed as proceeding under Extra Work provisions, the Contractor shall keep and furnish records of disputed Work in accordance with Section 2-10. 2-10.1.2 Claim Certification Submittal. 1. If the Contractor’s Claim seeks an increase in the Contract Price, the Contract Time, or both, submit with the Claim an affidavit certifying the following: a. The Claim is made in good faith and covers all costs and delays to which the Contractor is entitled as a result of the event(s) giving rise to the Claim. b. The amount Claimed accurately reflects the adjustments in the Contract Price, the Contract Time, or both to which the Contractor believes the Contractor is entitled. c. All supporting costs and pricing data are current, accurate, and complete to the best of the Contractor’s knowledge. The Contractor shall supply a cost breakdown per item of Work. d. The Contractor shall ensure that the affidavit is executed by an official who has the authority to legally bind the Contractor. 2-10.1.3 Agency’s Final Determination. 1. If the Contractor disagrees with the City Manager or Executive Manager’s final determination, as described in 2-10.1.1(1-2), Contractor must notify the Engineer in writing of the Contractor’s objection within 15 Working Days after receipt of the written determination and file a “Request for Mediation” in accordance with 2-10.2, “Dispute Resolution Process.” 2. Failure to give notice of objection within the 15 Working Days period shall waive the Contractor’s right to pursue the Claim. 2-10.1.6 Mandatory Assistance. 1. If a third-party dispute, litigation, or both, arises out of or relates in any way to the Services provided under the Contract, upon the Agency’s request, the Contractor shall assist in resolving the dispute or litigation. The Contractor’s assistance includes, but is not limited to the following: a. Providing requested documents in a timely manner. b. Providing professional consultations. c. Attending mediations, arbitrations, depositions, trials, or any event related to the dispute resolution and litigation. 2-10.1.6.1 Compensation for Mandatory Assistance. 1. The Agency will reimburse the Contractor for reasonable fees and expenses incurred by the Contractor for any required assistance rendered in accordance with 2-10.1.6, “Mandatory Assistance” as Extra Work. 2. The Engineer will determine whether these fees and expenses were necessary due to the Contractor’s conduct or failure to act. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 93 3. If the Engineer determines that the basis of the dispute or litigation in which these fees and expenses were incurred were the result of the Contractor’s conduct or the Contractor’s failure to act in part or in whole, the Contractor shall reimburse the Agency for any payments made for these fees and expenses. Reimbursement may be through any legal means necessary, including the Agency’s withholding of the Contractor’s payment. ADD 2-10.2 Dispute Resolution Process 2-10.2.1 Mandatory Non-binding Mediation. 1. If a dispute arises out of or relates to the Contract, or the breach of it, and if the dispute cannot be settled through those procedures described in Section 2-10.1.1, the parties must attempt to settle the dispute in an amicable manner, using mandatory mediation under the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association before having recourse in a court of law. 2. To initiate mediation, the initiating party shall serve a Request for Mediation at the American Arbitration Association (AAA). 2-10.2.2 Mandatory Mediation Costs. 1. The expenses of witnesses for either side shall be paid by the party producing such witnesses. All other expenses of the mediation, including required traveling and other expenses of the mediator and the cost of any proofs or expert advice produced at the direct request of the mediator, shall be borne equally by the parties, unless they agree otherwise. 2-10.2.3 Selection of Mediator. 1. A single mediator, knowledgeable in construction aspects and acceptable to both parties, shall be used to mediate the dispute. 2. If AAA is used, the initiating party shall concurrently file with AAA a “Request for Mediation” along with the appropriate fees, a copy of requested mediators marked in preference order, and a preference for available dates. 3. If AAA is selected to coordinate the mediation (Administrator), within 10 Working Days from the receipt of the initiating party’s Request for Mediation, the opposing party shall file the following: a. A copy of the list of the preferred mediators listed in preference order after striking any mediators to which they have any objection. b. A preference for available dates. c. Appropriate fees. 4. If the parties cannot agree on a mediator, then each party shall select a mediator and those mediators shall select the neutral third party to mediate the matter. 2-10.2.4 Conduct of Mediation Sessions. 1. Mediation hearings shall be conducted in an informal manner and discovery shall not be allowed. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 94 2. Discussions, statements, or admissions shall be confidential to the proceedings and shall not be used for any other purpose regarding the party’s legal position. The parties may agree to exchange any information they deem necessary. 3. Both parties shall have an authorized representative attend the mediation. Each representative shall have the authority to recommend entering into a settlement. Either party may have attorney(s), witnesses, or expert(s) present. Either party may request a list of witnesses and notifications of whether attorney(s) shall be present. 4. Any resulting agreements from mediation shall be documented in writing. Mediation results and documents, by themselves, shall be “non-binding” and inadmissible for any purpose in any legal proceeding, unless such admission is otherwise agreed upon in writing by both parties. Mediators shall not be subject to any subpoena or liability and their actions shall not be subject to discovery. ADD 2-10.3 Governing Law & Forum for Litigation. 1. This Contract shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California. Any lawsuits, at law or in equity, between the parties arising out of this Contract shall be filed in a court of competent jurisdiction in the County of San Diego. With respect to venue, the parties agree that this Contract is made in and will be performed in the County of San Diego. The parties waive all provisions of law providing for a change of venue in these proceedings to any other county. ADD 2-10.4 Pre-judgment Interest. 1. The parties stipulate that if a judgment is entered against a party for breaching this Contract, the pre-judgment interest shall be 2% per annum. SECTION 3 – CONTROL OF THE WORK 3-2 SELF-PERFORMANCE ADD the following: 1. If Contractor fails to satisfy the provisions requiring the Contractor to complete Work amounting to at least 50 percent of the Contract price with its own organization unless stipulated otherwise in the Contract Documents, the Agency may at its sole discretion elect to cancel the Contract or deduct an amount equal to 10 percent of the value of the Work performed in excess of 50 percent of the Contract Price by other than the Contractor’s own organization. The Board shall be the sole body for determination of a violation of these provisions. In any proceedings under this section, the Contractor, or prime Contractor, shall be entitled to a public hearing before the Board and shall be notified 10 Calendar Days in advance of the time and location of the hearing. The determination of the Board shall be final. 3-3 SUBCONTRACTORS ADD the following: 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 95 1. The Contractor shall incorporate these Specifications in the Contractor’s subcontracts for the work being performed by the Contractor’s Subcontractor. 2. The Contractor shall obtain or require that each Subcontractor obtains insurance policies in accordance with 5-4, “INSURANCE” which shall be kept in full force and effect for the duration of the Contract and in any attached supplemental agreements. 3. In any dispute between the Contractor and the Contractor’s Subcontractors, the Agency shall not be made a party to any judicial or administrative proceeding to resolve the dispute. 4. The Contractor shall ensure that the Contractor’s Subcontractors are appropriately licensed for the duration of the work that is performed under the Subcontracts in accordance with 2- 1, “WORK TO BE DONE.” If a Subcontractor is not properly licensed, the Contractor shall cease payment to the Subcontractor for all work performed when the Subcontractor was not properly licensed. The Contractor shall return to the Agency any payment the Contractor made to a Subcontractor for work performed when the Subcontractor was not licensed. 5. Subcontractors shall be considered employees of the Contractor, and the Contractor shall be responsible for their work. 6. Where the Contract Documents require that a particular product be installed or applied by an applicator approved by the manufacturer, ensure the Subcontractor or Supplier employed for such work is approved by the manufacturer. 7. Before the work of any Subcontractor is started, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a written statement showing the Work to be subcontracted giving the name and business of each Subcontractor and description and value of each portion of the Work to be so subcontracted. This submittal will confirm the Subcontractor’s commitments in the Bid. 3-4 AUTHORITY OF THE ENGINEER ADD the following: 1. The Engineer shall be the single point of contact and shall be included in all communications between Contractor and any Agency representative. 3-5 INSPECTION ADD the following: 1. Contractor shall make available to the Engineer accurate books and accounting records regarding all its activities. Contractor shall contractually require all Subcontractors to this Contract to do the same. The Engineer shall have access to the Contractor’s, and any Subcontractors documents described in this Section 3-5(1) within San Diego County. The Engineer shall have the right to monitor, assess, and evaluate Contractor’s and its Subcontractor’s performance pursuant to this Contract. The Engineer’s monitoring, assessments, and evaluations will include, but shall not be limited to, audits, inspection of premises, reports, contracts, subcontracts and interviews of Contractor’s staff and the staff of all Subcontractors to this Contract. Upon reasonable advance notice, Contractor shall make available to the Engineer for examination, all of its, and all Subcontractors to this Contract, records with respect to all matters covered by this Contract. Contractor shall also permit the Engineer to audit, examine, copy and make excerpts or transcripts from such data and records, and to make audits of all invoices, materials, payrolls, records of personnel, and 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 96 other data relating to all matters covered by this Contract. Any inspection described in this Section 3-5(1) shall occur as often as the Engineer deems necessary and during normal business hours. However, any such inspection shall not unreasonably interfere with Contractor’s ongoing business operations. Contractor and all Subcontractors to this Contract shall maintain such data and records for as long as may be required by applicable laws and regulations. 2. The Agency may utilize consultants to assist the Engineer during construction in observing the Contractor’s performance. The consultant shall be the Agency’s Representative on the Site assisting the Engineer and must not be confused with a building inspector with the Agency or with a Special Inspector. 3. The Agency may utilize a Special Inspector for inspection of specialty work and materials, whose costs the Agency will pay for unless the Contractor fails inspection. If inspections or tests reveal non-compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay for all corrective measures deemed necessary by the Engineer and also pay the cost of the Agency’s subsequent re-inspection and re-testing. 4. Inspections required by codes or ordinances are the Contractor’s responsibility. 5. The Contractor’s quality control testing and inspections are the Contractor’s responsibility. Contractor shall coordinate and schedule all inspections and tests. The Contractor shall give the Engineer notice of tests and inspections made by others. At least 5 Working Days of notice shall be given for offsite inspections. The Contractor shall wait until the Engineer has responded and agreed to Contractor’s schedule before scheduling test or inspections. 6. The Agency shall schedule any inspections and tests as the Agency deems necessary to ensure the Work is accomplished in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents (other than inspections for work performed in accordance with a permit). The Contractor is responsible for the inspection of all Work performed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 7. Contractor shall provide access in accordance with Cal-OSHA Standards as necessary. 8. Contractor shall remove and replace any items of Work performed without the required permit or inspection. For required subsequent inspection, the Contractor shall remove and replace Work at the discretion of Engineer at no additional cost to the Agency. Inspection of the Work does not relieve the Contractor of full compliance with the Contract Documents. 9. Contractor shall not conceal the Work prior to inspection, testing, or approval required by the Contract Documents, the Engineer’s prior written request, or by other agencies. If any item of Work is done prior to obtaining the required approvals when requested by the Engineer, Contractor shall expose the Work for inspection, testing, and/or approval. Upon successful completion of the inspection, testing, or approval, the Contractor shall proceed with the Work. The Contractor shall bear all direct and indirect costs and damages of such uncovering and re-covering and shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or the Contract Time, unless the Contractor has given the Engineer and any other affected agencies written notice of the Contractor’s intention to cover the Work and the Engineer has not acted in response to such notice. 10. When specified, Contractor shall make arrangements for tests, inspections, and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Engineer, or with the 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 97 appropriate public authority. The payment for such tests, inspections, and approvals are included in the Contract Price. 11. Unless specified otherwise, the Contractor shall pay the cost of inspections and tests. If inspections or tests reveal non-compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall bear the cost of corrective measures deemed necessary by the Engineer and the cost of the Agency’s subsequent re-inspection and re-testing. 12. The Contractor shall, at no charge to the Agency, provide copies of all records in the Contractor’s or Subcontractor’s possession pertaining to the Work that the Engineer may request. 13. Contractor agrees to maintain and/or make available, to the Engineer, within San Diego County, accurate books, and accounting records relative to all its activities and to contractually require all Subcontractors to this Contract to do the same. The Engineer shall have the right to monitor, assess, and evaluate Contractor’s and its Subcontractors performance pursuant to this Contract, the monitoring, assessments, and evaluations to include, but not be limited to, audits, inspection of premises, reports, contracts, subcontracts and interviews of Contractor’s staff and the staff of all Subcontractors to this Contract. At any time during normal business hours and as often as the Engineer may deem necessary, upon reasonable advance notice, Contractor shall make available to the Engineer for examination, all of its, and all of its Subcontractors’ records with respect to all matters covered by this Contract and will permit the Engineer to audit, examine, copy and make excerpts or transcripts from such data and records, and to make audits of all invoices, materials, payrolls, records of personnel, and other data relating to all matters covered by this Contract. However, any such activities shall be carried out in a manner so as to not unreasonably interfere with Contractor’s ongoing business operations. Contractor and all Subcontractors to this Contract shall maintain such data and records for as long as may be required by applicable laws and regulations. 3-6 THE CONTRACTOR’S REPRESENTATIVE ADD the following: 1. Both the representative and alternative representative shall be the Contractor’s employees and shall not be assigned to a Subcontractor unless otherwise approved by the Agency in writing. 2. The Contractor’s Project team shall attend scheduled construction meetings as required by the Engineer. If any of Contractor’s staff cannot attend, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer a minimum of 24 hours in advance, prior to the start of the scheduled meeting. If the Contractor does not provide the required notification, the Contractor shall pay for the costs of the Agency’s staff, consultants, or both that attended. The Contractor shall be charged a minimum of 2 hours of the attendee’s time. 3. The payment for the Contractor’s attendance at Project meetings is included in the Contract Price. The Engineer shall deduct costs assessed to the Contractor for not attending the meetings from the monthly progress payment via Change Order. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 98 3-7 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 3-7.1 General. ADD the following: 1.Specifications and Plans are divided into groups by engineering discipline for the Agency’s convenience. These divisions are not for the purpose of apportioning the Work or responsibility for the Work among Subcontractors and Suppliers. 2.The Contractor shall supply any Work that may reasonably be inferred from the Specifications or Plans as being required to produce the intended result whether or not it is specifically called for, at no additional cost to the Agency. 3.If referenced documents have been discontinued or updated by the issuing organization, the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization shall be used or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. 4.Scaled dimensions on Contract Documents are approximate. Before ordering materials or commencing the Work, the Contractor shall measure the Site for proper size and fit and verify dimensions and quantities by taking measurements in the field. The Contractor shall be responsible for their accuracy. 5.The Contractor shall verify any conditions affecting the cost of the Work through a reasonable examination of the Work Site prior to submitting the Bid. 6.Existing improvements visible at the Work Site, for which no specific disposition is made on the Plans, but which interfere with the completion of the Work, shall be removed, and disposed of by the Contractor. 7.The Plans, Specifications, and other Contract Documents shall govern the Work. The Contract Documents are intended to be complementary and cooperative. Anything specified in the Specifications and not shown on the Plans or shown on the Plans and not specified in the Specifications, shall be as though shown on or specified in both. 8.The Plans shall be supplemented by such working drawings and shop drawings as are necessary to adequately control the Work. 9.The Contractor shall ascertain the existence of any conditions affecting the cost of the Work through a reasonable examination of the Work Site prior to submitting the Bid. 10.Existing improvements visible at the Work Site, for which no specific disposition is made on the Plans, but which interfere with the completion of the Work, shall be removed, and disposed of by the Contractor. 11.The Contractor shall, upon discovering any error or omission in the Plans or Specifications, immediately call it to the attention of the Engineer. 3-7.2 Precedence of the Contract Documents. DELETE in its entirety and REPLACE with the following: 1.If there is a conflict between any of the Contract Documents, the document highest in the order of precedence, and most recent in edition, shall control. The order of precedence, from highest to lowest, shall be as follows: 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 99 a.Permits (issued by jurisdictional regulatory agencies including environmental documents). b.Change Orders and supplemental agreements; whichever occurs last. c.Contract Addenda, whichever occurs last. d.The signed written Contract. e.Bid/Proposal. f.Project Plans and Project Manual included in 00 74 00 g.Technical Specifications. h.Standard Drawings. i.Agency Supplemental General Provisions (Section 00 73 00). j.Agency Supplemental Technical Provisions (Section 00 74 00). k.Standard Plans i.City of Carlsbad Standard Drawings. ii.Carlsbad Municipal Water District Standard Drawings. iii.City of Carlsbad modifications to the San Diego Area Regional Standard Drawings. iv.Traffic Signal Design Guidelines and Standards. v.State of California Department of Transportation Standard Plans. vi.California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (CA MUTCD). l.“Greenbook” (Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction). m.Reference Specifications. 2.When additional small business/minority/women-owned/veteran or other special requirements by funding sources are included in the Contract Documents, the funding source’s requirements shall govern. a.With reference to the Drawings, the order of precedence shall be as follows: Figures govern over scaled dimensions. b.Detail Drawings govern over general Drawings. c.Addenda and Change Order Drawings govern over Plans. d.Plans govern over Standard Drawings. 3.When a conflict exists between the ADA requirements of Title 24, and the Agency Supplemental Provisions, the most restrictive requirement shall be followed. ADD: 3-7.3 Red-lines and Record Documents. 3-7.3.1 General. 1.The Contractor shall, at no charge to the Agency, provide copies of all records in the Contractor’s or Subcontractor’s possession pertaining to the Work that the Engineer may request. 2.The Contractor shall keep the Red-lines current with entries checked by the Engineer before the Work is covered. Contractor’s failure to update and deliver Red-lines information monthly to the Engineer for review and approval may result in the withholding of monthly progress payments. 3.The Contractor shall note the source identification, such as RFI numbers and Change Order numbers, as required identifying the source of the change to the Contract Documents. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 100 4. The Contractor shall deliver the Red-lines to the Engineer upon completion of the Construction Work. 5. The Contractor shall legibly annotate a full-size set of Plans daily, in red ink, to record additions, deletions or changes to the Work and changes in location, elevation or character of the Work not otherwise shown or noted in the Contract Documents. This “redline” set of drawings shall be kept on the Job Site, shall be used only as a record set, and shall be delivered to the Engineer within 10 Calendar Days of completion of the Work. Contractor shall immediately give written notice of any conflicts between these documents to the Engineer. 6. As-built information shall represent field measurements, approved Shop Drawings, Working Drawings, samples, product data, and other pertinent data discovered during the performance of the Work. The Contractor shall note the source of the change such as RFI or Change Order numbers, as required. The Contractor shall clearly record additions or changes in the Work and depth of underground facilities by dimensioning from 2, known, fixed points. 7. Payment for Record Drawings and Documents shall be included in the various Bid items and no additional payment will be made therefore. 3-7.3.2 Asset Specific Red-lines. 1. Irrigation System Red-lines: Not Used. 2. Re-vegetation Red-lines: Not Used. 3. Utility Red-lines: Utility Red-lines shall show any changes from the Plan for the following: a. Horizontal and vertical bends b. Changes in pipe material or pressure class c. Isolation valves d. Insulating joints e. Blow off valves by stationing and offsets. f. Air vacuum valves by stationing and offsets. g. Water and recycled water meter boxes replaced. h. Water sampling stations i. Cathodic test stations j. Locations of all sewer laterals and cleanouts. k. Items abandoned in place following dewatering operation. 4. Building Red-lines: Building Red-lines shall show any changes from the Plans for the following: a. Location by dimension and the depth by elevation of underground lines, valves, plugged tees, and capped ends. b. By dimension or scale Plans, wiring, conduits, and pull boxes as installed. c. Information necessary to maintain and service concealed items of Work. d. Dimensional changes to the Drawings. e. Revisions to details shown on the Drawings. f. Depths of foundations below the first floor. g. Locations and depths of underground utilities. h. Revisions to the routing of piping and conduits. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 101 i. Revisions to electrical circuitry. j. Actual equipment locations. k. Duct size and routing. l. Locations of concealed internal utilities. m. Changes made by Change Orders. n. Details not shown on original Plans. 3-7.3.3 Payment. 1. The payment for Red-lines Drawings shall be included in the Contract Price. ADD 3-7.4 Measurement and Dimensions. 1. Scaled dimensions are approximate. Before ordering materials or commencing the Work, the Contractor shall measure the Site for proper size and fit and verify dimensions and quantities by taking measurements in the field. Contractor shall be responsible for their accuracy. 3-8 SUBMITTALS 3-8.2 Working Drawings. ADD the following: 1. Working Drawings shall be submitted electronically to the Agency. DELETE Table 3-8.2 in its entirety and REPLACE with following: Item Section/ Drawing No. Title Subject 1 3-12.5.2 Sewage Bypass and Pumping Plan Sanitary Sewers 2 3-12.8.2 Dewatering Plan Water Pollution Control 3 5-7.2.2 Shoring Plan Safety 4 300-3.2 Cofferdams Structure Excavation & Backfill 5 303-1.6.1 General Falsework 6 303-1.7.1 General Placing Reinforcement 7 303-3.1 General Prestressed Concrete Construction 8 304-1.1.2 Falsework Plans Structural Steel 9 306-8.8 SDW- 154* Valves, Hydrants, and Appurtenances Water Valve Bypass Details for Mainlines 16-Inch and Larger 10 306-8.8.3 Thrust Blocks and Anchor Blocks Unless specified otherwise, design of all size water main thrust blocks and anchor blocks 11 307-1.1 General Jacking Operations 12 307-2.1 General Tunneling Operations 13 308-3 Submittals Microtunneling 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 102 14 601-2.1.2 Engineered Traffic Control Plan (TCP) Temporary Traffic Control for Construction and Maintenance Work Zones 15 1001-3 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) Water Pollution Control 16 1001-4 Water Pollution Control Plan (WPCP) Water Pollution Control * Note: The distance dimensions shown between the bypass pipes and the mainlines are subject to change to field conditions. Items listed in Table 3-8.2, except for items 1, 2 and, 5, shall be prepared by a Civil or Structural Engineer registered by the State of California. Item 15 shall be prepared by a Qualified SWPPP Developer (QSD) in accordance with 1001 3, “Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP).” Item 16 shall be prepared in accordance with 1001-4, “Water Pollution Control Plan (WPCP).” 3-8.3 Shop Drawings. ADD the following: 1. Shop Drawings shall be submitted electronically to the Agency. 2. Additional Shop Drawings may be required by the Special Provisions. DELETE Table 3-8.3 in its entirety and REPLACE with following: TABLE 3-8.3 Item Subsection Title Subject 1 207-2.5 Joints Reinforced Concrete Pipe 2 207-8.4 Joints Vitrified Clay Pipe 3 209-2.2.2 Shop Drawings Steel Pipe and Fittings 4 216-1 General Precast Reinforced Concrete Box 5 218-1 General Precast Vault 6 304-1.1.1 Shop Drawings Structural Steel 7 304-2.1 General Metal Hand Railings 3-8.4 Supporting Information. ADD the following: 1. The Contractor shall submit samples of the materials with cut sheets of the products. The Contractor shall organize cut sheets for review and approval by the Engineer prior to use on the Project and identify deviation from any of the specified material clearly, including cut sheets and samples of both the specified material and basis for the substitution. Included should be the Agency’s Project Name, Project Number, and the Engineer’s name, Contractor Name, and Submittal Number and clearly indicate the specific product to be used. 2. When photos of material are required, they shall be clear in resolution, identify the specific item for review, and shall indicate the name of the item, source, and date taken. The material shown in the photo shall be currently available for use on the Project. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 103 3. For landscaping and irrigation materials, the Contractor shall submit samples and test results to the Engineer within 15 Working Days of the Notice to Proceed. 4. Test sections (“Mock ups”) of materials as required in the Special Provisions shall be accepted by the Engineer before proceeding with the Work. 5. The Contractor shall provide and keep up-to-date a complete “As-Built” record set of blue- line prints, which shall be corrected in red daily and show every change from the original Drawings and Specifications and the exact “As-Built” locations, sizes and kinds of equipment, underground piping, valves, and all other Work not visible at surface grade. Prints for this purpose may be obtained from the Agency at cost. This set of Drawings shall be kept on the job and shall be used only as a Record Set and shall be delivered to the Engineer within 10 Calendar Days of completion of the Work. Payment for performing the Work required by Section 2-5.4 shall be included in the various Bid items and no additional payment will be made therefore. 3-8.6 Manufacturer’s Operation, Maintenance, and Warranty Instructions. To sentence (1), DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following: For each pre-manufactured product covered by a manufacturer’s warranty, Contractor shall submit 1 electronic copy and 3 bound original or legal copies prior to acceptance of the Contract. 3-9 SUBSURFACE DATA DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following: 3-9 TECHNICAL STUDIES AND SUBSURFACE DATA 1. If reports of explorations and tests of Site conditions are referenced in the Contract Documents, Contractor is encouraged to inspect the Site, acquire, and review these reports, and take other necessary steps to thoroughly familiarize oneself with the Site conditions. If a review of the documents and Site inspection indicate an obstruction or utility conflict with the proposed work, immediately notify the Engineer. 2. Subsurface data shall include geotechnical reports, groundwater elevations, soil analyses and characterization, and other information included or referenced in the Special Provisions and shall apply only at the location of the test holes and to the depths indicated. 3. Contractor is encouraged to review subsurface data, examine the Site and assess the Site conditions pertaining to the Work. If a review of the documents and Site inspection indicate an obstruction or utility conflict with the proposed work, immediately notify the Engineer. 4. Soil test reports for test holes which have been drilled are available for review at the office of the Engineer. Additional exploration may be performed at Contractor’s own expense. 5. The indicated groundwater elevation is that which existed on the date specified in the data. It shall be Contractor’s responsibility to determine and allow for the groundwater elevation on the date the Work is performed. A difference in groundwater elevation between what is shown in soil boring logs and what is encountered during construction shall not be considered as a basis for Extra Work in accordance with 2-8, “Extra Work.” 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 104 3-10 SURVEYING 3-10.1 General. ADD the following: 1. The Engineer or Surveyor shall request a right of entry to perform survey services on sewer mains and manholes from City of Carlsbad, wastewater@carlsbadca.gov or call 442-339- 2722, 7 Calendar Days prior to the start of survey services. 2. The Contractor shall hire and pay for the services of a licensed Surveyor (“Surveyor”) to perform all work necessary for establishing control, construction staking, records research and all other surveying work necessary to construct the Work, provide surveying services as required in the Contract and provide surveying, drafting and other professional services required to satisfy the requirements of the Land Surveyors Act. Surveyor shall be resident on the Site during all surveying operations and shall personally supervise and certify the surveying work. 3. All surveying data submittals shall conform to the requirements of Section 3.8, “Submittals.” The Contractor shall submit grade sheets to the Engineer before commencing work in the area affected by the grade sheets. The Contractor shall submit field notes for all required surveying to the Engineer within 10 Calendar Days of performing the survey. All surveying field notes, grade sheets and survey calculations shall be submitted electronically. The field notes, calculations and supporting data shall be clear and complete. Supporting data shall include all maps, affidavits, plats, field notes from earlier surveys and all other evidence used by the Surveyor to determine the location of the monuments set. The field notes and calculations will be labeled with name of the Surveyor, the party chief, the field crewmembers and the author of the field notes or calculations. They shall be annotated with the date of observation or calculation, be numbered with consecutive page numbers and shall be readable without resort to any electronic aid, computer program or documentation for any computer program. The field notes shall be prepared in conformance with the Caltrans “Surveys Manual.” The Contractor shall have a Record of Survey prepared by the Surveyor and file it in conformance with Business and Professions Code Sections 8700-8805 when the Surveyor performs any surveying that such map is required under Business and Professions Code Section 8762 and whenever the Surveyor shall establish, set or construct any permanent survey monument. SDRS drawing M-10 A, B, C type monuments, bolts, spikes, leaded tacks and nails (when set in concrete), iron pipes, reinforcing steel and all monuments and marks that are at, or accessory to, property corners and street centerlines are permanent survey monuments. The Record of Survey shall show all monuments set, control monuments used, the basis of bearings and all other data needed to determine the procedure of survey and the degree of accuracy attained by the field surveying including the unadjusted ratio of closure. The unadjusted ratio of closure shall not exceed 1 part in 40,000. The Record of Survey shall show the location and justification of location of all permanent monuments set and their relation to the street right-of-way. Record(s) of Survey(s) shall be submitted for the Engineer’s review and approval before submittal to the County Surveyor and before submittal to the County Recorder. 4. Payment for Work performed to satisfy the requirements shall be included in the actual Bid items requiring the survey work and no additional payment will be made. Extension of unit 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 105 prices for Extra Work shall include full compensation for attendant survey work and no additional payment will be made. Payment for the replacement of disturbed monuments and the filing of Records of Survey and/or corner records, including filing fees, shall be incidental to the Work necessitating the disturbance of the monuments and no additional payment will be made. 3-12 CONTRACT INFORMATION SIGNS ADD the following: Signs shall not be posted until approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall complete and submit a Review for Sign Permit (form P-11), available at: https://www.carlsbadca.gov/services/depts/planning/applications.asp 3-12 WORK SITE MAINTENANCE 3-12.1 General. ADD the following: 1. Maintain Site improvements including any temporary facilities, equipment, or other materials. Remove graffiti encountered on the Site within 24 hours. See also SECTION 400 - PROTECTION AND RESTORATION. 2. As a condition of Final Payment, the Contractor shall submit a signed and notarized affidavit stating that all brush, trash, debris, and surplus materials resulting from this Project have been disposed of in a legal manner. The cost of disposal is the Contractor’s responsibility. 3. The Contractor shall provide and maintain enclosed toilets for the use of their employees. Toilets must be kept in a neat and sanitary condition and ensure that they comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, and regulations pertaining to public health and sanitation of dwellings and camps. The cost of such is the Contractor’s responsibility. 4. If required in the Special Provisions, the Contractor shall provide and maintain enclosed toilets for the use of the Agency’s and Contractor’s officers, employees, or agents. Toilets must be kept in a neat and sanitary condition and ensure that they comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, and regulations pertaining to public health and sanitation of dwellings and camps. The cost of such is the Contractor’s responsibility. 5. The Contractor shall maintain drainage within and through the work areas. Earth dams will not be permitted in paved areas. Temporary dams of sandbags, asphaltic concrete, or other acceptable material will be permitted, when necessary, by the SWPPP and/ or BMP plan. Such dams shall be removed from the Site as soon as their use is no longer necessary. 6. Work Site maintenance shall be conducted on non-workdays when increased levels of maintenance are deemed necessary, in the opinion of the Engineer, to preserve the health safety or welfare of the public and or to comply with applicable regulations. 7. Disposal of all rubbish and surplus materials is incidental to Work Site maintenance. Disposal shall be made off the Site and shall be in accordance with: a. Local codes and ordinances that govern locations and methods of disposal. b. All applicable safety laws. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 106 c. Requirements of Subpart H, Section 1926.252 of the OSHA Safety and Health Standards for Construction. 8. Work Site maintenance is considered incidental to the items of work that they are associated with and no additional payment will be made. 9. Cleanup and Dust Control. Throughout all phases of construction, including suspension of the Work, and until the final acceptance, the Contractor shall keep the Site clean and free from rubbish and debris. The Contractor shall also abate dust nuisance by cleaning, sweeping, and sprinkling with water, or other means as necessary. The use of water resulting in mud on public streets will not be permitted as a substitute for sweeping or other methods. 3-12.2 Air Pollution Control. ADD the following: 1. Contractor shall carry out effective measures whenever and as often as necessary to prevent Contractor’s operation from producing dust in amounts damaging to property, cultivated vegetation, domestic animals, or causing a nuisance to persons living or occupying buildings in the vicinity. Contractor shall be responsible for any damage resulting from any dust originating from Contractor’s operations. The dust abatement measures shall be continued until Contractor is relieved of further responsibility by the Engineer. 2. Contractor shall adhere to Air Pollution Control District County of San Diego regulations for equipment used on the Job Site. 3-12.3 Noise Control. ADD the following: 1. All internal combustion engines used in the Work shall be equipped with mufflers in good repair and are subject to the City Noise Control Ordinance, Carlsbad Municipal Code Chapter 8.48. 3-12.4 Storage of Equipment and Materials. 3-12.4.1 General. ADD the following: 1. Equipment and material storage shall be confined to areas approved by the Engineer. Disposal of all rubbish and surplus materials shall be at the Contractor’s expense. 2. The Contractor shall order, purchase, transport, coordinate delivery, accept delivery, confirm the quantity and quality received, prepare storage area(s), store, handle, protect, move, relocate, remove and dispose excess of all materials used to accomplish the Work. 3. Materials shall be delivered to the Work Site only during Working Hours, and shall be accompanied by bills of lading that shall clearly state for each delivery: the name of the Contractor as consignee, the Project name and number, address of delivery and name of consignor and a description of the material(s) shipped. 4. Prior to storage of any materials which have been shipped to or by the Contractor to any location within the City’s boundaries the Contractor shall provide the Engineer a copy of lease agreements for each property where such materials are stored. The lease agreement shall 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 107 clearly state the term of the lease, the description of materials allowed to be stored and shall provide for the removal of the materials and restoration of the storage site within the time allowed for the Work. 5. All such storage shall conform to all laws and ordinances that may pertain to the materials stored and to preparation of the storage site and the location of the site on which the materials are stored. Storage of hazardous wastes, construction equipment material, and parking and fueling of equipment shall not occur in biologically sensitive areas. 6. Loss, damage or deterioration of all stored materials shall be the Contractor’s responsibility. Conformance to the requirements of this section, both within and outside the limits of work is a part of the Work. The Engineer shall have the right to verify the suitability of materials and their proper storage at any time during the Work. 7. The Contractor shall furnish and maintain in good condition all equipment and facilities as required for the proper execution and inspection of the Work. Such equipment and facilities shall meet all requirements of applicable ordinances and laws. 8. Restore the storage area to an equal or better condition as deemed necessary by the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Agency. 10. When required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish and operate a self-loading motor sweeper with spray nozzles at least once each Working Day for the purpose of keeping paved areas acceptably clean wherever construction, including restoration, is incomplete. 11. Materials and equipment shall be removed from the Site as soon as they are no longer necessary. Before the final inspection, the Site shall be cleared of equipment, unused materials, and rubbish so as to present a satisfactory clean and neat appearance. All cleanup costs shall be included in the Contractor’s Bid. 12. Care shall be taken to prevent spillage on haul routes. Any such spillage shall be removed immediately, and the area cleaned. 13. Excess excavation material from catch basins or similar structures shall be removed from the Site immediately. Sufficient material may remain for use as backfill if permitted by the Specifications. Forms and form lumber shall be removed from the Site as soon as practicable after stripping. 14. Failure of the Contractor to comply with the Engineer’s cleanup orders may result in an order to suspend Work until the condition is corrected. No additional compensation will be allowed because of such suspension. 15. Cleanup and dust control required in the Contract shall also be executed on weekends and other non-Working Days when needed to preserve the health safety or welfare of the public. The Contractor shall conduct effective cleanup and dust control throughout the duration of the Contract. The Engineer may require increased levels of cleanup and dust control that, in his/her sole discretion, are necessary to preserve the health, safety and welfare of the public. Cleanup and dust control shall be considered incidental to the items of Work that they are associated with and no additional payment will be made for them. 16. Vermin Control. At the time of acceptance, structures entirely constructed under the Contract shall be free of rodents, insects, vermin, and pests. Necessary extermination work shall be arranged and paid for by the Contractor as part of the Work within the Contract time and shall be performed by a licensed exterminator in accordance with requirements of governing 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 108 authorities. The Contractor shall be liable for injury to persons or property and responsible for the elimination of offensive odors resulting from extermination operations. 17. Temporary Light, Power, and Water. The Contractor shall furnish, install, maintain, and remove all temporary light, power, and water at its own expense. These include piping, wiring, lamps, and other equipment necessary for the Work. The Contractor shall not draw water from any fire hydrant (except to extinguish a fire), without obtaining permission from the water agency concerned. The Contractor shall obtain a construction meter for water used for the construction, plant establishment, maintenance, cleanup, testing and all other work requiring water related to this Contract. The Contractor shall contact the appropriate water agency for requirements. The Contractor shall pay all costs of temporary light, power and water including hookup, service, meter and any, and all, other charges, deposits and/or fees for them. These costs shall be considered incidental to the items of Work that they are associated with and no additional payment will be made for them. 3-12.4.2 Storage in Public Streets. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following: 1. Construction materials shall not be stored in streets, roads, or highways for more than 5 Calendar Days after unloading. All materials not installed or used in construction within 5 Calendar Days after unloading shall be stored at a location approved by the Engineer. 2. Construction equipment shall not be stored at the Work Site before its actual use nor for more than 5 Calendar Days after it is no longer needed. Time necessary for repair or assembly of equipment may be authorized by the Engineer. 3. Excavated material, except that which is to be used as backfill in the adjacent trench, shall not be stored in public streets unless otherwise permitted. Immediately after placing backfill, all excess material shall be removed. 4. The Contractor shall not store equipment for traffic control in right of way. ADD 3-12.4.3 Storage and Staging Areas. 1. Storage and staging areas are the Contractor’s responsibility. If the Plans designate a staging location within the Project or in close proximity, the Contractor may utilize such area for their use. The storage and staging areas shall be as close as possible to the Site. Contractor is responsible for obtaining any permits, leases, or any other items necessary to obtain staging areas. 2. Storage of hazardous wastes, construction equipment material, and parking and fueling of equipment shall not be allowed in the MHPA or other biologically sensitive areas. Ensure the fueling of vehicles occurs only within designated staging areas using appropriate catch basins and devices. 3. Return the storage and staging area and the adjacent area to an equal or better condition as deemed necessary by the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Agency. 4. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer a copy of the lease agreement for any property to be used for the storage of materials or equipment prior to delivery or storage of any materials or equipment. Each lease agreement shall clearly state the term of the lease and a description of the materials or equipment allowed to be stored and shall provide for the removal of the 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 109 materials or equipment and restoration of the storage site within the time allowed for the Work. 5. Construction equipment shall not be stored at the Work Site before its actual use on the Work nor for more than 5 Calendar Days after it is no longer needed. Time necessary for repair or assembly of equipment may be authorized by the Engineer. 3-13 COMPLETION, ACCEPTANCE, AND WARRANTY 3-13.1 Completion. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following: 1. The Contractor shall comply with the following prior to requesting a Pre-Final inspection of the Work and filing of a written assertion that the Work has been completed: a. Provide completed and signed redline drawings and record documents including installation, maintenance and operation instructions, manuals and/or tools for installed equipment. b. Provide and properly label all keys for existing facilities or new permanent work. c. Provide all items specified to be supplied as extra stock and spare parts. Wrap, seal, or place in a container all items as necessary to allow for storage by the Agency for future use. Verify the specified quantities. d. Provide all final Special Inspection reports and certifications required by equipment manufacturers to demonstrate compliance with applicable codes and standards. e. Obtain any required certifications from the Engineer of Record for permanent BMPs. f. Comply with all requirements of permits issued by jurisdictional agencies. g. Remove temporary facilities from the Site. h. Thoroughly clean the Site and remove all mark-outs and construction staking. 2. The Agency Inspector will schedule the Pre-Final inspection within 5 Working Days of receipt of the Contractor’s request. The Inspector will generate a list of deficiencies (Punchlist) within 5 Working Days after the Pre-Final inspection. 3. The Contractor shall have 30 Working Days to correct the deficiencies and provide a written response to each Punchlist item. The Inspector will review the corrective work within 5 Working Days of receipt of the Contractor’s written response to each Punchlist item. Any outstanding deficiencies will be considered incomplete Work and the Punchlist will be returned to Contractor. Full payment will not be made for any Bid item with outstanding deficiencies and a Final Inspection will not be scheduled until all deficiencies are completed to the satisfaction of the Inspector. 4. The Contractor shall submit a request for Final Inspection which shall include a written assertion that the Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and a written response describing the corrective Work completed for all punch list items identified in the Pre-Final inspection(s). The request for Final Inspection will not be considered without the Contractor’s written response to the punch list items. The Inspector will schedule the Final Inspection within 10 Working Days of receipt of the Contractor’s request and invitees will include the Construction Manager, Engineer and representatives from agencies or utility companies having jurisdiction over the Work. The Contractor’s attendance is mandatory. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 110 5. If, in the Engineer’s judgment, the Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Engineer will set forth in writing the date the Work was completed. This will be the date when the Contractor is relieved from responsibility to protect and maintain the Work, and to which liquidated damages will be computed. ADD 3-13.1.1 Requirements Before Requesting a Walk-through. 1. The following items are required prior to requesting a Walk-through: a. Remove temporary facilities from the Site. b. Thoroughly cleaning the Site and removing all mark outs and construction staking. c. Provide completed and signed Red-lines in accordance with Contract Document requirements. d. Provide all material and equipment maintenance and operation instructions and/or manuals. e. Provide all tools which are a permanent part of the equipment installed in the Project. f. Provide and properly identify all keys for construction and all keys for permanent work. g. Provide all final Special Inspection reports required by the applicable building code. h. Provide all items specified to be supplied as extra stock. Wrap, seal, or place in a container all items as necessary to allow for storage by the Agency for future use. Verify the specified quantities. i. Ensure that all specified equal opportunity (if applicable) and certified wage rate documentations covering the Contract Time have been submitted. j. Provide the spare parts for the proposed irrigation system as specified in the Special Provisions. 2. Contractor shall notify the Engineer to arrange a final inspection of permanent BMPs installed and shall obtain the completed, signed, and stamped DS-563 Form 30 Calendar Days prior to the issuance of the Notice of Completion. ADD the following: 3-13.1.2 Walk-through and Punchlist Procedure. 1. When Contractor considers that the Work and Services are complete, notify the Engineer in writing that the Project is complete and request that the Contractor and the Engineer perform a Walk-through for the generation of a Punchlist. Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 7 Working Days in advance of the Walk-through. 2. The Engineer will first determine if the Project is ready for a Walk-through by verifying whether the Contractor have completed all items as required by 3-13.1.1, “Requirements Before Requesting a Walk-through.” 3. If the Work includes sewer and storm drain installations, the inspection shall include televising in accordance with the requirements in the Contract Documents. 4. The Engineer shall facilitate the Walk-through. 5. Contractor shall make Plans, specifications, and technical data, such as submittals and equipment manuals, available at the Site for the Walk-through attendees. 6. The Engineer will provide the Contractor with the Punchlist within 15 Working Days after the date of the Walk-through and submit it to the Contractor. The Agency shall not provide a preliminary Punchlist. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 111 7. If the Engineer finds that the Project is not substantially complete as defined in the Contract, the Engineer will terminate the Walk-through and notify the Contractor in writing. 8. If, at any time during the Engineer’s evaluation of the corrective Work required by the Punchlist, the Engineer discovers that additional corrective Work is required, the Engineer may include that corrective Work in the Punchlist. Contractor shall remain solely responsible for the Project Site until the Project is completely operational, all Punchlist items have been corrected, and all operation and maintenance manuals have been accepted by the Agency. 9. The Engineer shall meet with the Contractor until all Punchlist items are corrected. If Contractor takes longer than 30 Working Days to complete the corrective Work, the Project shall be subject to re-evaluation. 10. Upon acceptance of the Work, Contractor shall assemble and deliver to the Engineer all records, documents, warranties, material certifications, bonds, guarantees, maintenance and service agreements, and maintenance and operating manuals. Written warranties, except manufacturer’s standard printed warranties, shall be on a letterhead addressed to the Contractor. Warranties shall be submitted in the format described in this section, modified as approved by the Agency, to suit the conditions pertaining to the warranty. 3-13.2 Acceptance DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following: 1. Acceptance of the Work will occur after all the requirements of the Contract Documents have been fulfilled. If, in the Engineer’s judgment, the Contractor has fully performed the Contract, the Engineer will recommend to the City Manager for the City of Carlsbad or Executive Manager for the Carlsbad Municipal Water District that the Contractor’s performance of the Contract be accepted. Upon such certification by the Engineer, the City Manager or Executive Manager may accept the Work. Upon the acceptance of the Work by the City Manager or Executive Manager, a “Notice of Completion” will be filed in the office of the San Diego County Recorder. The date of recordation shall be the date of acceptance of the Work. 2. Once the “Notice of Completion” has been recorded, the Engineer will release the retention. 3-13.3 Warranty. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following: 1. Contractor shall warranty and repair all defective materials and workmanship for a period of 1 year. This warranty period shall start on the date the Work was recorded by the “Notice of Completion” unless the Agency has beneficial use of the Project (excluding water, sewer, and storm drain projects). In addition, Contractor shall warranty the Work against all latent and patent defects for a period of 10 years. 2. The warranty period for specific items covered under manufacturers’ or suppliers’ warranties shall commence on the date they are placed into service at the direction of or as approved by the Engineer in writing. 3. All warranties, express or implied, from Subcontractors, manufacturers, or suppliers, of any tier, for the materials furnished and work performed shall be assigned, in writing, to the 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 112 Agency, and shall be delivered to the Engineer prior to the acceptance of the Contractor’s performance of the Contract. 4. Replace or repair defective materials and workmanship in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer after notice to do so from the Engineer and within the time specified in the notice. If Contractor fails to make such replacements or repairs within the time specified in the notice, the Agency may perform the replacement or repairs at Contractor’s expense. If Contractor fails to reimburse the Agency for the actual costs, Contractor’s Surety shall be liable for the cost. 5. The warranty period shall be extended with respect to portions of the Work corrected under warranty. Items that shall be warrantied free from defective workmanship and materials for a period longer than 1 year are as follows: Specified Item Minimum Warranty Period Detectable Warning Tile Construction 3 Years of Manufacturer’s Warranty All Work Under SECTION 500 – PIPELINE REHABILITATION 3 Years Fiber Optic Interconnect Cables 2 Years Luminaires1 10 Years of Manufacturer’s Warranty LED Signal Modules 3 Years of Manufacturer’s Warranty 1 Provide documentation verifying that the induction luminaire models being offered for the Project are covered by the 10-year warranty. 6. Contractor shall provide the Agency a copy of the manufacturer’s warranty for private sewer pumps, including the alarm panel and all other accessories. a. Contractor shall involve the manufacturer in the installation and startup as needed to secure any extended warranty required. b. This section is not intended to limit any manufacturer’s warranty which provides the Agency with greater warranty rights than set forth in this section or the Contract Documents. c. The warranty shall include all components. The form of the warranty shall be approved by the Engineer in accordance with 3-13.3.2, “Warranty Format Requirements.” 7. If, during the warranty period, any item of the Work is found to be Defective Work, Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Agency to do so. The warranty period shall be extended with respect to portions of the Work corrected as part of the warranty requirements. ADD the following: 3-13.3.1 Defective Work. 1. If the Engineer finds any part of the Work, to be defective or not in compliance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct the Defective Work in accordance with the Engineer’s written instructions and within the specified time limits. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 113 2. The Engineer may order Contractor to stop all or part of the Project if, upon notice, Contractor fails to immediately correct the Defective Work in conformance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor bears all direct and indirect costs and damages that result from the Agency’s Stop Work notice. 3. The Engineer may determine in its sole discretion to accept Defective Work instead of having the Contractor correct the Defective Work. However, the Contractor will still be financially responsible for the Defective Work. The Engineer shall issue a deductive Change Order and will incorporate the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents for the Defective Work, the diminished value to the Project, or for the cost to repair the Defective Work. 4. If the Contractor fails to correct Defective Work within the specified time limits, the Engineer may correct the Contractor’s Defective Work. The Agency has the right to correct any Defective Work without notice in the event of an emergency. Contractor shall bear all direct and indirect costs of the Defective Work that the Agency corrects. 5. When undertaking remedial action under this section, the Agency may exclude Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend Contractor’s Work and or services, and incorporate into the Project all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which the Agency has paid but Contractor has stored elsewhere. 6. For Building Projects which require a certificate of occupancy, not including sewer and water facilities, if the Contractor fails to correct the Defective Work listed on the Agency’s Punchlist within 30 Working Days in accordance with 6-1.1, “Construction Schedule,” the Contractor shall reimburse the Agency for all costs to provide inspection services required to monitor the Contractor’s Work beyond the 30 Working Days. The Agency shall bill the Contractor for the additional inspection at the Agency’s established rates. 7. If the Contractor completes the Project or portions of the Project prior to NOC, the Contractor shall preserve equipment by developing and implementing a preventive maintenance program in compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations. ADD the following: 3-13.3.2 Warranty Format Requirements. 1. Written warranties, except manufacturer’s standard printed warranties, shall be on the Contractor’s and Contractor’s agents’, material suppliers’, installers’, or manufacturers’ own letterhead, addressed to and for the Agency’s benefit. Submit warranties in the format described in this section, modified as approved by Engineer to suit the conditions pertaining to the warranty. 2. The Contractor shall obtain warranties, executed in triplicate by responsible Subcontractors and Suppliers, within 10 Working Days after completion of the applicable item of Work. Except for items put into use with the Engineer’s permission with date mutually agreed upon in writing, ensure that the beginning time of the warranty is the Project completion date. 3. The Contractor shall verify that the documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. 4. The Contractor shall verify that warranties are signed by both the Contractor and the appropriate party. 5. The Contractor shall provide warranties to the Engineer with a neatly typed table of contents, identifying each warranty with the number and title of the applicable specification section requiring the warranty and the name of the product or work item. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 114 6. The Contractor shall separate each warranty with index tab sheets keyed to the table of contents listing. Provide complete information using separate typed sheets as necessary. The information shall include a list of Subcontractors and Suppliers with the name, address, and telephone number of the responsible principals. 3-13.3.3 Long-Term Warranty Contract (LTWC). 1. If specified in the Special Provisions and when a LTWC is included in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall execute and submit the supplemental agreement for the extended Project warranty (the LTWC covering the workmanship and materials). 2. The first 3 years of warranty protection after installation shall be secured by the faithful performance and payment bonds in accordance with 1-7.2, “Contract Bonds.” 3. At the conclusion of the initial 3-year bonded warranty period, an “n”-year subsequent manufacturer’s warranty for labor and materials shall commence and run concurrently with the LTWC, where “n” is the number of additional years beyond the initial 3 years as specified in the Special Provisions. Alternatively, and with respect to the 3-year bonded warranty, the Contractor may submit a 2-year bond followed by 1-year bond. If the alternate option is selected, the 1-year bond shall be submitted to the Agency at least 90 Calendar Days before the expiration of the original 2-year bond. Contractor shall clearly inform the Contract Specialist of the option selected. The protection provided shall not be for less than 3 + “n” years continuously. 4. The manufacturer’s warranty for parts and labor shall secure performance of the LTWC by the Contractor. Additional security in the form of bonds for both the LTWC and the manufacturer’s extended “n”-year warranty (in years 4 and on following Acceptance) for labor and materials may, but is not required to be, provided per the compensation provisions of the LTWC. 5. The manufacturer warranty shall extend to performance of the LTWC by the Contractor, including without limitation the performance of periodic inspections, preparation of periodic reports, and performance of repairs or replacements including parts and labor. If the manufacturer warranty does not expressly extend to the LTWC or is qualified in any way to exclude warranty of the performance of the LTWC by the Contractor, the surety bond shall be provided for the LTWC in accordance with 1-7.2, “Contract Bonds.” 6. If the Contractor is unable to obtain a bond which extends the “n”-year term of the LTWC, to obtain a manufacturer warranty or both which clearly and unambiguously extends to secure performance of the LTWC by the Contractor for the “n”- year term, the Agency shall accept either form of security provided that at least 1 of these forms is provided before award. 7. Provision of the manufacturer’s warranty, bonds, or both as specified is a pre-condition to award of the Contract. 8. Refer to the LTWC for additional information. The provisions of 3-3, “SUBCONTRACTORS” shall not apply to LTWC. ADD 3-14 PARTNERING 1. Contractor may request the formation of a formal partnering relationship (Partnering) by submitting a request in writing to the Engineer after approval of the Contract. If Contractor’s request for Partnering is approved by the Engineer, scheduling of a Partnering workshop, 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 115 selecting the Partnering facilitator and workshop, selecting the Partnering facilitator and workshop site, and other administrative details shall be as agreed to by both Parties. 2. The establishment of a Partnering shall not change or modify the terms and conditions of the Contract and shall not relieve either party of the legal requirements of the Contract. 3. The goals of Partnering include the following: a. The Engineer and Contractor’s representatives, including Contractor’s Subcontractors, actively working together as partners. b. Avoidance of destructive confrontation and litigation among the parties. c. Mutual understanding on how the Work is to be conducted. d. Establishment of mutual key results to facilitate Project success. e. Establishment of an atmosphere of teamwork, trust, and open communication. 3-14.1 Payment. 1. The payment for providing a facilitator and a workshop site shall be borne equally by the Agency and Contractor. Contractor shall pay in advance all compensation for the costs of the facilitator and for the costs of obtaining the workshop site. 2. Unless a Bid item has been provided for “Partnering,” the Agency’s share of such costs shall be reimbursed to Contractor as Extra Work. Markups shall not be added. Other costs associated with the Partnering relationship shall be borne separately by the party incurring the costs. ADD 3-15 PUBLIC CONVENIENCE 1. The Contractor shall provide and maintain safe and adequate pedestrian and vehicular access to fire hydrants; hospitals; police and fire stations; commercial and industrial establishments including churches, schools and parking lots; service stations; public transportation; pedestrian crossing; motels and establishments of similar nature. Access shall be continuous and unobstructed unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 2. The Contractor shall provide access for emergency vehicles and mail delivery and trash collection services. The trash hauling schedule can be obtained by contacting Republic Services at Customer Support | Republic Services. 3. During paving operations, the Contractor shall provide paved parking within 800 feet of the affected residences or businesses unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 4. The Contractor shall provide notification 72 hours prior to the start of construction in the public right-of-way that affects vehicular traffic, parking, or pedestrian routes. For a full street closure, all residences and/or businesses on the affected street or alley shall be notified. For partial street closures or for curb, sidewalk or driveway repairs, the residences and/or businesses directly affected by the Work shall be notified. The notice shall: a. Be written and hand delivered. b. State the date and time the Work will begin and its anticipated duration. c. Provide a brief description of the Work and simple instructions to the home or business owner on actions to facilitate the construction. d. List 2 telephone numbers to obtain additional information. One number shall be the Contractor’s permanent office or field office and the other number shall be a 24-hour 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 116 number answered by someone who is knowledgeable about the Project. An answering machine shall not be connected to either number. e. For residences, be prepared on 65-lb. brightly colored card stock or equivalent durability with contrasting, 12-point font or larger printing; pre-cut in a manner for hanging on a doorknob; and minimum size of 3-1/2 inches wide by 8-1/2 inches long (refer to the appendices for an example). f. Be approved by the Engineer prior to distribution. 5. The Contractor shall post “No Parking” signs 72 hours in advance of the Work. The signs shall state the date and time of parking restriction for a duration not to exceed the time necessary to complete the Work at that location. If the Work is delayed or rescheduled, the signs shall be removed and re-posted 72 hours in advance of the rescheduled Work. 6. Payment for public convenience shall be considered as included in the Contract Price for each item in the Bid and no additional payment will be made. ADD 3-16 SITE ACTIVITIES BY THE AGENCY OR SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 3-16.1 The Agency’s Right to Award Separate Contracts. 1. The Agency reserves the right to perform work or operations outside the Scope of Work of the Contract related to the Project with Agency Forces, Separate Contractors, or both. If work to be performed by another party was not noted in the Contract, the Agency shall give written notice to Contractor 10 Working Days prior to the start of any Work. If Contractor determines that the work being performed by the Agency or others may interfere with or cause damage to Work being performed by Contractor, notify the Engineer in writing within 3 Working Days of the Engineer’s notice. 3-16.2 Integration of the Work with Separate Contractors. 1. When specified in the Contract Documents, prepare a plan to integrate the work performed by Separate Contractors, Agency Forces, or both with the performance of the Work and submit the plan to the Engineer for approval. The plan shall be fair and reasonable for Contractor and the Separate Contractors. Work with Separate Contractors to reach an agreement for the prepared plan. Arrange the performance of the work so that the Work and the work of the Separate Contractors are, to the extent applicable, properly integrated and jointed in a manner that avoids any damage to the Work or to the work of the Separate Contractors. 3-16.3 Coordination. 1. Coordinate Contractor’s activities and the Schedule with the activities and schedules of the Separate Contractors and make any revisions to the Schedule deemed necessary to avoid any disruption to the Work or to the work of the Separate Contractors. 3-16.4 Use of Site. 1. Provide the Agency and the Separate Contractors reasonable opportunities for the storage of materials and equipment and performance of their work. Connect and coordinate work and operations with the work and operations of the Agency and the Separate Contractors as required by the Contract Documents. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 117 2. Coordinate traffic control with the Separate Contractors for other projects and minimize the impact to the community. Prior to the start of construction, submit Contractor’s plan for coordination. 3-16.5 Deficiency in Work of Separate Contractors. 1. If part of Contractor’s Work depends on proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Agency or a Separate Contractor, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Separate Contractor and the Engineer any apparent discrepancies or defects in construction that would render it unsuitable for proper execution and results. Use good faith efforts to resolve any such discrepancies or defects or any related disagreements. Contractor’s failure to report constitutes Contractor’s acceptance of the Work of Separate Contractors as fit, proper, and coordinated with the Work. 3-16.6 Payment. 1. Payment for reporting deficiencies, coordinating, and resolving discrepancies shall be included in the Contract Price. SECTION 4 – CONTROL OF MATERIALS 4-1 PROTECTION ADD the following: 1. The Contractor shall repair or replace any equipment and materials in the event of vandalism, damage, or theft at no additional cost to the Agency. 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of public and private property adjacent to the Work and shall exercise due caution to avoid damage to such property. 3. All costs to the Contractor for protecting, removing, and restoring existing improvements shall be included in the Bid. 4. The Agency and affected utility companies have, by a search of known records, endeavored to locate and indicate on the Plans, all utilities which exist within the limits of the Work. However, the accuracy and/or completeness of the nature, size and/or location of utilities indicated on the Plans is not guaranteed. 5. The Contractor shall determine the location and depth of all utilities, including service connections, which have been marked by the respective owners and which may affect or be affected by its operations. If no pay item is provided in the Contract for this Work, full compensation for such Work shall be considered as included in the prices Bid for other items of Work. 6. The Contractor shall not interrupt the service function or disturb the support of any utility without authority from the owner or order from the Agency. All valves, switches, vaults, and meters shall be maintained readily accessible for emergency shutoff. 7. Where protection is required to ensure support of utilities located as shown on the Plans or in accordance with Section 5-1, the Contractor shall, unless otherwise provided, furnish, and place the necessary protection at its expense. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 118 8. Upon learning of the existence and location of any utility omitted from or shown incorrectly on the Plans, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer in writing. When authorized by the Engineer, support or protection of the utility will be paid for. 9. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer and the utility owner if any utility is disturbed or damaged. The Contractor shall bear the costs of repair or replacement of any utility damaged if located. 10. When placing concrete around or contiguous to any non-metallic utility installation, the Contractor shall at its expense: a. Furnish and install a 2-inch cushion of expansion joint material or other similar resilient material; or b. Provide a sleeve or other opening which will result in a 2-inch minimum-clear annular space between the concrete and the utility; or c. Provide other acceptable means to prevent embedment in or bonding to the concrete. 11. Where concrete is used for backfill or for structures which would result in embedment, or partial embedment, of a metallic utility installation; or where the coating, bedding or other cathodic protection system is exposed or damaged by the Contractor’s operations, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer and arrange to secure the advice of the affected utility owner regarding the procedures required to maintain or restore the integrity of the system. 12. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall remove all interfering portions of utilities shown on the Plans or indicated in the Bid documents as “abandoned” or “to be abandoned in place.” Before starting removal operations, the Contractor shall ascertain from the Agency whether the abandonment is complete, and the costs involved in the removal and disposal shall be included in the Bid for the items of Work necessitating such removals. 13. When feasible, the owner is responsible for utilities within the area affected by the Work will complete their necessary installations, relocations, repairs, or replacements before commencement of Work by the Contractor. When the Plans or Specifications indicate that a utility installation is to be relocated, altered, or constructed by others, the Agency will conduct all negotiations with the owners and work will be done at no cost to the Contractor, except for manhole frame and cover sets to be brought to grade as provided in the Contract Documents. Utilities which are relocated to avoid interference shall be protected in their position and the cost of such protection shall be included in the Bid for the items of Work necessitating such relocation. 14. After award of the Contract, portions of utilities which are found to interfere with the Work will be relocated, altered, or reconstructed by the owners, or the Engineer may order changes in the Work to avoid interference. Such changes will be paid. 15. When the Plans or Specifications provide for the Contractor to alter, relocate, or reconstruct a utility, all costs for such Work shall be included in the Bid for the items of Work necessitating such Work. Temporary or permanent relocation or alteration of utilities requested by the Contractor for its convenience shall be its responsibility and it shall make all arrangements and bear all costs. 16. The utility owner will relocate service connections as necessary within the limits of the Work or within temporary construction or slope easements. When directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall arrange for the relocation of service connections as necessary between the 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 119 meter and property line, or between a meter and the limits of temporary construction or slope easements. The relocation of such service connections will be paid and will include the restoration of all existing improvements which may be affected by the relocation. The Contractor may agree with the owner of any utility to disconnect and reconnect interfering service connections. The Agency will not be involved in any such agreement. 17. Contractor shall coordinate the Work with utility agencies and companies. Prior to the installation of any and all utility structures within the limits of work by any utility agency or company, or its contractor, the Contractor shall place all curb or curb and gutter that is a part of the Work and adjacent to the location where such utility structures are shown on the Plans and are noted as being located, relocated or are otherwise shown as installed by others. In order to minimize delays to the Contractor caused by the failure of other parties to relocate utilities that interfere with the construction, the Contractor, upon the Engineer’s approval, may be permitted to temporarily omit the portion of Work affected by the utility. If such temporary omission is approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall place survey or other physical control markers sufficient to locate the curb or curb and gutter to the satisfaction of the utility agency or company. Such temporary omission shall be for the Contractor’s convenience and no additional compensation will be allowed therefore or for additional work, materials or delay associated with the temporary omission. The portion thus omitted shall be constructed by the Contractor immediately following the relocation of the utility involved unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. 18. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of its Construction Schedule insofar as it affects the protection, removal, or relocation of utilities. The notification shall be included as a part of the Construction Schedule. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of any subsequent changes in the Construction Schedule which will affect the time available for protection, removal, or relocation of utilities. 19. The Contractor will not be entitled to damages or additional payment for delays attributable to utility relocations or alterations if correctly located, noted, and completed. 20. The Contractor may be given an extension of time for unforeseen delays attributable to unreasonably protracted interference by utilities in performing the Work correctly shown on the Plans. 21. The Agency will assume responsibility for the timely removal, relocation, or protection of existing main or trunkline utility facilities within the area affected by the Work if such utilities are not identified in the Contract Documents. The Contractor will not be assessed liquidated damages for any delay caused by failure of Agency to provide for the timely removal, relocation, or protection of such existing facilities. 22. The Contractor will be compensated for damages incurred due to delays for which the Agency is responsible or for delays attributable to interferences, relocations, or alterations not covered by the Contract Documents. These damages for delay will be determined by the Engineer. The Agency shall not be liable for damages which could have been avoided by the judicious handling of forces, equipment, or plant. These avoidable damages will be determined by the Engineer. The Engineer may grant Contractor an extension of time for damages due to delay. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 120 23. When necessary, the Contractor shall so conduct its operations as to permit access to the Work Site and provide time for utility work to be accomplished during the progress of the Work. 4-2 INSPECTION 4-2.1 General ADD the following: 1. All costs of inspection at the source, including salaries and mileage costs, shall be paid by the Contractor. 2. Materials typically accepted by Certificate of Compliance shall not require inspection at the source unless specified in the Contract Documents. For a list of these items or materials, Contractor may refer to the Summary of Work. 3. Location changes to the source of materials requiring inspection without the required 24- hour notification may result in non-compliant material subject to rejection. Contractor shall be responsible for staff charges resulting from last minute changes or cancellations once staff has been deployed. The Engineer shall issue a deductive Field Order for a minimum of 2 hours of staff time to reimburse the Agency for misdirected staff charges. The Contractor shall be notified in writing of the additional staff charges incurred. 4. Steel pipe in sizes larger than 18 inches shall require inspection at the source of production. 5. Vitrified clay and cast-iron pipe in all sizes are acceptable upon submittal of a Certificate of Compliance, subject to sampling and testing by the Agency. 6. Agency staff or a qualified inspection agency approved by the Engineer shall witness all welding, lining, coating, and testing. Contractor shall incur additional inspection costs outlined in 4-2.3, “Inspection of Items Not Locally Produced.” 7. All parts of production (including but not limited to product fabrication, welding, testing, lining, and coating of straight pieces and specials) shall be performed or produced in the United States. 8. Welding and all testing shall be performed by certified welders and testing staff with credentials traceable in the United States. 9. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer free and safe access to any and all parts of Work at any time. Such free and safe access shall include means of safe access and egress, ventilation, lighting, shoring, dewatering and all elements pertaining to the safety of persons as contained in the California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Industrial Relations, Chapter 4, Division of Industrial Safety, Subchapter 4, Construction Safety Orders and such other safety regulations as may apply. Contractor shall furnish Engineer with such information as may be necessary to keep the Engineer fully informed regarding progress and manner of work and character of materials. Inspection or testing of the whole or any portion of the Work or materials incorporated in the Work shall not relieve Contractor from any obligation to fulfill this Contract. 4-2.3 Inspection of Items Not Locally Produced ADD the following: 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 121 1. The Engineer may elect Agency staff or Consultants to perform inspection of an out-of-town manufacturers. The Contractor shall incur additional inspection costs of the Engineer including lodging, meals, and incidental expenses based on Federal Per Diem Rates, along with travel and car rental expenses. If the manufacturing plant operates a double shift, a double shift shall be figured in the inspection costs. a. At the option of the Engineer, full time inspection shall continue for the length of the manufacturing period. If the manufacturing period will exceed 3 consecutive weeks, Contractor shall incur additional inspection expenses of the Engineer’s supervisor for a trip of 2 Working Days to the site per month. b. When the Engineer elects Agency staff or Consultants to perform out-of-town inspections, the wages of staff employed by the Agency shall not be part of the additional inspection expenses paid by Contractor. c. Federal Per Diem Rates can be determined at the location below: https://www.gsa.gov/portal/content/104877 2. Specialty Testing of Foreign Materials. a. Materials that are manufactured, produced, or fabricated outside of the United States shall be delivered to a distribution point in California, unless otherwise specified. Quality Control and related testing shall be performed to all applicable specified US standards. Manufacturer’s testing and staff certification shall be traceable to a United States regulatory agency. Retain the materials for a sufficient period of time to permit inspection, sampling, and testing. The Contractor shall not be entitled to an extension of time for acts or events occurring outside of, at point of entry, or during transport to the United States, unless the extension is acceptable to the Engineer. ADD 4-2.4 Specialty Inspection Paid for by the Contractor 1. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of a qualified inspection agency to perform specialty inspection services as required by the Contract Documents. 2. The payment for the specialty inspection service Work shall be included under the Bid item for “Specialty Inspection Paid For By the Contractor.” 3. When an Allowance Bid item for “Specialty Testing Under the Direction of the Engineer” is provided, Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of a qualified third party independent laboratory to perform the required testing. Contractor shall be reimbursed for the cost of testing under this Bid item. 4. Contractor shall be reimbursed for the cost of specialty inspections when an Allowance Bid item is included in the Bid otherwise the cost is the responsibility of the Contractor if the manufacturer requires a specialty inspection service. 4-3 TESTING ADD the following: 1. Except as specified in these Special Provisions, the Agency will bear the cost of testing of locally produced materials and/or on-site workmanship where the results of such tests meet or exceed the requirements indicated in the Standard Specifications, Technical Specification, and any Supplemental Provisions. The cost of all other tests shall be borne by the Contractor. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 122 2. At the option of the Engineer, the source of supply of each of the materials shall be approved by the Engineer before the delivery is started. All materials proposed for use may be inspected or tested at any time during their preparation and use. If, after incorporating such materials into the Work, it is found that sources of supply that have been approved do not furnish a uniform product, or if the product from any source proves unacceptable at any time, the Contractor shall furnish approved material from other approved sources. If any product proves unacceptable after improper storage, handling or for any other reason it shall be rejected, not incorporated into the Work and shall be removed from the Project Site all at the Contractor’s expense. 3. Compaction tests may be made by the Engineer and all costs for tests that meet or exceed the requirements of the specifications shall be borne by the Agency. The tests may be made at any place along the Work as deemed necessary by the Engineer. The costs of any retests made necessary by noncompliance with the specifications shall be borne by the Contractor. 4-4 TRADE NAMES ADD the following: 1. Whenever materials or equipment are indicated in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular supplier, the naming of the item is intended to establish the type, function, and quality required. 2. Unless stated otherwise, materials or equipment of other suppliers may be accepted if sufficient information is submitted to the Engineer for review to determine whether the material or equipment proposed is equivalent or equal to that named. 3. For reviews prior to Bid: a. The Engineer shall respond to Contractor’s substitution proposal by the last date for issuing an Addendum for the Contract. If the Engineer fails to respond to Contractor’s substitution proposal before the Bid due date, the substitution proposal shall be deemed denied. b. Contractor may bring forward a substitution proposal after Award that was denied based on the Engineer’s failure to respond by submitting a Cost Reduction Proposal in accordance with 2-6.1, “Cost Reduction Proposal.” 4. Include the following information in the request for substitution: a. Whether or not acceptance of the substitute for use in the Work shall require a change in any of the Contract Documents to adopt the design to the proposed substitute. b. Whether or not incorporation or use of the substitute in connection with the Work is subject to the payment of any license fee or royalty. c. All variations of the proposed substitute from the items originally specified shall be identified. d. Available maintenance, repair, and replacement service requirements. The manufacturer shall have a local service agency within 50 miles (80.5 km) of the Site which maintains properly trained personnel and adequate spare parts and is able to respond and complete repairs within 24 hours. e. Certifications from the manufacturer or service provider that the proposed substitute shall perform the intended function adequately under the expected service 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 123 conditions, achieve the results called for by the general design, and be similar and of equal substance to that indicated. 5. There is no guaranteed time frame for the Engineer’s review of the substitution requests. Any lack of action on the Engineer’s side within Contractor’s requested time does not constitute acceptance of the substitution. 6. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, substitute items are determined to be unsatisfactory in performance, appearance, durability, compatibility with existing equipment or systems, availability of repair parts and suitability of application, the Contractor shall remove the substituted item and replace it with the originally specified item at no cost to the Agency. 7. The burden of proof as to the type, function, and quality of any such substitute product, material or equipment shall be upon Contractor. The Engineer may require at Contractor’s expense additional data about the proposed substitute. 8. Acceptance by the Engineer of a substitute item does not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents. If the Engineer takes no exceptions to the proposed substitution, it shall not relieve Contractor from Contractor’s responsibility to the efficiency, sufficiency, quality, and performance of the substitute material or equipment in the same manner and degree as the material and equipment specified by name. 9. The Bid submittal shall be based on the material and equipment specified by name in the Contract. If the proposal is rejected by the Engineer, Contractor shall not be entitled to either an extension in Contract Time, an increase in the Contract Price, or both. 10. As applicable, no Shop Drawing or Working Drawing submittals shall be made for a substitute item nor shall any substitute item be ordered, installed, or utilized without the Engineer’s prior written approval. 11. The Contractor is responsible for the satisfactory performance of substituted items. If, in the sole opinion of the Engineer, the substitution is determined to be unsatisfactory in performance, appearance, durability, compatibility with associated items, availability of repair parts and suitability of application the Contractor shall remove the substituted item and replace it with the originally specified item at no cost to the Agency. 4-5 WEIGHING AND METERING EQUIPMENT REPLACE the first paragraph with the following: All scales and metering equipment used for proportioning materials shall be inspected for accuracy and certified within the past 12 months by the State of California Bureau of Weights and Measures, by the County Director or Sealer of Weights and Measures, or by a scale mechanic registered with or licensed by the County. SECTION 5 – LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES 5-1 LAWS AND REGULATIONS ADD the following: 1. The Contractor shall strictly adhere to the provisions of the Labor Code regarding minimum wages; the 8-hour day and 40-hour week; overtime; Saturday, Sunday, and holiday work; and 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 124 prohibitions against discrimination, harassment, and retaliation. The Contractor shall forfeit to the Agency the penalties prescribed in the Labor Code for violations. 2. Each worker shall be paid subsistence and travel as required by the collective bargaining agreement on file with the State of California Department of Industrial Relations. 3. The Contractor’s attention is directed to Labor Code Section 1776 which imposes responsibility upon the Contractor for the maintenance, certification, and availability for inspection of such records for all persons employed by the Contractor or Subcontractor in connection with the Project. The Contractor shall agree through the Contract to comply with this Section and the remaining provisions of the Labor Code. 4. Municipal ordinances that affect this Work include Chapter 11.06. Excavation and Grading. If this notice specifies locations or possible materials, such as borrow pits or gravel beds, for use in the proposed construction Project which would be subject to Fish and Game Code Section 1601 or 1603, the conditions established in Fish and Game Code Section 1601 et seq. shall become conditions of the Contract. 5-3.3 Payroll Records. ADD the following: 1. The Contractor and its Subcontractors shall maintain and furnish to the Agency, at a designated time, a certified copy of each weekly payroll reflecting the wages containing all of Contractor’s and Subcontractors’ employees engaged in the Work and a statement of compliance signed under penalty of perjury. 5-3.4 Hours of Labor ADD the following: 1. Unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer, the hours of work shall be between the hours of 7:00 AM and 4:00 PM on Mondays through Fridays, excluding Agency holidays. The Contractor shall obtain the written approval of the Engineer if the Contractor desires to work outside these hours or at any time during weekends and/or holidays. This written permission must be obtained at least 48 hours prior to such work. The Engineer may approve work outside the stated hours and/or days when, in his/her sole opinion, such work conducted by the Contractor is beneficial to the best interests of the Agency. The Contractor shall pay the inspection costs of such work. 2. The Contractor shall incorporate the dates, areas and types of work prohibited in this section in the Construction Schedule. No additional payment, adjustment of bid prices or adjustment of contract time of completion will be allowed as a consequence of the prohibition of work being performed within the dates, areas and/or types of work prohibited in this section. 5-4 INSURANCE 5-4.1 General. ADD the following: 1. Contractor shall procure and maintain for the duration of the Contract insurance against claims for injuries to persons or damage to property which may arise from or in connection 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 125 with the performance of the Work by the Contractor, his or her agents, representatives, employees or Subcontractors. The insurance shall meet the City’s policy for insurance as stated in City Council Policy No. 70. a. Coverages and Limits: Contractor shall maintain the types of coverages and minimum limits specified in these Agency Supplemental General Provisions (00 73 00): i. Commercial General Liability (CGL) Insurance: Insurance written on an “occurrence” basis, including products-completed operations, personal & advertising injury, with limits no less than $2,000,000 per occurrence. If a general aggregate limit applies, either the general aggregate limit shall apply separately to this project/location or the general aggregate limit shall be twice the required occurrence limit. ii. Business Automobile Liability Insurance: $2,000,000 combined single limit per accident for bodily injury and property damage. In addition, the auto policy must cover any vehicle used in the performance of the Contract, used onsite or offsite, whether owned, non-owned or hired, and whether scheduled or non-scheduled. iii. Workers’ Compensation and Employers’ Liability Insurance: Workers’ compensation limits as required by the Labor Code and Employers’ Liability limits of $1,000,000 per incident. Workers’ compensation offered by the State Compensation Insurance Fund is acceptable to the City. b. Additional Provisions: Contractor shall ensure that the policies of insurance required under this Contract with the exception of Workers’ Compensation and Business Automobile Liability Insurance contain, or are endorsed to contain, the following provisions. i. The Agency, its officials, employees and volunteers must be covered as additional insured as respects: liability arising out of activities performed by or on behalf of the Contractor; products and completed operations of the Contractor; premises owned, leased, hired or borrowed by the Contractor. The coverage shall contain no special limitations on the scope of protection afforded to the Agency, its officials, employees or volunteers. All additional insured endorsements must be evidenced using separate documents attached to the certificate of insurance; 1 for each company affording general liability, and employers’ liability coverage. ii. The Contractor’s insurance coverage shall be primary insurance as respects the Agency, its officials, employees and volunteers. Any insurance or self- insurance maintained by the Agency, its officials, employees or volunteers shall be in excess of the Contractor's insurance and shall not contribute with it. iii. Any failure to comply with reporting provisions of the policies shall not affect coverage provided to the Agency, its officials, employees or volunteers. iv. Coverage shall state that the Contractor’s insurance shall apply separately to each insured against whom claim is made or suit is brought, except with respect to the limits of the insurer’s liability. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 126 c. Notice of Cancellation. Each insurance policy required by this Contract shall be endorsed to state that coverage shall not be nonrenewed, suspended, voided, canceled, or reduced in coverage or limits except after 10 Calendar Days’ prior written notice has been sent to the Agency by certified mail, return receipt requested. d. Deductibles and Self-Insured Retention (S.I.R.) Levels. Any deductibles or self- insured retention levels must be declared to and approved by the Agency. At the option of the Agency, either: the insurer shall reduce or eliminate such deductibles or self-insured retention levels as respects the Agency, its officials and employees; or the Contractor shall procure a bond guaranteeing payment of losses and related investigation, claim administration and defense expenses. e. Waiver of Subrogation. All policies of insurance required under this Contract shall contain a waiver of all rights of subrogation the insurer may have or may acquire against the Agency or any of its officials or employees. f. Subcontractors. Contractor shall include all Subcontractors as insured under its policies or shall furnish separate certificates and endorsements for each Subcontractor. Coverages for Subcontractors shall be subject to all of the requirements stated in these Agency Supplemental General Provisions (00 73 00). g. Acceptability of Insurers. Insurance must be placed with insurers that have a rating in Best’s Key Rating Guide of at least A-:VII. Insurers must also be authorized to transact the business of insurance by the State of California Insurance Commissioner as admitted carriers as evidenced by a listing in the official publication of the Department of Insurance of the State of California and/or under the standards specified by City Council Policy No. 70. h. Verification of Coverage. Contractor shall furnish the Agency with certificates of insurance and original endorsements affecting coverage required by this clause. The certificates and endorsements for each insurance policy are to be signed by a person authorized by that insurer to bind coverage on its behalf. The certificates and endorsements are to be in forms approved by the Agency and are to be received and approved by the Agency before the Contract is executed by the Agency. i. Coverage and Limits. Contractor will maintain the types of coverage and minimum limits indicated below unless the Risk Manager or City Manager or Executive Manager approves a lower amount. These minimum amounts of coverage will not constitute any limitations or cap on Contractor’s indemnification obligations under this Contract. Agency, its officers, agents, and employees make no representation that the limits of the insurance specified to be carried by Contractor pursuant to this Contract are adequate to protect Contractor. If Contractor believes that any required insurance coverage is inadequate, Contractor will obtain such additional insurance coverage, as Contractor deems adequate, at Contractor’s sole expense. The full limits available to the named insured shall also be available and applicable to the Agency as an additional insured. j. Cost of Insurance. The Cost of all insurance required under this Contract shall be included in the Contractor’s Bid. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 127 5-6 PATENTS FEES AND ROYALTIES. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following: 1. Contractor shall pay, at no additional cost to the Agency, all applicable royalties and license fees arising from the Work. Contractor shall indemnify and defend all claims and lawsuits for infringement of patent, trademark, and copyright against the Agency and shall hold the Agency harmless from any loss. 5-7 SAFETY 5-7.1.1 General. ADD the following: 1. When conducting grading or excavation, place Contractor’s name and emergency telephone number adjacent to the Work at intervals and locations approved by the Engineer. The method of posting shall be approved by the Engineer. 2. The Contractor shall respond and initiate corrective action in accordance with OSHA and within 24 hours of the notice of the nonconforming Work that poses an imminent threat to person or property. 3. The Contractor shall erect and properly maintain at all times, as required by the conditions and progress of the Work, all necessary safeguards for the protection of workers and public, and shall use danger signs warning against hazards created by such features of construction as protruding nails, hoists, well holes, and falling materials. ADD: 5-7.1.3 Health and Safety Plan (HSP). 1. The Contractor is ultimately responsible for the health and safety of Contractor’s employees. These specifications shall not be construed to limit Contractor’s liability nor to assume that the Agency, its employees, or designees shall assume any of Contractor’s liability associated with Site safety considerations. 2. Contractor shall have a HSP in effect at least 1 week prior to the commencement of the Work. The HSP shall comply with all OSHA and other applicable requirements. 3. The HSP shall specifically address procedures and protocols that shall be followed to monitor for or respond to the presence of hazardous atmosphere, possibility for engulfment, gasses due to organic soils or proximity to landfills, exposure to hazardous products such as may be released when grinding, cutting, or torching galvanized or painted surfaces or asbestos containing materials, contaminated soil, and groundwater. Identify response actions that shall be taken when these conditions are encountered. 4. The Agency shall not assume any role in determining the adequacy of the HSP on Contractor’s behalf. 5-7.3 Use of Explosives. ADD the following: 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 128 1. Explosives may be used only when authorized in writing by the Engineer. The Contractor shall prepare and submit an application for blasting permit to the City of Carlsbad Engineering Department and comply with the City’s blasting policy. 5-7.7 Security and Protective Devices. 5-7.7.1 General. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following: 1. Security and protective devices shall consist of fencing, railing, steel plates, or other devices for the protection of workers or the public from hazards posed by open excavations or any work in progress. Security and protective devices shall remain in place until the Work is accepted. 2. Unless otherwise specified, no separate or additional payment will be made for security and protective devices. Payment shall be included in the Contract price for the various Bid items requiring such devices. ADD: 5-7.7.3 Playground Safety. Not Used 5-7.7.2 Security Fencing 1. The payment for security fencing Work for open excavations shall be included in the Contract Price. 5-7.8 Steel Plate Covers 5-7.8.1 General. ADD the following: 1. The Contractor shall protect transverse or longitudinal cuts, voids, trenches, holes, and excavations in the right-of-way that cannot be properly completed within 1 Working Day by adequately designed barricades and structural steel plates (plates) that shall support legal vehicle loads in such a way as to preserve unobstructed traffic flow. 2. For trench widths exceeding those in Table 5-7.8.2, a structural design shall be prepared by a California registered civil or structural engineer regularly engaged in the design of shoring systems. 3. The Contractor shall secure approval in advance from authorities concerning the use of any bridging proposed on the Work. 4. The Contractor shall shore the trench adequately to support the bridging and traffic loads. 5. The Contractor shall design plates for HS 20-44 truck loading in accordance with Caltrans Bridge Design Specifications Manual and evaluate soil conditions and ensure that the plate extends enough beyond the trench walls to support traffic loads. 6. The Contractor shall use the plates skid-resistant with a nominal COF of 0.35 as determined by California Test Method 342. If a different test method is used, the Contractor may utilize standard test plates with known coefficients of friction available from each Caltrans District Materials Engineer to correlate skid resistance results to California Test Method 342. 7. Plates shall provide complete coverage to prevent any person, bicycle, motorcycle, or motor vehicle from being endangered due to plate movement causing separations or gaps. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 129 8. Alternative installation methods may be submitted in accordance with 3-8, “SUBMITTALS” for the Engineer’s approval. 9. Contractor shall install signage and postings with a 2 inch (50.8 mm) minimum letter height indicating the steel plate cover load limit, the Company’s name, and a 24-hour emergency contact phone number. See 601-1, “GENERAL.” 10. Contractor is responsible for the maintenance of the plates, shoring, and asphalt concrete ramps or any other approved device used to secure the plates. Contractor shall immediately mobilize necessary personnel and equipment after being notified by the Engineer, the Agency, or a member of the public of a repair needed for such items as plate movements, noise, anchors, and asphalt ramps. Failure to respond to the emergency request within 2 hours shall be grounds for the Agency to perform necessary repairs that shall be invoiced at the actual cost including overhead or $500 per incident, whichever is greater. Failure may also result in a “Stop Work” notice. 11. When plates are removed, Contractor shall repair any damage to the pavement with fine graded asphalt concrete mix or slurry seal satisfactory to the Engineer. 12. The pavement shall be cold planed to a depth equal to the thickness of the plate and to a width and length equal to the dimensions of the plate. The cold milling shall produce a flat surface that the plate shall rest on with no horizontal or vertical movement. Horizontal gaps between the unmilled pavement and the plate shall not exceed 25 mm (1 ") and shall be filled with elastomeric sealant material which may, at the contractor's option, be mixed with no more that 50%, by volume, of Type I aggregate conforming to the requirements of tables 203- 5.2 and 203-5.3. ADD 5-8 INDEMNIFICATION AND HOLD HARMLESS AGREEMENT 1. Contractor agrees to defend, indemnify, and hold harmless Agency, its affiliated and subsidiary entities, and its elected and appointed officials, officers, directors, managers, employees and agents (“Indemnified Parties”) from and against all claims asserted, liability established, or judgments for damages or injuries to any person or property, including to Contractor’s officers, employees, agents, or subcontractors, arising directly or indirectly out of the Work, which arise from, are connected with, or are caused or claimed to be caused by the acts or omissions of Contractor, its officers, employees, agents or subcontractors. Contractor’s duty to defend, indemnify, and hold harmless shall not include any claims or liabilities arising from the sole negligence or sole willful misconduct of the Indemnified Parties. Contractor further agrees that its duty to defend includes all attorney fees and costs associated with enforcement of this indemnification provision, defense of any claims arising from this Contract, and, where a conflict of interest exists or may exist between Contractor and Agency, the reasonable value of attorney fees and costs if Agency chooses, at its own election, to conduct its own defense or participate in its own defense of any claim related to this Contract. 2. Contractor shall also defend and indemnify the Indemnified Parties against any challenges to the Award of the Contract to Contractor, and Contractor will pay all costs, including defense 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 130 costs for the Agency. Defense costs include the cost of separate counsel for the Indemnified Parties, if the Indemnified Parties request separate counsel. 3. Contractor shall also defend and indemnify the Indemnified Parties against any challenges to the Award of the Contract to Contractor, arising in whole or in part from alleged inaccuracies or misrepresentation by the Contractor, whether intentional or otherwise, and Contractor will pay all costs, including defense costs for the Agency. Defense costs include the cost of separate counsel for the Indemnified Parties, if the Indemnified Parties request separate counsel. 4. Contractor shall defend, indemnify, protect and hold the Indemnified Parties harmless from and against any dispute between Contractor and Contractor’s Subcontractors if the Indemnified Parties are made a party to any judicial or administrative proceeding. ADD 5-9 CONFLICT OF INTEREST 1. Establish and make known to Contractor’s employees appropriate safeguards to prohibit employees from using their positions for a purpose that is or gives the appearance of being motivated by desire for private gain for themselves or others and particularly those with whom they have family, business, or other relationships. Project personnel shall not accept gratuities or any other favors from Subcontractors or potential Subcontractors. 2. Contractor is subject to all federal, state, and local conflict of interest laws, regulations, and policies applicable to public contracts and procurement practices (Government Code Sections 1090 et. seq. and 81000 et. seq., the Agency’s Ordinances, and the City of Carlsbad Municipal Code). If, in performing the Work, Contractor makes or participates in a “governmental decision” in accordance with Title 2, Section 18701, subdivision (a)(2) of the California Code of Regulations, or performs the same or substantially all the same duties for Agency that would otherwise be performed by an Agency employee holding a position specified in the Agency’s conflict of interest code, Contractor shall be subject to a conflict of interest code requiring the completion of 1 or more statements of economic interests disclosing Contractor’s relevant financial interests. 3. Statements of economic interests shall be made on Fair Political Practices Commission Form 700 and filed with the City of Carlsbad’s City Clerk. Contractor shall file a Form 700 (Assuming Office Statement) within 30 Calendar Days of the Agency’s written determination that Contractor shall be subject to a conflict of interest code and file a Form 700 (Annual Statement) on or before April 1st disclosing any financial interests held during the previous calendar year for which Contractor was subject to a conflict of interest code. 4. If the Agency requires Contractor to file a statement of economic interests as a result of the Work performed, Contractor shall be considered an “Agency Official” for conflict of interest purposes, including the prohibition against lobbying the Agency for 1 year following the expiration or termination of the Contract. 5. Contractor’s personnel employed on the Project shall not accept gratuities or any other favors from any Subcontractors or potential Subcontractors. Contractor shall not recommend or specify any product, supplier, or other Contractor with whom Contractor has a direct or indirect financial or organizational interest or relationship that would violate conflict of interest laws, regulations, or policies. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 131 6. If Contractor violates any conflict of interest laws or any of these conflict of interest provisions, the violation shall be grounds for immediate termination of this Contract. Further, the violation subjects Contractor to liability to the Agency for all damages sustained as a result of the violation. ADD the following: 5-10 ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION 1. When specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall post all communications addressed to the Engineer concerning construction including RFIs, submittals, daily logs, and transmittals to the Project management website established for the Project. The Contractor shall maintain a list of scheduled activities including planned and actual execution dates for all major construction activities and milestones defined in the approved Schedule. The Contractor shall review and act on all communications addressed to the Contractor in the Project management website. A user’s guide to the Project management system may be available on the City’s website and shall be provided to Contractor at the Pre-construction Meeting. 2. The payment for electronic communications shall be included in the Contract Price. ADD the following: 5-11 STATUTORY REFERENCES 1. All references in these Agency Supplemental General Provisions (00 73 00) to any statute, rule or regulation are to the statute, rule or regulation as amended, modified, supplemented, or replaced from time to time by the corresponding legislative or regulatory body. SECTION 6 – PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK 6-1 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK ADD the following: 1. A Payment for the Construction Schedule shall be included in the Contract Price and no separate payment will be made, therefore. 6-2 PROSECUTION OF WORK ADD the following: 1. As soon as possible under the provisions of the Specifications, the Contractor shall backfill all excavations and restores to usefulness all improvements existing prior to the start of the Work. 2. When a Subcontractor fails to prosecute a portion of the Work in a manner satisfactory to the Agency, Contractor shall remove such Subcontractor immediately upon written request of the Agency, and shall request approval of a replacement Subcontractor to perform the Work in accordance with the Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act (Pub. Contract Code, § 4100 et seq.) at no added cost to the Agency. ADD the following: 6-2.1 Order of Work. 1. The Contractor shall incorporate the requirements of the city, utility companies or agencies having jurisdiction over the Work in accordance with 2-4 Cooperation and Collateral Work, including any phasing requirements identified on the Plans or Special Provisions. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 132 2. If construction and demolition operations are within an active public space, the Contractor shall submit a phasing plan to the Engineer to accommodate accessibility to the public and Agency staff. Phasing plan must be approved before Work starts. Phasing plan will be considered part of the mobilization Bid item and shall include any revisions or implementation of the Plan. ADD the following: 6-2.2 Moratoriums. 1. When moratorium periods are specified in the Special Provisions, Contractor shall stop Work and completely demobilize all construction related activity, equipment, and materials within the stated limits prior to the beginning of the moratorium periods at no additional cost to the Agency. The Contractor shall complete any Work that has been started prior to the start of the moratorium. 2. Contractor shall restore and clean the Site prior to each moratorium. The Contractor shall not leave equipment, materials, or traffic control on the Site during the moratorium periods. Trenches shall be backfilled during moratorium periods. Temporary resurfacing or steel plate covers over trenches shall not be used. 3. The payment for complying with moratorium requirements shall be included in the Contract Bid. Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional costs for repeated mobilization and demobilization to continue the Work after the moratorium periods. 6-3 TIME OF COMPLETION 6-3.1 General. ADD the following: 1. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract, the time of completion of the Contract shall be expressed in Working Days. 2. The number of Working Days specified for the walk-through, preparation, and the completion of Punchlist items until acceptance shall be included in the stipulated Contract Time. 3. For pipeline Projects, the following shall be included in the stipulated Contract Time: a. Complete each street segment within 15 Working Days from the day the slurry seal or asphalt overlay is placed. Each completed segment shall include other incidental Work items (weed abatement, damaged asphalt pavement replacement, asphalt patching, resurfacing, striping, markings, raised pavement markers, and inlet markers). b. Where shutdowns of 16-inch and larger pipes are required, there is a shutdown moratorium from May until October. The Contractor shall plan and schedule Work accordingly. No additional payment or Working Days will be granted for delays due to the moratorium. 4. When specified in the Contract Documents, the PEP is included in the stipulated Contract Time and shall begin with the acceptance of the installation of the vegetation plan in accordance with Part 8 – LANDSCAPING AND IRRIGATION. 5. The Contractor shall obtain the written approval of the Engineer to perform any Work outside of normal Work hours. This approval must be obtained at least 48 hours prior to commencement of such Work. The Contractor shall pay any additional costs for inspection or testing of such Work. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 133 6. Work that is required by the Engineer to occur outside of normal Work hours will be identified in the Special Provisions. 7. The Contractor shall not perform Work during moratoriums per 6-2.2 or during any periods of restriction identified in agency permits or Project environmental documents and shall include all such schedule constraints in the Construction Schedule. 8. No additional payment or adjustment of Bid item prices or adjustment of Contract Time will be made for the Contractor’s inability to work outside of normal Work hours if Contractor’s request is denied by the Engineer or during prohibited periods. 9. Contractor’s schedule shall plan for a minimum of 2 weeks after final walk-through to receive a final punch list from the Agency. Punch list items can be worked on during this 2-week period. 6-4 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 6-4.1 General. ADD the following: 1. The Agency shall only grant an extension of time if the Extra Work or unforeseen condition impacts the Project’s critical path. All requests for an extension in Contract Time for any Extra Work or unforeseen event shall be demonstrated by using the CPM. No other scheduling method shall be used to calculate the Project’s schedule. 6-4.2 Extensions of Time. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following: 1. The Contract Time shall be modified only by Change Order. 2. Contractor shall immediately submit to the Agency a written request for a Change Order to modify the Contract Time, but in no event later than 1 Working Day after the occurrence and discovery of the events giving rise to the request. Contractor shall include in Contractor’s request a general description of the basis for and the estimated length of any extension and submit supporting data, including a time impact analysis setting forth the claimed Critical Path impacts to the Construction Schedule consistent with Section 1.14 (Change Orders, Delays, and Extensions of Time). 3. The Engineer shall not grant an extension of Contract Time unless Contractor demonstrates, through an analysis of the critical path, the following: a. The event causing the delay impacted the activities along the Project’s critical path. b. The increases in the time to perform all or part of the Project beyond the Contract Time arose from unforeseeable causes beyond Contractor’s control and without Contractor’s fault or negligence. c. All Project float has been used. 4. The Engineer shall issue a weekly document that stipulates the Contract Time. If Contractor does not agree with this document, Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review a written protest supporting Contractor’s objections to the document within 15 Working Days after receipt of the weekly document. Contractor’s failure to file a timely protest shall constitute Contractor’s acceptance of the Engineer’s weekly document. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 134 a. Contractor’s protest will be considered a claim for time extension and shall be subject to 2-10.1, “Claims.” 6-4.4 Written Notice and Report. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following: 1. Contractor’s failure to file with the Engineer a written request and report of cause within 24 hours will be considered grounds for refusal by the Agency to consider such request. 2. The Contractor shall provide written notice to the Engineer within 2 hours after the beginning of the delay, or when the Contractor has placed any workers or equipment on standby for any reason that the Contractor has determined to be caused by the Agency or by any organization that the Agency may otherwise be obligated by. The Contractor shall provide continuing daily written notice to the Engineer, each Working Day, throughout the duration of such period of delay. The initial and continuing written notices shall include the classification of each worker and supervisor and the make and model of all equipment placed on standby, the cumulative duration of the standby, the Contractor’s opinion of the cause of the delay and a cogent explanation of why the Contractor could not avoid the delay by reasonable means. Should the Contractor fail to provide the notice(s) required by this section the Contractor agrees that no delay has occurred and that it will not submit any claim(s) therefore. 3. The request for payment or extension must be made at least 15 Calendar Days prior to the specified completion date. Failure by the Contractor to provide notices and reports as specified in the Contract will be considered grounds for refusal by the Agency to consider such request. 6-6 SUSPENSION OF THE WORK 6-6.1 General. ADD the following: 1. The Agency reserves the right to shut down any trenching operation if Contractor is not proceeding within a reasonable period of time to restore the pavement and Site cleanup. A reasonable period of time is considered to be 5 to 10 Working Days after backfilling any 1 block, approximately 600 feet, of pipeline. The Engineer shall determine the period of time allowed which shall not be subject to dispute. 2. During periods when the Work is suspended, Contractor shall be prepared for any emergency Work that shall be supervised by Contractor’s representative. 3. Trenching operations are subject to suspension if the Contractor does not comply with the requirements for the maximum length of open trench specified in 306-3.5. 6-7 TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT FOR DEFAULT 6-7.1 General. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following: 1. Prior to the Acceptance of the Work, Contractor shall be found in default of the Contract if: 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 135 a. Contractor becomes insolvent, assign Contractor’s assets for the benefit of Contractor’s creditors, are unable to pay Contractor’s debts as they become due, or are otherwise financially unable to complete the Work. b. Contractor abandons the Work by failing to report to the Site and by failing to diligently execute the Work to completion. c. Contractor disregards written instruction from the Engineer or materially violates provisions of the Contract Documents. d. Contractor fails to execute the Work according to the Schedule approved by the Engineer. e. Contractor disregards laws or regulations of any public body having jurisdiction. f. Contractor commits continuous or repeated violations of regulatory or statutory safety requirements. g. Contractor fails to notify the Engineer upon discovery of items of Native American, Archaeological, or Paleontological interests. 2. Notices and other written communications regarding default between the Contractor, the Agency, and the Surety shall be transmitted in accordance with 5- 2, “SPECIAL NOTICES.” 6-8 TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONVENIENCE. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following: 1. At any time, the Agency may at its sole discretion terminate this Contract in whole or in part. If the Agency decides to terminate this Contract for convenience, the Agency shall issue a written notice of termination for convenience in accordance with 5-2, “SPECIAL NOTICES.” Upon receipt of this notice, Contractor shall immediately proceed as follows: a. Stop Work immediately or in accordance with the Notice of Termination. b. Notify Subcontractors and Suppliers to immediately cease their Work and place no further subcontracts for materials, services, or facilities except as necessary to complete any authorized continued portion of the Contract. c. Terminate all subcontracts to the extent that they relate to the Work terminated. d. With approval by the Engineer, settle all outstanding obligations arising from the termination of subcontracts. This approval shall be final for the purposes of this section. e. As directed by the Engineer, transfer and deliver completed or partially completed drawings, plans, calculations, specifications, and any other documents and records that, if the Contract had been completed, would be required to be furnished to the Agency. f. Complete the performance of the Work not terminated. g. Take all necessary steps and actions to minimize all costs to the Agency as a result of the termination. h. Take any action that may be necessary or that the Engineer may direct for the protection and preservation of the property related to the Contract that is in Contractor’s possession and in which the Agency has or may acquire an interest. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 136 6-8.1 Termination Cost. 1. The Agency shall determine and pay Contractor the fair and reasonable amounts for Contractor’s termination cost as follows: a. The Contract Price for completed services accepted by the Engineer not previously paid or adjusted for any saving of freight and other charges. b. The fair and reasonable cost of settling and paying termination settlements for terminated subcontracts that are chargeable to the terminated portion of the Contract. c. The Agency shall pay Contractor a prorated amount of profit for Work that Contractor performed. The Agency shall not pay for lost profit on Work that was not performed by Contractor. 6-8.2 Termination Settlement. 1. After termination, Contractor shall submit a final termination settlement proposal to the Engineer no later than 3 months from the effective date of termination, unless extended in writing by the Engineer. 2. If Contractor fails to submit the proposal within the time allowed, the Agency may determine and pay the fair and reasonable amount that may be due Contractor as a result of the termination. If Contractor does not agree that the amount determined by the Engineer is fair and reasonable, Contractor must notify the Engineer within 30 Calendar Days of receipt of payment. 6-8.3 Determination of Amount Due the Contractor. 1. In determining the amount due Contractor, the Agency shall deduct the following: a. The fair value of property destroyed, lost, stolen, or damaged that has become undeliverable to the Agency. b. Any claim which the Agency has against Contractor under the Contract. 6-8.4 Records and Documents Relating to Termination. 1. The Engineer will file an Agreement of Mutual Rescission of Contract with the Board. Once the Agreement is executed and a Notice of Completion is recorded, retention can be released. 2. Unless otherwise specified or required by statute, Contractor shall maintain all records and documents relating to the terminated portion of the Contract for 3 years after final settlement. This includes all books and other evidence bearing on Contractor’s costs, expenses, and settlement under the Contract. Contractor shall make these records and documents available to the Agency, at Contractor’s office, at all reasonable times, without any direct charge. If approved by the Engineer, Contractor may maintain photographs, microphotographs, and other authentic reproductions instead of original records and documents. 6-8.5 The Agency’s Right to Terminate or Suspend for Loss of Project Funds. 1. The Agency may terminate or suspend the Contract at its sole discretion if the State of California or its agents render the funds being used to fund this Project unavailable. If the Agency chooses to suspend the Contract, that suspension shall last until funds are identified and approved by the Board, whichever is appropriate, to be used to complete this Project. If 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 137 the Agency elects under this provision to terminate the Contract, then neither Party is entitled to compensation from the other Party for any costs arising from such termination. The Agency may also elect to terminate after invoking a suspension under this provision. 6-9 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following: 1. Contractor’s failure to complete the Work within the time allowed shall result in damages being sustained by the Agency. Such damages are, and shall continue to be, impracticable and extremely difficult to determine. For each consecutive Working Day in excess of the time specified for the completion of the Work, as adjusted in accordance with 6-4, “DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME,” Contractor shall pay to the Agency, or have withheld from monies due it, the sum described in the table below, along with any other damages that may be sustained by the Agency during the Project, unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions. 2. The execution of the Contract shall constitute agreement between Contractor and the Agency that the liquidated damage amount described in the table below is the value of the damage caused by Contractor’s failure to complete the Work within the allotted time. Such sum shall not be construed as a penalty and may be deducted from Contractor’s payments if such delay occurs. Contract Value Liquidated Damage Daily Amount $100,000 and more $2,500 3. Any progress payments made to Contractor after the specified completion date shall not constitute a waiver of payment for damages sustained by the Agency under this section. ADD the following: 6-10 RIGHT TO AUDIT 6-10.1 General. 1. The Agency retains the right to review, audit, reasonably access Contractor’s and all Contractor’s Subcontractor’s premises to review and audit Contractor’s compliance with the provisions of the Contract. This includes the right to inspect, photocopy, and retain copies, outside of Contractor’s premises, of all records with appropriate safeguards if such retention is deemed necessary by the Agency in its sole discretion. The Agency will keep this information in strictest confidence. 2. Contractor shall include the Agency’s right to audit in its subcontracts and ensure that these specifications are binding upon all Subcontractors. 6-10.2 Audit. 1. The right to audit includes the right to examine any and all books, records, documents, and any other evidence of procedures and practices that the Agency determines is necessary to discover and verify that Contractor are in compliance with all requirements under the Contract. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 138 2. If there is a claim for additional compensation or for changes in Work, the right to audit also includes the right to verify all direct and indirect costs which are claimed to have been incurred, anticipated to be incurred, or for which a claim for additional compensation or for changes in the Work have been submitted. 3. Contractor shall maintain complete and accurate records in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices in the construction industry. Contractor shall also make available to the Engineer for review and audit all Project-related accounting records and documents and any other financial data. Upon the Engineer’s request, Contractor shall submit exact duplicates of originals of all requested records to the Engineer. 6-10.3 Compliance Required Before Mediation and Litigation. 1. As a condition precedent to proceeding with mandatory mediation and further litigation under 2-10.2, “Dispute Resolution Process” Contractor shall comply with the audit specifications within 60 Calendar Days of the Engineer’s notice to review and audit compliance. See 5-2, “SPECIAL NOTICES.” 6-10.4 Access to Records on Federally Funded Projects. 1. Contractor shall retain all records, books, papers, and documents directly pertinent to the Contract for a minimum of 5 years after the Agency makes final payments and all other pending matters are closed and shall allow access to those records to the Agency, the Federal grantor agency, the Comptroller General of the United States, or any duly authorized representatives. SECTION 7 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Units of Measurement. The system of measure for this contract shall be the U.S. Standard Measures. 7-2 LUMP SUM WORK ADD the following: 7-2.1 Schedule of Values (SOV). 1. Submit a SOV for the lump sum Bid items of the Work to the Engineer for review and approval at the pre-construction meeting. The total value for the work described in the contract documents shall be shown in the SOV with category totals reflective of those values presented in Section 00 41 00 BID FORM, Bid Schedule A in the contract. 2. The SOV shall: a. Subdivide the Work into its respective parts. b. Include values for all items comprising the Work. c. Serve as the basis for monthly progress payments. 3. The Engineer is the sole judge of acceptable numbers, details, and description of values established. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, a greater number of SOV items than proposed by Contractor is necessary, add the additional items identified by the Engineer. When requested by the Engineer, provide substantiating data in support of the SOV. 4. The Contractor shall incorporate the SOV into the cost loading function of the Schedule in accordance with 6-1, “CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK.” Monthly progress payment amounts for Lump Sum items shall be determined from the monthly updates of the Schedule activities. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 139 5. The Contractor shall develop the SOV independently but simultaneously with the development of the Schedule activities and logic. Incorporate phase funding impacts, if applicable, into the Schedule. 6. The Contractor shall break down the Work not specifically included in the Bid as necessary for establishment of cost and Schedule activity. 7. Following acceptance of the SOV, the Contractor shall incorporate the changes (if any) into the cost loading portion of the Schedule. Where coordination of the Schedule and the SOV requires changes made to 1 or both documents, the Contractor shall propose changes to the SOV and to the Schedule activities to satisfy the Schedule cost loading requirements. 8. The Contractor shall update and submit these listings in conjunction with the Schedule monthly submittals. 9. The Contractor shall incorporate issued Change Orders or Field Orders in the Schedule into the SOV as single units identified by the Change Order or Field Order number. 10. Changes to the Schedule which add activities not included in the original Schedule but included in the original Work (schedule omissions) shall have values assigned as accepted by the Engineer. Other activity values shall be reduced to provide equal value adjustment increases for added activities as accepted by the Engineer. 11. In the event that the Contractor and the Engineer agree to make adjustments to the original SOV because of inequities discovered in the original accepted SOV, increases and equal decreases to values for activities may be made. 12. The payment for the preparation of the SOV shall be included in the Contract Price. 7-3 PAYMENT 7-3.1 General. To paragraph (8), DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following: If, within the time fixed by law, a properly executed notice to stop payment is filed with the Agency, due to the Contractor’s failure to pay for labor or materials used in the Work, all money plus 25 percent due for such labor or materials will be withheld from payment in accordance with applicable laws. At the expiration of 30 Calendar Days from the date of recording the NOC, the amount deducted from the final estimate and retained by the Agency shall be paid to Contractor except such amounts as are required by law to be withheld by properly executed and filed notices to stop payment. ADD the following: 1. Unless specified otherwise, the Contract Price includes use, consumer, and other taxes mandated by applicable legal requirements. The Contract Price is not subject to adjustment for tax increases. 2. As provided in California Public Contract Code Section 7105, if the Contract is not financed by revenue bonds, Contractor is not responsible for the cost of repairing or restoring damage to the Project when damage was proximately caused by an Act of God, in excess of 5% of the Contract Price, if the following occur: 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 140 a. The damaged portion of the Project was built in accordance with the Contract requirements. b. There are no insurance requirements in the Contract for the damages. 3. Guarantee periods shall not be affected by any payment but shall commence on the date of recordation of the Notice of Completion. 7-3.2 Partial and Final Payment. To paragraph (5), DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following: Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 22300, Contractor shall have the option, at Contractor’s expense, to substitute for any money withheld by the Agency, securities equivalent to the amount being withheld. Securities eligible for such substitution are bank or savings and loans certificates of deposit or such securities which are eligible for investment pursuant to Government Code Section 16430. As to any such security or securities so substituted for monies withheld, Contractor shall be the beneficial owner of same and shall receive any accrued interest. Such security shall, at Contractor’s request and expense, be deposited with the Agency or with a State or Federally Chartered bank as the escrow agent who shall pay such monies to Contractor upon notification by the Engineer that payment can be made. Such notification shall be given at the expiration of 30 Calendar Days from the date of NOC, or as prescribed by law, provided however, that there shall be a continued retention of the necessary securities to cover such amounts as are required by law to be withheld by properly executed and filed notices to stop payment, or as may be authorized by the Contract to be further retained. ADD the following: 1. After final inspection, the Engineer will make a Final Payment Estimate and process a corresponding payment. This estimate will be in writing and shall be for the total amount owed the Contractor as determined by the Engineer and shall be itemized by the Contract Bid item and Change Order item with quantities and payment amounts and shall show all deductions made or to be made for prior payments and amounts to be deducted under provisions of the Contract. All prior estimates and progress payments shall be subject to correction in the Final Payment Estimate. The Contractor shall have 30 Calendar Days from receipt of the Final Payment Estimate to make a written statement disputing any Bid item or Change Order item quantity or payment amount. The Contractor shall provide all documentation at the time of submitting the statement supporting its position. Should the Contractor fail to submit the statement and supporting documentation within the time specified, the Contractor acknowledges that full and final payment has been made for all Contract Bid items and Change Order items. If the Contractor submits a written statement with supporting documents within 30 Calendar Days from receipt of the Final Payment Estimate, the Engineer will review the disputed item within 30 Calendar Days and make any appropriate adjustments on the Final Payment. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 141 Remaining disputed quantities or amounts not approved by the Engineer will be subject to resolution as specified in Section 2-10.1.1, Initiation of Claim. The written statement filed by the Contractor shall be in sufficient detail to enable the Engineer to ascertain the basis and amount of the disputed items. The Engineer will consider the merits of the Contractor’s claims. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish within a reasonable time such further information and details as may be required by the Engineer to determine the facts or contentions involved in its claims. Failure to submit such information and details will be sufficient cause for denying payment for the disputed items. 2. Final Payment and release of Retention shall be paid after Contractor submits the following: a. An affidavit that payrolls and bills for materials, equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Agency or the Agency’s property might be responsible for or encumbered by. Fewer amounts withheld by the Agency shall have been paid for or otherwise satisfied. b. A certificate evidencing that insurances required by the Contract Documents shall remain in force after Final Payment is currently in effect and shall not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least a 30 Calendar Days prior written notice has been given to the Engineer. c. Consent of Surety to Final Payment. d. If required by the Engineer, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, and security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract Documents. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Agency, Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Engineer to indemnify the Agency against such lien. e. If required in the Contract Documents, the successful completion and submittal of the required reports such as construction demolition, waste recycling, and hydrostatic discharge reports. f. Required documentation, record drawings, operations manuals, test reports, warranty documentation, and UL labels shall be submitted before requesting the release of retention. ADD the following: 7-3.2.1 Application for Progress Payment. 1. By the 5th day of each month, sign, fill out, and submit to the Engineer a partial payment estimate that identifies acceptable Work performed during the previous month, or since the last partial payment estimate was submitted. If requested by the Engineer, provide such additional data as may be required to support the payment estimate. Such data may include submission of signed field orders and satisfactory evidence of payment for equipment, materials, and labor, including payments to Subcontractors and Suppliers. 2. For application for progress payments, Contractor shall use the format required by the Agency. An electronic copy of the invoice form is available from the Engineer upon request. Progress payments shall be signed, and the date of the invoice shall be the date that the invoice is submitted. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 142 3. The Agency shall not pay progress or partial payments until Contractor submits to the Engineer an updated Schedule. It is solely the Contractor’s responsibility to prepare and submit the Schedule updates. 4. Disputed or incorrect applications shall be returned to the Contractor within 7 Calendar Days with documentation describing the reason for the rejection of the payment request. ADD the following: 7-3.2.2 Amount of Progress Payments. 1. If an undisputed and properly submitted application for payment is received by the Engineer, the Agency shall pay Contractor within 30 Calendar Days after the Engineer receives the application for Payment consistent with Public Contract Code Section 20104.50. The Agency shall pay Contractor for the Work performed, including the payment for offsite stored materials per section 7-3.3.1.2, through the period covered by the application for payment if the payment amount before Retention does not exceed the percentage of completion of the Work as set forth in the SOV. ADD the following: 7-3.2.2.1 Progress Payment for Pipelines. Not Used ADD the following: 7-3.2.3 Waiver of Claims at Final Payment. 1. Contractor’s acceptance of Final Payment constitutes a waiver of affirmative claims by Contractor, except those previously made in writing and identified as unsettled at the time of Final Payment, which are expressly reserved by Contractor from operation of its Release of Claims pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 7100 or other Applicable Law. ADD the following: 7-3.2.4 Withholding of Payment and Back Charge. 1. The Engineer may withhold payment for any of the following reasons: a. Defective or incomplete Work. b. Stop notices, wage orders, or other withholdings required by Applicable Law. c. Contractor’s failure to comply with 5-3.3, “Payroll Records” and the Contractor Registration and Electronic Reporting System requirements of the Contract Documents. d. Failure to submit monthly Construction Schedule updates. 2. The Engineer may back charge the Contractor for any of the following reasons: a. Defective or incorrect Work not remedied. b. Damage to Agency property or a third party’s property that was caused by Contractor. c. Liquidated Damages. d. Non-attendance at meetings without prior cancellation notice. e. Failed inspections or re-inspections paid by the Agency. 7-3.3 Delivered Materials DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following: 1. The cost of materials and equipment delivered but not incorporated into the Work will not be included in the progress estimate. ADD the following: 7-3.3.1 Payment for Stored Materials on Site. ADD the following: 7-3.3.1.1 General. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 143 1. When authorized, Contractor may request payment for materials and equipment which has not been incorporated into the Work but will be at a later date and will be delivered and stored at the Project Site. 2. The material shall meet the Contract requirements and the material’s required test results and certifications shall be filed with the Engineer. 3. Only non-perishable materials for major items of Work or Materials Subject to Price Adjustment shall be considered for payment for on-site storage. However, each individual item has a value of more than 1% of the Contract Price and shall become a permanent part of the Work. 4. Materials cost shall be evidenced by the manufacturer’s paid invoice bearing the statement that Contractor has paid all invoices in full. 5. The payments for the stored materials shall not exceed the invoice price or 60% of the Bid prices for the pay items into which the materials are to be incorporated, whichever is less, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 6. Apply for the payment for materials stored on a form provided by the Engineer and attach documentation to show the following: a. The amount paid on the invoice (or other record of production cost) for the stored items. b. The dollar amount of the material incorporated into each of the various Work items for the month. c. The amount that should be retained for stored materials. d. That Contractor has received the materials and equipment free and are clear of all liens, charges, secured interests, and encumbrances. e. That the materials and equipment are covered by the appropriate property insurance in accordance with the insurance provisions and other arrangements that protect the Agency’s interest. 7. Contractor shall provide the Engineer, upon request and prior to any partial payment, documentation which transfers full legal title to such materials to the Agency conditional only upon receipt of the Final Payment. Such transfer of title or any partial payment shall not constitute acceptance by the Agency of the materials nor shall it void the right to reject materials subsequently found to be unsatisfactory in accordance with SECTION 4 – CONTROL OF MATERIALS. This shall also not relieve Contractor of any obligation arising under the Contract Documents. 8. The payments for materials on-site are subject to retention as set forth in 7-3.2, “Partial and Final Payment.” 9. Contractor shall assume all risks associated with the loss or damage to the stored products for which payment has or has not been received. 10. Equipment and materials shall be stored in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. The stored products shall be in a form ready for installation. The Agency shall not pay for raw materials or parts and pieces of equipment. 11. Any and all surplus materials that are not incorporated in the Work shall become Contractor’s property at no additional cost to the Agency. 12. Unless specifically provided in the Contract, payment for the materials on hand shall not be included when determining the percentage of Work completed. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 144 13. The cost of materials reported shall be at invoice or lowest current price at which such materials are locally available and delivered to the job site in the quantities involved, plus sales tax, freight, and delivery. The Agency reserves the right to approve materials and sources of supply, or to supply materials to the Contractor if necessary, for the progress of the Work. No markup shall be applied to any material provided by the Agency. ADD the following: 7-3.3.1.2 Payment for Stored Materials Offsite. 1. The payment of materials and equipment delivered and stored offsite shall be contingent upon Contractor’s compliance with the storage and protective maintenance requirements set forth in the Contract Documents and all other requirements necessary to preserve equipment warranties for the benefit of the Agency. 2. The Agency reserves the right to refuse approval for the payment of any equipment or materials suitably stored offsite in its sole discretion, regardless of whether all conditions in the Contract Documents have been met. 3. Partial payment may be made for products eligible for offsite delivery and storage only upon Contractor’s presentation of a bill of sale, a paid invoice, or an affidavit certifying that the material is received by the Contractor free and clear of all liens, encumbrances, and secured interest of any kind including offsite delivery. 4. Partial payment for products delivered and stored offsite shall be contingent upon Contractor’s compliance with the storage and protective maintenance requirements set forth in the Contract Documents and all other requirements necessary to preserve equipment warranties for the benefit of the Agency. 5. The cost of materials and equipment delivered but not incorporated into the Work will not be included in the progress estimate. 6. Costs associated with the delivery to and storage at an offsite facility shall be at Contractor’s expense regardless of the Engineer’s approval to deliver and store the materials. 7. Contractor shall provide written evidence to the Engineer of having made arrangements for unrestricted access by the Agency and the Agency’s authorized representatives to the materials wherever stored, including provisions for the Agency to take control and possession of such materials at any time and without restriction. Contractor shall furnish the Engineer a permit of entry, from the owner of the property, for at least 6 months after the NOC has been filed. The permit of entry shall contain information similar to the following: PERMIT OF ENTRY: Permission is granted to the Agency and its designated employees or agents to enter upon the property described in this permit for a period of not less than 6 months after the NOC has been filed for the Police & Fire Headquarters Chiller Replacement for the purpose of removing materials for which advance materials on hand payment has been made to (Contractor’s Name). The property is owned by (Owner’s Name) and is described as follows: (Address and Description of Property). (Include signature(s) and date(s) for owner and lessee or purchaser, and, if appropriate, attach a copy of a warehouse receipt or contract for storage. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 145 8. The material shall be clearly marked and identified as being specifically fabricated, produced, and reserved for use on the Project. The Contractor shall provide payment documentation for the materials. 7-3.4 Mobilization. ADD the following: 1. Mobilization consists of Work necessary for the movement of personnel, equipment, supplies, and incidentals to and from the Site; for establishment of all offices, buildings, storage yards, and other facilities necessary for the Work; and for all other Work and operations which shall be performed prior to beginning the Work and after completion of the Work on the various Contract items on the Site. 2. Contractor shall properly design the Project parameters to incorporate construction mobility for moving on and off the Site in a manner that limits disturbance to the surrounding residences, businesses, and any other citizens. This includes the designated staging areas, loading areas, and assemblage areas. Contractor shall consider and address access rights of the public at all times. Prepare a mobilization plan that shall describe and govern Contractor’s mobilization activities. 3. When a Bid item has been provided for “Mobilization,” payment for mobilization Work shall be distributed equally over the first 2 progress payments up to the Bid amount of the “Mobilization” Bid item but shall not exceed 3% of the Contract Price. If Contractor’s Bid item for “Mobilization” exceeds 3% of the Contract Price, then anything above 3% of the Contract Price shall be paid as a part of the Final Payment. 4. The complete dismantling and removal of all of Contractor’s properties, temporary facilities, equipment, materials, construction wastes, and personnel at the Site referred to as demobilization is included in the payment for mobilization, unless there is a Bid item for demobilization. 5. If a separate Bid item has not been provided for mobilization, the payment for mobilization is included in the Contract Price. 7-4 PAYMENT FOR EXTRA WORK 7-4.1 General. ADD the following: 1. With every request for payment, Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a breakdown showing monthly and cumulative amounts of the Work performed under the Change Order by Contractor and Contractor’s Subcontractors. The reporting format shall be approved by the Engineer. 2. When the price for the Extra Work cannot be agreed upon, the Agency will pay for the Extra Work based on the accumulation of costs. 7-4.2 Basis for Establishing Costs. 7-4.2.1 Labor. 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 146 ADD the following: 1. The costs of labor will be the actual cost for wages of workers performing the Extra Work at the time the Extra Work is done, plus employer payments of payroll taxes, workers compensation insurance, liability insurance, health and welfare, pension, vacation, apprenticeship funds, and other direct costs, resulting from federal, state, or local laws, as well as assessments or benefits required by lawful collective bargaining agreements. 2. The use of a labor classification which would increase the Extra Work cost will not be permitted unless the Contractor establishes the necessity for such additional costs. Labor costs for equipment operators and helpers shall be reported only when such costs are not included in the invoice for equipment rental. The labor cost for foremen shall be proportionate to all their assigned work and only that applicable to Extra Work will be paid. 3. Nondirect labor costs, including superintendence, shall be considered part of the markup of Section 7-4.2.1(1). 4. The Agency reserves the right to request the following: a. Financial records of salaries for an employee. b. Wage rates/Certified Payroll. c. Bonuses and deductions. 5. Contractor shall list the labor rates of its personnel and Subcontractors who work on the Project. The payment for payroll records is included in the Contract Price. 6. If Contractor’s proposal for Extra Work is based upon services and Work to be performed outside Normal Working Hours, the labor charges associated with the Extra Work shall consist of straight time wages and burdens plus the appropriate overtime or shift premium with no additional burdens, such as fringe benefits, on the premium portion. 7-4.2.2 Tool and Equipment Rental. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following: 1. No payment shall be made for the use of tools which have a replacement value of $200 or less. 2. Regardless of ownership, the rates and delay factors to be used in determining equipment rental costs shall not exceed those listed in the latest edition of the Caltrans publication entitled “Labor Surcharge and Equipment Rental Rates” preceding the date the Work is accomplished. The latest edition of the Caltrans publication is available at www.dot.ca.gov. The delay factors therein shall be used as multipliers of the rental rates for determining the value of costs for delay to the Contractor and Subcontractors, if any. The labor surcharge rates published therein are not a part of this Contract. 3. Contractor shall be entitled to a rental rate adjustment when Contractor can substantiate that the rental rates prevailing locally exceed the published rates by more than 15%. For equipment not listed in the Caltrans publication, rental rates shall not exceed listed rates prevailing locally at equipment rental agencies or distributors at the time the Work is performed. 4. Whenever possible, Extra Work shall be accomplished using equipment available on Site or owned by Contractor. If a specific piece of equipment shall be rented to be used exclusively 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 147 for the Extra Work, the rental rate shall be the invoiced rate. The rental rates paid shall include the cost of fuel, oil, lubrication, supplies, small tools, necessary attachments, repairs and maintenance of any kind, depreciation, storage, insurance, and all incidentals. Necessary loading and transportation costs for equipment used on the Extra Work shall be included. 5. If rental equipment is not being used or used intermittently and could be returned to its rental source rather than holding it at the Work Site, the Contractor shall return the equipment at no expense to the Agency unless Contractor elects to keep it at the Work Site at Contractor’s expense. 6. The reported rental time for equipment already at the Work Site shall be the duration of its use on the Extra Work. This time shall begin when equipment is first used on Extra Work, plus the time required to move it from its previous site and back or from its previous site to a closer site. 7. All equipment shall be acceptable to the Engineer, in good working condition, and suitable for the purpose for which it is to be used. 7-4.2.3 Materials. The cost of materials reported shall be at invoice or lowest current price at which such materials are locally available and delivered to the job Site in the quantities involved, plus sales tax, freight, and delivery. The Agency reserves the right to approve materials and sources of supply, or to supply materials to the Contractor if necessary, for the progress of the Work. No markup shall be applied to any material provided by the Agency. 7-4.2.4 Invoices. Vendors’ invoices for material, equipment rental and other expenditures shall be submitted with the request for payment. If the request for payment is not substantiated by invoices or other documentation, the Agency may establish the cost of the item involved at the lowest price which was current at the time of the report. 7-4.3 Markup. 7-4.3.1 Work by the Contractor. DELETE in its entirety and REPLACE with the following: The following percentages shall be added to the Contractor’s costs and shall constitute the markup for all overhead and profits: Labor 20 Materials 15 Equipment Rental 15 Other Items and Expenditures 15 To the sum of the costs and markups provided for in this section, 1% shall be added as compensation for bonding. 7-4.3.2 Work by a Subcontractor. DELETE in its entirety and REPLACE with the following: 00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 148 When all or any part of the Extra Work is performed by a Subcontractor, the markup established in 7-4.3.1 shall be applied to the Subcontractor’s actual cost of such Work. A markup of 10 percent on the first $5,000 of the subcontracted portion of the Extra Work and a markup of 5 percent on Work added in excess of $5,000 of the subcontracted portion of the Extra Work may be added by the Contractor. 7-4.4 Daily Reports. ADD the following: Payment for Extra Work will not be made until such time that the Contractor submits completed daily reports and all supporting documents to the Engineer. When the price for the Extra Work cannot be agreed upon, the Contractor shall submit a daily report to the Engineer on forms approved by the Agency. Included are applicable delivery tickets, listing all labor, materials, and equipment involved for that day, and other services and expenditures when authorized. Payment for Extra Work will not be made until such time that the Contractor submits completed daily reports and all supporting documents to the Engineer. Failure to submit the daily report by the close of the next Working Day may waive any rights for that day. An attempt shall be made to reconcile the report daily, and it shall be signed by the Engineer and the Contractor. In the event of disagreement, pertinent notes shall be entered by each party to explain points which cannot be resolved immediately. Each party shall retain a signed copy of the report. Reports by Subcontractors or others shall be submitted through the Contractor. The report shall: 1. Show names of workers, classifications, and hours worked. 2. Describe and list quantities of materials used. 3. Show type of equipment, size, identification number, and hours of operation, including loading and transportation, if applicable. 4. Describe other services and expenditures in such detail as the Agency may require. END OF SECTION 00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 149 00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS INTRODUCTION The Specifications contained in this 00 7400 Agency Supplemental Technical Provisions take precedence over the specification language contained in the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, "The Greenbook" latest edition and all errata. This specification addresses the unique conditions in Carlsbad that are not addressed in The Greenbook. Therefore, if there is a conflict, these Specifications shall control. The Greenbook may be purchased at Bidder/Contractors local technical bookstore or directly from the publisher. These Agency Supplemental General Provisions are available only for download from the online bidding portal with Contract Documents. The Agency does not provide hard copies. When used in the Contract Documents, statements or command phrases (active voice and imperative mood) refer to and are directed at the “Bidder” or “Contractor” as applicable. The Specifications are written to the “Bidder” before award and the “Contractor” after award. Before award, interpret sentences written in the imperative mood as starting with “The Bidder shall.” Interpret the term “you” as “the Bidder” and interpret the term “your” as “the Bidder’s.” After award, interpret sentences written in the imperative mood starting with “The Contractor shall.” Interpret the term “you” as “the Contractor” and interpret the term “your” as “the Contractor’s. Where a section is identified as (Not Used) or “Not Used”, The Greenbook specification shall control and no modifications to the Greenbook language are proposed. PART 2 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS SECTION 200 – ROCK MATERIALS 200-2 UNTREATED BASE MATERIALS 200-2.1 General. ADD the following: 1. Aggregate base shall be Crushed Aggregate Base per Greenbook Section 200-2 and as specified in this section. 200-2.2 Crushed Aggregate Base. 200-2.2.1 General. ADD the following: Crushed Aggregate Base shall be free from organic matter and other deleterious substances, and shall be of such nature that it can be compacted readily under watering and rolling to form a firm, stable base. 1. The aggregate shall not be treated with lime, cement or other chemical material before tests are performed. 2. Samples for testing shall represent every 500 cubic yards or one day's production, whichever is smaller. If the results of the aggregate grading tests do not meet the requirements for Percentage Passing Sieve as specified in Table 200-2.2.2, but meet the Quality Requirements as specified in Table 200-2.2.3, placement of the aggregate base may be continued for the remainder of that day. However, another day's Work may not be started until test results 00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 150 indicate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the next material to be used in the Work will comply with the requirements specified for Percentage Passing Sieve. 3. If the results of both the aggregate grading and Sand Equivalent tests do not meet the requirements of Section 200-2.2, the aggregate base which is represented by these tests shall be removed. However, if requested by the Contractor, and approved at the sole discretion of the Engineer, the aggregate base may remain in place and the Contractor shall pay to the Agency $50 per cubic yard for such aggregate base left in place. The Agency may deduct this amount from any moneys due, or that may be come due, to the Contractor under the Contract. SECTION 203 – BITUMINOUS MATERIALS 203-1 PAVING ASPHALT. 203-1.3 Test Reports and Certification. DELETE in its entirety and REPLACE with the following: 1. Paving asphalt shall be supplied by Caltrans or other State Department of Transportation approved vendors unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions. At delivery time, the supplying vendor shall deliver to the purchaser a certified copy of the test report. This report shall indicate the vendor's name, grade of paving asphalt delivered, date/ time and point of delivery, quantity delivered, ticket number, purchase order number, and results of specified tests. The certified test report and the testing required in connection with the report shall be submitted in accordance with 3-8.4. 2. Final acceptance of the material will be dependent upon the determination by the Engineer that the material involved conforms to the Specifications. 203-6 ASPHALT CONCRETE. 203-6.1 General. DELETE in its entirety and REPLACE with the following: 1. Asphalt concrete shall be the product of mixing mineral aggregate and up to 20 percent RAP with asphalt binder at a central mixing plant. 2. When specified in the Special Provisions, asphalt concrete may contain greater than 20 percent RAP or be produced using a WMA technology. 3. Asphalt concrete containing any modified paving asphalt or WMA technology or WMA additive shall not include more than 15 percent RAP. 4. Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the Plans, asphalt concrete mixtures shall conform to 203-6.4. 203-6.2.5.4 Testing. DELETE the fourth sentence and REPLACE with the following: 1. When using greater than 20 percent RAP, the following additional tests shall be performed: SECTION 209 – PRESSURE PIPE 209-1 IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS. 209-1.1 Ductile Iron Pipe (DIP). 209.-1.1.1 General 00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 151 ADD the following: 1. Ductile iron pipe and fittings and installation shall be as shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions and shall conform with the City of Carlsbad Engineering Standards, Volumes 2 and 3. 209-1.1.2 Materials. DELETE entirely and replace with the following: 1. Unless otherwise specified, ductile iron pipe shall conform to the following: TABLE 209-1.1.2 Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements Pipe Manufacturing Standards Conform to AWWA C151/ANSI 21.5 for 3”-64” (75 mm – 1600 mm) pipe. Design Standards Conform to AWWA C150/ANSI A21.50 and AWWA M41. NSF Certification NSF 61 certification required for potable water pipe. Material Ductile iron. Size As shown on the Plans. Minimum Wall Thickness 3”-12” (75 mm – 300 mm) pipe Pressure Class 350. 14” – 36” (350 mm – 900 mm) pipe Pressure Class 250. 42” – 64” (1050 mm – 1600 mm) pipe Pressure Class 200. Pipe with threaded flanges Per AWWA C115/ANSI 21.15. Pipe with grooved couplings Thickness Class 53. Markings Conform to AWWA C151 Section 4.6. Lengths 18’ or 20’ (5.5 m or 6.1 m) lengths per AWWA C151/ANSI A21.51. Shorter lengths may be used to facilitate curves or fit horizontal or vertical alignment. Interior Lining and Exterior Coating Buried Exterior Coatings Shop coat with 1 prime coat of asphaltic coating approximately 1 mil (25 µm) thick per AWWA C151. Exterior Coatings on Pipe Above Ground and in Vaults Conform to 212-12. Cement-Mortar Interior Lining (AWWA C104 “Double Thickness” Pipe Size Lining Thickness 3” – 12” (75 mm – 300 mm) pipe 1/8” (3 mm) 14” – 24” (350 mm – 0600 mm) pipe 3/16” (5 mm) 00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 152 Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements 30” – 64” (900 mm – 1600 mm) pipe 1/4” (6 mm) Conform to AWWA C104 using Type II cement Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Interior Lining where shown on the Plans Conform to 212-12. Ceramic Epoxy Interior Lining, where shown on the Plans Amine cured novalac epoxy lining. Permeability rating of 0.00. Abrasion resistance < 4 mils (100 µm) loss after 1,000,000 cycles on ± 22.5 sliding aggregate slurry abrasion test using a sharp natural siliceous gravel with particle size between 2 mm and 10 mm. Joints Standard Push-on Style AWWA C111/ANSI 21.11 Mechanical Joint AWWA C111/ANSI 21.11 Flange (threaded) AWWA C115/ANSI 21.15 Restrained Style Special push-on type joint providing longitudinal restraint to full test pressure without relying on thrust block. Boltless, restrained push-on joint design with positive axial locking restrained system capable of deflection after assembly. Use 1 type of restrained joint exclusively for all Work. Bell Joint Gaskets Material Conform to AWWA C111-ANSI A21.11. Vulcanized styrene butadiene rubber (SBR). Material for Hydrocarbon Applications and Contaminated Soils NBR (Nitrile) (acrylonitrile butadiene), FLUOREL, or FKM (Viton) (fluorocarbon). Gasket Age < 180 Calendar Days old or > 2 years old but retested < 60 Calendar Days prior to installation Flange Gaskets Material 212-2.7. Fittings Material Ductile iron. Standards Conform to AWWA C110/ANSI 21.10 or AWWA C153/ANSI A21.53. Style Push-on (standard) with restrained joint (as shown), or flanged. Mechanical joint with special approval. Marking Cast letters “DI” or “DUCTILE” into fittings, unless otherwise specified. Cast “AWWA C110” or “AWWA C153” depending on thickness. 00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 153 Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements Exterior Coatings Use same coating as adjacent pipe, as specified above. Interior Linings Use same lining as adjacent pipe, as specified above. Ductile Iron Pipe Joint Restraints Material Ductile iron. Style Gripping wedge Design Pressure Rating 3” – 16” (75 mm – 400 mm) 350 psi (2.4 MPa) 18” – 64” (450 mm – 1600 mm) 250 psi (1.7 MPa) Pipe Shop Coat Prime Coat 12 mils (300 µm) MDFT. Polyethylene PE Encasement Polyethylene Film and Tape Conform to 212-12.1.1. Color per 212-12.2 Alternate to Polyethylene Encasement Pipe Finish Coat 15 mils (375 µm) MDFT field-applied bitumastic coating. 209-2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS. 209-2.1 General. ADD the following: 1. Steel pipe and fittings and installation shall conform with the City of Carlsbad Engineering Standards, Volumes 2 and 3. 209-2.3 Mill-Type Steel Pipe. 209-2.3.1 Materials. DELETE entirely and replace with the following: 1. Unless otherwise specified, mill-type steel pipe shall conform to the following: TABLE 209-2.3.1 Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements Pipe Manufacturing Standards Furnace-welded, electrically welded or seamless pipe conforming to AWWA C200 for pipe 6” (150 mm) and larger or ANSI B36.10 for pipe smaller than 6” (150 mm) or for pipe with wall thickness specified by strength or schedule on the Plans. Design Standards Conform to AWWA M11. NSF Certification NSF 61 certification required for potable water pipe. Material ASTM A53 Grade A or B, ASTM A134 (steel plate per ASTM A283 Grades C or D or A36), ASTM A135, or ASTM A139. Size As shown on Plans. 00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 154 Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements Conform to dimensional tolerances of AWWA C200 for pipe ≥ 6” (150 mm) identified on the Plans by class, gauge or decimal wall thickness. Conform to ANSI B36.10 for pipe > 6” (150 mm) or for pipe specified on the Plans by strength or wall-thickness schedule. Minimum Wall Thickness Where the Plans do not show thickness, submit design and supporting calculations prepared by the manufacturer in accordance with AWWA M11 using a maximum design working stress of 1/2 the yield stress for the grade of steel used in pipe fabrication. Compute wall thickness using pressure equal to 250 psi (1.72 MPa) or the design pressure shown on the Plans plus 50 psi, whichever is greater. No pipe 4” (100 mm) and larger outside buildings or vaults shall have a wall thickness less than 14-gauge (1.9 mm) No pipe 4” (100 mm) and larger inside buildings or vaults shall have a wall thickness less than 3/8” (9.5 mm). Markings Mark each special and each length of straight pipe at bell end to identify: • Manufacturer’s name or mark • Type of steel • Design pressure • Diameter and weight of pipe or special • Proper location of pipe or special by reference to layout schedule Lengths Furnish in single random lengths, double random lengths, or in specified cut lengths. For single random lengths, average length shall not be less than 17.5’ (5.3 m) and no piece shall be shorter than 9’ (2.7 m). For double random lengths average length shall not be less than 35’ (10.7 m), not less than 10^ of pieces shall be shorter than 26.25’ (8.0 m) and no piece shall be shorter than 14’ (2.7 m). For specified cut lengths, the actual pipe length shall not vary from the specified length by more than 1/8” (3 mm). Interior Lining and Cement- Mortar Interior Conform to AWWA C205 and AWWA C602 using Type II/V cement. 00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 155 Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements Exterior Coating (Required on exposed steel surfaces and ring joints) Lining and Exterior Coating Trim mortar lining as necessary to allow full operation of butterfly or check valves at connections to steel pipe. Line exposed portions of pipe interior with hand- applied epoxy conforming to 212-12. 3/4” (19 mm) min coating thickness unless otherwise shown or soil is identified as corrosive. Trim coating 6” to 12” (150 mm to 300 mm) above grade on spools penetrating to daylight or vault interiors. Cold-Applied Tape Exterior Coatings Conform to AWWA C209 for the exterior of specials, connections, and fittings. Conform to AWWA C214 for steel pipeline coatings. Liquid Epoxy Interior Lining and Exterior Coating of Above-Ground Pipe Conform to AWWA C210 and 212-12. Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Interior Lining and Exterior Coating of Above-Ground Pipe Conform to AWWA C213 and 212-12. Extruded Polyolefin Exterior Coatings Conform to AWWA C215 for extruded coatings. Conform to AWWA C216 for heat-shrinkable cross- linked coatings. Joints Ends Prepared for Mechanical- Coupled Field Joints Conform to AWWA C200 Section 4.13. Square cut or beveled with no burrs. Outside surfaces where coupling seats shall be free of indentations, projections, or roll marks to ensure watertight seal. Pipe ends shall have the tolerances within limits required by the mechanical coupling manufacturer. Field-Butt- Welded Joints Pipe with wall thickness 15/64” (6.0 mm) or greater, intended for field butt welding. Bevel pipe on outside, inside or both sides as shown or specified. Bevel angle shall be 30 to 35 degrees measured from plane perpendicular to pipe axis. Width of root face at pipe end shall be 1/32” to 3/32” (0.8 mm to 2.3 mm) Flanged Joint Forged steel conforming to ASTM A181 Faced and dimensioned in accordance with ASME/ANSI B16.5 for 00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 156 Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements the pressure class shown on the Plants or specified in the Special Provisions. Threads for screwed flanges and companion pipe ends shall conform to ASME/ANSI B1.20.1. Pipe ends for welding neck flanges shall be beveled. Flange Gaskets Material 212-2.7 Fittings Material Same steel as pipe. Standards Manufacture from mill-type steel pipe in accordance with ASME/ANSI B16.9. Exterior Coatings Use same coating as adjacent pipe, as specified above. Interior Linings Use same lining as adjacent pipe, as specified above. 209-4 PVC PRESSURE PIPE. 209-4.1 General. ADD the following: 1. PVC pipe and fittings and installation shall conform with the City of Carlsbad Engineering Standards, Volumes 2 and 3. 209-4.2 Materials. DELETE entirely and replace with the following: 1. Unless otherwise specified, PVC pressure pipe shall conform to the following: TABLE 209-4.2 Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements Pipe Manufacturing Standards Conform to AWWA C900 for pipe 4” – 60” (100 mm – 1,500 mm). Design Standards Conform to AWWA M23 using hydraulic design basis below. NSF Certification NSF 61 certification required for potable water pipe. Material Virgin rigid poly-vinyl-chloride. Conform to ASTM D1784 Cell Class 12454B or better. Conform to NSF 13. Conform to AWWA C900 Section 4.2. Markings (each pipe) Conform to AWWA C900 Section 6.1. Mark applicable AWWA standard. Show nominal pipe diameter. Show AWWA pressure class or DR. Show NSF 61 stamp (for potable water service). Show manufacturer and manufacturing date code. Size As shown on the Plans. 00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 157 Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements Conform to outside diameter of ductile iron pipe unless otherwise shown. Minimum Wall Thickness (Dimension Ratio) Design Pressure and Diameter Shown on the Plans Minimum Dimension Ratio 0-100 psi (.7 MPa) 4” – 16” (100 mm – 400 mm) DR 18 (Class 235) 100-200 psi (1.0 MPa) 4” – 16” (100 mm – 400 mm) DR 14 (Class 305) Greater than 200 psi (1.4 MPa) or greater than 16” Use DIP or Steel Pipe Pipe with Grooved Couplings Use DIP or Steel Pipe Lengths Laying lengths shall be 20’ with option to supply up to 15% random (minimum length 10’) sections Joints Standard Push- on Style Conform to ASTM D3139. Bell Joint Gaskets Material Elastomeric membrane per AWWA C900 Section 4.2.4 (Gaskets and Lubricants) and ASTM F477. Butadiene styrene (SBR or BR) for potable water. Ethylene propylene (EPM or EPDM) for recycled water. Material for Hydrocarbon Applications and Contaminated Soils Elastomeric membrane per AWWA C900 Section 4.2.4 (Gaskets and Lubricants) and ASTM F477. NBR (Nitrile) (acrylonitrile butadiene), FLUOREL or FKM (Viton) (fluorocarbon). Gasket Age < 180 Calendar Days old or < 2 years old but retested < 60 Calendar Days prior to installation Fittings Material Ductile iron. Standards Conform to AWWA C110/ANSI 21.10 or AWWA C153/ANSI A21.53. Style Push-on (standard) or restrained joint (as shown). Marking Cast letters “DI” or “DUCTILE” into fittings, unless otherwise specified. Exterior Coatings 1 mil (25 µm) petroleum asphaltic coating. Interior Linings Cement mortar (double thickness). Plastic Film Wrap for Corrosion Protection Conform to 212-12.1.1. Color per 212-12.2. 00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 158 209-5 HIGH-DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) SOLID WALL PRESSURE PIPE. 209-5.1 General. ADD the following: 1. HDPE pipe and fittings and installation shall conform with the City of Carlsbad Engineering Standards, Volumes 2 and 3. 209-5.2 Materials. DELETE in its entirety and replace with the following: 1. Unless otherwise specified, HDPE pressure pipe shall conform to the following. TABLE 209-5.2 Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements Pipe Manufacturing Standards (Potable Water Pipe) Conform to AWWA C901 for pipe 1/2” – 3” (12.5 mm – 75 mm). Conform to AWWA C906 for pipe 4” – 63” (100 mm – 1575 mm). Manufacturing Standards (Non-Potable Water Pipe) Conform to ASTM F714 Design Standards Conform to AWWA M55. NSF Certification NSF 61 certification required for potable water pipe. Material ASTM D3350 PE 4710 Cell classification 4454 or higher. Conform to AWWA C901 Section 4.2 or AWWA C906 Section 4.2 as appropriate. Markings (each pipe) Conform to AWWA C901 or C906 Section 6.1. Mark applicable AWWA standard. Show nominal pipe diameter. Show standard material code designation. Show AWWA pressure class or DR. Show NSF 61 stamp (for potable water service). Show manufacturer and manufacturing date code. Size 1-1/4” – 63” (32 mm – 1575 mm) diameter as shown on the Plans. Ductile iron pipe size (DIPS) outside diameter for pipe 4” – 48” (100 mm – 1200 mm) unless otherwise shown. Iron pipe size (IPS) outside diameter for pipe ≤ 4” (100 mm) or > 48” (1200 mm). Minimum Wall Thickness (Dimension Ratio) Design Pressure Shown on the Plans Minimum Dimension Ratio 0-80 psi (0.6 MPa) DR 21 80-100 psi (0.7 MPa) DR 17 00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 159 Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements 100-150 psi (1.0 MPa) DR 11 150-200 psi (1.4 MPa) DR 9 Greater than 200 psi Use ductile iron or steel Joints Style Thermal butt fusion for joining pipe in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Flanged for connections to appurtenances and other pipe materials in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Flange Back- up Ring Provide flange back-up ring of Type 316 SS or fusion bonded epoxy coated ductile iron. Design Pressure Match design pressure rating of pipe shown on the Plans. Fusion Fittings Standards ASTM D2683 socket-type, ASTM D3261 butt-type, or ASTM F1055 electrofusion (fittings shall be marked as complying). Material HDPE conforming to pipe specifications. Pressure Rating De-rated pressure of fitting shall meet or exceed design pressure rating of pipe shown on the Plans. Adaptor Fittings (For Connections to Flanged Fittings) Internal Stiffener Ring Required for mechanical joint connections. Backup Ring Stainless steel. Thrust Restraint. HDPE in-line wall anchors and thrust blocks and per manufacturer’s requirements. 209-7 PIPELINE IDENTIFICATION. 209-7.2 Requirements. DELETE in its entirety and replace with the following: 1. Pipeline identification shall conform to the following: TABLE 209-7.2 Function Type Materials/Method Pipe Contents Identification Pipe Color (Plastic Pipe or Polywrap) Blue for Potable Water. Purple for Recycled Water. Green for Sewage. AND Stenciling Stenciling marked on pipe in contrasting color to background color of pipe stating: “POTABLE WATER,” “CAUTION RECYCLED WATER – DO NOT DRINK” or ”CAUTION SEWER” as appropriate. 5/8” (16 mm) high letters. Repeated at 1 foot (300 mm) intervals. 00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 160 Function Type Materials/Method OR Identification Tape Polyethylene tape 6” (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (100 µm) minimum thickness with 2” (50 mm) high letters stating: “POTABLE WATER,” “CAUTION RECYCLED WATER – DO NOT DRINK” or “CAUTION SEWER” as appropriate. For pipe > 12” (300 mm) diameter, use 12” (300 mm) wide tape. Color – Blue with black or white letters for potable water, Purple with black or white letters for recycled water, Green with black or white letters for sewage. Attached to top of pipe with adhesive tape. Pipe Warning and Locating Warning and Locating Tape Polyethylene tape 6” (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (100 µm) minimum thickness with 2” (50 mm) high letters stating: “CAUTION: WATERLINE BURIED BELOW,” “CAUTION: RECLAIMED WATERLINE BURIED BELOW – DO NOT DRINK,” or “CAUTION: SEWER BURIED BELOW” as appropriate. For pipe > 12” (300 mm) diameter, use 12” (300 mm) wide tape. Color – blue with black or white letters for potable water, Purple with black or white letters for recycled water, Green with black or white letters for sewage. Place in pipe trench 18” (450 mm) above pipe. Tape shall contain metallic strip that can be registered by magnetic field locating device. OR Locating Wire In lieu of installing metallic warning tape; non-metallic warning tape 18” (450 mm) above pipe and 10-guage copper wire attached to top of pipe and accessibly terminated may be used. 212-3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS, CASINGS SPACERS, AND WALL PENETRATIONS. 212-3.4 Rubber Annular Hydrostatic Sealing Devices. 212-3.4.1 General. DELETE the last sentence and REPLACE with the following: 1. The sealing device shall be capable of sealing a minimum hydrostatic pressure of 20 psi. 212-5 VALVES. 212-5.5.1.2 Materials. DELETE TABLE 212-5.5.1.2 in its entirety and REPLACE with the following: 00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 161 TABLE 212-5.5.1.2 Item Option Reference Specification/Requirements Body and Cover Ductile Iron or ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12. Body and Cover for Pressures over 250 psi (1.7 MPa) Ductile Iron ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12. Disc and Disc Arm Ductile Iron ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12. Seat SAE Type 316 Stainless Steel ASTMA276. Pivot Shaft SAE Type 316 Stainless Steel ASTMA276. 212-10 SERVICE LATERALS, METERS, AND METER BOXES. 212-10.3 Corporation Stops, Angle Meter Valves, Service Saddles and Other Service Materials. DELETE the last sentence of the first paragraph and REPLACE with the following: 1.Unless otherwise shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions, service saddles and corporation stop inlets shall be threaded per NPT tapered per ANSI B1.20.1. ADD the following: 212-13 TRACER WIRE FOR NON-METALLIC PIPE. 212-13.1 General. 1.Tracer wire shall conform to the following: a)Conductor: Minimum 10 AWG, copper clad steel or solid copper (direct burial) or 8 AWG, copper clad steel (directional drilling), rated for 30 volts. b)Break load: minimum 600-lb (direct burial); 2,500-lb (directional drilling) c)Insulation: High Molecular Weight Polyethylene (HMWPE), minimum 30-mil (direct burial); 45-mil (directional drilling). Color per the APWA uniform color code. d)Splices and connectors: For direct burial only, moisture displacement and corrosion proof, direct bury splice kits, UL rated for 600 volts. SECTION 216 – PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BOX 216-4 TESTING REQUIREMENTS. 216-4.2.2 Acceptance. DELETE the first paragraph and REPLACE with the following: 1.When the average compressive strength of all cylinders tested is equal to or greater than the specified compressive strength of the PCC, and not more than 10 percent of the cylinders tested have an average compressive strength less than 90 percent of the specified compressive strength, and no cylinder tested has a compressive strength less than 85 percent of the specified compressive strength, the lot will be accepted. SECTION 217 – BEDDING AND BACKFILL MATERIALS 217-1 BEDDING MATERIAL. 217-1.1 General. ADD the following: 1.Bedding for pressure pipe of any material shall conform with the City of Carlsbad Engineering Standards, Volumes 2 and 3. 00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 162 217-1.2 Bedding Material for Plastic Pipe. DELETE the second paragraph and REPLACE with the following: 1.For HDPE, PVC solid wall, and PE solid wall pipe in gravity applications, the bedding material shall be crushed rock conforming to the requirements shown in Table 217-1.2 unless otherwise specified or shown on the Plans. 217-2 TRENCH BACKFILL. 217-2.1 General. DELETE TABLE 217-2.1 and replace with the following: TABLE 217-2.1 Zone Zone Limits Maximum Rock Size (greatest dimension) Sand Equivalent (Excluding Rock) Backfill Zone From subgrade to 12” (300 mm) above top of pipe or conduit 4” (150 mm) Not less than 20 unless otherwise shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions. 00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 163 PART 3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS (Not Used) PART 4 EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 400 – PROTECTION AND RESTORATION SECTION 401 – REMOVAL 401-3 CONCRETE AND MASONRY IMPROVEMENTS. 401-3.2 Concrete Curb, Walk, Gutters, Cross Gutters, Curb Ramps, Driveway and Alley Intersections. DELETE in its entirety and REPLACE with the following: 1.Concrete shall be removed to neatly sawed edges with saw cuts made through the entire thickness. Concrete sidewalk or driveway to be removed shall be neatly sawed in straight lines either parallel to the curb or at right angles to the alignment of the sidewalk. No section to be replaced shall be smaller than 30 inches (750 mm) in either length or width. All existing concrete shall be removed to the nearest joint. Concrete shall be removed to neatly sawed edges with saw cuts made to a depth deep enough to produce a clean straight break without loosening, cracking or damaging adjoining improvements. Curb and gutter shall be sawed on a neat line at right angles to the curb face. PCC and all other material unsuitable for use as fill, as determined by the Engineer, shall be removed from the right-of- way and disposed of by the Contractor at a site of his own choice and shall pay all costs incidental to the disposal. ADD the following: 401-3.2.1 Adjacent Asphalt Concrete (AC/AB) Sawcut and Removal. 1.Adjacent AC/AB sawcut and removal associated with concrete construction shall be full depth and a minimum width of 12 inches from face of concrete edge and continue along the concrete scheduled for removal. Removal and disposal of adjoining AC/AB section shall be incidental to the removal of concrete structure Bid item per this Section. Replacement of adjoining AC/AB section shall be incidental to replacement of the concrete as specified in Section 303-5. SECTION 402 – UTILITIES 402-1 LOCATION. 402-1.1 General. DELETE the first paragraph and REPLACE with the following: 1.Known utilities and their respective owners are shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions and their locations are based on available records. The accuracy and/or completeness of the utilities shown on the Plans is not guaranteed and actual locations must be confirmed by potholing. Where underground utilities are shown on the Plans, the Contractor shall assume every property parcel will be served by a service connection for each type of utility. INSERT, after the first sentence of the third paragraph, the following: Subsurface installations shall be located at least 5 Working Days and at least 500 feet in advance of any construction heading and the results reported in written form to the Engineer. AMEND letter d) to read as follows: d) horizontal location with reference to Project stationing. 00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 164 402-2 PROTECTION. DELETE the first 3 paragraphs and REPLACE with the following: 1.The Contractor shall not interrupt the service function or disturb the support of any utility without authority from the utility owner or direction from the Engineer. Valves, switches, vaults, and meters shall be maintained readily accessible for emergency shutoff. Excavation of soils providing support to pressure pipeline thrust blocks may require isolation and de- pressurization of the pipeline prior to the installation of support devices and the Contractor shall coordinate such Work with the utility owner. 2.Where a vertical separation distance of 12 inches cannot be attained between a proposed utility and an existing utility greater than 4 inches in diameter, place a 1-inch thick neoprene or silicone pad with Shore A durometer hardness of 50 to 70 (ASTM D2240) in contact with the top of the lower utility and backfill with Portland cement concrete sand conforming to 203-1.5.5 to 3 inches above the bottom of the upper utility. The width of the pad shall be equal to the width of the trench and the length shall extend 1 foot beyond the outer limits of the existing utility. 3.Where protection is required to ensure support of utilities located as shown on the Plans or in accordance with 402-1, the Contractor shall, unless otherwise specified, furnish and place the necessary protection at its expense. 4.Upon learning of the existence and location of any utility omitted from the Plans, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer in writing. When authorized by the Engineer, support or protection of the utility will be paid for as provided in 7-3 or 7-4. 402-4 RELOCATION. DELETE paragraphs 3 and 4 and REPLACE with the following: 1.When the Plans or Special Provisions provide for the Contractor to alter, relocate, or reconstruct a utility, all costs for such Work, including temporary utility service, shall be included in the Bid for the items of Work necessitating such Work. Temporary or permanent relocation or alteration of utilities requested by the Contractor for its convenience shall be its responsibility and it shall make all arrangements and bear all costs. 2.The Contractor will relocate service connections as necessary within the limits of the Work or within temporary construction or slope easements in accordance with the procedures and upon the approval of the utility owner. When directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall arrange for the relocation of service connections as necessary between the meter and property line, or between a meter and the limits of temporary construction or slope easements. Payment for the relocation of such service connections shall be in accordance with 7-3 unless otherwise specified in the Bid. Payment will include disconnection of existing service connections from the utility main, capping or plugging existing outlets on the utility main, abandoning the service connection, and the restoration of all existing improvements which may be affected by the service connection relocation. The Contractor may agree with the owner of any utility to disconnect and reconnect private interfering service connections. Unless otherwise specified in the Bid, disconnection and reconnection of private services will be outside of the scope of the Work and the Agency will not be involved in any such agreement. 00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 165 402-5 DELAYS DUE TO UTILITY CONFLICTS. DELETE paragraphs 1 through 4 and REPLACE with the following: 1.The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of its Construction Schedule insofar as it affects the protection, removal, or relocation of utilities. The notification shall be included as a part of the Construction Schedule in accordance with 6-1 which shall be revised upon the completion of utility potholing and evaluation for potential utility conflicts. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of any subsequent changes in the Construction Schedule which will affect the time available for protection, removal, or relocation of utilities. 2.The Contractor will not be entitled to damages or additional payment for delays attributable to utility relocations or alterations if correctly located, noted, and completed in accordance with 402-1. 3.The Contractor may be given an extension of time for unforeseen delays attributable to unreasonably protracted interference by utilities in performing Work correctly shown on the Plans. 4.The Agency will determine the scope of Work for the removal, relocation, or protection of existing main or trunk line utility facilities within the area affected by the Work if such utilities are not identified in the Contract Documents. The Contractor will not be assessed liquidated damages for any delay caused by the removal, relocation, or protection of such existing facilities. 402-6 COOPERATION. DELETE in its entirety and REPLACE with the following: 1.When necessary, the Contractor shall so conduct its operations as to permit access to the Work Site by the Agency or the utility owner and provide time for utility Work to be accomplished during the progress of the Work. 1. PART 5 PIPELINE SYSTEM REHABILITATION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 166 SECTION 2 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS a.The Contractor shall perform Work and furnish materials, labor, tools, equipment or services that may be reasonably inferred as being required to produce the intended result, whether specifically called for in the Contract Documents, at no additional cost to the Agency. b.Visible, existing improvements for which no specific disposition is made on the Plans, but which interfere with the Work, shall be removed, and disposed of by the Contractor with the prior approval of the Engineer. c.The completed Work will provide the Agency with two new 50-ton chillers, a new electrical distribution board, and improved drainage in the central plant area, as more fully described in the Drawings and the technical specifications. Provide all labor, material and equipment for the following: 1.Selective demolition of the existing electrical, control wiring/devices and waterlines serving the existing chiller; 2.Removal and disposal of the existing 100-ton chiller; 3.Selective demolition of the electrical feeding various equipment in the central plant area served by the existing electrical distribution cabinet; 4.Removal and disposal of the existing electrical distribution cabinet; 5.Selective concrete demolition in areas of the central plant to accommodate new drainage grate system, and housekeeping pad expansion for chillers; 6.Install new concrete drainage grate system and housekeeping pad extension per the project plans and specifications; 7.Install conduits, wiring and new electrical distribution board per the project plans and specifications; 8.Install two new 50-ton chillers per the project plans and specifications; 9.Install all new piping and electrical connections to make the new 50-ton chillers fully operational per the plans and specifications; 10.Complete all other improvements as indicated per the plans and specifications. d.Location of the Project is 2560 Orion Way, Carlsbad. e.Work also includes: e.g., compliance with environmental requirements, cooperation with city’s construction manager; maintaining safe Work area throughout the construction period; traffic control if/as needed; and obtaining all permits needed to perform the indicated Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01 11 20 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 167 01 11 20 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE a.The Contract Price shall cover all Work required by the Contract Documents. All costs in connection with the proper and successful completion of the Work, including furnishing all materials, equipment, supplies, and appurtenances; providing all construction plant, equipment, and tools; and performing all necessary labor and supervision to fully complete the Work, shall be included in the unit and lump sum Bid prices. All Work not specifically set forth as a pay item in the Bid Form shall be considered a subsidiary obligation of Contractor and all costs in connection the Work shall be included in the Bid prices. b.All estimated quantities stipulated in the Bid Form or other Contract Documents are approximate and are to be used only (a) as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the Work and (b) for the purpose of comparing the Bids submitted for the Work. The actual amounts of Work done and materials furnished under unit price items may differ from the estimated quantities. The basis of payment for Work and materials will be the actual amount of Work done and materials furnished. Contractor agrees that it will make no claim for damages, anticipated profits, or otherwise on account of any difference between the amounts of Work actually performed and materials actually furnished and the estimated amounts therefor. c.Payment for each Bid Item shall be made in accordance with Sections 7-2 and 7-3 of the Agency Supplemental General Provisions and the Bid. All Work shown or described in the Contract Documents and necessary for the functioning of installed equipment or constructed facilities and the repair or replacement of damaged existing improvements in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be considered as included in the Bid Items. 1.02 BID ITEMS a.Items listed on the Bid Schedule in Section 00 41 00 Bid Form shall be billed on a monthly basis. 1.03 SUBMITTALS b.Informational Submittals: 1.Schedule of Values 2.Schedule of Estimated Progress Payments: i.Submit with initially acceptable Schedule of Values. ii.Submit adjustments thereto with Application for Payment. 3.Application for Payment. 4.Final Application for Payment. 1.04 CASH ALLOWANCES – Not Used. 1.05 SCHEDULE OF VALUES (SOV) a.Upon request of the Construction Manager, the Contractor shall provide documentation to support the accuracy of the SOV. 01 11 20 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 168 b.The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer for review a SOV within the time specified in the Contract Documents. c.When requested by the Engineer, the SOV shall divide each lump sum Bid item into its respective activities as listed in the Construction Schedule, and the sum of the costs apportioned to the activities comprising the Bid item shall equal the Bid item price. The Contractor shall add additional detail to the SOV when, in the opinion of the Engineer, such detail is necessary to represent the basis for payment. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a corrected Schedule of Values within 10 Calendar Days of the Engineer’s request. d.The Contractor shall make adjustments to the approved SOV to account for Change Orders or Extra Work. The SOV entries for adjustments so made shall be approved by the Engineer. e.The Contractor shall submit a revised SOV with each payment request. f.Payment for the preparation of or revisions to the SOV shall be included in the Contract Price and no additional payment will be made therefor. g.Lump Sum Work: 1.Must reflect specified cash and contingency allowances and alternates, as applicable. 2.List bonds and insurance premiums, mobilization, demobilization, preliminary and detailed progress schedule preparation, equipment testing, facility startup, and Contract closeout separately. i.Mobilization includes, at minimum, items identified in Section 01 50 00, Temporary Facilities and Controls. 3.Break down by Division 02 through 49 with appropriate subdivision of each specification for each Project facility. h.An unbalanced or front-end loaded schedule will not be acceptable. i.Summation of the complete SOV representing all the Work shall equal the Contract Price. j.The Contractor shall submit SOV electronically in a spreadsheet format compatible with latest version of MS Excel. 1.06 SCHEDULE OF ESTIMATED PROGRESS PAYMENTS a.Show estimated payment requests throughout Contract Times aggregating initial Contract Price. b.Base estimated progress payments on initially acceptable progress schedule. Adjust to reflect subsequent adjustments in progress schedule and Contract Price as reflected by modifications to the Contract Documents. 01 11 20 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 169 1.07 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT a.Transmittal Summary Form: Attach 1 Summary Form with each detailed Application for Payment for each schedule and include Request for Payment of Materials and Equipment on Hand as applicable. Execute certification by authorized officer of Contractor. b.Use detailed Application for Payment Form provided by Construction Manager. c.Provide separate form for each schedule as applicable. d.Include accepted Schedule of Values for each schedule or portion of lump sum Work and the unit price breakdown for the Work to be paid on a unit priced basis. e.Include separate line item for each Change Order and Work Change Directive executed prior to date of submission. Provide further breakdown of such as requested by Construction Manager. f.Preparation: 1.Round values to nearest dollar. 2.Submit Application for Payment, including a Transmittal Summary Form and detailed Application for Payment Form(s) for each schedule as applicable, a listing of materials on hand for each schedule as applicable, and such supporting data as may be requested by Construction Manager. 1.08 PAYMENT a.Transmittal Summary Form: Attach 1 Summary Form with each detailed Application for Payment for each schedule and include Request for Payment of Materials and Equipment on Hand as applicable. Execute certification by authorized officer of Contractor. b.Each month, the Engineer will make an approximate measurement of the Work performed to the closure date as basis for making monthly progress payments. The estimated value will be based on Contract Unit Prices, completed Change Order Work. Progress payments shall be made no later than 30 Calendar Days after the closure date. Five Working Days following the closure date, the Engineer shall complete the detailed progress pay estimate and submit it to the Contractor for the Contractor’s information. Should the Contractor assert that additional payment is due, the Contractor shall within 10 Calendar Days of receipt of the progress estimate, submit a supplemental payment request to the Engineer with adequate justification supporting the amount of supplemental payment request. Upon receipt of the supplemental payment request, the Engineer shall, as soon as practicable after receipt, determine whether the supplemental payment request is a proper payment request. If the Engineer determines that the supplemental payment request is not proper, then the request shall be returned to the Contractor as soon as practicable, but not later than 7 Calendar Days after receipt. The returned request shall be accompanied by a document setting forth in writing the reasons why the supplemental payment request was not proper. Consistent with Public Contract Code Section 20104.50, the Agency shall make payments within 30 Calendar Days after receipt of an undisputed and properly submitted supplemental payment request from the Contractor. If payment of the undisputed supplemental payment request is not made 01 11 20 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 170 within 30 Calendar Days after receipt by the Engineer, then the Agency shall pay interest to the Contractor equivalent to the legal rate set forth in subdivision (a) of Code of Civil Procedure Code Section 685.010. c.After final inspection, the Engineer will make a Final Payment Estimate and process a corresponding payment. This estimate will be in writing and shall be for the total amount owed the Contractor as determined by the Engineer and shall be itemized by the Contract Bid item and Change Order item with quantities and payment amounts and shall show all deductions made or to be made for prior payments and amounts to be deducted under provisions of the Contract. All prior estimates and progress payments shall be subject to correction in the Final Payment Estimate. d.The Contractor shall have 30 Calendar Days from receipt of the Final Payment Estimate to make a written statement disputing any Bid item or Change Order item quantity or payment amount. The Contractor shall provide all documentation at the time of submitting the statement supporting its position. Should the Contractor fail to submit the statement and supporting documentation within the time specified, the Contractor acknowledges that full and final payment has been made for all Contract Bid items and Change Order items. e.If the Contractor submits a written statement with documentation in the aforementioned time, the Engineer will review the disputed item within 30 Calendar Days and make any appropriate adjustments on the Final Payment. Remaining disputed quantities or amounts not approved by the Engineer will be subject to resolution as specified in Section 2-10, Disputed Work. f.The written statement filed by the Contractor shall be in sufficient detail to enable the Engineer to ascertain the basis and amount of the disputed items. The Engineer will consider the merits of the Contractor’s claims. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish within a reasonable time such further information and details as may be required by the Engineer to determine the facts or contentions involved in its claims. Failure to submit such information and details will be sufficient cause for denying payment for the disputed items. 1.09 MOBILIZATION (Not Used) 1.09 EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING a.Except where otherwise specified, the unit or lump sum price Bid for each item of Work which involves excavation or trenching shall include all costs for such Work. No separate payment shall be made for excavation or trenching. All trenching shall be unclassified as to materials which may be encountered, and trenches shall be unclassified as to depth. All excavation Work required for structures shall be unclassified as to materials which may be encountered; such excavation Work shall be considered to be a subsidiary obligation of Contractor and the cost of such excavation shall be included in the prices Bid for the structures. 01 11 20 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 171 PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 172 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE 1.01 PROCORE PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COLLABORATION SYSTEM a.This project may utilize the Owner’s Procore (www.procore.com) online project management and document control platform. The intent of utilizing Procore is to reduce cost and schedule risk, improve quality and safety, and maintain a healthy team dynamic by improving information flow, reducing non-productive activities, reducing rework and decreasing turnaround times. The Contractor is required to create a free web-based Procore user account(s) and utilize web-based training / tutorials (as needed) to become familiar with the system. Unless the Engineer approves otherwise, the Contractor shall process all project documents through Procore because this platform will be used to submit, track, distribute and collaborate on project. If unfamiliar or not otherwise trained with Procore, Contractor and applicable team members shall complete a free training certification course located at http://learn.procore.com/procore-certification- subcontractor. The Contractor is responsible for attaining their own Procore support, as needed, either through the online training or reaching out to the Procore support team. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to regularly check Procore and review updated documents as they are added. There will be no cost to the Contractor for use of Procore. It is recommended that the Contractor provide mobile access for Windows, iOS located at https://apps.apple.com/us/app/procore-construction-management/id374930542 or Android devices located at https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.procore.activities with the Procore App installed to at least one on-site individual to provide real-time access to current posted drawings, specifications, RFIs, submittals, schedules, change orders, project documents, as well as any deficient observations or punch list items. Providing mobile access will improve communication, efficiency, and productivity for all parties. The use of Procore for project management does not relieve the contractor of any other requirements as may be specified in the contract documents. END OF SECTION 01 32 00 SUBMITTALS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 173 01 32 00 SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL a.Each submittal shall be consecutively numbered. Resubmittals shall be labeled with the original submittal number followed by an ascending alphabetical designation (e.g., ‘4-A’ would indicate the first resubmittal of the fourth submittal). Each submittal shall be accompanied by a letter of transmittal on the Contractor’s letterhead which shall contain the following: 1.Agency Project title and Contract number. 2.Specification section number(s) pertaining to material submitted for review. 3.Submittal number. 4.Description of the contents of the submittal. 5.Identification of any deviation from the Contract Documents on the transmittal and by redline on the shop or working Drawings. 6.Contractor’s certification statement. 7.Printed name and signature of submitter, title and date. b.The Contractor shall place the following certification statements on all submittals and shall subscribe to one of the following: "I certify that the materials, equipment or construction procedure(s) contained in this submittal meet all requirements shown or specified in the Contract Documents with no exceptions.” Or "I certify that the materials, equipment or construction procedure(s) contained in this submittal meet all requirements shown or specified in the Contract Documents, except for the following deviation(s):” c.Shop Drawings and engineering data (submittals) covering all equipment and all fabricated components and building materials which will become a permanent part of the Goods and Special Services under this Contract shall be submitted to Engineer for review, as required. Submittals shall verify compliance with the Contract Documents, and shall include Drawings and descriptive information in sufficient detail to show the kind, size, arrangement, and the operation of component materials and devices; the external connections, anchorages, and supports required; the performance characteristics; and dimensions needed for installation and correlation with other materials and equipment. d.Each submittal shall cover items from only one section of the specification unless the item consists of components from several sources. Contractor shall submit a complete initial submittal including all components. When an item consists of components from several sources, Contractor's initial submittal shall be complete including all components. e.All submittals, regardless of origin, shall be approved by Contractor and clearly identified with the name and number of this Contract, Contractor's name, and references to 01 32 00 SUBMITTALS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 174 applicable specification paragraphs and Contract Drawings. Each copy of all submittals, regardless of origin, shall be stamped or affixed with an approval statement of Contractor. Each submittal shall indicate the intended use of the item in the Goods and Special Services. When catalog pages are submitted, applicable items shall be clearly identified and inapplicable data crossed out. The current revision, issue number, and date shall be indicated on all Drawings and other descriptive data. f.Contractor shall be solely responsible for the completeness of each submittal. Contractor's stamp or affixed approval statement of a submittal, is a representation to Engineer that Contractor accepts sole responsibility for determining and verifying all quantities, dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data, and that Contractor has reviewed and coordinated each submittal with the requirements of the Goods and Special Services and the Contract Documents. g.All deviations from the Contract Documents shall be identified as deviations on each submittal and shall be tabulated in Contractor's letter of transmittal using Figure P-01300- 2. Such submittals shall, as pertinent to the deviation, indicate essential details of all changes proposed by Contractor (including modifications to other facilities that may be a result of the deviation) and all required piping and wiring diagrams. h.The Contractor shall submit shop Drawings electronically. All submittals shall be made with the selected method, and the Contractor shall inform the Engineer by letter 1 week after award of the Contract, which method has been selected. Submittals made by any method other than that selected by the Contractor, will be returned without review. i.Submittal documents shall be in black and white unless color is required for the review of the submittal. All electronic files shall be in PDF as generated by Adobe Acrobat Professional latest version. The PDF file(s) shall be fully indexed using the Table of Contents, searchable with thumbnails generated. PDF images must be at a readable resolution. For most documents, they should be scanned or generated at 300 dots per inch (dpi). Optical Character Recognition (OCR) capture must be performed on these images so that text can be searched, selected and copied from the generated PDF file. The PDF documents shall have a bookmark created in the navigation frame for each major entry (“Section” or “Chapter”) in the Table of Contents. Thumbnails shall be generated for each page or graphic in the PDF file. The opening view for each PDF document shall be as follows: 1.Initial View: Bookmarks and Page 2.Magnification: Fit In Window 3.The file shall open to the Contractor’s transmittal letter, with bookmarks to the left. The first bookmark shall be linked to the Table of Contents. PDF document properties shall include the submittal number for the document title and the Contractor’s name for the author. j.Electronic submittal file sizes shall be limited to 10 MB. When multiple files are required for a submittal the least number of files possible shall be created. 01 32 00 SUBMITTALS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 175 k.The Contractor shall post submittals and retrieve the Engineer’s submittal review comments through the Engineer’s (Consulting Engineer’s) Project website accessible through the Internet. Instruction on procedures for posting and retrieving submittals will be provided after award of the Contract. l.Facsimiles (fax) will not be acceptable. Engineer will not accept submittals from anyone but Contractor. Submittals shall be consecutively numbered in direct sequence of submittal and without division by subcontracts or trades. 1.02 ENGINEER’S REVIEW OF SUBMITTALS a.Engineer's review of submittals covers only general conformity to the Drawings and Specifications, external connections, and dimensions that affect the layout; it does not indicate thorough review of all dimensions, quantities, and details of the material, equipment, device, or item covered. Engineer's review shall not relieve Contractor of sole responsibility for errors, omissions, or deviations in the Drawings and data, nor of Contractor's sole responsibility for compliance with the Contract Documents. b.Engineer's submittal review period shall be 21 consecutive Calendar Days and shall commence on the first Calendar Day following receipt of the submittal or resubmittal in Engineer's office. The time required to mail the submittal or resubmittal back to Contractor shall not be considered a part of the submittal review period. c.When the Drawings and data are returned with review status "NOT ACCEPTABLE" or "RETURNED FOR CORRECTION," the corrections shall be made as instructed by Engineer. If submittals are made in hard copy, 5 corrected copies shall be resubmitted. If submittals are made electronically, the corrected Drawings and data shall be resubmitted through the Project website. Resubmittals by facsimile or e-mail will not be accepted. When the Drawings and data are returned with review status "EXCEPTIONS NOTED," "NO EXCEPTIONS NOTED," or "RECORD COPY," no additional copies need be furnished unless specifically requested by Engineer. 1.03 RESUBMITTAL OF DRAWINGS AND DATA a.Contractor shall accept full responsibility for the completeness of each resubmittal. Contractor shall verify that all corrected data and additional information previously requested by Engineer are provided on the resubmittal. b.When corrected copies are resubmitted, Contractor shall direct specific attention to all revisions in writing and shall list separately any revisions made other than those called for by Engineer on previous submittals. Requirements specified for initial submittals shall also apply to resubmittals. Resubmittals shall bear the number of the first submittal followed by a letter (A, B, etc.) or a unique identification that indicates the initial submittal and correct sequence of each resubmittal. c.If more than 1 resubmittal is required because of failure of Contractor to provide all previously requested corrected data or additional information, Contractor shall reimburse Agency for the charges of Engineer for review of the additional resubmittals. 01 32 00 SUBMITTALS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 176 This does not include initial submittal data such as shop tests and field tests that are submitted after initial submittal. d.Resubmittals shall be made within 30 Calendar Day of the date of the letter returning the material to be modified or corrected, unless within 14 Calendar Days Contractor submits an acceptable request for an extension of the stipulated time period, listing the reasons the resubmittal cannot be completed within that time. e.The need for more than 1 resubmittal, or any other delay in obtaining Engineer's review of submittals, will not entitle Contractor to extension of the Contract Times unless delay of the Work is the direct result of a change in the Work authorized by a Change Order or failure of Engineer to review and return any submittal to Contractor within the specified review period. 1.04 COLOR SELECTION a.Contractor shall submit samples of colors and finishes for all accepted products before Engineer will coordinate the selection of colors and finishes with Agency. Engineer will prepare a schedule of finishes that include the colors and finishes selected for both manufactured products and for surfaces to be field painted or finished and will furnish this schedule to Contractor within 60 Calendar Days after the date of acceptance of the last color or finish sample. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA AND MANUALS a.Adequate operation and maintenance information shall be supplied for all equipment requiring maintenance or other attention. The equipment supplier shall prepare a Project specific operation and maintenance manual for each type of equipment indicated in the individual equipment sections or the equipment schedule. b.Parts lists and operating and maintenance instructions shall be furnished for other equipment not listed in the individual equipment sections or the equipment schedule. c.Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following: 1.Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 2.Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking instructions. 3.Operating instructions for startup, routine and normal operation, regulation and control, shutdown, and emergency conditions. 4.Lubrication and maintenance instructions. 5.Guide to troubleshooting. 6.Parts lists and predicted life of parts subject to wear. 7.Outline, cross section, and assembly drawings; engineering data; and wiring diagrams. 8.Test data and performance curves, where applicable. d.The operation and maintenance manuals shall be in addition to any instructions or parts lists packed with or attached to the equipment when delivered, or which may be required by Contractor. 01 32 00 SUBMITTALS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 177 e.Manuals shall be submitted in electronic format to the Engineer prior to the date of shipment of the equipment. The manuals shall be submitted and the Engineer’s review comments retrieved, through the Project website accessible through the Internet. Instruction on procedures for posting and retrieving O&M submittals and review comments will be provided after award of the Contract. When the O&M manuals are reviewed "RETURNED FOR CORRECTION,” the corrections shall be made as instructed by the Engineer or Consulting Engineer, and corrected manuals resubmitted to the Engineer or Consulting Engineer. Delivery of the final O&M shall be made 30 Calendar Days prior to placing the equipment in operation. f.All material shall be marked with Project identification, and inapplicable information shall be marked out or deleted. g.Shipment of equipment will not be considered complete until all required manuals and data have been received. 1.06 HARD COPY OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS – Not Used 1.07 ELECTRONIC OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS a.Electronic manuals shall be in Adobe Acrobat’s PDF, and shall be prepared at a resolution between 300 and 600 dpi, depending on document type. OCR capture shall be performed on these documents. OCR settings shall be performed with the “original image with hidden text” option in Adobe Acrobat Exchange. b.File size shall be limited to 10 MB. When multiple files are required the least number of files possible shall be created. File names shall be in the format OMXXXXX-YYYZ-V.pdf, where XXXXX is the 5-digit number corresponding to the specification section, YYY is a 3- digit O&M manual number, e.g., 001, Z is the letter signifying a resubmittal, A, B, C, etc, and V is a number used only when more than one 10 MB file is required for an O&M manual. c.Documents prepared in PDF format shall be processed as follows: d.Pages shall be searchable (processed for optical character recognition) and indexed when multiple files are required. 1.Of material to update the manual provided by the manufacturer. Pages shall be rotated for viewing in proper orientation. 2.A bookmark shall be provided in the navigation frame for each entry in the Table of Contents. 3.Embedded thumbnails shall be generated for each completed PDF file. 4.The opening view for PDF files shall be as follows: 5.Initial View: Bookmarks and Page 6.Page Number: Title Page (usually Page 1) 7.Magnification: Set to Fit in Window 8.Page: Single Page 9.Where the bookmark structure is longer than 1 page, the bookmarks shall be collapsed to show the chapter headings only. 01 32 00 SUBMITTALS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 178 10.When multiple files are required the first file of the series (the parent file) shall list every major topic in the Table of Contents. The parent file shall also include minor headings bookmarked based on the Table of Contents. Major headings, whose content is contained in subsequent files (children) shall be linked to be called from the parent to the specific location in the child file. The child file shall contain bookmark entries for both major and minor headings contained in the child file. The first bookmark of any child file shall link back to the parent file and shall read as follows "Return to the Equipment Name Table of Contents," e.g., Return to the Polymer Feed System Table of Contents. 11.Drawings shall be bookmarked individually. 12.Files shall be delivered without security settings to permit editing, insertion and deletion 1.08 LABELING a.As a minimum, the following information shall be included on all final O&M manual materials, including CD-ROM disks, jewel cases, and hard copy manuals: Equipment name and/or O&M title spelled out in complete words. Project Name. Agency Project/Contract Number. Specification Section Number. Example: “Section 15 55 00” Manufacturer’s name. File Name and Date. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01 41 26 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 179 01 33 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE (Not Used) 01 41 26 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS a.The Contractor is responsible to obtain all local, state and federal permits and licenses required to perform the Work. Payment for obtaining and complying with permits and licenses including, but not limited to, general construction permits, building permits, grading permits, encroachment permits, haul route permits, excavation permits, drilling permits, water discharge permits, temporary easements, licenses, inspection fees, and Federal, State and local taxes shall be borne by the Contractor and shall be included in prices Bid for Work for which such costs are appurtenant. b.The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all costs incurred for permits necessitated by its operations such as, but not limited to, permits required for sewage bypass pumping or discharge; Night Work; overload; blasting or demolition or for any permit related to the operation of equipment used in such Work. c.The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits for the disposal of all waste or surplus materials removed from the Project. The cost of the permit(s) shall be included in the price for the Bid items requiring the permits and no additional compensation will be allowed for them. d.The Contractor shall provide a copy of the permit or license to the Agency prior to performing the Work requiring the permit or license. e.Contractor shall pay for all fees applicable to Contractor’s operations. f.Contractor shall not begin Work until all permits applicable to the Work are obtained. Permits shall be maintained in valid status until acceptance of the Work by the Agency. g.The Contractor shall pay all business taxes or license fees that are required for the Work. 1.To the extent that there is a change in the type or cost of any permits, fees, licenses, or inspections after Contract award, there shall be an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price on account of such change under the Extra Work provisions. 2.The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by Applicable Laws. The Contractor is not entitled to damages or additional payment for delays attributable to the acquisition of permits. 3.The Contractor shall pay the Agency for regulatory fees, fines, or penalties imposed on the Agency arising from the Contractor’s failure to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. h.The Contractor shall obtain, pay for, and comply with required permits, licenses, work permits, and authorizations from appropriate agencies, including the following: 1.Licenses 01 41 26 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 180 i.Before submitting Bids, Contractors shall be licensed in accordance with provisions of Chapter 9, Division 3, of the Business and Professions Code. ii.City of Carlsbad Business License. 2.State and Federal permits i.Excavation and Dirt Moving Permit from Cal/OSHA ii.Safety permit from California Division of Industrial Safety iii.NPDES General Permit for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Construction and Land Disturbance Activities (LUP Type 2) iv.NPDES Permit for discharge of hydrostatic test water and potable water 3.Other permits i.City Haul Route Permit ii.Traffic Control Plan Permit iii.Grading Permit iv.Right of Way Permit v.Oversize Load Permit vi.Blasting Permit vii.Written authorization from private property owners for property utilized for staging i.The Agency will obtain for the Contractor, the following: 1.Building Permit 2.CEQA Notice of Exemption 1.02 HAUL ROUTE PERMIT a.The Contractor shall prepare a Project specific haul route plan detailing the streets intended for use in delivery of materials and import and export of soil. Contractor will be limited to the routes approved by the City of Carlsbad according to the approved haul route plan contained in the permit. 1.03 TRAFFIC CONTROL PLANS a.The Contractor shall prepare Project specific traffic control plans, and haul route plan and use such plans to obtain a traffic control permit from the City of Carlsbad Development Services Department. 1.04 RAILROAD – Not Used 1.05 STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN (SWPPP)/ GENERAL PERMIT PROJECTS LESS THAN ONE ACRE (TIER 1 and TIER 2 or Maintenance ONLY Projects that may be over an acre) A.Water Pollution Prevention. The Contractor shall plan for and implement temporary construction BMPs to mitigate the water quality impacts of land disturbance and non- storm water discharges related to construction activities in accordance the Agency’s current Municipal Stormwater Permit and Carlsbad Municipal Code Chapter 15.12. BMPs are the schedules of activities, prohibitions of practices, maintenance procedures and other management practices employed during construction activities to prevent or reduce pollution of bodies of water protected by the federal Clean Water Act (33 U.S.C. § 01 41 26 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 181 1251 et seq.) and the state Porter-Cologne Water Quality Control Act (Water Code, § 13000 et seq.), which include oceans, lagoons, lakes, streams and other sensitive water bodies and water courses. Construction BMPs also include physical devices and structural construction control measures designed to prevent soil erosion from occurring on the Work Site, or that are designed to prevent sediment from leaving the Work Site, both of which are referred to hereafter as “Water Pollution.” BMPs are also intended to protect the health, safety and welfare of the public and to prevent damage to adjoining public and private property resulting from construction activities. B.Pollution prevention practices and the minimum BMPs are required during all 12 months of the year. BMPs and other erosion control practices must be implemented as the most important “first line of defense.” The Agency has adopted the CASQA ‘Stormwater Best Management Practices Handbook: Construction,’ latest edition, as its preferred source for adopting construction BMPs. All BMPs must correspond to the BMP Fact Sheets included in the CASQA Construction Handbook. With the approval of the Engineer, or designee, the Agency may accept comparable BMPs from reputable alternative sources. As used in this section, “Engineer” shall have the same meaning as “Construction Manager.” C.The Contractor shall utilize the Agency’s Tier 1 or Tier 2 SWPPP templates and include all applicable elements provided in the template. The SWPPP templates are available on the Agency’s website at [PROJECT ENGINEER insert website address here]. Tier 1 and Tier 2 SWPPP templates include standard storm water prevention construction notes, a Project information block, a Storm Water Compliance Statement, Agency approval block and a BMP Checklist Table. The BMP Checklist Table is intended to help the Contractor select appropriate BMPs best suited to the Project and the Work. Additionally, the SWPPP shall include a Site plan showing the proposed Project Site and depicting the areas of proposed construction and proposed locations of construction BMPs. The Tier 1 and Tier 2 SWPPP plans shall be submitted as additional sheets to the construction plan set. D.The Engineer may require Contractor to adopt additional BMPs if the Engineer determines the selected BMP(s) are ineffective or incapable of preventing Water Pollution from escaping the Work site. Tier 1 and Tier 2 SWPPPs must be combined with proper and timely installation of the BMPs, thorough and frequent inspections, maintenance, and documentation. The Contractor shall ensure that the selected BMPs are appropriately incorporated into the Site design and, if required by the Engineer, must employ a qualified professional to ensure proper installation and maintenance of the BMPs. E.The Engineer may suspend the Work, consistent with Supplemental General Provisions Section 6-6, at the Contractor’s cost, that create Water Pollution or otherwise violate water quality standards required by the federal Clean Water Act (33 U.S.C. § 1251 et seq.) and the state Porter-Cologne Water Quality Control Act (Water Code, § 13000 et seq.) if the Engineer determines that the Contractor has failed to satisfy all requirements of this section. If the Contractor violates any provisions of this subsection, or if Water Pollution occurs in the Work Site for any reason, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer. 01 41 26 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 182 F.The Contractor shall immediately notify the Agency if there is a non-stormwater discharge to the storm drain conveyance system resulting from the Work or Project-related activities. In addition, the Contractor shall, within 24 hours, submit a written report to the Engineer describing the incident and corrective actions taken. If for any reason the Engineer detects Water Pollution, before notification by the Contractor, this written report shall also include an explanation of why the Contractor had not timely notified the Engineer. G.Implementation Costs. Preparation, implementation and management of Water Pollution prevention activities are incidental to the items of Work and Agency shall not make additional payment to Contractor for these costs. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 183 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.05 SANITARY FACILITIES Contractor shall furnish temporary sanitary facilities at the Site, as provided in the Contract, for the needs of all construction workers and others performing Work or furnishing services on the Project. Sanitary facilities shall be of reasonable capacity, properly maintained throughout the construction period, and obscured from public view to the greatest practical extent. If toilets of the chemically treated type are used, at least 1 toilet will be furnished for each 20 persons. Contractor shall enforce the use of such sanitary facilities by all personnel at the Site. 1.12 DAMAGE TO EXISTING PROPERTY Contractor will be held responsible for any damage to existing structures, Work, materials, or equipment because of its operations and shall repair or replace any damaged structures, Work, materials, or equipment to the satisfaction of, and at no additional cost to, Agency. Contractor shall protect all existing structures and property from damage and shall provide bracing, shoring, or other work necessary for such protection. (Optional Paragraph) Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to streets, roads, curbs, sidewalks, highways, shoulders, ditches, embankments, culverts, bridges, or other public or private property, which may be caused by transporting equipment, materials, or workers to or from the Work Site. Contractor shall make satisfactory and acceptable arrangements with the agency having jurisdiction over the damaged property concerning its repair or replacement. 1.13 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION All trees and other vegetation which must be removed to perform the Work shall be removed and disposed of by Contractor; however, no trees or cultured plants shall be unnecessarily removed unless their removal is indicated on the Drawings. All trees and plants not removed shall be protected against injury from construction operations. Trees considered by Engineer to have any significant effect on construction operations are indicated on the Drawings and those which are to be preserved are so indicated. Contractor shall take extra measures to protect trees designated to be preserved, such as erecting barricades, trimming to prevent damage from construction equipment, and installing pipe and other Work by means of hand excavation or tunneling methods. Such trees shall not be endangered by stockpiling excavated material or storing equipment against their trunks. When injuring or removal of trees designated to be preserved cannot be avoided, or when removal and replacement is indicated on the Drawings, each tree injured beyond repair or removed shall be replaced with a similar tree of the nearest size possible. 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 184 All trimming, repair, and replacement of trees and plants shall be performed by qualified nursery workers or horticulturists. 1.14 SECURITY Contractor shall be responsible for protection of the Site, and all Work, materials, equipment, and existing facilities thereon, against vandals and other unauthorized persons. No claim shall be made against Agency by reason of any act of an employee or trespasser, and Contractor shall make good all damage to Agency’s property resulting from Contractor's failure to provide security measures as specified. Security measures shall be at least equal to those usually provided by Agency’s to protect Agency’s existing facilities during normal operation, but shall also include such additional security fencing, barricades, lighting, watchman services, and other measures as required to protect the Site. 1.16 PARKING Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable parking areas for the use of all workers and others performing Work or furnishing services in connection with the Project, as required to avoid any need for parking personal vehicles where they may interfere with public traffic, Agency’s operations, or construction activities. XX 1.17 NOISE CONTROL Contractor shall take reasonable measures to avoid unnecessary noise. Such measures shall be appropriate for the normal ambient sound levels in the area during working hours. All construction machinery and vehicles shall be equipped with practical sound-muffling devices, and operated in a manner to cause the least noise consistent with efficient performance of the Work. During construction activities on or adjacent to occupied buildings, and when appropriate, Contractor shall erect screens or barriers effective in reducing noise in the building and shall conduct its operations to avoid unnecessary noise which might interfere with the activities of building occupants. XX 1.18 DUST CONTROL Contractor shall take reasonable measures to prevent unnecessary dust. Earth surfaces subject to dusting shall be kept moist with water or by application of a chemical dust suppressant. When practicable, dusty materials in piles or in transit shall be covered to prevent blowing dust. 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023 Page 185 Buildings or operating facilities which may be affected adversely by dust shall be adequately protected from dust. Existing or new machinery, motors, instrument panels, or similar equipment shall be protected by suitable dust screens. Proper ventilation shall be included with dust screens. xx 1.19 TEMPORARY DRAINAGE PROVISIONS Contractor shall provide for the drainage of storm water and such water as may be applied or discharged on the Site in performance of the Work. Drainage facilities shall be adequate to prevent damage to the Work, the Site, and adjacent property. Existing drainage channels and conduits shall be cleaned, enlarged, or supplemented as necessary to carry all increased runoff attributable to Contractor's operations. Dikes shall be constructed as necessary to divert increased runoff from entering adjacent property (except in natural channels), to protect Agency’s facilities and the Work, and to direct water to drainage channels or conduits. Ponding shall be provided as necessary to prevent downstream flooding. 1.20 EROSION CONTROL Contractor shall prevent erosion of soil on the Site and adjacent property resulting from its construction activities. Effective measures shall be initiated prior to the commencement of clearing, grading, excavation, or other operation that will disturb the natural protection. Work shall be scheduled to expose areas subject to erosion for the shortest possible time, and natural vegetation shall be preserved to the greatest extent practicable. Temporary storage and construction buildings shall be located, and construction traffic routed, to minimize erosion. Temporary fast-growing vegetation or other suitable ground cover shall be provided as necessary to control runoff. 1.21 POLLUTION CONTROL Contractor shall prevent the pollution of drains and watercourses by sanitary wastes, sediment, debris, and other substances resulting from construction activities. No sanitary wastes shall be permitted to enter any drain or watercourse other than sanitary sewers. No sediment, debris, or other substance shall be permitted to enter sanitary sewers, and reasonable measures shall be taken to prevent such materials from entering any drain or watercourse. xx END OF SECTION PROJECT MANUAL BIDDING AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS CARLSBAD POLICE AND FIRE HEADQUARTERS CHILLER REPLACEMENT IDS Project #: 22X005.08 DATE: October 02, 2024 SIGNATURE AND STAMPS Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement CITY OF CARLSBAD – POLICE AND FIRE HEADQUARTERS- CHILLER REPLACEMENT SIGNATURES AND STAMPS Specifications for Project, City of Carlsbad – Police and Fire Headquarters – Chiller Replacement have been prepared under the direction of the following architects/engineers: As to the general specifications and requirements: As to Architectural portions: 10/02/2024 Signature and Date As to Structural portions: 10/02/2024 Signature and Date SIGNATURE AND STAMPS Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement As to Electrical engineering portions: 10/02/2024 Signature and Date As to Mechanical engineering portions: 10/02/2024 Signature and Date TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10 - 1 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 22 14 13 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 22 14 23 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATIONS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 23 09 23 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13.1 HYDRONIC VALVES & SPECIALTIES 23 64 23.13 AIR-COOLED WATER CHILLERS DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33.13 CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33.16 BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33.23 SURFACE RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 23 00 LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 1 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement SECTION 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician. B. Pre-demolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins. C. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 2 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Contractor as part of change order work before start of the work. 2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Contractor as part of the change order work before start of the work E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 3 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. D. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. 1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions. B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 4 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement C. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain[ fire watch and] portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.[ Comply with requirements in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."] B. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area indicated on Drawings. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. C. Removed and Reinstalled Items: SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 5 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 02 41 19 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 03 10 00 - 1 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provisions of Division 01 apply to this section B. Section Includes: 1. Formwork for cast-in-place concrete as indicated. 2. Installation of items to be embedded in concrete, such as anchor bolts, inserts, embeds, and sleeves. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 032000: Concrete Reinforcing 2. Section 033000: Cast-In-Place Concrete 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Regulatory Requirements: Except as otherwise specified herein, Work of this section shall be in accordance with CBC, Chapter 19A, Concrete. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings indicating locations of forms, joints, embedded items, and accessories. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's Product Data for form materials and accessories. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the following as a minimum requirement: 1. Conform to ACI 347R-14 (or latest edition). 2. Plywood: Conform to tables for form design and strength in APA Form V 345. B. Mock-ups: Provide mock-ups for architectural exposed finishes; 100 square feet minimum size. Locate as required by the Architect. CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 03 10 00 - 2 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Form materials may be reused during progress of the Work provided they are completely cleaned and reconditioned, recoated for each use, capable of producing formwork of required quality, and are structurally sound. B. Form Lumber: WCLIB Construction Grade or Better, WWPA No. 1 or Better. C. Plywood: PS 1-19, Group I, Exterior Grade B-B Plyform or better, minimum 5-ply and 3/4 inch thick for exposed locations and at least 5/8 inch thick for unexposed locations, grade marked, not mill oiled. Furnished plywood with medium or high density overlay is permitted. D. Coated Form Plywood: For exposed painted concrete, plastic overlaid plywood of grade specified above, factory coated with a form coating and release agent Noxcrete", or equal. E. Tube Forms: Burke "SmoothTube,” Sonoco "Seamless Sonotubes,” or Alton Building Products "Sleek Seamless Standard Wall,” of the type leaving no marks in concrete, one- piece lengths for required heights. F. Joist Forms: Code recognized steel or molded plastic types as required. G. Special Forms: For exposed integrally-colored concrete, plywood as above with high density overlay, plywood with integral structural hardboard facing or fibrous glass reinforced plastic facing, providing specified finish. H. For Exposed Concrete Finish: 1. Plywood: New, waterproof, synthetic resin bonded, exterior type Douglas fir or Southern pine plywood manufactured especially for concrete formwork and conforming to NIST PS 1, BB grade, class I. 2. Glass-Fiber-Fabric Reinforced Plastic Forms: Matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to structural tolerances and appearance of finished concrete surfaces. 3. Steel: Minimum 16 gage sheet, well matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete, without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearances of finished concrete surfaces. 4. Plywood: "Finland Form,” or "Combi Form" distributed by North American Plywood Corporation. The material shall be furnished with hard smooth birch face veneers with phenolic resin thermally fused onto panel sides. Edges shall be factory sealed. I. Form Ties: Prefabricated rod, flat band, wire, internally threaded disconnecting type, not leaving metal within 1-1/2 inch of concrete surface. CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 03 10 00 - 3 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement J. Form Coating: Non-staining clear coating free from oil, silicone, wax, not grain-raising, "Formshield" by A.C. Horn, Inc., "Release" by Burke Concrete Accessories, or "Cast-Off" by Sonneborn Building Products. Where form liners are furnished, provide form coatings recommended by form liner manufacturer. K. Form Liner: Rigid or resilient type by L.M. Scofield, Labrado Forms, Symons, or Greenstreak L. Void Forms: Manufactured by SureVoid Products, Inc, or equal. Forms shall be "WallVoid" for temporary support of concrete walls and grade beams spanning between supports, and "SlabVoid" for creating gaps between concrete slabs or steps and underlying soils. Void forms shall be fabricated of corrugated paper with moisture resistant exterior, and shall be capable of withstanding working load of 1,500 psf. Provide accessories as required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Forms shall be constructed so as to shape final concrete structure conforming to shape, lines and dimensions of members required by Drawings and Specifications and shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar. They shall be properly braced or tied together to maintain position and shape. Forms and their supports shall be designed so that previously placed structures will not be damaged. Forms shall be true to line within the tolerances set forth in ACI 347 and ACI 117, whichever is stricter, unless otherwise directed by the Architect. 3.2 ERECTION A. Plywood shall be installed with horizontal joints level, vertical joints plumb and with joints tight. Back joints by studs or solid blocking and fill where necessary for smoothness. Reused plywood shall be thoroughly cleaned, damaged edges or surfaces repaired and both sides and edges oiled with colorless form oil. Nail plywood along edges, and to intermediate supports, with common wire nails spaced as necessary to maintain alignment and prevent warping. B. Openings for Cleaning: Provide temporary openings at points in formwork to facilitate cleaning and inspection. At base of walls and wide piers, bottom form board on one face for entire length shall be omitted until form has been cleaned and inspected. 3.3 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Forms shall not be removed until concrete has sufficiently hydrated to maintain its integrity and not be damaged by form removal operations. The contractor shall remain fully and solely responsible for structure condition and integrity in relation to decisions regarding time of form removal. The preferred method of determining form removal time is the assessment of sufficient concrete strength based on tests of field cured specimens per 3.03B; however, at the contractor’s option and sole responsibility, the contractor may refer to Section 5.7 of ACI 347R-14 for minimum elapsed times and associated footnotes and provisions. Shoring shall not be removed until member has acquired sufficient strength to support its weight, load upon it, and added load of construction. CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 03 10 00 - 4 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement B. Compressive strength of in-place concrete shall be determined by testing field-cured specimens representative of concrete location or members, as specified in Section 033000: Cast-In-Place Concrete. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion. 3.5 CLEAN UP A. Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site. END OF SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING 32 20 00 - 1 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provisions of Division 01 apply to this section B. Section Includes: 1. Concrete steel reinforcement as indicated. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 031000: Concrete Forming and Accessories 2. Section 033000: Cast-In-Place Concrete 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Regulatory Requirements: Fabrication and placement of reinforcing shall be in accordance with requirements of CBC, Chapter 19A. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit steel reinforcement Shop Drawings in accordance with ACI 315. Include assembly diagrams, bending charts and slab plans. Indicate lengths and location of splices, size and lengths of reinforcing steel. All reinforcement shop drawings shall be submitted in electronic format (PDF). B. Closeout Submittals: Record exact locations of reinforcing that vary from Shop Drawings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the following as a minimum requirement: 1. CBC, Chapter 19A, Concrete. 2. American Concrete Institute (ACI). 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) Manual of Standard Practice. 4. American Welding Society (AWS). CONCRETE REINFORCING 32 20 00 - 2 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement B. Source Quality Control: Refer to Division 01 Sections for general requirements and to following paragraphs for specific procedures. Testing laboratory retained by the Owner shall perform following conformance testing, select test Samples of bars, ties, and stirrups from the material at the Project site or from the place of distribution, with each Sample consisting of not less than two 18-inch long pieces, and perform the following tests according to ASTM A615. 1. Identified Bars: If Samples are obtained from bundles as delivered from the mill, identified as to heat number, accompanied by mill analyses and mill test reports, and properly tagged with the identification certificate so as to be readily identified, perform one tensile and one bend test for each 10 tons or fraction thereof of each size of bars. Submit mill reports when Samples are selected. 2. Unidentified Bars: When positive identification of reinforcing bars cannot be performed and when random Samples are obtained, perform tests for each 2.5 tons or fraction thereof, one tensile and one bend test from each size of bars. C. Certification of Welders: Shop and Project site welding shall be performed by certified welding operators. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Avoid exposure to dirt, moisture or conditions harmful to reinforcing. B. Reinforcing steel bars, wire, and wire fabric shall be stored on the Project site to permit easy access for examination and identification of each shipment. Material of each shipment shall be separated for size and shape. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide reinforcing of sizes, gages and lengths indicated, bent to indicated shapes. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, or ASTM A706 deformed grade 40 billet steel unless otherwise specified or indicated. B. Deformed Bar Anchors: ASTM A1064. C. Bars or Rod Mats: ASTM A184. D. Wire Fabric for Reinforcement: ASTM A1064. E. Tie Wire: ASTM A1064, fully annealed, copper-bearing steel wire, 16 gage minimum. F. Chairs, Spacers, Supports, and Other Accessories: Standard manufacture conforming to ACI-315 fabricated from steel wire of required types and sizes. For reinforcement supported from grade, provide properly sized dense precast blocks of concrete. CONCRETE REINFORCING 32 20 00 - 3 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 2.3 FABRICATION OF REINFORCING BARS: A. Comply with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice for Reinforced Concrete Construction for fabrication of reinforcing steel. B. Bending and Forming: Fabricate bars of the indicated sizes and bend and form to required shapes and lengths by methods not injurious to materials. Do not heat reinforcement for bending. Bend bars No. 6 size and larger in the shop only. Bars with unscheduled kinks or bends are not permitted. Provide only tested and permitted bar materials. C. Welding: Provide only ASTM A706 steel where welding is indicated. Perform welding by the direct electric arc process in accordance with AWS D1.4 and specified low-hydrogen electrodes. Preheat 6 inches each side of joint. Protect joints from drafts during the cooling process; accelerated cooling is not permitted. Do not tack weld bars. Clean metal surfaces to be welded of loose scale and foreign material. Clean welds each time electrode is changed and chip burned edges before placing welds. When wire brushed, the completed welds must exhibit uniform section, smooth welded metal, feather edges without undercuts or overlays, freedom from porosity and clinkers, and good fusion and penetration into the base metal. Cut out welds or parts of welds deemed defective, using chisel, and replace with proper welding. Prequalification of welds shall be in accordance with CBC requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Bars shall be bent cold. Bars partially embedded in concrete shall not be field bent except as indicated on reviewed Shop Drawings. Before installation, clean reinforcing of loose scale, rust, oil, dirt and any coating that could reduce bond. B. Accurately position, install, and secure reinforcing to prevent displacement during the placement of concrete. C. Provide metal chairs to hold reinforcement the required distance above form bottoms. In beams and slab construction, provide chairs under top slab reinforcement as well as under bottom reinforcement. Space chairs so that reinforcement will not be displaced during installation. Provide metal spacers to secure proper spacing. Stirrups shall be accurately and securely wired to bars at both top and bottom. At slabs, footings, and beams in contact with earth, provide concrete blocks to support reinforcement at required distance above grade. D. Install and secure reinforcement to maintain required clearance between parallel bars and between bars and forms. Lapped splices shall be installed wherever possible in a manner to provide required clearance between sets of bars. Stagger lapped splices. Dowels and bars extending through construction joints shall be secured in position against displacement before concrete is installed and subsequently cleaned of concrete encrustations while they are still soft. E. Do not install reinforcing in supported slabs and beams until walls and columns have been installed to underside of slabs and beams or until construction joints have been thoroughly cleaned. Reinforcing shall be inspected before placement of concrete and cleaned as required. CONCRETE REINFORCING 32 20 00 - 4 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement F. Use deformed bars unless otherwise indicated, except for spiral reinforcement. 3.2 CLEAN UP A. Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 03 20 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 32 30 00 - 1 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provisions of Division 01 apply to this section B. Section Includes: 1. Cast-in-place concrete placement and finishing. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 031000: Concrete Forming and Accessories 2. Section 032000: Concrete Reinforcing 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating locations of cast-in-place concrete Work and accessory items such as vapor barriers. Include details and locations of reinforcing, embedded items, and interfacing with other Work. All shop drawing submittals shall be in electronic format (PDF). B. Product Data: 1. Mix Design: Submit a concrete mix design for each mix that will be provided for the Work. Include water/cement ratio, size of coarse aggregate and amount of any admixture. Predict minimum compressive strength in accordance with the strength requirements shown in the drawings and/or specifications, maximum slump and air content percentage. Mix designs shall be prepared and stamped by a licensed California Civil Engineer. Mix design submittal shall be in electronic format (PDF). 2. Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete shall deliver to the project inspector a certificate with each mixer truck. Certificate shall bear the signature of representative of the testing laboratory, and shall state quantity of cement, water, fine and coarse aggregate and admixtures. C. Material Samples: Submit Samples illustrating concrete finishes, minimum 12 inches x 12 inches in size. D. Certificates: Submit a notarized certificate that each of following conforms to the latest standards indicated: 1. Aggregates – ASTM Standard C33 2. Admixtures - ASTM Standard C260 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 32 30 00 - 2 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 3. Curing materials - ASTM Standard C171 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the following as a minimum requirement. B. California Building Code (CBC), applicable edition as determined by the governing regulatory authority. C. American Concrete Institute (ACI) Publications, latest editions or as applicable as determined by the governing regulatory authority: 1. ACI 211 - Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions of Concrete. 2. ACI 304 - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. 3. ACI 305 - Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting. 4. ACI 306 - Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting. 5. ACI 308 - Recommended Practice for Curing Concrete. 6. ACI 309 - Recommended Practice for Consolidation of Concrete. 7. ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards, latest editions: 1. ASTM A 185 - Welded Steel Wire Fabric For Concrete Reinforcement. 2. ASTM C 31 - Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 3. ASTM C 33 - Concrete Aggregates. 4. ASTM C 39 - Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 5. ASTM C 88 - Soundness of Aggregates by use of Sulphate or Magnesium Sulphate. 6. ASTM C 94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete. 7. ASTM C 143 - Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 8. ASTM C 150 - Portland Cement. 9. ASTM C 171 - Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. 10. ASTM C 172 - Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 11. ASTM C 173 - Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 32 30 00 - 3 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 12. ASTM C 227 - Potential Alkali Reactivity of Cement-Aggregate Combinations (Mortar-Bar Method). 13. ASTM C 231 - Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 14. ASTM C 260 - Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 15. ASTM C 289 - Potential Reactivity of Aggregates (Chemical Method). 16. ASTM D 1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). E. Continuous inspection shall be provided at the batch plant and for transit-mixed concrete to run check sieve analysis of aggregate, check moisture content of fine aggregate, check design of mix, check cement being used with test reports, check loading of mixer trucks, and certify to quantities of materials placed in each mixer truck. F. Inspection shall be performed by a representative of a testing laboratory selected by the Owner. Owner will pay for inspection costs. Notify the laboratory 24 hours in advance of time concrete is to be mixed. Notify the laboratory of postponement or cancellation of mixing within at least 24 hours of scheduling time. G. Continuous batch plant inspection requirement may be waived in accordance with the CBC. Waiver shall be in writing. H. Strength Test of Concrete: Refer to CBC 2022 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Mixing and Placing Concrete: Refer to CBC 2022. B. Ready-mix concrete shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with ASTM C94, CBC and CBC Standards, as well as ACI 318. Each batch of concrete delivered to the project site shall be accompanied by a time slip bearing departure time and signature of batch plant supervisor. Concrete placement shall be completed, and concrete placed into its final position as shown on the drawings within 90 minutes after start of mixing. Start of mixing time and completion of concrete placement time shall be documented in writing for all concrete pours. C. Store cement and aggregate materials so as to prevent their deterioration or intrusion by foreign matter. Deteriorated or contaminated materials shall not be furnished. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS A. Cold Weather Requirements: 1. Adequate equipment shall be provided for heating concrete materials and protecting concrete during freezing or near-freezing weather. Surfaces, in which concrete is to come in contact with, shall be free from frost or ice. No frozen materials or materials containing ice shall be furnished. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 32 30 00 - 4 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 2. When placing concrete during freezing or near-freezing weather the mix shall have a temperature of at least 50 degrees F., but not more than 90 degrees F. when cement is added. Concrete shall be maintained at a temperature of at least 50 degrees F. for at least 72 hours after placing or until it has thoroughly hydrated. When necessary, concrete materials shall be heated before mixing. Special precautions shall be provided for protection of transit-mixed concrete. B. Hot Weather Requirements: 1. During hot weather, proper attention shall be provided for ingredients, production methods, handling, placing, protection and curing, to prevent excessive concrete temperatures or water evaporation which could impair required strength or durability. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Mix and deliver in accordance with requirements of CBC. B. Strength of Concrete: Concrete, unless otherwise indicated or specified, shall be provided with a minimum ultimate 28-day strength of 4,000 psi (f'c). For high-early-strength concrete, age for reaching the f'c shall be as indicated on Drawings. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C 150. Furnished cement shall be as selected and reviewed for concrete proportioning. B. Aggregates: Aggregates shall conform to ASTM C 33 and C 227 except as modified herein. Any suitable individual grading of coarse aggregate may be furnished, provided such grading results in a mix that conforms to all requirements of this specification and the drawings. The gradings shown below are typical industry values for maximum aggregate sizes from ¾” to 1-1/2”. Since this project limits maximum aggregate size to 1”, the 1-1/2” gradation information does not apply. If a smaller maximum aggregate size is used, for example 3/8”, the contractor shall submit an appropriate gradation. GRADING OF COMBINED AGGREGATE Sieve Number or 1-1/2" 1" 3/4" Size in Inches Maximum Maximum Maximum Passing a 2" ------ ------ ------ Passing a 1-1/2" 95-100 ------ ------ Passing a 1" 70-90 90-100 ------ CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 32 30 00 - 5 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement Passing a 3/4" 50-80 70-95 90-100 Passing a 3/8" 40-60 45-70 55-75 Passing a No. 4 35-55 35-55 40-60 Passing a No. 8 25-40 27-45 30-46 Passing a No. 16 16-34 20-38 23-40 Passing a No. 30 12-25 12-27 13-28 Passing a No. 50 2-12 5-15 5-15 Passing a No. 100 0-3 0-5 0-5 C. Water: Water shall be potable and free from deleterious matter. D. Admixtures: ACI 318, Section 3.6. E. Expansion Joint Fillers: Preformed strips, non-extruding and resilient bituminous type, of thickness indicated, conforming to ASTM D1751. F. Curing Paper and Liquid Curing Compounds: 1. Curing Paper: A standard brand conforming to ASTM C171, Type 1 - Regular. 2. Liquid Curing Compounds: A standard brand, clear liquid conforming to ASTM C309, Master Builders, Grace, Antihydro. G. Abrasive Aggregate: Norton Alundum, Union Carbide Carborundum, or equal, graded #12 through #30 sizes, color as selected by Architect. H. Underlayment: Latex underlayment for filling low spots in concrete shall be Tile-Tex by Flintkote Co., Webtex #60 or Fixallatex by Dowman Products Co. I. Vapor Barrier: ASTM D21O3, polyethylene sheeting, clear, 10 mils minimum thickness, impact strength greater than 70 grams per mil, 10 feet minimum width. Provide minimum 2- inch wide waterproof plastic self-adhering tape for sealing edges and ends of sheeting. 1. Moisture barrier is required where an interior area is scheduled to receive moisture sensitive floor finishes. J. Stair Strips and Nosing: 1. Fabricated from 6063-T5 extruded aluminum, mill finish. Anti-slip filler shall contain at least 60 percent virgin grain aluminum oxide abrasive. Binder shall be fully cured resilient type epoxy, with binder-to-filler ratio of 13 percent. The epoxy-abrasive filler shall extend over the curved front edge of the nosing and shall be securely bonded to the extruded aluminum base. 2. Manufactured by Wooster Products Inc. American Safety Tread Co. Inc., or equal. 3. Nosing and strips for concrete casting shall be provided with Sure-Hold anchors, chevron shaped continuous full length of nosing or strip. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 32 30 00 - 6 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 4. Nosings and anchors for attachment to hydrated concrete stairs and wood stairs shall be similar to those specified below, except they shall be provided with countersunk holes for screws and fasteners. 5. Colors: As selected by Architect to contrast with stair color. Colors shall extend uniformly through the filler. 6. Strip and Nosing Types: a. Nosings for sloped riser steel pan stairs: Type WP4J, 4-1/16 inches wide, 3/8 inch thick. b. Nosings for new concrete stairs: Type WP4C, 4-1/16 inches wide, 3/8 inch thick, nose projects down 1/4 inch. c. Nosings for square edged steel pan stairs: Type WP4SP, 4-1/16 inches wide, 3/8 inch thick nose. d. Strips for recessing into concrete stairs: Type WP1A, except 2-1/4 inches wide, 3/8 inch thick. American Safety Tread Co., Type 24, or equal. e. Strips for adhering to existing or hydrated concrete: Flex-Tred anti-safety strips, minimum 2-1/4 inches wide. Cut from rolls and round corners. f. Strips for anchoring into wood or stone: American Safety Tread Co., Type 24H, or equal, with holes for fasteners, 2-1/4 inches wide. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Time of Placing: Do not place concrete until reinforcement, conduits, outlet boxes, anchors, hangers, sleeves, bolts, and other embedded materials are securely fastened in place. Contact the inspector at least 24 hours before placing concrete; do not place concrete until inspected and approved. B. Pouring Record: A record shall be kept on the Project site of time and date of placing concrete in each portion of structure. Such record shall be maintained on the roject site until substantial completion and shall be available for examination by all project team members, including the design team, inspectors and Owner. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Moisture Barrier: Before installation of screeds and slab reinforcement, install a moisture barrier under slabs on grade. Place membrane in as large sheets as possible, lapped 12 inches at sides and ends, with top lap placed in the direction of the spreading of concrete. Extend membrane and lap at least 4 inches onto adjoining wall surfaces and seal with pressure-sensitive tape. 1. Install moisture barrier on minimum 2-inch bed of sand, unless otherwise indicated, over gravel base as indicated on the Drawings. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 32 30 00 - 7 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 2. Patch punctures and tears in moisture barrier. B. Reglets and Rebates: 1. Form reglets and rebates in concrete to receive flashing, frames and other equipment as detailed and required. Coordinate dimensions and locations required with other related Work. 2. If concrete slabs on grade adjoin a wall or other perpendicular concrete surface, form a reglet in wall to receive and carry horizontal concrete Work. Reglet shall be full thickness of the slab and shall be 3/4 inch wide, unless otherwise indicated. Requirement does not apply to exterior walks, unless specifically indicated. C. Anchor Slots: Dove-tail anchor slots at concrete walls to receive masonry veneer shall be set vertically in forms, 24 inches maximum on centers measured horizontally. Anchor slots shall be No. 24 gage galvanized sheet steel with removable fiber filler to prevent seepage of cement in slot. D. Screeds: Install screeds accurately and maintain at required grade or slab elevations after steel reinforcement has been installed, but before starting to place concrete. Install screeds adjacent to walls and in parallel rows not to exceed 8 feet on centers. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Conveying and Placing: 1. Concrete shall be placed only under direct observation of the project inspector. Do not place concrete outside of regular working hours unless the project inspector has been notified at least 48 hours in advance. 2. Concrete shall be conveyed from mixer to location of final placement by methods which will prevent separation or loss of materials. 3. Concrete shall be placed as nearly as practicable to its final position to avoid segregation due to re-handling or flowing. No concrete that has partially hydrated or has been contaminated by foreign materials shall be placed, nor shall re-tempered concrete or concrete which has been remixed after initial set be placed. 4. In placing concrete in columns, walls or thin sections, provide openings in forms, elephant trunks, tremies or other recognized devices, to prevent segregation and accumulation of partially hydrated concrete on forms or metal reinforcement above level of concrete being placed. Such devices shall be installed so that concrete will be dropped vertically. Unconfined vertical drop of concrete from end of such devices to final placement surface shall not exceed 6 feet. 5. Concrete shall be placed as a continuous operation until placing of panel or section is completed. Top surfaces of vertically formed lifts shall be level unless noted otherwise on the drawings. 6. Concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated during placement, and shall be worked around reinforcement and embedded fixtures with mechanical vibrators. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 32 30 00 - 8 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 7. Where conditions make consolidation difficult, or where reinforcement is congested, batches of mortar containing same proportions of cement, sand, and water as provided in the concrete, shall first be deposited in the forms to a depth of at least one inch. B. Compaction and Screeding: 1. Tamp freshly placed concrete with a heavy tamper until at least 3/8 inch of mortar is brought to surface. Concrete shall then be tamped with a light tamper and screeded with a heavy straightedge until depressions and irregularities are eliminated, and surface is true to finish grades or elevations. Remove excess water and debris. 2. Where slabs are to receive separate cement finish or mortar setting bed, continued tamping to raise mortar to surface is not performed. Laitance shall be removed by brushing with a stiff brush or by light sandblasting to expose clean top surface of coarse aggregate. C. Floating and Troweling: 1. When concrete has hydrated sufficiently, it shall be floated to a compact and smooth surface. After floating, wait until concrete has reached proper consistency before troweling. Top surfaces shall receive at least 2 troweling operations with steel hand trowel. Prior to and during final troweling, apply a fine mist of water frequently with an atomizing type fog sprayer. Omit troweling for slabs to receive a separate cement finish. 2. For interior finish slabs, final troweling shall provide a hard, impervious, and non-slip surfaces, free from defects and blemishes. Finished surface shall be within a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. Avoid burnishing. Do not add cement or sand to absorb excess moisture. 3. Exterior Paving and Cement Walks: Finish as specified above, except surface shall be given a non-slip broom finish to match Sample reviewed by the Architect. 4. Vertical concrete surfaces shall be finished smooth and free from marks or other surface defects. D. Curing: 1. Concrete shall be maintained above 50 degrees F., and in a moist condition for 7 days after placing, except that high early strength concrete shall be maintained in a moist condition for 3 days. 2. Before applying curing paper, interior floor treated with colored hardener shall be given a heavy protective coat of colored wax left unpolished, and then immediately covered with paper. If wax is not applied within two hours after final troweling, concrete shall be sprayed with a fine water mist and maintained continuously moist until wax is applied, unless spraying is not recommended by hardener manufacturer. After other Work such as plastering and painting has been completed, curing paper shall be removed and waxed floors cleaned of protective wax coating. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 32 30 00 - 9 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 3. Forms containing concrete, top of concrete between forms, and exposed concrete surfaces after removal of forms shall be maintained in a thoroughly wet condition for at least 7 consecutive days after placing. 4. If weather is hot or surface has dried out, spray surface of concrete slabs and paving with fine mist of water, starting not later than 2 hours after final troweling and continuing until sunset. Surface of finish shall be kept continuously wet until curing medium has been installed. 5. Immediately after finishing, roof slabs and monolithic floor finish to receive resilient floor covering shall be uniformly and completely coated with liquid curing compound. a. Install compound in a manner and quantity sufficient to produce a uniform continuous thin film of water-impervious membrane. Compound shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's directions. b. Protect adjoining surfaces from damage during installation. If curing compound is not applied immediately, cover finished concrete with wet burlap or curing paper and keep concrete surface wet for a period not to exceed thirty hours following finishing of concrete. At end of that time, burlap or paper shall be removed and curing compound installed as specified above. 5. Immediately after finishing, monolithic floor slabs not scheduled to receive resilient floor covering shall be covered with curing paper. Paper shall be lapped 3 inches at joints and sealed with waterproof sealer. Edges shall be cemented to finish. Repair or replace paper damaged during construction operations. 6. Within 24 hours after finishing, exterior slabs and paving, and interior slabs to receive cement topping or mortar setting beds, shall be covered with sand to a depth of 2 inches and kept thoroughly wet for 7 days. a. Instead of sand covering, exterior walks and paving where no other surface treatment is specified, may be cured with clear liquid curing compound immediately installed in accordance with manufacturer's directions. E. Filling, Leveling and Patching: 1. Concrete slabs exhibiting high or low spots and indicated to receive resilient floor covering or soft floor covering, shall have surfaces repaired. High spots shall be honed, or ground with power-driven machines to required tolerances. Low spots shall be filled with latex underlayment, installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. 2. Holes resulting from form ties or sleeve nuts shall be solidly packed, through exterior walls, by pressure grouting with cement grout, as specified. Grouted holes on exposed surfaces shall be screeded flush and finished to match adjoining surfaces. F. Cement Base: Cement base shall be of the height, thickness, and shape detailed. Base shall be reinforced with one inch mesh, 18 gage, zinc-coated wire fabric. Base finish mixture shall be one part Portland cement, 2 parts of fine aggregate and one part pea gravel. Colored cement base shall include a chemically inert mineral oxide pigment in the mix. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 32 30 00 - 10 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 3.4 FINISHING A. Soda and Acid Wash: Concrete surfaces to receive plaster, paint or other finish, and which have been formed by oil coated forms, shall be scrubbed with a solution of 1-1/2 pounds of caustic soda to one gallon of water. Surfaces where smooth wood or waste molds have been furnished shall be scrubbed with a solution of 20 percent muriatic acid. Wash with clean water after scrubbing. B. Sacking: Exposed concrete curbs, walls, and other surfaces shall be sacked by an application of Portland cement grout, floated, and rubbed. Sacking shall not be performed until patching and filling of holes has been completed. Entire sacking operation for any continuous area shall be started and completed within the same day. 1. Mix one part Portland cement and 1-1/2 parts fine sand with sufficient water to produce a grout having consistency of thick paint. Wet surface of concrete sufficiently to prevent absorption of water from grout. Apply grout uniformly with a brush or spray gun, then immediately float surface with a cork or other suitable float, scouring wall vigorously. 2. While grout is still plastic, finish surface with a sponge-rubber float, removing excess grout. Allow surface to dry thoroughly, then rub vigorously with dry burlap to completely remove dried grout. No visible film or grout shall remain after rubbing with burlap. C. Sandblasting: Exterior concrete surfaces to receive stucco dash coat finish, where plywood or other smooth forms have been furnished, shall be uniformly sand-blasted with sharp quartz sand under sufficient air pressure to remove dirt, form oil and other foreign materials, and roughen surface to provide a proper bond. Such surfaces shall be thoroughly washed with clean water after sandblasting. D. Abrasive: Concrete stair treads, landings, ramps and steps on interior and exterior of buildings, and interior exposed concrete floors in shop buildings shall receive an abrasive finish. Abrasive grains in amount of 30 pounds per 100 square feet shall be evenly installed by dust-on method and embedded into surface during first troweling operation. Additional abrasive grains, in amount of 30 pounds per 100 square feet, shall then be evenly installed and embedded into surface during final troweling operation. E. Floor Hardener: Exposed interior concrete floors throughout shall be treated with floor hardener, as specified. Install hardener after surface of concrete has reached the point where no excess moisture is present, but while it is still plastic. Hardener shall be installed as follows: 1. Colored Hardener: Install at rate of 40 pounds per 100 square feet of surface for initial application. 2. Gray (natural) Hardener: Install at rate of 20 pounds per 100 square feet of surface for initial application. 3. Hardener shall be evenly distributed and thoroughly floated into surface mortar with a wood float. An additional 20 pounds of hardener, colored or gray, specified as above, shall be installed over each 100 square feet, and troweled to an even surface having uniform color and texture. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 32 30 00 - 11 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement F. Cement Grout and Dry-Pack Concrete: Cement grout shall be mixed at the Project site and shall be composed of one volume of Portland cement and 2-1/2 volumes of fine aggregate. Materials shall be mixed dry with sufficient water added to make mixture flow under its own weight. When grout is used as a dry pack concrete, add sufficient water to provide a stiff mixture, which can be molded into a sphere. G. Broom Finish: Exterior stair treads and landings shall be provided with a non-slip broom finish in addition to abrasive finish specified. H. Abrasive Stair Nosing: Nosing shall be installed according to manufacturers written recommendations. 3.5 EXPANSION AND CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. Construction Joints: Details and proposed location of construction joints shall be as indicated on the Drawings, located to least impair strength of structure, in accordance with the following: 1. Thoroughly clean contact surface by sand blasting entire surface not earlier than 5 days after initial placement. 2. A mix containing same proportion of sand and cement provided in concrete plus a maximum of 50 percent of coarse aggregate shall be placed to a depth of at least one inch on horizontal joints. Vertical joints shall be wetted and coated with a neat cement grout immediately before placing of new concrete. 3. Should contact surface become coated with earth, sawdust, or deleterious material of any kind after being cleaned, entire surface shall be re-cleaned before applying mix. B. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints where indicated in walks and exterior slabs. Space approximately 20 feet apart, unless otherwise indicated. Joints shall extend entirely through slab with joint filler in one piece for width of walk or slab. Joint filler shall be 3/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated. C. Tooled Joints: Slabs, walks and paving shall be marked into areas as indicated with markings made with a V-grooving tool. Marks shall be round-edged, free from burrs or obstructions, with clean cut angles and shall be straight and true. Walks, if not indicated, shall be marked off into rectangles of not more than 12 square feet and shall have a center marking where more than 5 feet wide. 3.6 TESTING A. Molded Cylinder Tests: 1. Owner Consultant will prepare cylinders. Each cylinder shall be dated, given a number, point in structure from which sample was obtained, mix design number, mix design strength and result of accompanying slump test noted. 2. Separate tests of molded concrete cylinders obtained at same place and time shall be made at age of 3 days, 7 days, and 28 days. A strength test shall be the average CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 32 30 00 - 12 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement of the compressive strength of 2 cylinders, obtained from the same sample of concrete and tested at 28 days or at test age designated for determination of f'c. 3. Test cylinders shall be prepared at the Project site and stored in testing laboratory in accordance with ASTM C 31 and tested in accordance with ASTM C 39. B. Core Test: At request of the Architect, cores of hardened concrete shall be cut from portions of hydrated structures for testing, in accordance with CBC and ASTM C 42. 1. Provide 4-inch diameter cores at representative places throughout the structure as designated by the Architect. 2. In general, provide sufficient cores to represent concrete placed with at least one core for each 4,000 square feet of building area, and at least 3 cores total for each Project. 3. Where cores have been removed, fill voids with drypack, and patch the finish to match the adjacent existing surfaces. C. Concrete Consistency: Measure consistency according to ASTM C143. Test twice each day or partial day's run of the mixer. D. Adjustment of Mix: If the strength of any grade of concrete for any portion of Work, as indicated by molded test cylinders, fall below minimum 28 days compressive strength specified or indicated, adjust mix design for remaining portion of construction so that resulting concrete meets minimum strength requirements. E. Defective Concrete: 1. Should strength of any grade of concrete, for any portion of Work indicated by tests of molded cylinders and core tests, fall below minimum 28 days strength specified or indicated, concrete will be deemed defective Work and shall be replaced or adequately strengthened in a manner acceptable to the Architect and SEOR. 2. Concrete Work that is not formed as indicated, is not true within 1/250 of span, not true to intended alignment, not plumb or level where so intended, not true to intended grades and levels, contains sawdust shavings, wood or embedded debris, or does not fully conform to Contract provisions, shall be deemed to be defective Work and shall be removed and replaced. F. Concrete For Equipment Pads, Mechanical and Electrical Work: Unless otherwise indicated, strength shall be 4,000 psi concrete. Exposed concrete shall be provided with a hand trowel finish with radius corners and edges. Form and place concrete where necessary as described in Section 031000: Concrete Forming and Accessories and reinforced as described in Section 032000: Concrete Reinforcing. Calcium chloride shall not be furnished in any concrete mix provided for the installation of underground electrical conduits. For concrete encasement of more than one conduit, furnish 3/4 inch to 1 inch aggregate as specified for concrete mix. 3.7 CLEAN UP A. Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 32 30 00 - 13 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 03 30 00 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 22 14 13 - 1 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement SECTION 22 14 13 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Specialty pipe fittings. B. Related Section: 1. Section 33 41 00 "Storm Utility Drainage Piping" for storm drainage piping outside the building. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For storm drainage piping, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. B. Field quality-control reports. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. 2.02 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company. 2. GF Piping Systems. 3. JM Eagle. FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 22 14 13 - 2 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement B. NSF Marking: Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-drain" for plastic storm drain and "NSF-sewer" for plastic storm sewer piping. C. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665; drain, waste, and vent. D. Cellular-Core PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Schedule 40. E. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe. F. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656. G. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. 2.03 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS A. Transition Couplings: 1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in OD's or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined. 2. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified- piping-system fitting. 3. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Fernco Inc. 2) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. 3) Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies, Inc. b. Standard: ASTM C 1173. c. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. d. Sleeve Materials: 1) For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. 4. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: b. Standard: ASTM C 1460. c. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 22 14 13 - 3 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations from layout are approved on coordination drawings. B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping at indicated slopes. F. Install piping free of sags and bends. G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. H. Make changes in direction for storm drainage piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. I. Lay buried building storm drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed. J. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated: 1. Building Storm Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger. 2. Horizontal Storm-Drainage Piping: 1 percent downward in direction of flow. K. Install PVC soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." 1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. L. Plumbing Specialties: 1. Install backwater valves in storm drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Section 22 14 23 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 22 14 13 - 4 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 2. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building storm sewers in storm drainage gravity-flow piping. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in storm drainage force-main piping. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 22 14 23 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." 3. Install drains in storm drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Section 22 14 23 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." M. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. N. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 22 05 17 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." O. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 22 05 17 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." P. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 22 05 18 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping." 3.02 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints. B. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Torque bolts in cross pattern. 3.03 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION A. Transition Couplings: 1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's. 2. In Drainage Piping: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. 3.04 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to backflow. 1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install backwater valves in accessible locations. 3. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Section 22 14 23 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 22 14 13 - 5 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 3.05 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 22 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Section 22 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments. 2. Install stainless-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in corrosive environments. 3. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments. 4. Install stainless-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in corrosive environments. 5. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 6. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m) if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls. 7. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 8. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches (300 mm) of each fitting and coupling. D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. E. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum rods. F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: a. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. b. NPS 3 (DN 80): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. c. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 5/8-inch (16- mm) rod. d. NPS 6 and NPS 8 (DN 150 and DN 200): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/4-inch (19- mm) rod. G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet (4.5 m). 3.06 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 22 14 13 - 6 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties. 1. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor, and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor. 2. Install horizontal backwater valves with cleanout cover flush with floor. 3. Comply with requirements for backwater valves cleanouts and drains specified in Section 22 14 23 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment. 3.07 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify exposed storm drainage piping. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 22 05 53 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water (30 kPa). From 15 minutes before inspection starts until completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. 4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 22 14 13 - 7 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 3.09 CLEANING A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. 3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated. B. Underground storm drainage piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and smaller shall be the following: 1. PVC soil pipe and fittings; CISPI, hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints. 2. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. END OF SECTION STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 14 23 - 1 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement SECTION 22 14 23 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Roof drains. 2. Miscellaneous storm drainage piping specialties. 3. Cleanouts. 4. Through-penetration fire stop assemblies. 5. Flashing materials. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL ROOF DRAINS A. Cast-Iron, Large-Sump, General-Purpose Roof Drains: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements: a. Josam Company. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. d. Tyler Pipe. e. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASME A112.6.4, for general-purpose roof drains. 3. Body Material: Cast iron. 4. Dimension of Body: Nominal 15-inch diameter. STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 14 23 - 2 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 5. Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Required. 6. Flow-Control Weirs: Not required. 7. Outlet: Bottom. 8. Extension Collars: Not required. 9. Underdeck Clamp: Required. 10. Expansion Joint: Not required. 11. Sump Receiver Plate: Required. 12. Dome Material: Cast iron. 13. Perforated Gravel Guard: Stainless steel. 14. Vandal-Proof Dome: Required. 15. Water Dam: 2 inches high. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Downspout Adaptors: 1. Description: Manufactured, gray-iron casting, for attaching to horizontal-outlet, parapet roof drain and to exterior, sheet metal downspout. 2. Size: Inlet size to match parapet drain outlet. B. Downspout Boots: 1. Description: Manufactured, ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron casting, with strap or ears for attaching to building; NPS 4 outlet; and shop-applied bituminous coating. 2. Size: Inlet size to match downspout and NPS 4 outlet. C. Conductor Nozzles: 1. Description: Bronze body with threaded inlet and bronze wall flange with mounting holes. 2. Size: Same as connected conductor. 3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements: a. Josam Company. b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. c. Tyler Pipe. d. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Products Operation. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2.3 CLEANOUTS A. Floor Cleanouts: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements: a. Josam Company. b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. c. Tyler Pipe. d. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Products Operation. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M, for adjustable housing cleanouts. 3. Size: Same as connected branch. 4. Type: Adjustable housing. 5. Body or Ferrule Material: Cast iron. 6. Clamping Device: Not required. 7. Outlet Connection: Spigot. STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 14 23 - 3 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 8. Closure: Brass plug with tapered threads. 9. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads. 10. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy. 11. Frame and Cover Shape: Round. 12. Top-Loading Classification: Heavy Duty. 13. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout. B. Test Tees: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Josam Company. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. d. Tyler Pipe. e. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M and ASTM A 74, ASTM A 888, or CISPI 301, for cleanout test tees. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 4. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil-pipe T-branch or hubless, cast-iron soil- pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 5. Closure Plug: raised head. 6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. C. Wall Cleanouts: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Josam Company. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. d. Tyler Pipe. e. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation 2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M, for cleanouts. Include wall access. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 4. Body Material: Hubless, cast-iron soil-pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 5. Closure: Raised-head, plug. 6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 7. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with screw. 8. Wall Access: Round, nickel-bronze, copper-alloy, or stainless-steel wall-installation frame and cover. 2.4 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES A. Through-Penetration Fire stop Assemblies: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ProSet Systems Inc. 2. Standard: ASTM E 814, for through-penetration firestop assemblies. 3. Certification and Listing: Intertek Testing Service NA for through-penetration firestop assemblies. STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 14 23 - 4 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 4. Size: Same as connected pipe. 5. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs. 6. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch with neoprene O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include PVC protective cap for plug. 7. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings. 2.5 FLASHING MATERIALS A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M,12 oz./sq. ft. B. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04- inch minimum thickness unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot-dip galvanized, mill- phosphatized finish for painting if indicated. C. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil minimum thickness. D. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened. E. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed. F. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's written installation instructions. 1. Install flashing collar or flange of roof drain to prevent leakage between drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. 2. Install expansion joints, if indicated, in roof drain outlets. 3. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance. B. Install downspout adapters on outlet of back-outlet parapet roof drains and connect to sheet metal downspouts. C. Install downspout boots at grade with top 12 inches above grade. Secure to building wall. D. Install conductor nozzles at exposed bottom of conductors where they spill onto grade. E. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following instructions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Use cleanouts the same size as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate cleanouts at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 14 23 - 5 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 3. Locate cleanouts at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping. 4. Locate cleanouts at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. F. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor. G. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall. H. Install test tees in vertical conductors and near floor. I. Install wall cleanouts in vertical conductors. Install access door in wall if indicated. J. Install through-penetration fire stop assemblies in plastic conductors at concrete floor penetrations. K. Install sleeve-flashing device with each conductor passing through floors with waterproof membrane. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 22 14 13 "Facility Storm Drainage Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. 3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Fabricate flashing from single piece of metal unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required: 1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of 6.0-lb/sq. ft. lead sheets, 0.0938-inch thickness or thicker. Solder joints of 4.0-lb/sq. ft. lead sheets, 0.0625-inch thickness or thinner. B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane. 1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching the pipe size, with a minimum length of 10 inches and with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe. 2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve. 3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around specialty. C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement. D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work. STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 14 23 - 6 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION 22 14 23 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 1 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement SECTION 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Transition fittings. 3. Dielectric fittings. 4. Mechanical sleeve seals. 5. Sleeves. 6. Escutcheons. 7. Grout. 8. Mechanical demolition. 9. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 10. Painting and finishing. 11. Concrete bases. 12. Supports and anchorages. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts. E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within concrete pipe trench and unheated shelters. F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials: 1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. 2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. 3. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials: 1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 2 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following if proposed to be used on this project: 1. Transition fittings. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. 4. Escutcheons. B. Welding certificates. 1. Certificates shall be applicable for materials to be joined at the job-site. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." ASME Section VIII. B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. C. Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. D. Piping penetration through fire-rated construction assemblies, including accessory components; sleeves, sealants, packing materials and methods, and installation shall meet the requirements of the CBC, and shall be California State Fire Marshal approved. Firestopping details shall bear the UL label, indicate F-rating, T-rating, and shall meet the requirements of the California Building Code. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames." Coordinate to avoid access COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 3 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement panels at hard lid ceiling if possible. Access panel shall be located in accessible area for maintenance convenience and safety and limit disturbance to the public. D. Coordinate with other sections of the specifications for the applicability of materials specified in this section. Not every product or material listed may be used. E. Coordinate requirements of this section with actual work to be performed. This section is general in scope for basic materials and methods, all of which may not actually apply to this project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below. B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges. 2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated. C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: Bolts shall be United States Customary System bolts and nuts (e.g. ¾”). Metric bolts and nuts shall not be used. Bolts and nuts shall be stainless steel with heavy hex nuts. For HTW applications, bolts shall meet ASTM A193 Grade B7 and nuts shall meet ASTM A194 Grade 2H. D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 4 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general- duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated. G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235. 2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. 3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138. I. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer. 2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined. 1. Manufacturers: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div. c. Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated (The); Pipe Products Div. d. JCM Industries. e. Smith-Blair, Inc. f. Viking Johnson. g. Or equal. 2. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling. 3. Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling. 4. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting. B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent- cement-joint end. 1. Manufacturers: a. Eslon Thermoplastics. b. Or equal. C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end. 1. Manufacturers: a. Thompson Plastics, Inc. b. Or equal. D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC four-part union. Include brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut. 1. Manufacturers: a. NIBCO INC. b. NIBCO, Inc.; Chemtrol Div. c. Or equal. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 5 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials. B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. C. Dielectric Unions: Shall not be used. Provide 6” long brass nipple with brass unions. Or brass union and bronze ball valve on ends of nipple. D. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. 1. Manufacturers: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. e. Or equal. 2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures. E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. 1. Manufacturers: a. Calpico, Inc. b. Lochinvar Corp. c. Or equal. F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. 1. Manufacturers: a. Perfection Corp. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Victaulic Co. of America. e. Or equal. 2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. 1. Manufacturers: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. e. Thunderline Modular Seals; Link-Seal f. Or equal. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 6 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. 5. Link-Seal shall be basis of design. 2.7 SLEEVES A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. 1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws. E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. Acceptable only for concrete foundation walls below grade. F. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. 2.8 ESCUTCHEONS A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening. B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome- plated finish. C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass. D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass E. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate. F. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw. 2.9 GROUT A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout. 1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 7 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. F. Install piping to permit valve servicing. G. Install piping at indicated slopes. H. Install piping free of sags and bends. I. Install fittings or custom bends for changes in direction and branch connections. J. Install piping to allow application of insulation. K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following: 1. New Piping: a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep- pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One- piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with rough-brass finish. g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type. h. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate type. 2. Existing Piping: Use the following: COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 8 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish. b. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and spring clips. c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split- casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish. d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, cast-brass type. f. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, floor-plate type. M. Mounting hardware, including nuts, bolts and washers for outdoor applications and below grade applications must be of stainless steel materials. N. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes, except in Group L occupancy, and other locations where spill control is needed. O. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves. P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior concrete and masonry walls, and concrete floor and roof slabs. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. b. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors for areas indicated on fire code drawings as “Group L Occupancy” 4 inches above finished floor level, including slabs on grade. 2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. 3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For Group L occupancies, mechanical rooms, and wet area applications where spill containment is required. b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For applications not requiring spill containment. c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing. d. Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout. 4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation. 5. Where required, sleeve application and installation shall comply with UL approved Firestopping Detail. 6. Coordinate requirements of sound-proofing caulk, as determined by the Sound and Vibration Consultant’s recommendations. Q. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. 2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 9 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. R. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials per UBC requirements. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for material and installation requirements. Piping penetration through fire-rated construction assemblies, including accessory components; sleeves, sealants, packing materials and methods, and installation shall conform to Underwriters Laboratories Listed firestop systems. S. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. T. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements. U. Install valves in readily accessible locations, avoiding hard-lid ceilings where possible. Provide access panels for valve access complying with Division 08, and coordinate access panel locations with other disciplines. 3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D. Oxyacetylene torch welding, and cutting of structural steel or bolt holes shall not be permissible. E. Install main and branch piping using specified fittings, “T-drill”, “welded nozzles”, or “Side- Tap” or similar fitting substitution style connections are not acceptable. F. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. G. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. H. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 10 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement I. Welded Joints: See Section 23 0511 “Welding Pressure Piping.” J. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. K. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes. 3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. 4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. 5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. 6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138 Appendix. L. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139. M. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212. N. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657. 1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion. O. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install shut-off valves at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 1/2 and smaller, at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3. Install flanges, in piping NPS 3 and larger, at final connection to each piece of equipment. 4. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 5. Wet Piping Systems: Install brass union, ball valve and brass nipple fitting to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom. B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces. C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 11 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement minimum interference to other installations. Grease fittings shall be installed in accessible locations. Extended lube lines are not acceptable. D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. 3.5 PAINTING A. Painting of mechanical systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Section "High Performance Coatings." B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. 3.6 CONCRETE BASES A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to CBC seismic zone 4 requirements. 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, vibration isolator, or seismic restraint. Provide 1 inch chamfer at all corners and round over edge. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. 3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. Minimum embedment shall comply with seismic engineer’s calculations. 5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 3.7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. D. Outdoor Applications: Outdoor support assemblies and accessories shall be of “stainless steel material”, or “hot-dip galvanized carbon steel with high-performance coatings”, as noted below: 1. Stainless steel: Mounting hardware such as bolts, nuts, washers, straps, brackets, fastening hardware etc., shall be stainless steel. 2. Coated galvanized steel: Carbon steel support assemblies, including all metal fabrications for use outdoors shall comply with each paragraph listed below: a. Assemblies must be shop-fabricated and pre-assembled for one-piece hot-dip galvanized coating process. b. After hot-dip galvanized coating is applied, a high-performance exterior coating system shall be applied. Provide High-Performance Exterior COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 12 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement Coating Systems conforming to Division 09 “High Performance Coatings”, meeting all performance requirements, including salt spray test performance. c. Touch-up and repair per manufacturer’s recommendations after field installation. E. Rooftop Applications: Rooftop support assemblies and accessories shall be fabricated for outdoor applications as noted above, and shall be designed per SMACNA design requirements. 1. SMACNA Clearances: Pipes, pipe racks, and equipment shall be installed high enough above roofing surfaces to allow roofing access for maintenance and repair. Install piping and equipment at a minimum height as shown in Table 4-1 of SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual – 5th Edition. 2. SMACNA Support Systems: Piping systems and equipment supports, unless otherwise shown, use round column supports to tie-in to structure with lead jacks for built-up roofs, and single-ply preformed jacks for single-ply roofs, lead flashing, and lead umbrellas with stainless steel draw band per Figure 4-16A, or Figure 4-16B, of SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual – 5th Edition. 3.8 GROUTING A. Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout. D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout. E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases. F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment. G. Place grout around anchors. H. Cure placed grout. END OF SECTION 23 05 00 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 05 13 - 1 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement SECTION 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on alternating- current power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following: 1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors. 2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 95 deg F and rated for a coastal environment. B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 05 13 - 2 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor. B. Efficiency: Premium efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1. C. Service Factor: 1.15. D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque. 1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding. 2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed. E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed. F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage. G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating. I. Insulation: Class F. J. Code Letter Designation: 1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 2. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic. K. Enclosure Material: Totally Enclosed, Fan Cooled. Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T. 2.4 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLYPHASE MOTORS A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method. B. Motors Used with Variable-Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer. 1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width-modulated inverters. 2. Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation. 3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors. C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor. COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 05 13 - 3 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application: 1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run. B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type. C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type. E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 23 05 13 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 1 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement SECTION 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Metal framing systems. 4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 5. Fastener systems. 6. Equipment stands. 7. Equipment supports. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for components: 1. Trapeze pipe hangers. 2. Metal framing systems. 3. Pipe stands. 4. Equipment supports. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural-Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 2 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. 2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. 3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction. 2.2 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized, hot-dip galvanized, or electro- galvanized. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coated, or epoxy powder-coated. 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. B. Stainless Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support bearing surface of piping. 3. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel. 2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A. Description: MSS SP-58, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts. 2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems: 1. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated, pipe-support assembly made of steel channels, accessories, fittings, and other components for supporting multiple parallel pipes. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 3 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 2. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 3. Channels: Continuous slotted carbon-steel channel with inturned lips. 4. Channel Width: Selected for applicable load criteria. 5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel. 6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of galvanized steel. 7. Metallic Coating: Pregalvanized G90. 2.5 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS A. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psi or ASTM C591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psi minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier. B. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C533, Type I calcium silicate with 100-psi ASTM C552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psi or ASTM C591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psi minimum compressive strength. C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe. D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature. 2.6 FASTENER SYSTEMS A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type anchors for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 1. Indoor Applications: Zinc-coated or stainless steel. 2. Outdoor Applications: Stainless steel. 2.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes. 2.8 OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT STANDS 1. Description: Individual foot supports with elevated adjustable channel cross bars and clamps/fasteners/bolts for ground or roof supported outdoor equipment HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 4 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement components, without roof membrane penetration, in a pre-fabricated system that can be modularly-assembled on site. 2. Foot Material: Rubber or polypropylene. 3. Rails Material: Hot dip galvanized carbon steel. 4. Wind/Sliding Load Resistance: Up to 100 mph minimum. 2.9 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: ASTM B221. B. Carbon Steel: ASTM A1011/A1011M. C. Structural Steel: ASTM A36/A36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; galvanized. D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M. E. Threaded Rods: Continuously threaded. Zinc-plated or galvanized steel for indoor applications and stainless steel for outdoor applications. Mating nuts and washers of similar materials as rods. F. Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping materials and installation for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies. B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb. 3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure. B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 5 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field fabricate from ASTM A36/A36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled strut systems. D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping. E. Fastener System Installation: 1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. 2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Pipe Stand Installation: 1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounted Type: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane. 2. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. See Section 07 72 00 "Roof Accessories" for curbs. G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. H. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes. I. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. J. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. K. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. L. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. M. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. N. Insulated Piping: HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 6 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. 5. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. 3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth. C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. 3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following: HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 7 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches. 3.6 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Section 09 91 10 "Interior and Exterior Painting" for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780/A780M. 3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment. B. Comply with MSS SP-58 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports metal trapeze pipe hangers and metal framing systems and attachments for general service applications. F. Use stainless steel pipe hangers attachments for hostile environment applications. G. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless steel attachments for copper piping and tubing. H. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 8 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement I. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing. J. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 2. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required. 3. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection. 4. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8. 5. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 6. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 7. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 8. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8. 9. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3. 10. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 11. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction. 12. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate. 13. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe. 14. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. 15. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 16. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 24, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 17. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is unnecessary. 18. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is unnecessary. 19. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction. K. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 9 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps. L. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. M. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar- joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge. 8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads. 10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions. 11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel. 12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb. 13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited. N. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 10 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe. O. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. 2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches. 3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with springs. 4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping systems. 5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger. 6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support. 7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support. 8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load- adjustment capability. These supports include the following types: a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member. P. Comply with MSS SP-58 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. Q. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. R. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction. END OF SECTION 23 05 29 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 - 1 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement SECTION 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment labels. 2. Pipe labels. 3. Valve tags. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label. C. Valve numbering scheme. D. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS A. Metal Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: stainless steel, 0.025-inch or anodized aluminum, 0.032- inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 2. Letter Color: Black. 3. Background Color: Natural 4. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 5. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering. 6. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 - 2 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 7. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11- inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number, and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. 2.2 PIPE LABELS A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction according to ASME A13.1. B. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing. C. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. 2.3 VALVE TAGS A. Description: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers. 1. Tag Material: stainless steel, 0.025-inch or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain or beaded chain or S-hook. B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. 1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 - 3 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors. C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. 3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment. B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. 3.4 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels. B. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes, including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions. C. Pipe Label Color Schedule: 1. Chilled-Water Piping: White letters on a safety-green background. 2. Heating Water Piping: Black letters on a safety-orange background. 3. Refrigerant Piping: Black letters on a safety-white background. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 - 4 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn- watering hose connections, and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule. B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs: 1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: a. Chilled Water: 1-1/2 inches round. b. Refrigerant: 1-1/2 inches round. c. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches round. 2. Valve-Tag Colors: a. Toxic and Corrosive Fluids: Black letters on a safety-orange background. b. Flammable Fluids: Black letters on a safety-yellow background. c. Combustible Fluids: White letters on a safety-brown background. d. Potable and Other Water: White letters on a safety-green background. e. Compressed Air: White letters on a safety-blue background. f. Defined by User: White letters on a safety-purple background, black letters on a safety-white background, white letters on a safety-gray background, and white letters on a safety-black background END OF SECTION 23 05 53 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 1 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Balancing Water Systems: a. Air Cooled Chillers. b. Chilled Water Pumps 2. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Equipment: a. Motors. b. Air Cooled Chillers c. Chilled Water Pumps 3. Testing, adjusting, and balancing existing systems and equipment. 4. Control system verification. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. B. BAS: Building automation systems. C. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. D. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. E. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau. F. TAB Specialist: An independent entity meeting qualifications to perform TAB work. G. TDH: Total dynamic head. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 2 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. TAB Conference: If requested by the Owner, conduct a TAB conference at Project site after approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. 1. Minimum Agenda Items: a. The Contract Documents examination report. b. The TAB plan. c. Needs for coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. d. Proposed procedures for documentation and communication flow. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the TAB specialist and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3. C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article. D. System Readiness Checklists: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit system readiness checklists as specified in "Preparation" Article. E. Examination Report: Submit a summary report of the examination review required in "Examination" Article. F. Certified TAB reports. G. Sample report forms. H. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following: 1. Instrument type and make. 2. Serial number. 3. Application. 4. Dates of use. 5. Dates of calibration. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by AABC. 1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC. 2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC as a TAB technician. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 3 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement B. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by NEBB or TABB. 1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by NEBB or TABB. 2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by NEBB or TABB as a TAB technician. C. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 111, Section 4, "Instrumentation." D. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing." 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. B. Examine installed systems for balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are applicable for intended purpose and are accessible. C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment. D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required. F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. 1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. 2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 4 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions. G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed. H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections. I. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, filters are clean, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. J. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens have been replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations. K. Examine control valves for proper installation for their intended function of throttling, diverting, or mixing fluid flows. L. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping. M. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment. N. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes the following: 1. Equipment and systems to be tested. 2. Strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems. 3. Instrumentation to be used. 4. Sample forms with specific identification for all equipment. B. Perform system-readiness checks of HVAC systems and equipment to verify system readiness for TAB work. Include, at a minimum, the following: 1. Hydronics: a. Verify leakage and pressure tests on water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed. b. Piping is complete with terminals installed. c. Water treatment is complete. d. Systems are flushed, filled, and air purged. e. Strainers are pulled and cleaned. f. Control valves are functioning per the sequence of operation. g. Shutoff and balance valves have been verified to be 100 percent open. h. Pumps are started and proper rotation is verified. i. Pump gage connections are installed directly at pump inlet and outlet flanges or in discharge and suction pipe prior to valves or strainers. j. Variable-frequency controllers' startup is complete and safeties are verified. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 5 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement k. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided. 3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance" and in this Section. B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures. 1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts. 2. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 23 07 19 "HVAC Piping Insulation." C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings. D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units. 3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Cross-check the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts. C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity. D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements. E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers. F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. H. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. 3.5 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS A. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 6 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 4. Phase and hertz. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter size and thermal-protection-element rating. 8. Service factor and frame size. B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test manual bypass of controller to prove proper operation. 3.6 CONTROLS VERIFICATION A. In conjunction with system balancing, perform the following: 1. Verify temperature control system is operating within the design limitations. 2. Confirm that the sequences of operation are in compliance with Contract Documents. 3. Verify that controllers are calibrated and function as intended. 4. Verify that controller set points are as indicated. 5. Verify the operation of lockout or interlock systems. 6. Verify the operation of valve and damper actuators. 7. Verify that controlled devices are properly installed and connected to correct controller. 8. Verify that controlled devices travel freely and are in position indicated by controller: open, closed, or modulating. 9. Verify location and installation of sensors to ensure that they sense only intended temperature, humidity, or pressure. B. Reporting: Include a summary of verifications performed, remaining deficiencies, and variations from indicated conditions. 3.7 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused. 1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan. 2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate information. 3. Check the refrigerant charge. 4. Check the condition of filters. 5. Check the condition of coils. 6. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate-drain trap. 7. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication. 8. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements taken. Report deficiencies. B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished. Verify the following: 1. New filters are installed. 2. Coils are clean and fins combed. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 7 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 3. Drain pans are clean. 4. Fans are clean. 5. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated. 6. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected. C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are affected by the renovation work. 1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows, and determine the new fan speed and the face velocity of filters and coils. 2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment manufacturer. 3. If calculations increase or decrease the airflow rates and water flow rates by more than 5 percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or decrease is 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required. 4. Balance each air outlet. 3.8 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system's airflow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. 4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. B. Maintaining pressure relationships as designed shall have priority over the tolerances specified above. 3.9 PROGRESS REPORTING A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices. 3.10 FINAL REPORT A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems. 1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. 3. Certify validity and accuracy of field data. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 8 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following: 1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and Product Data. C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB specialist. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following: 1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. 7. Position of balancing devices. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 9 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement E. Air Cooled Chiller Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to manufacturer's factory startup equipment reports, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Fuel type in input data. g. Output capacity in Btu/h. h. Ignition type. i. Burner-control types. j. Motor horsepower and rpm. k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz. l. Motor full-load amperage and service factor. m. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. n. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Entering-air temperature in deg F. c. Leaving-air temperature in deg F. d. Air temperature differential in deg F. e. Entering-air static pressure in inches wg. f. Leaving-air static pressure in inches wg. g. Air static-pressure differential in inches wg. h. Low-fire fuel input in Btu/h. i. High-fire fuel input in Btu/h. j. Manifold pressure in psig. k. High-temperature-limit setting in deg F. l. Operating set point in Btu/h. m. Motor voltage at each connection. n. Motor amperage for each phase. o. Heating value of fuel in Btu/h. 3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Static head in feet of head or psig. b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig. c. Actual impeller size in inches. d. Full-open flow rate in gpm. e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig. f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig. g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig. h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig. i. Final water flow rate in gpm. j. Voltage at each connection. k. Amperage for each phase. F. Instrument Calibration Reports: 1. Report Data: TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 10 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration. 3.11 VERIFICATION OF TAB REPORT A. The TAB specialist's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Construction Manager. B. Construction Manager shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day. C. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED." D. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected. E. If TAB work fails, proceed as follows: 1. TAB specialists shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final inspection. 2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB specialist to complete TAB work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB specialist's final payment. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.12 ADDITIONAL TESTS A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions. END OF SECTION 23 05 93 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 - 1 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement SECTION 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes insulation for HVAC piping systems. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any). B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation. 5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties. 6. Detail application of field-applied jackets. 7. Detail application at linkages of control devices. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 - 2 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products in accordance with ASTM E84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke- developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke- developed index of 150 or less. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 23 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing. 1.8 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come into contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested in accordance with ASTM C871. HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 - 3 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable in accordance with ASTM C795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. F. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Comply with ASTM C552. 1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Type II, Class 1, without jacket. 2. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Type II, Class 2, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL jacket. 3. Factory fabricate shapes in accordance with ASTM C450 and ASTM C585. 4. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. G. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C534/C534M, Type I for tubular materials, Type II for sheet materials. H. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C1393. 1. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ jacket. 2. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. 3. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. 4. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C195. B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C196. C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C449. 2.3 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated. B. Calcium Silicate Adhesive: Fibrous, sodium-silicate-based adhesive with a service temperature range of 50 to 800 deg F. C. Cellular-Glass Adhesive: Two-component, thermosetting urethane adhesive containing no flammable solvents, with a service temperature range of minus 100 to plus 200 deg F. D. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Solvent-based adhesive. 1. Flame-spread index shall be 25 or less and smoke-developed index shall be 50 or less as tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Wet Flash Point: Below 0 deg F. HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 - 4 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 3. Service Temperature Range: 40 to 200 deg F. 4. Color: Black. E. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. F. ASJ Adhesive and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A, for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 2.4 MASTICS AND COATINGS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. B. Vapor-Retarder Mastic, Solvent Based, Indoor Use: Suitable for indoor use on below- ambient services. 1. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM E96/E96M or ASTM F1249. 2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F. 3. Color: White. C. Vapor-Retarder Mastic, Solvent Based, Outdoor Use: Suitable for outdoor use on below- ambient services. 1. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM E96/E96M or ASTM F1249. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F. 3. Color: White. 2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES A. Adhesives shall comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 1. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation. 2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Color: White. 2.6 SEALANTS A. Materials shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. B. Joint Sealants: 1. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. a. Service Temperature Range: Minus 150 to plus 250 deg F. b. Color: White or gray. C. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 3. Color: Aluminum. HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 - 5 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement D. ASJ Flashing Sealants and PVDC and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 3. Color: White. 2.7 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type II. 2.8 TAPES A. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C1136. 1. Width: 3 inches. 2. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape. B. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Width: 2 inches. 2. Thickness: 3.7 mils. 3. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 5 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width. 2.9 SECUREMENTS A. Bands: 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal. 2. Aluminum: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal. 3. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel, with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size is determined by manufacturer for application. B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4 inch wide, stainless steel or Monel. C. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel. HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 - 6 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows: 1. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature of between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range. C. Coordinate insulation installation with the tradesman installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation. D. Mix insulating cement with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless steel surfaces, use demineralized water. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and of thicknesses required for each item of pipe system, as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 - 7 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement G. Keep insulation materials dry during storage, application, and finishing. Replace insulation materials that get wet. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends attached to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward-clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self- sealing lap. Staple laps with outward-clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c. a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape, in accordance with insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings. M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 25 percent of its nominal thickness. N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches in similar fashion to butt joints. P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 - 8 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 3.4 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. 1. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers. E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping." 3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials, except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles. B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, Mechanical Couplings, and Unions: HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 - 9 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, mechanical couplings, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as that of adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. 4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. 5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers, so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below- ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. 6. Insulate flanges, mechanical couplings, and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation to fit. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union" matching size and color of pipe labels. 7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric- reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour. 8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket, except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing, using PVC tape. C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands, and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient services, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 - 10 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive, as recommended by insulation material manufacturer, and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular- glass block insulation of same thickness as that of pipe insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as that of pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 - 11 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as that of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties, and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands, and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive, as recommended by insulation material manufacturer, and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 - 12 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.9 FINISHES A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size. B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. C. Color: Final color as selected by the owner. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work. D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless steel jackets. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. D. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative. E. Tests and Inspections: Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article. F. All insulation applications will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. G. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.11 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Insulation conductivity and thickness per pipe size shall comply with schedules in this Section or with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 - 13 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement B. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Underground piping. 2. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury. 3.12 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick. b. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. B. Chilled Water and Brine, Above 40 Deg F: 1. NPS 12 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 2 inches thick. b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 2 inches thick. C. Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and Below: 1. NPS 12 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 2 inches thick. b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 2 inches thick. D. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. E. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick. F. Refrigerant Liquid Piping: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. 3.13 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Chilled Water and Brine: HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 - 14 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 3 inches thick. b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 3 inches thick. B. Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and Below: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 3 inches thick. b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 2 inches thick. C. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick. D. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick. E. Refrigerant Liquid Piping: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick. END OF SECTION 23 07 19 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 23 08 00 - 1 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement SECTION 23 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes commissioning process requirements for the following HVAC&R systems, assemblies, and equipment: 1. Cooling generation systems 2. Controls and instrumentation, including BAS. 3. Systems testing and balancing verification, including chilled water piping systems 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BAS: Building automation system. B. DDC: Direct digital controls. C. HVAC&R: Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning, and Refrigeration. D. "Systems," "Subsystems," "Equipment," and "Components": Where these terms are used together or separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, subsystems, equipment, and components. E. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For BAS and HVAC&R Testing Technician. B. Construction Checklists: See related Sections for technical requirements for the following construction checklists: 1. Vibration and seismic controls for HVAC&R piping and equipment. 2. Instrumentation and control for HVAC&R. 3. Chilled water piping. 4. Chillers 5. Pumps COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 23 08 00 - 2 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. BAS Testing Technician Qualifications: Technicians to perform BAS construction checklist verification tests, construction checklist verification test demonstrations, commissioning tests, and commissioning test demonstrations shall have the following minimum qualifications: 1. Journey-level or equivalent skill level with knowledge of BAS, HVAC&R, electrical concepts, and building operations. 2. Minimum three years' experience installing, servicing, and operating systems manufactured by approved manufacturer. 3. International Society of Automation (ISA) Certified Control Systems Technician (CCST) Level I. B. HVAC&R Testing Technician Qualifications: Technicians to perform HVAC&R construction checklist verification tests, construction checklist verification test demonstrations, commissioning tests, and commissioning test demonstrations shall have the following minimum qualifications: 1. Journey-level or equivalent skill level. Vocational School four-year program graduate or an Associates degree in mechanical systems, air conditioning, or similar field. Degree may be offset by three years' experience in servicing mechanical systems in the HVAC industry. Generally, required knowledge includes HVAC&R systems, electrical concepts, building operations, and application and use of tools and instrumentation to measure performance of HVAC&R equipment, assemblies, and systems. 2. Minimum three years' experience installing, servicing, and operating systems manufactured by approved manufacturer. 3. One of the following: a. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Technician. b. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) Certified Test and Balance Technician. c. Owner retains the right to waive NEBB or AABC Certification. C. Testing Equipment and Instrumentation Quality and Calibration: For test equipment and instrumentation required to perform HVAC&R commissioning work, perform the following: 1. Submit test equipment and instrumentation list. For each equipment or instrument, identify the following: a. Equipment/instrument identification number. b. Planned commissioning application or use. c. Manufacturer, make, model, and serial number. d. Calibration history, including certificates from agencies that calibrate the equipment and instrumentation. 2. Test equipment and instrumentation shall meet the following criteria: a. Capable of testing and measuring performance within the specified acceptance criteria. b. Be calibrated at the manufacturer's recommended intervals with current calibration tags permanently affixed to the instrument being used. COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 23 08 00 - 3 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement c. Be maintained in good repair and operating condition throughout the duration of use on this Project. d. Be recalibrated/repaired if dropped or damaged in any way since last calibrated. D. Proprietary Test Instrumentation and Tools: 1. Equipment Manufacturer's Proprietary Instrumentation and Tools: For installed equipment included in the commissioning process, test instrumentation and tools manufactured or prescribed by equipment manufacturer to service, calibrate, adjust, repair, or otherwise work on its equipment or required as a condition of equipment warranty, perform the following: a. Submit proprietary instrumentation and tools list. For each instrument or tool, identify the following: 1) Instrument or tool identification number. 2) Equipment schedule designation of equipment for which the instrument or tool is required. 3) Manufacturer, make, model, and serial number. 4) Calibration history, including certificates from agencies that calibrate the instrument or tool, where appropriate. b. Include a separate list of proprietary test instrumentation and tools in the operation and maintenance manuals. c. HVAC&R proprietary test instrumentation and tools become the property of Owner at the time of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. Certify that HVAC&R systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and started and are operating according to the Contract Documents and approved Shop Drawings and submittals. B. Certify that HVAC&R instrumentation and control systems have been completed and calibrated, that they are operating according to the Contract Documents and approved Shop Drawings and submittals, and that pretest set points have been recorded. C. Certify that TAB procedures have been completed and that TAB reports have been submitted, discrepancies corrected, and corrective work approved. D. Set systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested according to approved test procedures (e.g., normal shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position, unoccupied cycle, emergency power, and alarm conditions). E. Measure capacities and effectiveness of systems, assemblies, subsystems, equipment, and components, including operational and control functions to verify compliance with acceptance criteria. COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 23 08 00 - 4 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement F. Test systems, assemblies, subsystems, equipment, and components operating modes, interlocks, control responses, and responses to abnormal or emergency conditions, and response according to acceptance criteria. G. Construction Checklists: Prepare and submit detailed construction checklists for HVAC&R systems, subsystems, equipment, and components. 1. Contributors to the development of construction checklists shall include, but are not limited to, the following: a. HVAC&R systems and equipment installers. b. TAB technicians. c. HVAC&R instrumentation and controls installers. H. Perform tests using design conditions, whenever possible. 1. Simulated conditions may, with approval of Architect, be imposed using an artificial load when it is impractical to test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions, calibrate testing instruments. Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated conditions as directed by Commissioning Coordinator and document simulated conditions and methods of simulation. After tests, return configurations and settings to normal operating conditions. 2. Commissioning test procedures may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is impractical. 3. Commissioning test procedures may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when design or simulating conditions and altering set points are impractical. I. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the HVAC&R system, document the deficiency and report it to Owner. After deficiencies are resolved, reschedule tests. J. If seasonal testing is specified, complete appropriate initial performance tests and documentation and schedule seasonal tests. K. Coordinate schedule with, and perform the following activities at the direction of, Commissioning Coordinator. L. Comply with construction checklist requirements, including material verification, installation checks, start-up, and performance tests requirements specified in Sections specifying HVAC systems and equipment. M. Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to complete and document the following: 1. Performance tests. 2. Demonstration of a sample of performance tests. 3. Commissioning tests. 4. Commissioning test demonstrations. 3.2 TAB COMMISSIONING TESTS A. TAB Verification: COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 23 08 00 - 5 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 1. Prerequisites: Completion of "Examination" Article requirements and correction of deficiencies, as specified in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." 2. Completion of "Preparation" Article requirements for preparation of a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures, and system-readiness checks and reports, as specified in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." 3. Scope: HVAC&R air systems and hydronic piping systems. 4. Purpose: Differential flow relationships intended to maintain air pressurization differentials between the various areas of Project. 5. Conditions of the Test: a. Commissioning Test Demonstration Sampling Rate: As specified in "Inspections" Article in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." b. Systems operating in full heating mode with minimum outside-air volume. c. Systems operating in full cooling mode with minimum outside-air volume. d. For measurements at air-handling units with economizer controls; systems operating in economizer mode with 100 percent outside air. 6. Acceptance Criteria: a. Under all conditions, rechecked measurements comply with "Inspections" Article in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." b. Additionally, no rechecked measurement shall differ from measurements documented in the final report by more than two times the tolerances allowed. c. Under all conditions, where the Contract Documents indicate a differential in airflow between supply and exhaust and/or return in a space, the differential relationship shall be maintained. 3.3 CENTRAL REFRIGERATION SYSTEM COMMISSIONING TESTS A. Start and Stop Chilled-Water Pump(s): 1. Prerequisites: Installation verification of the following: a. Startup of chilled-water pump(s). b. Input Device: Flow switch in chilled-water circuit. c. Output Device: DDC system command to starter relay. d. Display of the following at the operator's workstation: 1) Chilled-water flow indication. 2) Chilled-water pump(s) on-off status. 3) Chilled-water pump(s) on-off indication. 2. Scope: Chilled-water system, including chilled-water pump(s), associated controls, and condenser-water system controls. 3. Purpose: a. Chilled-water pump(s) start. b. Chilled-water pump(s) shutdown. COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 23 08 00 - 6 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 4. Conditions of the Test: a. Verify Start: Start with chilled-water pump enable-input device in the "disable" state to prevent pump start. Place the enable-input device in the "enable" state. b. Verify Shutdown: Start with the enable-input device in the "enable" state to allow the pump(s) to run. Then place the enable-input device to the "disable" state. 5. Acceptance Criteria: a. Start: Chilled-water pump(s) start when and only when the enable-input device is in the "enable" state. b. Shutdown: The enable-input device stops the chilled-water pump(s) when placed in the "disable" state. END OF SECTION 23 08 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 23 09 23 - 1 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement SECTION 23 09 23 DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The Direct-Digital Control (DDC) System specified herein shall include materials, operator workstation, building controllers, sensors, control valves, wiring, installation, start-up, testing, documentation and training for a complete operable system as required for this project. B. Controls Engineering shall be provided by the local controls manufacturer representative. C. Work specified under this section shall be performed by, or under the direct supervision of the local controls manufacturer representative, or by a contractor that is certified by the controls manufacture to perform all work within Section 23 09 00 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC and those sections of 23 09 00 that have been specified herein. D. Alternate techniques, modifications or changes to any aspect of these specifications may be submitted as a voluntary alternate no later than (15) days prior to the bid date and with sufficient information for a complete evaluation. This information shall include product data sheets, a UL508A Standard for Industrial Control Panels statement of compliance for any locally manufactured control panels, a detailed sequence of operation and engineered shop drawing. Shop drawings shall include the following as a minimum. Point to point wiring diagrams for each piece of equipment to be controlled, a network riser diagram that will depict quantity and location of the operator workstation, controllers, routers and repeaters required for this project. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. 01 00 00: General Requirements B. 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures C. 23 00 00: Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) D. 23 08 00: Commissioning of HVAC E. 26 00 00: Electrical 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit engineered shop drawings, sequences of operation, third party equipment and controls integration points and product data sheets covering all items of equipment for the proposed system prior to installation for approval. Any deviation from the contract documents shall be noted and the drawings signed and dated by the Contractor. Additionally, submit a UL508A Standard for Industrial Control Panels statement of compliance for any locally manufactured control panels. B. After completion of the installation and commissioning, a full set of as-built documentation shall be turned over to the Owner. The as-built shall include operation and maintenance manuals, sequence of operation, shop drawings and digital copies of the following. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 23 09 23 - 2 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 1. Complete DDC System database backup 2. Source files for all custom written controller applications 3. Source files for graphics if required for this project 1.04 WARRANTY A. Components, system software, and parts shall be guaranteed against defects in materials, fabrication, and execution for (1) year from date of system acceptance. Provide labor and materials to repair, reprogram, or replace components at no charge to the Owner during the warranty period. B. Provide a list of applicable warranties for components, this list shall include warranty information, names, addresses, telephone numbers, and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services. C. Respond to the Owner’s request for warranty service within (24) hours during normal business hours. Submit records of the nature of the call, the work performed, and the parts replaced or service rendered. D. Contractor shall request VPN access from owner and provide remote maintenance, software updates and repair service for the duration of the warranty period. 1.05 TRAINING A. Provide a competent instructor who is factory trained and has comprehensive knowledge of system components and operations to provide full instructions to designated personnel in the system operation, maintenance, and programming. Training shall be specifically oriented to installed equipment and systems. B. Provide (8) hours of onsite owner familiarization and training for the installed system. Training shall include system overview, time schedules, emergency operation, and programming and report generation. C. Owner employees attending this training session shall be provided with the following documentation: 1. System layout point to point connection diagram. 2. System components cut sheets. 3. Operations and maintenance data. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Do not store or install electronic hardware on the project until non-condensing environmental conditions have been established. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. DDC Equipment: Only Carrier OPEN BACnet controls equipment will be acceptable, to match existing equipment in the building. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 23 09 23 - 3 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement B. Controls installation will be by Russell Sigler Inc. Controls Group. C. The local manufacture representative will operate a free 40 hour a week, toll free customer support hotline for additional user support services that are required. 2.02 SYSTEM LISTING COMPLIANCE A. Locally manufactured control panels shall meet all requirements as outlined by UL 508A standard and shall be both approved and listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 2.03 COMMUNICATION A. Controller and operator interface communication shall conform to ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135, BACnet. B. Each controller shall have a communication port for temporary connection to a laptop computer or other operator interface. Connection shall support memory downloads and other commissioning and troubleshooting operations. C. Use owner provided Ethernet backbone for network segments. 2.04 OPERATOR INTERFACE A. Description. The control system shall be as shown and consist of a high-speed, peer-to- peer network of DDC controllers and a stand-alone web server operator interface. Depict each mechanical system and building floor plan by a point-and-click graphic. A web server shall gather data from this system and generate web pages accessible through a conventional web browser on each PC connected to the network. Operators with sufficient access level shall have an ability to make changes to all system and equipment graphics in the web server in addition to having full DDC system access to make configuration changes to the control system. Any tools required for making graphic changes shall be provided with web server. B. Operator Interface. Furnish (1) Web server interface as shown on the system drawings. 1. With the use of an owner provided remote SMTP email server the operators interface web server shall notify personnel of an alarm and record information about an alarm in the DDC system. 2. Any required installation or commissioning software shall be provided to the owner. C. Operator Functions. Operator interface shall allow each authorized operator to execute the following functions as a minimum: 1. Log In and Log Out 2. Point-and-click Navigation 3. View and Adjust Equipment Properties 4. View and Adjust Operating Schedules 5. View and Respond to Alarms 6. View and Configure Trends 7. Manage Control System Hardware 8. Manage Operator Access D. System Graphics. Operator interface shall be graphical and shall include at least one graphic per piece of equipment and graphics that summarize conditions on each floor of DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 23 09 23 - 4 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement each building included in this contract. Indicate thermal comfort on floor plan summary graphics using dynamic colors to represent zone temperature relative to zone setpoint. E. Trend Configuration. Operator shall be able to configure trend sample or change of value (COV) interval, start time, and stop time for each system data object and shall be able to retrieve data for use in spreadsheets and standard database programs. F. Reports and Logs. Operator shall be able to select, to modify, to create, and to print reports and logs. Furnish the following standard system reports. 1. Alarm Reports 2. Schedule Reports 3. Security Reports 4. Commissioning Reports 5. Equipment Reports G. Energy Conservation 1. Outside Air Lockout. Lock out heating or cooling modes based on configurable outside air temperature limits. 2. Demand Limiting a. System shall monitor building power consumption from building power meter pulse generator signals or from building feeder line watt transducer or current transformer. b. The system shall include all required hardware and software necessary to receive an Automated Demand Response (ADR) signal from the utilities Demand Response Automation Server (DRAS). c. When power consumption exceeds adjustable levels, or the system receives an ADR signal from the utility, the system shall automatically adjust set points, and take other programmatic actions to reduce demand. 3. Optimal Start. The system shall bring the conditioned space to within occupied set points prior to the occupied time period to ensure occupant comfort. 4. Demand Controlled Ventilation (DCV).Each controlled space shall have a Carbon Dioxide (CO2) sensor and shall maintain a ventilation setpoint through a DCV algorithm to fulfill the requirements of ASHRAE standard, 62-1989 “Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality” (including Addendum 62a-1990). 2.05 BUILDING CONTROLLERS 2.05.1 BACNET IP CONTROLLERS: GENERAL PURPOSE A. Advanced Application Controllers (AAC) shall be a solid state micro-controller with configurable control module with pre-tested and factory configured software specifically designed for regulating building equipment using closed-loop Direct Digital Control and facility management routines. Controllers shall be capable operating in a stand-alone or networked manner, and shall be located where shown on the plans. The controller shall be powered from standard, off-the-shelf, Class II, 24-volt transformers. The controller shall be easily mounted in a standard NEMA 1 type enclosure without special rails or mounting hardware and as local and national code dictates. The controller shall be capable of DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 23 09 23 - 5 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement operating in either a stand-alone mode or as part of a network with an EMS operator's station and other system elements including Product Integrated Controllers (PIC's) B. BACnet. Advanced Application Controllers (AACs). AAC shall conform to BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC) device profile as specified in ANSI/ASHRAE 135, BACnet Annex L and shall be listed as a certified B-AAC in the BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL) Product Listing. AAC shall reside on a BACnet network using the MS/TP or IP Data Link/Physical layer protocol. C. Custom Programming The controller shall contain a graphical controller based programming language for creating complex control strategies for specific unique applications. Custom programs shall be retained in controller memory and shall not require a host CPU to operate. All custom programming point data shall be transferable from one controller to another (if networked) directly without an on-line CPU or host computer. D. Communication. 1. Network Connection. Controller shall support a single point ethernet connection or a daisy-chained ethernet connection using the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). 2. Ethernet Port. Provide two (2) 10/100 Base T (minimum) ethernet ports with ethernet switching capability. 3. Service Port. Provide one (1) USB port for connection to a Portable Operator's Terminal or a display. 4. Data Sharing. Each AAC shall share data as required with each networked. 5. Stand-Alone Operation. Each piece of equipment shall be controlled by a single controller to provide stand-alone control in the event of communication failure. All I/O points specified for a piece of equipment shall be integral to its controller. Provide stable and reliable stand-alone control using default values or other method for values normally read over the network such as outdoor air conditions, supply air or water temperature coming from source equipment, etc. E. Environment. Controller hardware shall be suitable for anticipated ambient conditions. 1. Controllers used outdoors or in wet ambient conditions shall be mounted in waterproof enclosures and shall be rated for operation at -29°C to 60°C (-20°F to 140°F). 2. Controllers used in conditioned space shall be mounted in dust-protective enclosures and shall be rated for operation at 0°C to 50°C (32°F to 120°F). F. Memory. 1. The Controller shall have a Non-Volatile Memory providing indefinite storage of application and configuration data. 2. Controller memory shall support operating system, database, and programming requirements. G. Controller Time. Controller shall feature and maintain a 365-day Real-Time Clock/Calendar with holiday functions. H. Stand alone capability. The controller shall be capable of providing all control functions of the HVAC system without the use of a computer. 1. It shall establish occupancy scheduling based on its own local occupancy schedule, the closure of a contact connected to an external time clock or EMS system, or by a timed override request (1 to 24 hours) through its space temperature sensor override button. I. Networked capability. The controller shall include the inherent capability to access the system control selections as well as to monitor system performance by means of a communicating network with a PC and EMS software program. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 23 09 23 - 6 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 1. When networked, occupancy may be established by user interface or occupancy signal from other controller located in network. J. Scheduling. AAC shall provide the following schedule options as a minimum: 1. Weekly. Provide separate schedules for each day of the week. Each schedule shall be able to include up to 5 occupied periods (5 start-stop pairs or 10 events). 2. Exception. Operator shall be able to designate an exception schedule for each of the next 365 days. After an exception schedule has executed, system shall discard and replace exception schedule with standard schedule for that day of the week. 3. Holiday. Operator shall be able to define 24 special or holiday schedules of varying length on a scheduling calendar that repeats each year. K. Serviceability. 1. Controller shall have diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor. 2. Wires shall be connected to a field-removable modular terminal strip or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable. L. Immunity to Power and Noise. AAC shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80% nominal voltage. Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W at 1 m (3 ft). M. Input and output devices shall be wired to "quick-connect plug type" terminals to facilitate removal of the module without disconnecting wiring from the plug type terminal. N. Alarm Processing. The controller shall contain a routine to process alarms. Alarm processing logic shall also monitor return to normal conditions as part of the alarm scan. The operator will have the ability to modify the alarm/alert priority level. O. PID Control. System shall provide direct- and reverse-acting PID (proportional-integral- derivative) algorithms. Each algorithm shall have anti-windup and selectable controlled variable, setpoint, and PID gains. Each algorithm shall calculate a time-varying analog value that can be used to position an output or to stage a series of outputs. P. Anti-Short Cycling. Binary output objects shall be protected from short cycling by means of preconfigured minimum on-time and off-time settings, customized for the specific requirements of the application. Q. On and Off Control with Differential. System shall provide direct- and reverse-acting on and off algorithms with adjustable differential to cycle a binary output based on a controlled variable and setpoint. R. Inputs. Shall support the following input types as a minimum 1. Dry or pulsed dry contacts 2. 0-5 VDC 3. 0-10 VDC 4. 10K thermistors S. Outputs. Shall support the following input types as a minimum 1. Discrete types 2. 0-10 VDC analog type 3. 80 HZ PWM T. Real-Time Clock. Shall feature and maintain a 365-day hardware clock/calendar with holiday functions. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 23 09 23 - 7 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement U. Library of direct digital control routines. The following types of factory tested direct digital control routines shall be provided as a minimum: 1. Indoor/Outdoor Lighting Control 2. Time Schedule with/without override 3. Enthalpy/Analog Comparison 4. Analog Comparison 5. Interlock / Permissive Interlock 6. Fan Control 7. Time Schedule with/without override 8. Unit Heater 9. Constant Volume Air Source control with Demand Controlled Ventilation 10. VAV Air Source control with Demand Controlled Ventilation 11. WSHP Loop Monitor and Pump Control 12. WSHP Loop Cooling - Closed Circuit Tower 13. WSHP Loop Cooling - Open Circuit Tower 14. WSHP Loop Heating 15. Electric Meter with Demand Limit 2.06 A. General. The control system shall be available as a complete package with the required input sensors and devices readily available. Provide BACnet Building Controllers (BC), Advanced Application Controllers (AAC), Application Specific Controllers (ASC), and Sensors (SEN) as required. B. Stand-Alone Operation. Each piece of equipment shall be controlled by a single controller to provide stand-alone control in the event of communication failure. C. Serviceability. Controllers shall have diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor. D. Rooftop Unit Controller (RTC). Defined as Application Specific Controllers (ASC), shall be factory installed by the HVAC manufacturer and shall control all associated HVAC rooftop equipment functions in a single zone application or as part of a zoning system application. 1. Capacity control shall be based by the RTC internal time clock and setpoints (cooling and heating) coupled with a communicating room sensor. The controls shall provide separate occupied and unoccupied cooling and heating setpoints. 2. RTC shall utilize up to 2 speed of fan control, up to 3 stages of cooling, and up to 4 stages of heating. 3. RTC shall provide economizer control that has been certified for Fault Detection and Diagnostics (FDD) by California Energy Commission (CEC). The FDD system shall detect the following faults: a. Air temperature sensor failure/fault b. Not economizing when it should c. Economizing when it should not d. Damper not modulating e. Excess outdoor air E. Zone Controller (ZC). Defined as Application Specific Controllers (ASC) shall be capable of independent zone control or function as part of the zoning system. 1. ZC shall have an integrated brushless actuator, onboard pressure sensor and shall perform pressure independent zone control by measuring and controlling CFM being delivered to the zone. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 23 09 23 - 8 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 2. The ZC shall utilize the Dual Maximum Control Setpoints VAV Box Logic as defined by Title 24. F. Bypass Controller (BC). Defined as Application Specific Controllers (ASC) shall be capable of reading supply static pressure and controlling the bypass damper (or a VFD speed control output) to maintain the supply static set point in the supply duct. This operation shall be provided when operating within a zoning system application, or in a stand-alone mode. 1. BC shall have an integrated brushless actuator and onboard pressure sensor to measure and control duct static pressure. G. General Purpose Controller. Defined as Advanced Application Controller (AAC) shall be a solid state micro-controller with pre-tested and factory configured software designed for controlling building equipment using DDC algorithms and facility management routines. The controller shall be capable of operating in either a stand-alone mode or as part of a network. 2.07 FIELD INSTALLED SENSORS A. Space Temperature Sensors shall communicate to the controller over a 4-wire communication network and have setpoint adjustment, after hours override, occupancy sensor, LCD display and a communication service port. B. Carbon dioxide sensor (CO2) shall be integrated into the Space Temperature Sensors and have integral programming to perform automatic baseline calibration without user interface. The recommended manual recalibration period shall not be less than five years. C. Status indication for fans or pumps shall be provided by current sensing switch. The sensor shall be installed at the motor starter or motor to provide load indication. The unit shall consist of a current transformer, a solid state current sensing circuit (with adjustable set point) and a solid state switch. A light emitting diode (LED) shall indicate the on off status of the unit. 2.08 CONTROL PANELS A. Provide single-door, UL 508A Listed; NEMA Type 1, 3R or 4 to match environmental conditions, wall-mount enclosures for each system under automatic control. Mount relays, switches, and controllers in cabinet and indicators, pilot lights, push buttons and switches flush on enclosure exterior face as required. B. Fabricate panels from 16 gauge steel with ANSI 61 gray finish and shall include (1) black padlock handle that will accommodate a padlock with up to a 5/16-in. locking bar for secure access to the enclosure contents. All additional latches shall be black non-locking handle type. C. Provide engraved name plates that identify each control panel and for each component mounted to the exterior of the enclosure. D. Provide a complete wiring diagram, bill of material for all components and markings with the following information: 1. Manufacturer’s name or trademark 2. Supply voltage, number of phases, frequency, and full-load current for each incoming supply circuit DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 23 09 23 - 9 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 3. Enclosure type number PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ELECTRICAL WIRING A. This contractor is responsible for all low voltage electrical installation and wiring for a fully operational DDC System as shown on the drawings and shall perform electrical installation in accordance with local and national electrical codes and in accordance with Division 26. B. Install all HVAC control wiring, 24vdc or less, in electrical metallic tubing (EMT) when wire is concealed in walls and in exposed areas. Rigid metal conduit (RMC) will be used when conduit will be installed on roofs. Plenum wire may be used in ceilings where anchored support is provided every 10 feet. Existing pathways and conduits to be reused. C. Electrical Contractor is responsible for providing power from local electrical panels to the DDC System control panels. D. When transitioning between buildings above or below ground level, provide a pull box with necessary surge suppression hardware to transition exterior rated wiring to interior applications. 3.02 ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURE A. Upon completion of the installation, the contractor shall start-up the system and perform all necessary calibration and testing to ensure the proper operation of the DDC System. B. The contractor shall be a member of the designated Commissioning Team and shall be responsible for performing procedures presented in specification and contract drawings as detailed in the Functional Performance Tests (FPT). END OF SECTION 23 09 23 HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - 1 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement SECTION 23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes pipe and fitting materials and joining methods for the following: 1. Chilled-water piping. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following: 1. Plastic pipe and fittings with solvent cement. 2. RTRP and RTRF with adhesive. 3. Pressure-seal fittings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Piping layout, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Other building services. 3. Structural members. B. Qualification Data: For Installer. C. Welding certificates. D. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Installers of Pressure-Sealed Joints: Installers shall be certified by pressure-seal joint manufacturer as having been trained and qualified to join piping with pressure-seal pipe couplings and fittings. B. Steel Support Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - 2 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement C. Pipe Welding: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. 1. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature unless otherwise indicated: 1. Chilled-Water Piping: 200 deg F. 2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L. B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K. C. DWV Copper Tubing: ASTM B 306, Type DWV. D. Copper or Bronze Pressure-Seal Fittings: 1. Housing: Copper. 2. O-Rings and Pipe Stops: EPDM. 3. Tools: Manufacturer's special tools. 4. Minimum 200-psig working-pressure rating at 250 deg F. E. Copper, Mechanically Formed Tee Option: For forming T-branch on copper water tube. F. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22. 2.3 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; welded and seamless, Grade B, and wall thickness as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article. B. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article. C. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article. D. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article. E. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250; raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article. HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - 3 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement F. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe. G. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings: 1. Material Group: 1.1. 2. End Connections: Butt welding. 3. Facings: Raised face. H. Steel Pressure-Seal Fittings: 1. Housing: Steel. 2. O-Rings and Pipe Stop: EPDM. 3. Tools: Manufacturer's special tool. 4. Minimum 300-psig working-pressure rating at 230 deg F. I. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of same materials and wall thicknesses as pipe in which they are installed. 2.4 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. CPVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 441/F 441M, with wall thickness as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article. 1. CPVC Plastic Pipe Fittings: Socket-type pipe fittings, ASTM F 438 for Schedule 40 pipe; ASTM F 439 for Schedule 80 pipe. B. PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, with wall thickness as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article. 1. PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings: Socket-type pipe fittings, ASTM D 2466 for Schedule 40 pipe; ASTM D 2467 for Schedule 80 pipe. 2.5 JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless otherwise indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges. B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - 4 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copper with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel. F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. a. CPVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 490 g/L or less. b. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less. c. Solvent cement and adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." 2. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. a. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less. b. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less. c. Solvent cement and adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." H. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working temperatures and pressures. 2.6 TRANSITION FITTINGS A. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: 1. One-piece fitting with one threaded brass or copper insert and one solvent- cement-joint end of material and wall thickness to match plastic pipe material. B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: 1. Brass or copper end, solvent-cement-joint end of material and wall thickness to match plastic pipe material, rubber gasket, and threaded union. 2.7 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined. B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Description: HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - 5 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. C. Dielectric Flanges: 1. Description: a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. c. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. d. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits: 1. Description: a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers. E. Dielectric Nipples: 1. Description: a. Standard: IAPMO PS 66. b. Electroplated steel nipple, complying with ASTM F 1545. c. Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F. d. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. e. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following: 1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints. B. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be any of the following: 1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints. 2. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints. HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - 6 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATIONS A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping to permit valve servicing. F. Install piping at indicated slopes. G. Install piping free of sags and bends. H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. I. Install piping to allow application of insulation. J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves. L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage. M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow. N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up. O. Install branch connections to mains using mechanically formed tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe. P. Install valves according to Section 230523.11 "Globe Valves for HVAC Piping," Section 230523.12 "Ball Valves for HVAC Piping," Section 230523.13 "Butterfly Valves for HVAC Piping," Section 230523.14 "Check Valves for HVAC Piping," and Section 230523.15 "Gate Valves for HVAC Piping." Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated. S. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting. HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - 7 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement T. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for identifying piping. U. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. V. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. 3.3 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions. C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric nipples. D. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits. 3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Comply with requirements in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for hanger, support, and anchor devices. Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports. B. Comply with requirements in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC" for seismic restraints. C. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long. 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe. 6. On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from scratching pipe. D. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet. 5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet. 6. NPS 3 and Larger: Maximum span, 12 feet. E. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - 8 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 3. NPS 1-1/4Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 7. NPS 3 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. F. Plastic Piping Hanger Spacing: Space hangers according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions for service conditions. Avoid point loading. Space and install hangers with the fewest practical rigid anchor points. G. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors. 3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. C. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M. E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. F. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article. G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. H. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. 3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join ASTM D 1785 schedule number, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. 4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. I. Mechanically Formed, Copper-Tube-Outlet Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure, and brazed joints. HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - 9 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 3.6 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections. B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment. C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required. D. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections. Comply with requirements in Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping." 3.7 CHEMICAL TREATMENT A. Perform an analysis of makeup water to determine type and quantities of chemical treatment needed to keep system free of scale, corrosion, and fouling. B. Install bypass chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated. 1. Install in upright position with top of funnel not more than 48 inches above the floor. 2. Install feeder in minimum NPS 3/4 bypass line, from main with full-size, full-port, ball valve in the main between bypass connections. 3. Install NPS 3/4 pipe from chemical feeder drain to nearest equipment drain and include a full-size, full-port, ball valve. C. Fill system with fresh water and add liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease and petroleum products from piping. Circulate solution for a minimum of 24 hours, drain, clean strainer screens, and refill with fresh water. D. Add initial chemical treatment and maintain water quality in ranges noted above for the first year of operation. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows: 1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer screens. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment. 5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test. B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping: HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - 10 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used. 2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid. 3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water. 4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping." 5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. 6. Prepare written report of testing. C. Perform the following before operating the system: 1. Open manual valves fully. 2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation. 3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure. 4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type). 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers, cooling towers, to specified values. 7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings. END OF SECTION 23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING AND VALVES 23 21 13.1-1 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement SECTION 23 21 13.1 HYDRONIC VALVES AND SPECIALITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes piping, special-duty valves, and hydronic specialties for hot-water heating, chilled-water cooling, process cooling loops, and condenser water systems; makeup water for these systems; blowdown drain lines; and condensate drain piping. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC" for general piping materials and installation requirements. 2. Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC" for pipe supports, product descriptions, and installation requirements. Hanger and support spacing is specified in this Section. 3. Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC" for labeling and identifying hydronic piping. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for valves, diverting fittings, manual calibrated balancing valves, and automatic flow-control valves. B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, special pipe support assemblies, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and their attachment to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops. C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. D. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section. Include the following: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements. E. Maintenance Data: For hydronic specialties and special-duty valves to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 01. F. Piping, fittings, and accessories: For each type of materials indicated, including gaskets. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Delete paragraph below if no welding. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate HYDRONIC PIPING AND VALVES 23 21 13.1-2 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of hydronic piping and suspension system components with other construction, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies. B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for foundation wall penetrations. C. Coordinate piping installation with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof specialties are specified in Division 07 Sections. D. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections. E. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 Sections. F. Coordinate installation of pipe sleeves for penetrations through exterior walls and floor assemblies. Coordinate with requirements for firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for fire and smoke wall and floor assemblies. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Manual Calibrated Balancing Valves: a. Griswold Controls. b. Or approved equal. 2. Pressure-Reducing Valves: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Hersey c. Febco d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Watts Regulators. e. Or approved equal. 3. Safety Valves: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. ITT McDonnell & Miller Div.; ITT Fluid Technology Corp. c. Kunkle Valve Division. d. Spence Engineering Company, Inc. e. Or approved equal. 4. Automatic Flow-Control Valves: a. Griswold Controls. b. Or approved equal. 5. Expansion Tanks: a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. HYDRONIC PIPING AND VALVES 23 21 13.1-3 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement c. Taco, Inc. d. Wheatley e. Or approved equal. 6. Air Separators and Air Purgers: a. Spiro Research Company; Spirotherm, Inc. b. Or approved equal. 2.2 PIPING MATERIALS A. General: Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe and fitting materials. 2.3 VALVES A. Ball Valves: (Sizes NPS ½”– 2”, typical) 1. Ball valves (1/2”-2”), shall be two-piece style, full port, bronze body (ASTM B62 or B584) with type 316 SS ball & stem and PTFE (or RPTFE) seats and seals. Valves shall be rated for 600 psig WOG & 150 psig SWP (non-shock). All valves shall have adjustable packing glands and blow-out proof (internally retained) stems and shall comply with the latest edition of MSS-SP-110. Threaded end (FNPT) ball valves only; use male adapters where required in soldered end applications. Supply valves with stem extensions which clear 2” of piping insulation when installed in insulated services. a. Conbraco Industries, Inc; Apollo Division figure 77-140. b. Milwaukee Valve figure BA400S. c. Hammond Valve figure 8303A. d. Nibco figure T-585-70-66. e. Or approved equal. B. AWWA, Cast-Iron Gate Valves for non hot water applications: 1. Manufacturers: a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; American Flow Control Div. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. c. Grinnell Corporation; Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. d. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa). e. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. f. McWane, Inc.; M&H Valve Company Division g. NIBCO INC. h. United States Pipe and Foundry Company. i. Or approved equal. 2. Nonrising-Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves: AWWA C509, gray- or ductile- iron body and bonnet; with bronze or gray- or ductile-iron gate, resilient seats, bronze stem, and stem nut. a. Minimum Working Pressure: 200 psig. b. End Connections: Mechanical joint, or flanged. c. Interior and Exterior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550, epoxy. C. Cast-Iron Gate Valves for hot water applications: 1. Manufacturers: a. Type I, Cast-Iron, Rising-Stem Gate Valves: 1) Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. HYDRONIC PIPING AND VALVES 23 21 13.1-4 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 2) Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. 3) Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. 4) Milwaukee Valve Company. 5) NIBCO INC. 6) Powell, Wm. Co. 7) Walworth Co. 8) Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. 9) Or approved equal. 2. Cast-Iron Gate Valves, General: MSS SP-70, Type I. a. Class 125, OS&Y, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: Cast-iron body with bronze trim, renewable bronze seat rings, rising stem, and tapered solid-wedge disc. D. Check Valves: 1. Sizes NPS ¾”– 2”: Ball-Check, spring type, Class 150, MSS-SP-80, two-piece bronze body and seat, full port, blowout proof, threaded ends, stainless steel ball, stem, and spring, Teflon elastomers, Buna-N disc. a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. c. NIBCO INC. T-585-70-IC. d. Or approved equal. 2. Sizes NPS 2½”- larger: Swing Check, Type 1, Class 125, MSS-SP-71, cast-iron body, flanged with bronze seat and bronze trim, bolted cap. a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. 373. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. G931. c. NIBCO INC. F-918-B. d. Or approved equal. 3. Sizes NPS ¾” – 2”: Non-slam Check, Class 125, bronze body and seat, tight shut-off, threaded ends. Rated for 200 F applications. a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. 62-100. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. c. NIBCO INC. T-480. d. Or approved equal. 4. Sizes NPS 2½”-larger: Non-slam Check, Type 1, Class 125, MSS-SP-71, cast- iron body, flanged with bronze seat and bronze trim, bolted cap. a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. c. NIBCO INC. F-910. d. Or approved equal. E. Carbon Steel Butterfly Valves: 1. Sizes 14” and – larger: 150 psig CWP rating, MSS SP-67, Type I, Carbon Steel Construction, tight shutoff, flanged type with one piece stem, 200° F. rating, 316 stainless steel disc and shaft or bronze disc with 416 stainless steel shaft, PTFE coated stainless bearing, EPDM shaft seal, PTFE shaft seal for NPS 24 and larger, EPDM seat material, with manual sintered bronze gear operator, and handwheel. a. General Signal; DeZurik Unit. BAW. b. Henry J. Pratt Company: 2FII. c. Or approved equal. HYDRONIC PIPING AND VALVES 23 21 13.1-5 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement F. Manual Calibrated Balancing Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body, ball type, 125- psig working pressure, 250 deg F maximum operating temperature, and having threaded ends. Valves shall have calibrated orifice or venturi, connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral seals, and be equipped with a memory stop to retain manually set position. G. Manual Calibrated Balancing Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Cast-iron or steel body, ball type, 125-psig working pressure, 250 deg F maximum operating temperature, and having flanged or grooved connections. Valves shall have calibrated orifice or venturi, connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral seals, and be equipped with a memory stop to retain manually set position. H. Pressure-Reducing Valves: Diaphragm-operated, bronze or brass body with low inlet pressure check valve, inlet strainer removable without system shutdown, and noncorrosive valve seat and stem. Select valve size, capacity, and operating pressure to suit system. Valve shall be factory set at operating pressure and have capability for field adjustment. I. Safety Valves: Diaphragm-operated, bronze or brass body with brass and rubber, wetted, internal working parts; shall suit system pressure and heat capacity and shall comply with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV. J. Automatic Flow- Limiting Device: factory set to maintain constant flow with plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure fluctuations, and equipped with test probes. Each valve shall have an identification tag outside of insulation attached by chain, and be factory marked with the zone identification, valve number, and flow rate. The body shall bear factory standard product tag. Valve shall be line size and one of the following designs depending on the system: 1. Gray-iron or brass body, designed for 175 psig at 200 deg F with stainless-steel cartridge/piston and spring. 2. Brass body, designed for 175 psig at 200 deg F with stainless-steel cartridge/piston and spring. K. Pressure Sustaining and Pressure Regulating Valve: The valve shall be hydraulically operated, single diaphragm-actuated, globe or angle pattern. The valve shall consist of three major components: the body with seat installed, the cover with bearings installed, and the diaphragm assembly. The diaphragm assembly shall be the only moving part and shall form a sealed chamber in the upper portion of the valve, separating operating pressure from line pressure. 1. Valve body shall be of cast Ductile Iron material and have stainless steel trim. 2. The valve shall contain a resilient, synthetic rubber disc, with a rectangular cross- section contained on three and one-half sides by a disc retainer and forming a tight seal against a single removable seat insert. 3. The diaphragm assembly containing a non-magnetic 303 stainless steel stem of sufficient diameter to withstand high hydraulic pressures shall be fully guided at both ends by a bearing in the valve cover and an integral bearing in the valve seat. The seat shall be a solid, one-piece design and shall have a minimum of a five-degree taper on the seating surface for a positive, drip-tight shut off. 4. The pressure reducing pilot control shall be a direct-acting, adjustable, spring- loaded, normally open, diaphragm valve with stainless steel trim designed to permit flow when controlled pressure is less than the spring setting. The pilot control is held open by the force of the compression on the spring above the diaphragm and it closes when the delivery pressure acting on the underside of HYDRONIC PIPING AND VALVES 23 21 13.1-6 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement the diaphragm exceeds the spring setting. The pilot control system shall include a fixed orifice. The pilot system shall include an opening speed control on all valves 3” and smaller on the model 92-01 and 4” and smaller on the model 692- 01, as standard equipment. The pilot control shall have a second downstream sensing port which can be utilized to install a pressure gauge. 5. The pressure sustaining pilot control shall be a direct-acting adjustable spring loaded control which opens when upstream pressure exceeds the spring setting on the pilot. The pilot control system shall include an X44A strainer & orifice assembly. 6. A full range of spring settings shall be available in ranges of 0 to 450 psi. Downstream spring range shall be 2-30 psi. 7. A direct factory representative shall be made available for start-up service, inspection and necessary adjustments. 8. The valve shall be a Cla-Val Co. Model No. 750-01 Combination Pressure Reducing & Sustaining Valve as manufactured by Cla-Val Co., Newport Beach, CA 92659-0325 or equal. L. Refer to Part 3 “Valve Applications” Article for applications of each valve. M. Combination duty type valves and fittings shall not be used. N. Combination Assemblies: Individual threaded components, ball valves, control valve, automatic flow limiting device of brass body construction, fitted with pressure and temperature test valves, strainer, flexible hoses, and designed for 300 psig at 250 deg F for duct or terminal mounted heating coils. 2.4 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES A. Manual Air Vent Bronze body ball valve with stainless steel ball; NPS ½. B. Automatic Air Vent: Designed to vent automatically with float principle; bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig working pressure; 240 deg F operating temperature; with NPS 1/4 discharge connection and NPS 1/2 inlet connection. Provide only one automatic air vent in system at air separator. C. Expansion Tanks: Welded carbon steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating temperature with rustproof coating. Separate air charge from system water to maintain design expansion capacity by a flexible diaphragm securely sealed into tank. Include drain fitting and taps for pressure gage and air-charging fitting. Support vertical tanks with steel legs or base; support horizontal tanks with steel saddles. Factory fabricate and test tank with taps and supports installed and labeled according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1, shipped with minimum of 12 psig charge. D. Air Separators: Welded black steel; ASME constructed and labeled for 150 psig minimum working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating temperature; tangential Viton seal and O-ring brass vent head and skim valve, copper coalescing medium, non- ferrous float, in-line inlet and outlet connections; threaded connections for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged connections for NPS 2-1/2 and larger; threaded blowdown connection. Provide units in sizes for full-system flow capacity with pressure loss performance of less than one foot of water, and maximum velocity of 4 feet per second, as manufactured by Spirotherm, or equal as manufactured by others with greater than line size inlet as required to meet performance requirement of less than one foot of water at design flow capacity. HYDRONIC PIPING AND VALVES 23 21 13.1-7 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement E. Y-Pattern Strainers NPS 2 and smaller: 1. Strainers 2" and smaller for heating and air conditioning water service shall be based on Watts No. 777 or an equivalent strainer by Armstrong or equal, 400 psig WOG bronze body, threaded, Y-pattern, 20-mesh stainless steel screen, with a full size drain connection and ball valve. F. Y-Pattern Strainers NPS 2-1/2 and larger: 1. Strainers 2-1/2" and larger for heating and air conditioning water service shall be based on Watts No. 77F-DI, Keckely Style “A”, or an equivalent strainer by Armstrong or equal, Class 125 cast-iron body, flanged, Y-pattern, stainless steel screen, with a drain connection and ball valve (as described elsewhere herein). G. Suction Diffuser: Angle or straight pattern, 175-psig pressure rating, cast-iron body and end cap, pump-inlet fitting; with bronze startup and bronze or stainless-steel permanent strainers; bronze or stainless-steel straightening vanes; drain plug; and factory- or field- fabricated support. 2.5 CONNECTORS A. Stainless-Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors: 1. Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective jacket. 2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected. 3. Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch misalignment. 4. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. B. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors: 1. Body: Fiber-reinforced rubber body. 2. End Connections: Steel flanges drilled to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges. 3. Performance: Capable of misalignment. 4. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Hot Water Heating and Chilled Water (above ground): 1. NPS 2 and smaller: Type L copper; with 95-5 soldered wrought copper fittings. 2. NPS 2-1/2 and larger: Black steel pipe, ASTM A53, Type S (seamless) or Type ERW (welded); with standard weight ASTM A234 forged steel fittings for butt- weld connection or 150 lb; or grooved mechanical joint coupling and fittings with roll grooved mechanical joints. B. Heating and Chilled Water Pot Feeder: 1. Type L Copper: Type L copper: with 95-5 soldered wrought copper fittings. C. Equipment Connections 1. NPS 2 and smaller: Use union connections. 2. NPS 2-1/2 and larger: Use flange connections. HYDRONIC PIPING AND VALVES 23 21 13.1-8 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 3. Dissimilar metals: Where piping is connected to equipment with different materials, such as ferrous to copper, use brass union, brass coupler, brass pipe/nipple in order to prevent electrolysis. 4. Valves: Provide shut-off duty isolation valves and strainers at all equipment. 5. Flexible Piping Connectors: Provide flexible piping connectors at each piece of equipment unless acoustic consultant determines such devices are not required to meet project sound and vibration performance requirements. D. Condensate Drain Lines: Type L drawn-temper copper tubing with soldered joints. 3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. General-Duty Valve Applications for hydronic systems unless otherwise noted, use the following valve types: Type Minimum Size Maximum Size Valve Service: Ball 1/2” 2 ” Shut-off, and Throttling duty. Gate, AWWA (chilled water) 2½” 12” Shut-off duty. Butterfly (chilled water only) 14” n/a Shut-off duty. Gate, rising stem (hot water) 2½” n/a Shut-off duty. Ball - Check (hot water) ¾” 2” Check valve. B. Install main building shut-off valves for hydronic systems. C. Install shutoff duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply connection to each piece of equipment, unless only one piece of equipment is connected in the branch line. D. Install auto flow limiting balancing valves in the return water line of each heating or cooling element. Install manual calibrated balancing valve at split coils as shown on the drawings. E. Reheat Coils: Provide combination assemblies as described in Part 2, with flow limiting device and flexible hose connections. F. Hydronic systems which utilize flow limiting devices as balancing means shall include flow limiting devices on all system user branch take-off’s at heat exchange device for system uniformity and proper system balance and operation. G. Combination duty type valves and fittings shall not be used. H. See Division 23 Section “Instrumentation and Controls” for hydronic control valve requirements. I. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction. HYDRONIC PIPING AND VALVES 23 21 13.1-9 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement J. Install safety valves on hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install safety-valve discharge piping, without valves, to floor. Comply with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements. K. Install pressure-reducing valves on hot-water generators and elsewhere as required to regulate system pressure. L. All water valves operating between 32 and 95F and larger than 2” shall be AWWA C-509 epoxy coated gate valves. Where the valves are insulated to prevent sweating (e.g. chilled water) the valves shall be non-rising stem. Other applications may be either rising stem or non-rising stem as required. Except where buried outside, the valves shall have handwheels. Buried valves shall have 2” square operating nut. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC" for basic piping installation requirements. B. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves. C. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage. D. Install piping level or at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent in direction of flow or a drain. E. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up- top flat. F. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the takeoff coming out the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, install the takeoff coming out the top of the main pipe. G. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2. H. Anchor piping for proper direction of expansion and contraction. I. Do not use groove-joint fittings on insulated piping system, unless insulation system is specifically designed for groove-joint fittings. J. Avoid underground piping. K. Piping penetrations shall be carefully detailed. Insulation through penetrations shall be continuous. L. Bushings and short nipples shall not be used. M. Avoid pipe joints located over, or within 2 feet of electrical equipment. If it cannot be avoided provide with drip pans. HYDRONIC PIPING AND VALVES 23 21 13.1-10 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement N. Teflon tape shall be utilized for threaded pipe joints. O. Provide pipe and fittings of similar materials so dielectric fittings are not needed; i.e. only brass and bronze fittings with copper piping. P. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings and Couplings: 1. Piping shall be roll grooved only. Cut groove piping is not allowed. 2. Gaskets shall be EPDM. 3. Install per manufacturer’s installation instructions. 3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC" for joint construction requirements for soldered and brazed joints in copper tubing; threaded, welded, and flanged joints in steel piping. 3.5 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting. B. Install one automatic air vent per system in mechanical equipment rooms only at air separator for system air venting. C. Install in-line air separators in pump suction lines. Install drain valve on units NPS 2 and larger. D. Install expansion tanks on floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure tank is properly charged with air to suit system design requirements. E. Provide pot-feeder in heating systems and only in non-central plant chilled water systems. 3.6 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Size for supply and return piping connections shall be same as for equipment connections. B. Install shut-off valves, strainers, accessories, and flexible hose threaded connections. C. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment. D. Never install bypass piping around control valves. E. Install ports for pressure and temperature gages at coil inlet connections. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows: 1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. HYDRONIC PIPING AND VALVES 23 21 13.1-11 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment. 5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test. B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping: 1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium. 2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release trapped air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of liquid. 3. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that system is full of water. 4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test at 150 PSI or 1.5 times the design pressure, whichever is greater, for four hours. There shall be no decrease in pressure over the four hour test period. Isolate equipment subject to damage from test pressure. Make no test against a service valve or meter. Isolate from the system all existing piping and new or existing equipment that may be damaged by test pressure. Test only new piping unless instructed otherwise. Final connection between new and existing piping shall be tested at normal system operating pressures and monitored for leaks for three working days. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping." 5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage throughout the testing period. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. 6. Prepare written report of testing. 3.8 ADJUSTING A. Perform these adjustments before operating the system: 1. Open valves to fully open position. 2. Check pump for proper direction of rotation. 3. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure. 4. Check air vent at air separator and determine if it is operating freely (automatic type). 5. Check air vents at high points of system and bleed air completely (manual type). 6. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 7. Check and set operating temperatures of heating and chilled water systems to design requirements. 8. Lubricate motors and bearings. 3.9 CLEANING A. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove and clean or replace strainer screens. After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping systems, but before balancing, remove disposable fine-mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers. END OF SECTION 23 21 13.1 AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS 23 64 23.13 - 1 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement SECTION 23 64 23.13 AIR-COOLED WATER CHILLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes packaged, air-cooled, electric-motor-driven, scroll water chillers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BAS: Building automation system. B. COP: Coefficient of performance. The ratio of the rate of heat removal to the rate of energy input using consistent units for any given set of rating conditions. C. DDC: Direct digital control. D. EER: Energy-efficiency ratio. The ratio of the cooling capacity given in Btu/h to the total power input given in watts at any given set of rating conditions. E. GFI: Ground fault interrupt. F. IPLV: Integrated part-load value. A single-number part-load efficiency figure of merit for a single chiller calculated per the method defined by AHRI 550/590 and referenced to AHRI standard rating conditions. G. I/O: Input/output. H. kW/Ton: The ratio of total power input of the chiller in kilowatts to the net refrigerating capacity in tons at any given set of rating conditions. I. NPLV: Nonstandard part-load value. A single number part-load efficiency figure of merit for a single chiller calculated per the method defined by AHRI 550/590 and intended for operating conditions other than the AHRI standard rating conditions. J. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating. K. TEAO: Totally enclosed air over. L. TENV: Totally enclosed nonventilating. AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS 23 64 23.13 - 2 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include refrigerant, rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. 2. Performance at AHRI standard conditions and at conditions indicated. 3. Performance at AHRI standard unloading conditions. 4. Minimum evaporator flow rate. 5. Refrigerant capacity of water chiller. 6. Fluid capacity of evaporator. 7. Characteristics of safety relief valves. B. Shop Drawings: Complete set of manufacturer's prints of water chiller assemblies, control panels, sections and elevations, and unit isolation. Include the following: 1. Assembled unit dimensions. 2. Weight and load distribution. 3. Required clearances for maintenance and operation. 4. Size and location of piping and wiring connections. 5. Diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: 1. Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: a. Structural supports. b. Piping roughing-in requirements. c. Wiring roughing-in requirements, including spaces reserved for electrical equipment. d. Access requirements, including working clearances for mechanical controls and electrical equipment, and tube pull and service clearances. 2. Coordination drawings showing plan, section and elevation views, drawn to ¼” = 1’-0”. 3. Each view to show screened background with the following: a. Column grids, beams, columns, and concrete housekeeping pads. b. Layout with walls, floors, and roofs, including each room name and number. c. Equipment and products of other trades that are located in vicinity of chillers and part of final installation, such as plumbing systems. B. Certificates: For certification required in "Quality Assurance" Article. C. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for water chillers, accessories, and components, from manufacturers. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS 23 64 23.13 - 3 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. D. Installation instructions. E. Source quality-control reports. F. Startup service reports. G. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each water chiller to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. B. Spare Parts List: Recommended spare parts list with quantity for each. C. Touchup Paint Description: Detailed description of paint used in application of finish coat to allow for procurement of a matching paint. D. Instructional Videos: Including those that are prerecorded and those that are recorded during training. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Unit shall be rated in accordance with AHRI (Air-Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute) Standard 550/590, latest edition (U.S.A.) and all units shall be ASHRAE (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers) 90.1-2019 compliant. B. Unit construction shall comply with ASHRAE 15 Safety Code, UL (Underwriters Laboratories) latest edition, and ASME (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) applicable codes (U.S.A. codes). C. The management system governing the manufacture of this product is ISO (International Organization for Standardization) 9001:2015 certified. D. An operational test, in which the chiller is run under load, is performed at the factory. This test checks for proper operation of fans as well as various controls and safeties, and a Certificate of Unit Testing, indicating successful end-of-line testing, is provided with the unit. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Ship water chillers from the factory fully charged with refrigerant. B. Unit controls shall be capable of withstanding 150°F (66°C) storage temperatures in the control compartment. AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS 23 64 23.13 - 4 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement C. Unit shall be stored and handled per unit manufacturer's recommendations. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Standard Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of chillers that fail in materials or workmanship within 12 months from date of chiller startup or 18 months from the date of shipment, whichever occurs first. B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of water chillers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Extended warranties include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Complete chiller including refrigerant charge. b. Complete compressor and drive assembly including refrigerant charge. c. Refrigerant charge. 1) Loss of refrigerant charge for any reason due to manufacturer's product defect and product installation. d. Parts only. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of shipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Scroll water chillers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 2. Component Importance Factor: 1.0. B. Site Altitude: Chiller shall be suitable for altitude at which installed without affecting performance indicated. Make adjustments to affected chiller components to account for site altitude. C. AHRI Rating: Rate water chiller performance according to requirements in AHRI 550/590. D. ASHRAE Compliance: ASHRAE 15 for safety code for mechanical refrigeration. E. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning." F. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and stamp water chiller heat exchangers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS 23 64 23.13 - 5 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement G. Comply with NFPA 70. H. Comply with requirements of UL 1995, "Heating and Cooling Equipment," and include label by a qualified testing agency showing compliance. I. Operation Following Loss of Normal Power: 1. Equipment, associated factory- and field-installed controls, and associated electrical equipment and power supply connected to backup power system shall automatically return equipment and associated controls to the operating state occurring immediately before loss of normal power without need for manual intervention by an operator when power is restored either through a backup power source, or through normal power if restored before backup power is brought on-line. 2. See drawings for equipment served by backup power systems. 3. Provide means and methods required to satisfy requirement even if not explicitly indicated. J. Outdoor Installations: 1. Chiller shall be suitable for outdoor installation indicated. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Carrier B. Trane 2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Description: Microprocessor controlled, air-cooled liquid chiller for outdoor installation, utilizing scroll compressors, low sound fans, electronic expansion valve, optional hydronic pump system and fluid storage tank. For units that incorporate Greenspeed intelligence, all fans are controlled with variable speed fan drive motors. Chiller software shall be specifically developed to coordinate optimal fan speed for application conditions and provide refrigerant circuit optimization, resulting in higher part load efficiency and reduced acoustic levelsRetain "Sound-Reduction Package" Paragraph below for projects with stringent acoustical requirements. Sound-reduction packages are typically an optional feature. 2.4 EQUIPMENT A. General: 1. Factory assembled, single-piece chassis, air-cooled liquid chiller. Contained within the unit cabinet shall be all factory wiring, piping, controls, refrigerant charge (R-32), and special features required prior to field start-up. AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS 23 64 23.13 - 6 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement B. Materials of Construction: 1. Frame shall be of heavy-gauge, galvanized steel. 2. Exterior panels shall be galvanized steel with a baked enamel powder or pre- painted finish. 3. Painted parts shall withstand 1000 hours in constant neutral salt spray under ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) B117 conditions with a 1 mm scribe per ASTM D1654. After test, painted parts shall show no signs of wrinkling or cracking, no loss of adhesion, no evidence of blistering, and the mean creepage shall not exceed 1/4 in. (Rating ³ per ASTM D1654) on either side of the scribe line. C. Fans: 1. Standard condenser fans shall be direct-driven (VFD [variable frequency drive] controlled on units with Greenspeed intelligence), 9-blade airfoil cross-section, reinforced polymer construction, shrouded-axial type, and shall be statically and dynamically balanced with inherent corrosion resistance. 2. The variable speed drives for the condenser fans on 30RC units with Greenspeed intelligence shall include a DC link reactor. 3. Fan operation shall allow reduced sound levels during scheduled unoccupied operating periods. Manufacturers without unoccupied reduced sound capability shall submit 1/3 octave band data and sound power data as measured according to AHRI 370 as confirmation of unit sound characteristics. 4. Air shall be discharged vertically upward. 5. Fans shall be protected by coated steel wire safety guards. 6. Fan blades shall have serrated edges to minimize the sound that is produced. D. Compressor/Compressor Assembly: 1. Fully hermetic, direct-drive, scroll-type com-pressors. 2. Compressor motors shall be cooled by refrigerant gas passing through motor windings and shall have either internal line break thermal and current overload protection or external current overload modules with compressor temperature sensors. 3. Compressors shall be mounted on rubber in shear vibration isolators. 4. Staging of compressors shall provide unloading capability. Digital compressor unloading control shall be available as an option. E. Brazed Plate Evaporator: 1. Evaporator shall be rated for a refrigerant working-side pressure of 710 psig (4895 kPa) and shall be tested for a maximum water-side pressure of 300 psig (2068 kPa) or 150 psig (1034 kPa) when optional hydronic package is installed. 2. Shall be single-pass, ANSI (American National Standards Institute) type 316 stainless steel, brazed plate construction. 3. Shell shall be insulated with 3/4-in. (19 mm) closed-cell, polyvinyl-chloride foam with a maximum K factor of 0.28. 4. Shall incorporate 2 independent refrigerant circuits on sizes 035 to 060; sizes 010 to 030 shall have one independent refrigerant circuit. 5. Evaporator shall have factory-installed heater, to protect Evaporator from ambient temperature freeze down to –20°F (–29°C). Unit shall be provided with a factory- installed flow switch. 6. All connections shall use standard Victaulic-type fittings. 7. Evaporator shall be supplied with a 20 mesh strainer. AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS 23 64 23.13 - 7 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement F. Condenser: 1. Coil shall be air-cooled Novation® heat exchanger technology with microchannel (MCHX) coils and shall have a series of flat tubes containing a series of multiple, parallel flow microchannels layered between the refrigerant manifolds. 2. Coils shall consist of a two-pass arrangement. Coil construction shall consist of aluminum alloys for fins, tubes, and manifolds in combination with a corrosion- resistant coating. 3. Tubes shall be cleaned, dehydrated, and sealed. 4. Assembled condenser coils shall be leak tested and pressure tested at 656 psig (4522 kPa). G. Refrigeration Components: 1. Refrigerant circuit components shall include filter drier, moisture indicating sight glass, electronic expansion device and complete operating charge of both refrigerant R-32 and compressor oil. Per Department of Transportation regulations, when any A2L refrigerant is employed, there must be a suction service valve on any chiller containing a charge of 20 kg or more. Therefore, a suction service valve is included on all 30RC035-060 chillers which employ Al/Cu coils. H. Controls, Safeties, and Diagnostics: 1. Unit controls shall include the following minimum components: a. Microprocessor with non-volatile memory. Battery backup system shall not be accepted. b. Separate terminal block for power and controls. c. Control transformer to serve all controllers, relays, and control components. d. ON/OFF control switch. e. Replaceable solid-state controllers. f. Pressure sensors shall be installed to measure suction and discharge pressure for each circuit. Thermistors shall be installed to measure evaporator entering and leaving fluid temperatures, outdoor ambient temperature, and discharge temperature. 2. Unit controls shall include the following functions: a. Automatic circuit primary/secondary for dual circuit chillers. b. Hermetic scroll compressors are maintenance free and protected by an auto-adaptive control that minimizes compressor wear. c. Capacity control based on leaving chilled fluid temperature and compensated by rate of change of return-fluid temperature with temperature set point accuracy to 0.1°F (0.06°C). d. Limiting the chilled fluid temperature pull-down rate at start-up to an adjustable range of 0.2°F to 2°F (0.11°C to 1.1°C) per minute to prevent excessive demand spikes at start-up. e. Seven-day time schedule. f. Leaving chilled fluid temperature reset from return fluid and outside air temperature. g. Chilled water pump start/stop control and primary/standby sequencing to ensure equal pump run time. AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS 23 64 23.13 - 8 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement h. Dual chiller control for parallel chiller applications without addition of hardware modules and control panels (additional thermistors and wells are required). i. Timed maintenance scheduling to signal maintenance activities for pumps, condenser coil cleanings, strainer maintenance and user-defined maintenance activities. j. Boiler enable signal to initiate system heating mode. k. Low ambient protection to energize evaporator and hydronic system heaters. l. Periodic pump start to ensure pump seals are properly maintained during off-season periods. m. Single step demand limit control activated by remote contact closure. n. Nighttime sound mode to reduce the sound of the machine by a user- defined schedule. 3. Diagnostics: a. The control panel shall include, as standard, a display: 1) Color touch screen display with stylus. 2) Display shall allow a user to navigate through menus, select desired options, and modify data. b. Features of the display shall include: 1) Multiple connection ports for USB, Ethernet, or BACnet1 IP, ModbusError! Reference source not found.-RTU (Remote Terminal Unit), LEN (local equipment network), and Carrier -Comfort -Network® (CCN) connections. NOTE: BACnet IP may require -additional -programming. 2) Automatic reporting of alarms over email. 3) Ability to graphically plot trends of system performance and conditions over time. 4) Graphical summary display of current chiller operation and water conditions. 5) Display shall allow access to configuration, maintenance, service, set point, time schedules, alarm history, and status data. 6) Three levels of password protection against unauthorized access to configuration and maintenance information, and display set up parameters. 7) Full compatibility with the Carrier -Comfort Network® (CCN) system to provide email alarm notification and to provide network capability to fully - monitor and control chiller. 8) Display shall be capable of displaying the last 50 alarms, with clear full text description and time and date stamp, and will store a snapshot of operating conditions before and after the 10 most recent alarms. 9) Display run hours and number of starts for machine and individual compressors. 10) The control system shall allow software upgrade without the need for new - hardware modules. 4. Safeties: a. Unit shall be equipped with thermistors and all necessary components in conjunction with the control system to provide the unit with the -following protections: 1Third-party trademarks and logos are the property of their respective owners. AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS 23 64 23.13 - 9 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 1) Reverse rotation. 2) Low chilled fluid temperature. 3) Motor overtemperature. 4) High pressure. 5) Electrical overload. 6) Thermal overload. 7) Loss of refrigerant charge. a) Condenser fan motors shall have internal -overcurrent protection. I. Operating Characteristics: 1. Unit shall be capable of operating down to –20°F (–29°C) on size 010 and 015 units, 45°F (7.2°C) on size 020-030 units, and 32°F (0°C) on size 035-060 units as standard. 2. Unit sizes 020-060 are capable of lower starting and operating temperatures with the inclusion of wind baffles and high-efficiency variable condenser fans. 3. Unit shall be capable of starting and running at outdoor ambient temperatures up to 120°F (50°C) for all sizes. Unit shall additionally be able to stay online when running with a 125°F (52°C) ambient temperature. 4. Unit shall be capable of starting up with 95°F (35°C) entering fluid temperature to the evaporator. J. Fan Motors: 1. Condenser fan motors shall be totally enclosed, air over, 3-phase type with permanently lubricated bearings and Class F insulation. Fans shall use 8-pole motor. K. Electrical Requirements: 1. Unit/module primary electrical power supply shall enter the unit at a single electrical box. 2. Unit shall operate on 3-phase power at the voltage shown in the equipment schedule. 3. Control points shall be accessed through terminal block. 4. Unit shall be shipped with factory control and power wiring installed. 5. Unit shall have a standard SCCR (short circuit current rating) of 10 kA. L. Chilled Water Circuit: 1. Chilled water circuit shall be rated for 300 psig (2068 kPa). Units with optional pump package are rated for 150 psig (1034 kPa) working pressure. 2. Solid-state flow monitor with integral relay shall be factory installed and wired. 3. Brass body strainer with 20 mesh screen and ball type blow down. 4. Optional hydronic package (applies to all unit sizes except as noted, with or without the use of VFD [variable frequency drive]): a. Field pipe connections shall be carbon steel Victaulic type. b. Optional single or primary/stand-by operation pump systems. Dual pump systems shall have a pump discharge check valve. c. For dual-pump packages, the equipment shall have one pump operating, and a simple transition to the back-up pump shall be accomplished by means of a valve which shall be supplied with this configuration. d. For dual-pump packages, when servicing is required, the pump removal/installation process shall require neither the chiller to be drained AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS 23 64 23.13 - 10 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement nor the installation of a blank flange to replace the pump vertical in-line, being removed/installed. e. Pumps shall be single stage design, capable of being serviced without disturbing piping connections. 1) Pump casing shall be of class 30 cast iron. 2) The impeller shall be of cast bronze, closed type, dynamically balanced, keyed to the shaft and secured by locking cap screw. 3) The hydronic kit will be provided with a flush line connection to ensure lubrication at the seal face and allow for positive venting of the seal chamber. 4) Each port shall be fitted with an isolation valve that allows the units to operate in parallel or standby, yet may be used to isolate one pumping unit for servicing or removal with the other pump still -running. 5) Pump shall be rated for 150 psig (1034 kPa) working pressure. 6) The pump piping shall have gauge tappings at the suction and discharge lines and include drain ports. 7) Dual pumps shall allow for the servicing of one pump without draining the chilled water loop. 8) Motors shall be TEFC 3-phase type with grease-lubricated ball bearings. 9) Each pump shall be factory tested per Hydraulic Institute Standards. 10) Pump motors shall be VFD compatible. f. Fluid expansion tank shall be factory installed within the chiller cabinet insulates, pre-charged and rated for a maximum working pressure of 150 psig (1034 kPa). g. Water pressure taps (2) shall be factory installed across the evaporator and rated for 150 psig (1034 kPa). h. Combination valve (which includes check, isolation, and modulation) shall be factory installed. Pressure/temperature taps (2) shall be factory installed to measure the pressure -differential across the combination valve. i. Hydronic assembly shall have factory- supplied electric freeze protection to –20°F (–29°C) when optional heaters are used. M. Special Features: Certain standard features are not applicable when the features designated by * are specified. For assistance in amending the specifications, contact your Carrier representative. 1. High-efficiency variable condenser fans: All fans on the unit shall have variable speed fan motors to provide higher part load efficiency and reduced acoustic levels. Each fan circuit shall have a factory-installed, independent variable speed drive with display. Variable speed drives are rated IP-55 enclosures and UL Listed. The use of this option or accessory, with the addition of antifreeze in the evaporator circuit and wind baffles, shall allow running with outdoor ambient temperatures down to –20°F (–28.9°C). This feature is standard on sizes 010 and 015. 2. * Low-Ambient Operation: Unit shall be capable of starting as low as and operating down to –20°F (–29°C) with the addition of high-efficiency variable con-denser fans. In addition, adequate field-supplied antifreeze with suitable corrosion inhibitor protection shall be field-installed in the evaporator circuit. Field-installed wind baffles shall also be required. If significant low-load operation is AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS 23 64 23.13 - 11 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement anticipated, then hot gas bypass is recommended. High-efficiency variable condenser fans are standard on sizes 010 and 015. NOTE: The motors associated with low ambient head pressure control will be open type and shall have class B insulation. 3. Unit-Mounted Non-Fused Disconnect: Unit shall be supplied with factory-installed, non-fused electrical disconnect for main power supply. This option shall be included with the high SCCR option. 4. Optional Condenser Coil Materials: a. E-coated microchannel coils: E-coated aluminum microchannel coil shall have a flexible epoxy polymer coating uniformly applied to all coil external surface areas without material bridging between fins or louvers. Coating process shall ensure complete coil encapsulation, including all exposed fin edges. E-coat shall have a thickness of 0.8 to 1.2 mil with top coat having a uniform dry film thickness from 1.0 to 2.0 mil on all external coil surface areas including fin edges. E-coated coils shall have superior hardness characteristics of 2H per ASTM D3363-00 and cross hatch adhesion of 4B-5B per ASTM D3359-02. Impact resistance shall be up to 160 in./lb (ASTM D2794-93). E-coated coil shall have superior impact resistance with no cracking, chipping, or peeling per NSF/ANSI 51-2002 Method 10.2. E-coated aluminum microchannel coils shall be capable of withstanding 8,000-hour salt spray test in accordance with the ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) B-117 Standard. b. Aluminum fin/copper tube coils: Coil shall be constructed of seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to aluminum fins. Fins shall have wavy enhancements. These condenser coils are recommended with remote evaporator applications. These coils are not recommended for corrosive environments. c. E-coated aluminum-fin coils: Coil shall have a flexible epoxy polymer coating uniformly applied to all coil surface areas without material bridging between fins. Coating process shall ensure complete coil encapsulation. Color shall be high gloss black with gloss; 60° of 65 to 90% per ASTM ID523-89. Uniform dry film thickness from 0.8 to 1.2 mil on all surface areas including fin edges. Superior hardness characteristics of 2H per ASTM D3363-92A and cross hatch adhesion of 4B-5B per ASTM D3359-93. Impact resistance shall be up to 160 in./lb (ASTM D2794-93). Humidity and water immersion resistance shall be up to minimum 1000 and 250 hours respectively (ASTM D2247-92 and ASTM D870-92). E-coated aluminum-fin coils shall be capable of withstanding 8,000-hour salt spray test in accordance with the ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) B-117 Standard. Coil construction shall be aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes. 5. Hot Gas Bypass: Unit shall be equipped with factory or field-installed, microprocessor-controlled, hot gas bypass that shall permit unit operation down below the minimum standard step of AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS 23 64 23.13 - 12 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement capacity. The factory option is not available on sizes 010 and 015 or on any application with a leaving fluid temperature below 38°F (3.3°C). Option and accessory not available on units with the digital compressor option. 6. Energy Management Module: A factory or field-installed module shall provide the following energy management capabilities: cooling set point and demand limit control; 2-point demand limit control (from 15% to 100%) activated by a remote contact closure; discrete input for “Ice Done” indication for ice storage system interface and dual chiller leaving water temperature or chilled water reset based upon space temperature. 7. Hail Guards: Unit shall be supplied with factory or field-installed, louvered, sheet metal panels which securely fasten to the chiller and provide condenser coil protection against hail and other physical damage. This option or accessory directly covers the coil(s) on all sizes. 8. Vibration Isolation: Vibration isolation pads shall be supplied for field installation at unit mounting points. Pads shall help to reduce vibration transmission into the occupied space. 9. Chilled Water Storage Tank: a. Fluid storage tank shall be rated for a maximum of 150 psig (1034 kPa). b. Shall provide a minimum 4 gallon per ton (3.7 L per kW) fluid storage capacity. c. Shall fit under the chiller to minimize system footprint requirements. Tanks fitted outside of chiller footprint shall not be acceptable. d. Tank shall be constructed a cold rolled carbon steel shell. e. Tank shall be insulated with 3/4-in. (19 mm) closed-cell, polyvinyl-chloride foam with a maximum K factor of 0.28. f. Tank shall be baffled to prevent temperature stratification. g. Tank shall have Victaulic connections. h. Tank shall have vent and drain plugs accessible from outside tank enclosure. i. Internal heaters shall provide freeze protection to –20°F (–29°C). The included heater thermostat prevents overheating of the fluid. 10. BACnet IP: Shall provide a factory-installed interface between the chiller and a BACnet Local Area Network (LAN) and allows integration with i-Vu® Open control system or a third-party BACnet building automation system. Field configuration is required. 11. LonWorks Translator: Unit shall be supplied with field-installed interface between the chiller and a Local Operating Network (LON, i.e., LonWorks FT-10A ANSI/EIA-709.1). Field programming shall be required. 12. GFI Convenience Outlet: Shall be factory or field installed to provide the chiller with a 4 amp GFI receptacle. The receptacle shall have independent fuse protection. The convenience outlet is a 115-v female receptacle. When this item is factory-installed, remote connectivity is also included. AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS 23 64 23.13 - 13 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 13. Compressor Blankets: Shall provide factory or field-installed sound blankets around each compressor in conjunction with low-sound AeroAcoustic™ fans to provide significant chiller sound reduction. 14. High SCCR (Short Circuit Current Rating): The optional high SCCR (short circuit current rating) device shall allow the chiller to tolerate a 65 kA (208V-460V) and 25KA (575V) short circuit current for a brief period of time while protecting the downstream components. The high SCCR option shall provide a higher level of protection than the standard unit. The selection of this option includes a non-fused disconnect. 15. Digital Compressor Option: Shall provide a factory-installed digital compressor to provide incremental steps for tighter temperature control (not available on any application with a leaving fluid temperature below 38°F [3.3°C]). 16. Remote Evaporator Kit: Field-installed remote evaporator kit shall provide the additional hardware required to remotely mount the evaporator from the unit. There are limits to total separation of the unit to the evaporator as well as vertical separation limits, and these shall be delineated in the accessory installation instructions. Never bury refrigerant piping on these or any other applications. 17. Wind Baffles: Wind baffles shall be field installed to facilitate operation down to –20°F (–29°C) when used in conjunction with high-efficiency variable condenser fans. 18. Suction Line Insulation: Shall provide a tubular, closed-cell form of insulation that is factory-installed on the chiller suction piping. 19. Phase Loss Monitor: Shall be field installed to provide the unit with protection against phase loss. 20. Remote connectivity: Shall be factory-installed to provide a secure cellular system which communicates operating information to a central operating site. The selection of this option automatically includes GFI convenience outlet. 2.5 INSULATION A. Closed-cell, flexible, elastomeric thermal insulation complying with ASTM C 534/C 534M, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. 1. Thickness: 3/4 inch. AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS 23 64 23.13 - 14 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement B. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer. C. Factory-applied insulation over all cold surfaces of chiller capable of forming condensation. Components shall include, but not be limited to, evaporator, evaporator water boxes including nozzles, refrigerant suction pipe from evaporator to compressor, cold surfaces of compressor, refrigerant-cooled motor, and auxiliary piping. 1. Apply adhesive to 100 percent of insulation contact surface. 2. Before insulating steel surfaces, prepare surfaces for paint, and prime and paint as indicated for other painted components. Do not insulate unpainted steel surfaces. 3. Seal seams and joints to provide a vapor barrier. 4. After adhesive has fully cured, paint exposed surfaces of insulation to match other painted parts. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform functional test of water chillers before shipping. B. Factory test and inspect evaporator according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. Stamp with ASME label. C. For water chillers located outdoors, rate sound power level according to AHRI 370 procedure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Before water chiller installation, examine roughing-in for equipment support, anchor-bolt sizes and locations, piping, controls, and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other conditions affecting water chiller performance, maintenance, and operations. 1. Water chiller locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact locations before roughing-in for piping, controls, and electrical connections. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 WATER CHILLER INSTALLATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into concrete bases. B. Coordinate sizes, locations, and anchoring attachments of structural-steel support structures with actual equipment provided. C. Install water chillers on support structure indicated. D. Equipment Mounting: AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS 23 64 23.13 - 15 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 1. Install water chillers on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in [Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."] [Section 033053 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."] 2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic-control devices specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC." 3. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 230548.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC." E. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance. F. Maintain clearances required by governing code. G. Chiller manufacturer's factory-trained service personnel shall charge water chiller with refrigerant if not factory charged. H. Install separate devices furnished by manufacturer and not factory installed. 1. Chillers shipped in multiple major assemblies shall be field assembled by chiller manufacturer's factory-trained service personnel. 3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 232116 "Hydronic Piping Specialties." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Comply with requirements in Section 232300 "Refrigerant Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. C. Where installing piping adjacent to chillers, allow space for service and maintenance. D. Evaporator Fluid Connections: 1. Connect to evaporator inlet with shutoff valve, strainer, flexible connector, thermometer, and plugged tee with pressure gage. 2. Connect to evaporator outlet with shutoff valve, balancing valve, flexible connector, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee with pressure gage, flow meter, and drain connection with valve. 3. Make connections to water chiller with a mechanical coupling. E. Connect each chiller vent connection with an automatic vent, full size of vent connection. 3.4 ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTIONS A. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." B. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS 23 64 23.13 - 16 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement C. Provide nameplate for each electrical connection indicating electrical equipment designation and circuit number feeding connection. Nameplate shall be laminated phenolic layers of black with engraved white letters at least 1/2 inch high. Locate nameplate where easily visible. 3.5 CONTROLS CONNECTIONS A. Install control and electrical power wiring to field-mounted control devices. B. Connect control wiring between chillers and other equipment to interlock operation as required to provide a complete and functioning system. C. Connect control wiring between chiller control interface and DDC system for remote monitoring and control of chillers. Comply with requirements in Section 230923 "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC." D. Provide nameplate on face of chiller control panel indicating control equipment designation serving chiller and the I/O point designation for each control connection. Nameplate shall be laminated phenolic layers of black with engraved white letters at least 1/2 inch high. 3.6 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. B. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical connections for proper assemblies, installations, and connections. C. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and perform the following: 1. Verify that refrigerant charge is sufficient and water chiller has been leak tested. 2. Verify that pumps are installed and functional. 3. Verify that thermometers and gages are installed. D. Visually inspect chiller for damage before starting. Repair or replace damaged components, including insulation. Do not start chiller until damage that is detrimental to operation has been corrected. E. Prepare a written startup report that records results of tests and inspections. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain water chillers. 1. Instructor shall be factory trained and certified. 2. Train personnel in operation and maintenance and to obtain maximum efficiency in plant operation. 3. Provide instructional videos showing general operation and maintenance that are coordinated with operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Obtain Owner sign-off that training is complete. 5. Owner training shall be held at Project site. AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS 23 64 23.13 - 17 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement END OF SECTION 23 64 23.13 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 1 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement SECTION 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Copper building wire. 2. Connectors and splices. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Copper building wire. 2. Connectors and splices. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COPPER BUILDING WIRE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. General Cable; Prysmian Group North America. 2. Service Wire Co. 3. Southwire Company, LLC. B. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying conductor with an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less. C. Standards: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. D. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B8 ASTM B496 for stranded conductors. LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 2 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement E. Conductor Insulation: 1. Type THWN-2. Comply with UL 83. 2. Type THW-2. Comply with NEMA WC-70/ICEA S-95-658 and UL 83. 3. Type XHHW-2. Comply with UL 44. 2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors, splices, and lugs of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. B. Jacketed Cable Connectors: For steel and aluminum jacketed cables, zinc die-cast with set screws, designed to connect conductors specified in this Section. C. Lugs: One piece, seamless, designed to terminate conductors specified in this Section. 1. Material: Copper. 2. Type: One hole with standard barrels. 3. Termination: Compression. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Feeders: 1. Copper; stranded for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. 2. Copper for feeders smaller than No. 4 AWG; copper or aluminum for feeders No. 4 AWG and larger. Conductors must be stranded for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. B. Branch Circuits: 1. Copper: a. Stranded for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. b. Stranded for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 10 AWG and larger. C. ASD Output Circuits Cable: Extra-flexible stranded for all sizes. 3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A. Service Entrance: Conductor shall be provided by the utility company. B. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 3 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement C. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points in accordance with Section 260533.13 "Conduits for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables. C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." G. Complete cable tray systems installation according to Section 260536 "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems" prior to installing conductors and cables. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B. B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inch of slack. 3.5 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor. 3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 4 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 3.7 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements. 2. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors and conductors feeding the following critical equipment and services for compliance with requirements: 3. Perform each of the following visual and electrical tests: a. Inspect exposed sections of conductor and cable for physical damage and correct connection according to the single-line diagram. b. Test bolted connections for high resistance using one of the following: 1) A low-resistance ohmmeter. 2) Calibrated torque wrench. 3) Thermographic survey. c. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation. d. Inspect for correct identification. e. Inspect cable jacket and condition. f. Insulation-resistance test on each conductor for ground and adjacent conductors. Apply a potential of 500 V(dc) for 300 V rated cable and 1000 V(dc) for 600 V rated cable for a one-minute duration. g. Continuity test on each conductor and cable. h. Uniform resistance of parallel conductors. B. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports to record the following: 1. Procedures used. 2. Results that comply with requirements. 3. Results that do not comply with requirements, and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. END OF SECTION 260519 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 1 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Grounding and bonding conductors. 2. Grounding and bonding clamps. 3. Grounding and bonding bushings. 4. Grounding and bonding hubs. 5. Grounding and bonding connectors. 6. Intersystem bonding bridge grounding connectors. 7. Grounding and bonding busbars. 8. Grounding (earthing) electrodes. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Product Listing: Include copy of unexpired approval letter, on letterhead of qualified electrical testing agency, certifying product's compliance with specified listing criteria. a. If listed manufacturer differs from selling manufacturer, indicate relationship between entities on submittal. Clearly indicate which entity warrants product performance and fitness for purpose. b. Listing criteria identified in approval letter must match specified listing criteria. UL label indicating approval of equipment's enclosure is not considered approval of equipment for intended application. c. Product identification in approval letter must match product branding and model numbers in submittal. Approval letters for discontinued or superseded products are unacceptable for submitted product. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's published instructions. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at grounding connections for service entrance equipment based on NFPA 70B. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 2 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 1) Tests must determine if ground-resistance or impedance values remain within specified maximums, and instructions must recommend corrective action if values do not. 2) Include recommended testing intervals. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Electrical Power Testing (EPT) Technician III: Possessing active NICET EPT Level III certification. Able to manage switching procedures, conduct tests of complex equipment, analyze test and equipment data, plan a job, and lead a team. Has experience performing NFPA 70B, IEEE, and NETA electrical tests. 1.6 SERVICE CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Electrical and ICT Equipment Grounding (Earthing): Do not exceed 10 Ω resistance to ground (earth). 1. Contact Architect for resolution if 10 Ω specified resistance to ground (earth) is not attained after second attempt to increase effectiveness of grounding (earthing) electrode. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONDUCTORS A. Equipment Grounding Conductor: 1. Standard Features: 600 V, [THHN/THWN-2], copper wire or cable, green color, in accordance with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." B. ASTM - Bare Copper Grounding and Bonding Conductor: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. ERICO; brand of nVent Electrical plc. b. Harger Lightning & Grounding; business of Harger, Inc. 2. Standard Features: Complying with one or more of the following: a. Concentric-Lay Stranded Copper Conductor: ASTM B8. 2.2 GROUNDING AND BONDING CLAMPS A. Description: Clamps suitable for attachment of grounding and bonding conductors to grounding electrodes, pipes, tubing, and rebar. Grounding and bonding clamps specified in this article are also suitable for use with communications applications. B. UL KDER and KDSH - Hex-Fitting-Type Pipe and Rod Grounding and Bonding Clamp. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 3 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement a. ERICO; brand of nVent Electrical plc. b. Harger Lightning & Grounding; business of Harger, Inc. c. Burndy; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. d. Grounding and Bonding Equipment for Communications: UL CCN KDSH; including UL 467. 2. Standard Features: a. Two pieces with stainless steel bolts. b. Clamp Material: Silicon bronze. c. Listed for outdoor use. 2.3 GROUNDING AND BONDING BUSHINGS A. Description: Bonding bushings connect conduit fittings, tubing fittings, threaded metal conduit, and unthreaded metal conduit to metal boxes and equipment enclosures and have one or more bonding screws intended to provide electrical continuity between bushing and enclosure. Grounding bushings have provision for connection of bonding or grounding conductor and may or may not also have bonding screws. B. UL KDER - Bonding Bushing 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Killark; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. b. O-Z/Gedney; brand of Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions, Appleton Group. c. Raco Taymac Bell; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. 2.4 GROUNDING AND BONDING HUBS A. UL KDER - Grounding and Bonding Hub: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Burndy; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. b. Crouse-Hinds; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector. c. O-Z/Gedney; brand of Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions, Appleton Group. 2. Standard Features: Insulated, gasketed, watertight hub with mechanical-type wire terminal. 2.5 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONNECTORS A. UL KDER - Lay-In Lug Mechanical-Type Grounding and Bonding Busbar Terminal: GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 4 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Chatsworth Products, Inc. b. ILSCO. c. Burndy; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. 2. Standard Features: Mechanical-type, copper rated for direct burial terminal with set screw. 2.6 GROUNDING (EARTHING) ELECTRODES A. UL KDER - Rod Electrode: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Continental Industries; brand of Hubbell Utility Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. b. ERICO; brand of nVent Electrical plc. c. Harger Lightning & Grounding; business of Harger, Inc. d. Grounding and Bonding Equipment: UL CCN KDER; including UL 467. 2. Standard Features: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 ft. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine facility's grounding electrode system and equipment grounding for compliance with requirements for maximum ground-resistance level and other conditions affecting performance of grounding and bonding of electrical system. B. Inspect test results of grounding system measured at point of electrical service equipment connection. C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with connection of electrical service equipment only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 SELECTION OF GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS A. Grounding and Bonding Conductors: 1. Provide solid conductor for 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated. 2. Custom-Length Insulated Equipment Bonding Jumpers: 6 AWG, 19-strand, Type THHN. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 5 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement B. Grounding and Bonding Connectors: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. C. Grounding and Bonding Busbars: Provide in electrical equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF GROUNDING AND BONDING A. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions. B. Reference Standards: 1. Electrical Construction: ICC IBC, ICC IFC, NFPA 1, NFPA 70, and NECA NEIS 1. 2. Electrical Maintenance: NFPA 70B. 3. Electrical Safety: NFPA 70E. 4. Grounding and Bonding: NECA NEIS 331 and Article 250 of NFPA 70. 5. Emergency and Standby Power Work: NFPA 110, NFPA 111, and NECA NEIS 416. 6. Work in Confined Spaces: NFPA 350. C. Special Techniques: 1. Grounding and Bonding Conductors: a. Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. 2. Grounding and Bonding Connectors: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact are galvanically compatible. a. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer in order of galvanic series. b. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. c. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless steel separators and mechanical clamps. d. Make aluminum-to-galvanized-steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps. e. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. f. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1) Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate adjacent parts. 2) Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 6 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 3) Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if disconnect-type connection is required, use bolted clamp. g. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1) Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use bolted clamp connector or bolt lug-type connector to pipe flange by using one of lug bolts of flange. Where dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. h. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install driven ground rod at base of each corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 ft apart. 3. Electrodes: a. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inch below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated. 1) Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any. 2) Use exothermic welds for below-grade connections. 4. Grounding at Service: a. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors must be connected to ground busbar. Install main bonding jumper between neutral and ground buses. 5. Grounding Separately Derived Systems: a. Permanent Generators: Install grounding electrode(s) at location of permanent generators having switched neutral connections. Electrode must be connected to equipment grounding conductor and to frame of generator. 6. Equipment Grounding and Bonding: a. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with feeders and branch circuits. b. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1) Feeders and branch circuits. 2) Lighting circuits. 3) Receptacle circuits. 4) Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5) Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6) Flexible raceway runs. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 7 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR GROUNDING AND BONDING A. Administrant for Electrical Power Tests and Inspections: 1. Engage qualified electrical testing and inspecting agency to administer and perform tests and inspections. B. Field tests and inspections must be witnessed by owner or authorities having jurisdiction. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with calibrated torque wrench in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 3. Test completed grounding system at each location where maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before conductors are connected. a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method in accordance with IEEE Std 81. c. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. D. Nonconforming Work: 1. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 2. Remove and replace defective components and retest. E. Collect, assemble, and submit test and inspection reports. 1. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: a. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 Ω. b. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 5 Ω c. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 Ω. d. Generator: 10 Ω. 3.5 PROTECTION A. After installation, protect grounding and bonding cables and equipment from construction activities. Remove and replace items that are contaminated, defaced, damaged, or otherwise caused to be unfit for use prior to acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION 26 05 26 CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 26 05 33.13 - 1 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement SECTION 26 05 33.13 CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Type EMT duct raceways and elbows. 2. Type ENT duct raceways and fittings. 3. Type FMC duct raceways. 4. Type LFMC duct raceways. 5. Type PVC duct raceways and fittings. 6. Fittings for conduit, tubing, and cable. 7. Solvent cements. 8. Section 260519 "Low-Voltage for Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" specifies nonmetallic underground conduit with conductors (Type NUCC). 1.2 REFERENCES A. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Electrical Raceway Types: 1. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. 2. EMT-A: Aluminum electrical metallic tubing. 3. EMT-S: Steel electrical metallic tubing. 4. EMT-SS: Stainless steel electrical metallic tubing. 5. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing. 6. EPEC: Electrical HDPE underground conduit (thin wall). 7. EPEC-A: Type A electrical HDPE underground conduit. 8. EPEC-B: Type B electrical HDPE underground conduit. 9. ERMC: Electrical rigid metal conduit. 10. ERMC-A: Aluminum electrical rigid metal conduit. 11. ERMC-S: Steel electrical rigid metal conduit. 12. ERMC-S-G: Galvanized-steel electrical rigid metal conduit. 13. ERMC-S-PVC: PVC-coated-steel electrical rigid metal conduit. 14. ERMC-SS: Stainless steel electrical rigid metal conduit. 15. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. 16. FMC-A: Aluminum flexible metal conduit. 17. FMC-S: Steel flexible metal conduit. 18. FMT: Steel flexible metallic tubing. 19. FNMC: Flexible nonmetallic conduit. See "LFNC." 20. HDPE: HDPE underground conduit (thick wall). 21. HDPE-40: Schedule 40 HDPE underground conduit. 22. HDPE-80: Schedule 80 HDPE underground conduit. 23. IMC: Steel electrical intermediate metal conduit. 24. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 25. LFMC-A: Aluminum liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 26. LFMC-S: Steel liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 27. LFMC-SS: Stainless steel liquidtight flexible metal conduit. CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 26 05 33.13 - 2 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 28. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit. 29. LFNC-A: Layered (Type A) liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit. 30. LFNC-B: Integral (Type B) liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit. 31. LFNC-C: Corrugated (Type C) liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit. 32. PVC: Rigid PVC conduit. 33. PVC-40: Schedule 40 rigid PVC conduit. 34. PVC-80: Schedule 80 rigid PVC Conduit. 35. PVC-A: Type A rigid PVC concrete-encased conduit. 36. PVC-EB: Type EB rigid PVC concrete-encased underground conduit. 37. RGS: See ERMC-S-G. 38. RMC: See ERMC. 39. RTRC: Reinforced thermosetting resin conduit. 40. RTRC-AG: Low-halogen, aboveground reinforced thermosetting resin conduit. 41. RTRC-AG-HW: Heavy wall, low-halogen, aboveground reinforced thermosetting resin conduit. 42. RTRC-AG-SW: Standard wall, low-halogen, aboveground reinforced thermosetting resin conduit. 43. RTRC-AG-XW: Extra heavy wall, low-halogen, aboveground reinforced thermosetting resin conduit. 44. RTRC-BG: Low-halogen, belowground reinforced thermosetting resin conduit. B. Definitions: 1. Conduit: A structure containing one or more duct raceways. 2. Duct Raceway: A single enclosed raceway for conductors or cable. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Products or components listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70, by qualified electrical testing laboratory recognized by authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application. 2.2 TYPE EMT DUCT RACEWAYS AND ELBOWS A. UL FJMX - Steel Electrical Metal Tubing (EMT-S) and Elbows: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit; Atkore International. b. Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions. c. Western Tube; Zekelman Industries. CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 26 05 33.13 - 3 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 2. Listing Criteria: Investigated, labeled, and marked by qualified electrical testing laboratory in accordance with guide information and standards specified for the following UL product categories: a. UL CCN FJMX; including UL 797. 3. Standard Features: a. Material: Steel. b. Exterior Coating: Alternate corrosion-resistant coating. c. Interior Coating: Zinc with organic top coating. d. Minimum Trade Size: Metric designator 21 (trade size 3/4). 2.3 TYPE FMC DUCT RACEWAYS A. UL DXUZ - Steel Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC-S): 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Anaconda Sealtite; Anamet Electrical, Inc. b. Electri-Flex Company. c. Penn Aluminum Conduit & EMT; Penn Aluminum International LLC; Berkshire Hathaway. 2. Listing Criteria: Investigated, labeled, and marked by qualified electrical testing laboratory in accordance with guide information and standards specified for the following UL product categories: a. UL CCN DXUZ; including UL 1. 3. Standard Features: a. Material: Steel. b. Minimum Trade Size: Metric designator 21 (trade size 3/4). 2.4 TYPE LFMC DUCT RACEWAYS A. UL DXHR - Steel Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC-S): 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Anaconda Sealtite; Anamet Electrical, Inc. b. Electri-Flex Company. c. International Metal Hose Co. 2. Listing Criteria: Investigated, labeled, and marked by qualified electrical testing laboratory in accordance with guide information and standards specified for the following UL product categories: a. UL CCN DXHR; including UL 360. CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 26 05 33.13 - 4 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 3. Standard Features: a. Material: Steel. b. Minimum Trade Size: Metric designator 21 (trade size 3/4). 2.5 TYPE PVC DUCT RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS A. UL DZYR - Schedule 40 Rigid PVC Conduit (PVC-40) and Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Calconduit; Atkore International. b. JM Eagle. c. National Pipe and Plastic, Inc. (Oldcastle). 2. Listing Criteria: Investigated, labeled, and marked by qualified electrical testing laboratory in accordance with guide information and standards specified for the following UL product categories: a. UL CCN DZYR; including UL 651. 3. Standard Features: a. Dimensional Specifications: Schedule 40. b. Minimum Trade Size: Metric designator 21 (trade size 3/4). c. Markings: For use with maximum 90 deg C wire. 2.6 FITTINGS FOR CONDUIT, TUBING, AND CABLE A. UL DWTT - Fittings for Type ERMC, and Type PVC Raceways: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Konkore Fittings; Atkore International. b. O-Z/Gedney; brand of Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions, Appleton Group. c. Southwire Company, LLC. 2. Listing Criteria: Investigated, labeled, and marked by qualified electrical testing laboratory in accordance with guide information and standards specified for the following UL product categories: a. UL CCN DWTT; including UL 514B. 3. Standard Features: a. Material: Steel. b. Coupling Method: Compression coupling. c. Expansion and Deflection Fittings: UL 651 with flexible bonding jumper. d. CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 26 05 33.13 - 5 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement B. UL ILNR - Fittings for Type FMC Duct Raceways: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. American Fittings Corp. (AMFICO). b. Liquid Tight Connector Co. c. Southwire Company, LLC. 2. Listing Criteria: Investigated, labeled, and marked by qualified electrical testing laboratory in accordance with guide information and standards specified for the following UL product categories: a. UL CCN ILNR; including UL 514B.Retain this article to require threaded joints and fittings to be treated with joint compound for improved conductivity, resistance to oxidation, and ease of assembly and disassembly. Note that plumbing compounds and tapes are not permitted by NFPA 70 because they are not conductive. 2.7 SOLVENT CEMENTS A. UL VBEW - Solvent Cements for Nonmetallic Duct Raceways and Fittings: 1. Listing Criteria: Investigated, labeled, and marked by qualified electrical testing laboratory in accordance with guide information and standards specified for the following UL product categories: a. Solvent Cements: UL CCN VBEW; including UL 340. b. Solvent Cement Compatibility with PVC Conduit Fittings: UL CCN DWTT; including UL 514B. Follow solvent manufacturer's published instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SELECTION OF CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Unless more stringent requirements are specified in the Contract Documents or manufacturer's published instructions, comply with NFPA 70 for selection of duct raceways. Consult Architect for resolution of conflicting requirements. B. Indoors: 1. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: ERMC. 2. Exposed and Subject to Physical Damage: ERMC. 3. Exposed and Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Damp or Wet Locations: ERMC. 6. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions. B. Special Installation Techniques: CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 26 05 33.13 - 6 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 1. General Requirements for Installation of Duct Raceways: a. Complete duct raceway installation before starting conductor installation. b. Provide stub-ups through floors with coupling threaded inside for plugs, set flush with finished floor. Plug coupling until conduit is extended above floor to final destination or a minimum of 2 ft above finished floor. c. Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends in conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which no more than equivalent of two 90-degree fewer bends are permitted. Support within 12 inch of changes in direction. d. Make bends in duct raceway using large-radius preformed ells except for parallel bends. Field bending must be in accordance with NFPA 70 minimum radii requirements. Provide only equipment specifically designed for material and size involved. e. Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. f. Support conduit within 12 inch of enclosures to which attached. g. Do not install duct raceways or electrical items on "explosion-relief" walls or rotating equipment. h. Do not install conduits within 2 inch of the bottom side of a metal deck roof. i. Keep duct raceways at least 6 inch away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal duct raceway runs above water and steam piping. j. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits metric designator 53 (trade size 2) and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length. Ream inside of conduit to remove burrs. k. Install pull wires in empty duct raceways. Provide polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200 lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inch of slack at both ends of pull wire. Cap underground duct raceways designated as spare above grade alongside duct raceways in use. l. Install duct raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures without hubs with locknuts on both sides of enclosure wall. Install locknuts hand tight, plus one-quarter turn more. 1) Termination fittings with shoulders do not require two locknuts. 2. Types EMT-S: Do not install aluminum duct raceways or fittings in contact with concrete or earth. 3. Types ERMC: a. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound that maintains electrical conductivity to threads of duct raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's published instructions. 4. Types FMC, LFMC, and LFNC: a. Provide a maximum of 36 inch of flexible conduit for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 5. Types PVC: a. Do not install Type PVC conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 122 deg F. Conductor ratings must be limited to 75 deg C except where installed in a trench CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 26 05 33.13 - 7 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement outside buildings with concrete encasement, where 90 deg C conductors are permitted. b. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions for solvent welding and fittings. c. Join joints with solvent cement in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and allowed to cure before handling. Joints to be bent, pushed, or pulled must set for minimum 24 h after joining. 6. Duct Raceways Embedded in Slabs: a. Arrange duct raceways to cross building expansion joints with expansion fittings at right angles to the joint. b. Arrange duct raceways to ensure that each is surrounded by minimum of 2 inch of concrete without voids. 7. Duct Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: a. Provide insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than 4 AWG. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits. 8. Duct Raceways Penetrating Rooms or Walls with Acoustical Requirements: Seal duct raceway openings on both sides of rooms or walls with acoustically rated putty or firestopping. 9. Identification: Provide labels for conduit assemblies, duct raceways, and associated electrical equipment. a. Provide warning signs. C. Interfaces with Other Work: 1. Firestop penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. 2. Provide conduit hangers and supports. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL OF CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Administrant for Electrical Power Tests and Inspections: 1. Engage factory-authorized service representative to administer and perform tests and inspections on components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. 2. Administer and perform tests and inspections. B. Administrant for Communications Tests and Inspections: 1. Administer and perform tests and inspections. C. Field tests and inspections must be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform manufacturer's recommended tests and inspections. 2. Pull solid aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and adequate bend radii, and test for out-of-round duct. Provide minimum 12 inch long mandrel equal to duct size minus 1/4 inch. If obstructions are indicated, remove obstructions and retest. 3. Conduit Placement: a. Verify that center-line location and offsets are in accordance with the Drawings. b. Verify that hangers and supports for conduits are attached to structure. CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 26 05 33.13 - 8 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement c. Verify that nuts on bolts or hanger rods are secure. d. Verify that space between raceways and cored holes are filled with non-shrinking grout or other approved material indicated on the Drawings and the Specifications. e. Verify that expansion devices are installed at locations indicated on the Drawings and the Specifications. f. Verify that ends are cut square to provide flush-butting surfaces when spliced and inside edges are free of burrs that could impede installation of cables. g. Verify minimum separation of utilities, or that approved mechanical protection has been provided to surrounding conduit(s) where minimum separation cannot be achieved. 4. Document all changes on Record Drawings. E. Nonconforming Work: 1. Conduit will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 2. Remove and replace defective units and retest. F. Field Quality-Control Reports: Collect, assemble, and submit test and inspection reports. 3.4 CLEANING A. Verify that bentonite or other drilling fluids are contained and removed, and site is restored to its original or improved condition. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 26 05 33.13 BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33.16 - 1 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement SECTION 26 05 33.16 BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metallic outlet boxes, device boxes, rings, and covers. 2. Junction boxes and pull boxes. 3. Cover plates for device boxes. 4. Hoods for outlet boxes. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Communications Outlet: One or more communications jacks, or cables and plugs, mounted in a box or ring, with a suitable protective cover. B. Enclosure: The case or housing of an apparatus, or the fence or wall(s) surrounding an installation, to prevent personnel from accidentally contacting energized parts or to protect the equipment from physical damage. Types of enclosure and enclosure covers include the following: 1. Cabinet: An enclosure that is designed for either surface mounting or flush mounting and is provided with a frame, mat, or trim in which a swinging door or doors are or can be hung. 2. Concrete Box: A box intended for use in poured concrete. 3. Conduit Body: A means for providing access to the interior of a conduit or tubing system through one or more removable covers at a junction or terminal point. In the United States, conduit bodies are listed in accordance with outlet box requirements. 4. Conduit Box: A box having threaded openings or knockouts for conduit, EMT, or fittings. 5. Cover Plate: A cover designed for protecting wiring devices installed in flush-mounted device boxes while permitting their safe operation; also called a faceplate or wallplate. 6. Cutout Box: An enclosure designed for surface mounting that has swinging doors or covers secured directly to and telescoping with the walls of the enclosure. 7. Device Box: A box with provisions for mounting a wiring device directly to the box. 8. Extension Ring: A ring intended to extend the sides of an outlet box or device box to increase the box depth, volume, or both. 9. Floor Box: A box mounted in the floor intended for use with a floor box cover and other components to complete the floor box enclosure. 10. Floor-Mounted Enclosure: A floor box and floor box cover assembly with means to mount in the floor that is sealed against the entrance of scrub water at the floor level. 11. Floor Nozzle: An enclosure used on a wiring system, intended primarily as a housing for a receptacle, provided with a means, such as a collar, for surface-mounting on a floor, which may or may not include a stem to support it above the floor level, and is sealed against the entrance of scrub water at the floor level. 12. Junction Box: A box with a blank cover that joins different runs of raceway or cable and provides space for connection and branching of the enclosed conductors. BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33.16 - 2 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 13. Outlet Box: A box that provides access to a wiring system having pryout openings, knockouts, threaded entries, or hubs in either the sides or the back, or both, for the entrance of conduit, conduit or cable fittings, or cables, with provisions for mounting an outlet box cover, but without provisions for mounting a wiring device directly to the box. 14. Pedestal Floor Box Cover: A floor box cover that, when installed as intended, provides a means for typically vertical or near-vertical mounting of receptacle outlets above the floor's finished surface. 15. Pull Box: A box with a blank cover that joins different runs of raceway and provides access for pulling or replacing the enclosed cables or conductors. 16. Raised-Floor Box: A floor box intended for use in raised floors. 17. Recessed Access Floor Box: A floor box with provisions for mounting wiring devices below the floor surface. 18. Recessed Access Floor Box Cover: A floor box cover with provisions for passage of cords to recessed wiring devices mounted within a recessed floor box. 19. Ring: A sleeve, which is not necessarily round, used for positioning a recessed wiring device flush with the plaster, concrete, drywall, or other wall surface. 20. Ring Cover: A box cover, with raised center portion to accommodate a specific wall or ceiling thickness, for mounting wiring devices or luminaires flush with the surface. 21. Termination Box: An enclosure designed for installation of termination base assemblies consisting of bus bars, terminal strips, or terminal blocks with provision for wire connectors to accommodate incoming or outgoing conductors, or both. C. Receptacle: A fixed connecting device arranged for insertion of a power cord plug. Also called a power jack. D. Receptacle Outlet: One or more receptacles mounted in a box with a suitable protective cover. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's published instructions. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Electrical Power Testing (EPT) Technician III: Possessing active NICET EPT Level III certification. Able to manage switching procedures; conduct tests of complex equipment; analyze test and equipment data; plan a job; and lead a team. Has experience performing NFPA 70B, IEEE, and NETA electrical tests. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Products or components listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70, by qualified electrical testing laboratory recognized by authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application. BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33.16 - 3 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 2.2 METALLIC OUTLET BOXES, DEVICE BOXES, RINGS, AND COVERS A. UL QCIT - Metallic Outlet Boxes and Covers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Hubbell Premise Wiring; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. b. O-Z/Gedney; brand of Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions, Appleton Group. c. Pass & Seymour; Legrand North America, LLC. 2. Listing Criteria: Investigated, labeled, and marked by qualified electrical testing laboratory in accordance with guide information and standards specified for the following UL product categories: a. UL CCN QCIT; including UL 514A. 3. Standard Features: a. Box having pryout openings, knockouts, threaded entries, or hubs in either the sides or the back, or both, for entrance of conduit, conduit or cable fittings, or cables, with provisions for mounting outlet box cover, but without provisions for mounting wiring device directly to box. b. Material: Sheet steel. c. Sheet Metal Depth: Minimum 2.5 inch. 4. Other Available Features Required by the Project: a. Luminaire Outlet Boxes and Covers: Nonadjustable, listed and labeled for attachment of luminaire weighing up to 50 lb. B. UL QCIT - Metallic Conduit Bodies: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Killark; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. b. O-Z/Gedney; brand of Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions, Appleton Group. c. Pass & Seymour; Legrand North America, LLC. 2. Listing Criteria: Investigated, labeled, and marked by qualified electrical testing laboratory in accordance with guide information and standards specified for the following UL product categories: a. UL CCN QCIT; including UL 514A. 3. Standard Features: Means for providing access to interior of conduit or tubing system through one or more removable covers at junction or terminal point. In the United States, conduit bodies are listed in accordance with outlet box requirements. BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33.16 - 4 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement C. UL QCIT - Metallic Device Boxes: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Hubbell Premise Wiring; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. b. Killark; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. c. O-Z/Gedney; brand of Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions, Appleton Group. 2. Listing Criteria: Investigated, labeled, and marked by qualified electrical testing laboratory in accordance with guide information and standards specified for the following UL product categories: a. UL CCN QCIT; including UL 514A. 3. Standard Features: a. Box with provisions for mounting wiring device directly to box. b. Material: Sheet steel. c. Sheet Metal Depth: minimum 2.5 inch. D. UL QCIT - Metallic Extension Rings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Hubbell Wiring Device-Kellems; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. b. O-Z/Gedney; brand of Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions, Appleton Group. c. Pass & Seymour; Legrand North America, LLC. 2. Listing Criteria: Investigated, labeled, and marked by qualified electrical testing laboratory in accordance with guide information and standards specified for the following UL product categories: a. UL CCN QCIT; including UL 514A. 3. Standard Features: Ring intended to extend sides of outlet box or device box to increase box depth, volume, or both. 2.3 JUNCTION BOXES AND PULL BOXES A. UL BGUZ - Indoor Sheet Metal Junction and Pull Boxes: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Cooper B-line; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector. BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33.16 - 5 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement b. Hoffman; brand of nVent Electrical plc. c. O-Z/Gedney; brand of Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions, Appleton Group. 2. Listing Criteria: Investigated, labeled, and marked by qualified electrical testing laboratory in accordance with guide information and standards specified for the following UL product categories: a. UL CCN BGUZ; including UL 50 and UL 50E. 3. Standard Features: a. Box with a blank cover that serves the purpose of joining different runs of raceway or cable. b. Degree of Protection: Type 1. c. B. UL BGUZ - Outdoor Sheet Metal Junction and Pull Boxes: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Cooper B-line; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector. b. Hoffman; brand of nVent Electrical plc. c. O-Z/Gedney; brand of Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions, Appleton Group. 2. Listing Criteria: Investigated, labeled, and marked by qualified electrical testing laboratory in accordance with guide information and standards specified for the following UL product categories: a. UL CCN BGUZ; including UL 50 and UL 50E. 3. Standard Features: a. Box with a blank cover that serves the purpose of joining different runs of raceway or cable. b. Degree of Protection: Type 3R. 2.4 COVER PLATES FOR DEVICE BOXES A. UL QCIT or QCMZ - Metallic Cover Plates for Device Boxes: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Arrow Hart, Wiring Devices; Eaton, Electrical Sector. b. Hubbell Wiring Device-Kellems; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. c. O-Z/Gedney; brand of Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions, Appleton Group. BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33.16 - 6 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 2. Listing Criteria: Investigated, labeled, and marked by qualified electrical testing laboratory in accordance with guide information and standards specified for the following UL product categories: a. UL CCN QCIT or UL CCN QCMZ; including UL 514D. 3. Standard Features: a. Cover plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match cover plate finish. b. Damp and Wet Locations: Listed, labeled, and marked for location and use. Provide gaskets and accessories necessary for compliance with listing. c. Cover Plate Material: 0.032 inch thick, Type 302/304 non-magnetic stainless steel with brushed finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SELECTION OF BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Unless more stringent requirements are specified in Contract Documents or manufacturers' published instructions, comply with NFPA 70 for selection of boxes and enclosures. Consult Architect for resolution of conflicting requirements. B. Degree of Protection: 1. Outdoors: a. Type 3R unless otherwise indicated. b. Locations Exposed to Hose down: Type 6P. c. Locations Subject to Potential Flooding: Type 6P. d. Locations in-Ground or Exposed to Corrosive Agents: Type 6P. e. Locations in-Ground or Exposed to Corrosive Agents Where Mechanism Must Operate When Ice Covered: Type 3SX. 2. Indoors: a. Type 1 unless otherwise indicated. b. Damp or Dusty Locations: Type 12. c. Locations Exposed to Airborne Dust, Lint, Fibers, or Flyings: Type 6. d. Locations Exposed to Hosedown: Type 6P. e. Locations Exposed to Brief Submersion: Type 6P. f. Locations Exposed to Prolonged Submersion: Type 6P. g. Locations Exposed to Corrosive Agents: Type 6P. h. Locations Exposed to Spraying Oil or Coolants: Type 13. C. Exposed Boxes Installed Less Than 2.5 m (8 ft) Above Floor: 1. Boxes with knockouts or unprotected openings are prohibited. 2. Provide exposed cover. Flat covers with angled mounting slots or knockouts are prohibited. BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33.16 - 7 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 3.2 INSTALLATION OF BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions. B. Reference Standards for Installation: Unless more stringent installation requirements are specified in Contract Documents or manufacturers' published instructions, comply with the following: 1. Electrical Construction: ICC IBC, ICC IFC, NFPA 1, NFPA 70, and NECA NEIS 1. 2. Electrical Safety: NFPA 70E. 3. Commissioning of Active and Passive Fire Protection Features: NFPA 3 and NFPA 4. 4. Grounding and Bonding: NECA NEIS 331 and Article 250 of NFPA 70. 5. Communications Work: BICSI N1. 6. Life Safety and Means of Egress Work: NFPA 101. 7. Emergency and Standby Power Work: NFPA 110, NFPA 111, and NECA NEIS 416. 8. Work in Confined Spaces: NFPA 350. 9. Work in Basements and Other Developed Subterranean Spaces: NFPA 520. 10. Outlet, Device, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Article 314 of NFPA 70. 11. Consult Architect for resolution of conflicting requirements. C. Special Installation Techniques: 1. Provide boxes in wiring and raceway systems wherever required for pulling of wires, making connections, and mounting of devices or fixtures. 2. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated. 3. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box, whether installed indoors or outdoors. 4. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. 5. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes. 6. Support boxes in recessed ceilings independent of ceiling tiles and ceiling grid. 7. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for purpose. 8. Fasten junction and pull boxes to, or support from, building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits. 9. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. 10. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface. 11. Do not install aluminum boxes, enclosures, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth. 12. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to ensure a continuous ground path. 13. Boxes and Enclosures in Areas or Walls with Acoustical Requirements: a. Seal openings and knockouts in back and sides of boxes and enclosures with acoustically rated putty. b. Provide gaskets for cover plates and covers. D. Interfaces with Other Work: 1. Identification: Provide labels for boxes and associated electrical equipment. BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33.16 - 8 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement a. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components. b. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate. c. Provide warning signs and arc-flash hazard warning labels for electrical equipment. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL OF BOXES AND COVERS A. Administrant for Electrical Power Tests and Inspections: 1. Administer and perform tests and inspections. B. Field tests and inspections must be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform manufacturer's recommended tests and inspections. 2. Perform tests and inspections recommended by standards listed in "Reference Standards for Installation" Paragraph. D. Nonconforming Work: 1. Boxes and covers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 2. Remove and replace defective units and retest. E. Field Quality-Control Reports: Collect, assemble, and submit test and inspection reports. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove construction dust and debris from boxes before installing cover plates, covers, and hoods. 3.5 PROTECTION A. After installation, protect boxes from construction activities. Remove and replace items that are contaminated, defaced, damaged, or otherwise caused to be unfit for use prior to acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION 26 05 33.16 SURFACE RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33.23 - 1 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement SECTION 26 05 33.23 SURFACE RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Surface metal raceways and fittings. 2. Strut-type channel raceways and fittings. 3. Wireways and auxiliary gutters. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" specifies grounding and bonding referenced by this Section. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's published instructions. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Electrical Power Testing (EPT) Technician III: Possessing active NICET EPT Level III certification. Able to manage switching procedures; conduct tests of complex equipment; analyze test and equipment data; plan a job; and lead a team. Has experience performing NFPA 70B, IEEE, and NETA electrical tests. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Products or components listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70, by qualified electrical testing laboratory recognized by authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application. 2.2 SURFACE METAL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS A. Source Quality Control: 1. Samples: SURFACE RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33.23 - 2 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement a. Surface Metallic Raceway Nonmetallic Cover Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's standard color sheets, showing full range of available colors for each type, [12 inch] <Insert dimension> long. B. UL RJBT - Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings with Metal Covers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Hubbell Wiring Device-Kellems; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. b. MonoSystems, Inc. c. Wiremold; Legrand North America, LLC. 2. Listing Criteria: Investigated, labeled, and marked by qualified electrical testing laboratory in accordance with guide information and standards specified for the following UL product categories: a. UL CCN RJBT; including UL 5. 3. Standard Features: a. Galvanized steel base with snap-on covers. b. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect. c. Wiring Channels: Single. Multiple channels must be capable of housing a standard 20 to 30 A device flush within the raceway. 2.3 STRUT-TYPE CHANNEL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS A. Source Quality Control: 1. Samples: a. Strut-Type Channel Raceway Nonmetallic Covers for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's standard color sheets, showing full range of available colors for each type. B. UL RIUU - Strut-Type Channel Raceways and Fittings with Metallic Covers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Atkore Unistrut. b. Cooper B-line; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector. c. Power-Strut; Atkore International. 2. Listing Criteria: Investigated, labeled, and marked by qualified electrical testing laboratory in accordance with guide information and standards specified for the following UL product categories: a. UL CCN RIUU; including UL 5B. SURFACE RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33.23 - 3 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 3. Standard Features: a. Prime coated, ready for field painting. 2.4 WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. UL ZOYX - Metal Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Cooper B-line; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector. b. Hoffman; brand of nVent Electrical plc. c. Square D; Schneider Electric USA. 2. Listing Criteria: Investigated, labeled, and marked by qualified electrical testing laboratory in accordance with guide information and standards specified for the following UL product categories: a. UL CCN ZOYX; including UL 870. 3. Standard Features: a. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. b. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. c. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type unless otherwise indicated. 4. Other Available Features Required by the Project: a. Degree of Protection: Type 3R unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SURFACE RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions. B. Reference Standards for Installation: Unless more stringent installation requirements are specified in Contract Documents or manufacturers' published instructions, comply with the following: 1. Electrical Construction: ICC IBC, ICC IFC, NFPA 1, NFPA 70, and NECA NEIS 1. 2. Electrical Safety: NFPA 70E. 3. Grounding and Bonding: NECA NEIS 331 and Article 250 of NFPA 70. 4. Communications Work: BICSI N1. 5. Work in Confined Spaces: NFPA 350. 6. Work in Basements and Other Developed Subterranean Spaces: NFPA 520. 7. Auxiliary Gutters: Article 366 of NFPA 70. 8. Surface Metal Raceway: Article 386 of NFPA 70. SURFACE RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33.23 - 4 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 9. Surface Nonmetallic Raceway: Article 388 of NFPA 70. 10. Consult Architect for resolution of conflicting requirements. C. Special Installation Techniques: 1. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings. 2. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2 inch radius control at bend points. 3. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inch and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. Tape and glue are unacceptable support methods. D. Interfaces with Other Work: 1. Identification: Provide labels for surface raceways and associated electrical equipment. a. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components. b. Provide warning signs. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL OF SURFACE RACEWAYS A. Administrant for Electrical Power Tests and Inspections: 1. Administer and perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform manufacturer's recommended tests and inspections. C. Nonconforming Work: 1. Boxes and covers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 2. Remove and replace defective units and retest. D. Field Quality-Control Reports: Collect, assemble, and submit test and inspection reports. 3.3 CLEANING A. Remove construction dust and debris from surface raceways before installing covers. 3.4 PROTECTION A. After installation, protect surface raceways from construction activities. Remove and replace items that are contaminated, defaced, damaged, or otherwise caused to be unfit for use prior to acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION 26 05 33.23 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 1 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Color and legend requirements for raceways, conductors, and warning labels and signs. 2. Labels. 3. Bands and tubes. 4. Tapes and stencils. 5. Tags. 6. Signs. 7. Cable ties. 8. Paint for identification. 9. Fasteners for labels and signs. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for electrical identification products. B. Identification Schedule: For each piece of electrical equipment and electrical system components to be an index of nomenclature for electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with ASME A13.1 and IEEE C2. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. E. Comply with NFPA 70E requirements for arc-flash warning labels. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 2 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement F. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969. G. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 2.2 COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS A. Raceways and Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type. B. Color-Coding for Phase- and Voltage-Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service feeder and branch-circuit conductors. 1. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG if authorities having jurisdiction permit. 2. Colors for 4160V Circuits: a. Phase L1: Brown. b. Phase L2 Red. c. Phase L3: Blue. 3. Color for Neutral: White. 4. Color for Equipment Grounds: Green. 5. Colors for Isolated Grounds: Green with white stripe. C. Raceways and Cables Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: "DANGER - CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING." D. Warning Label Colors: 1. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. E. Warning labels and signs shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM)." F. Equipment Identification Labels: 1. Black letters on a white-field. 2. Black letters on a green-field for equipment fed from UPS System. 2.3 LABELS A. Vinyl Wraparound Labels: Preprinted, flexible labels laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing label ends. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. Champion America. c. Panduit Corp. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 3 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement d. Seton Identification Products. B. Snap-around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeves, with diameters sized to suit diameters and that stay in place by gripping action. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. Marking Services, Inc. c. Panduit Corp. d. Seton Identification Products. C. Self-Adhesive Wraparound Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil- (0.08-mm-) thick, vinyl flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. Ideal Industries, Inc. c. Panduit Corp. d. Seton Identification Products. 2. Self-Lamination: Clear; UV-, weather- and chemical-resistant; self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend. 3. Marker for Labels: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink recommended by printer manufacturer. D. Self-Adhesive Labels: Vinyl, thermal, transfer-printed, 3-mil- (0.08-mm-) thick, multicolor, weather- and UV-resistant, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for intended use and location. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. Ideal Industries, Inc. c. Panduit Corp. d. Seton Identification Products. 2. Minimum Nominal Size: a. 1-1/2 by 6 inches (37 by 150 mm) for raceway and conductors. b. 3-1/2 by 5 inches (76 by 127 mm) for equipment. c. As required by authorities having jurisdiction. 2.4 BANDS AND TUBES A. Snap-around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeves, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameters sized to suit diameters and that stay in place by gripping action. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. HellermannTyton. c. Marking Services, Inc. d. Panduit Corp. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 4 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement B. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tubes with machine-printed identification labels, sized to suit diameter and shrunk to fit firmly. Full shrink recovery occurs at a maximum of 200 deg F (93 deg C). Comply with UL 224. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. Panduit Corp. 2.5 TAPES AND STENCILS A. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Carlton Industries, LP. b. Ideal Industries, Inc. c. Panduit Corp. B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide; compounded for outdoor use. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. Carlton Industries, LP. c. Marking Services, Inc. C. Tape and Stencil: 4-inch- (100-mm-) wide black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers placed diagonally over orange background and are 12 inches (300 mm) wide. Stop stripes at legends. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. HellermannTyton. b. LEM Products Inc. c. Marking Services, Inc. d. Seton Identification Products. D. Floor Marking Tape: 2-inch- (50-mm-) wide, 5-mil (0.125-mm) pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with yellow and black stripes and clear vinyl overlay. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Carlton Industries, LP. b. Seton Identification Products. E. Underground-Line Warning Tape: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. Ideal Industries, Inc. c. Marking Services, Inc. d. Seton Identification Products. 2. Tape: a. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines. b. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 5 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement c. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert and not subject to degradation when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils. 3. Color and Printing: a. Comply with ANSI Z535.1, ANSI Z535.2, ANSI Z535.3, ANSI Z535.4, and ANSI Z535.5. b. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: "ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE". 4. Tag: Type I: a. Pigmented polyolefin, bright colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service. b. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). c. Thickness: 4 mils (0.1 mm). d. Weight: 18.5 lb/1000 sq. ft. (9.0 kg/100 sq. m). e. Tensile according to ASTM D 882: 30 lbf (133.4 N) and 2500 psi (17.2 MPa). 5. Tag: Type II: a. Multilayer laminate, consisting of high-density polyethylene scrim coated with pigmented polyolefin; bright colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service. b. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). c. Thickness: 12 mils (0.3 mm). d. Weight: 36.1 lb/1000 sq. ft. (17.6 kg/100 sq. m). e. Tensile according to ASTM D 882: 400 lbf (1780 N) and 11,500 psi (79.2 MPa). 6. Tag: Type ID: a. Detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented polyolefin film, a solid aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the continuity of the conductive core; bright colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service. b. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). c. Overall Thickness: 5 mils (0.125 mm). d. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil (0.00889 mm). e. Weight: 28 lb/1000 sq. ft. (13.7 kg/100 sq. m). f. Tensile according to ASTM D 882: 70 lbf (311.3 N) and 4600 psi (31.7 MPa). 7. Tag: Type IID: a. Reinforced, detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented woven scrim, a solid aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the continuity of the conductive core; bright-colored, continuous- printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service. b. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). c. Overall Thickness: 8 mils (0.2 mm). d. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil (0.00889 mm). e. Weight: 34 lb/1000 sq. ft. (16.6 kg/100 sq. m). f. Tensile according to ASTM D 882: 300 lbf (1334 N) and 12,500 psi (86.1 MPa). F. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch (25 mm). 2.6 TAGS A. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 6 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement a. Brady Corporation. b. Carlton Industries, LP. c. Marking Services, Inc. d. Seton Identification Products. B. Nonmetallic Preprinted Tags: Polyethylene tags, 0.023 inch (0.58 mm) thick, color-coded for phase and voltage level, with factory printed permanent designations; punched for use with self- locking cable tie fastener. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. Carlton Industries, LP. c. Marking Services, Inc. d. Panduit Corp. e. Seton Identification Products. C. Write-on Tags: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Carlton Industries, LP. b. LEM Products Inc. c. Seton Identification Products. 2. Polyester Tags: 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment. 3. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer. 2.7 SIGNS A. Baked-Enamel Signs: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Carlton Industries, LP. b. Champion America. c. Marking Services, Inc. 2. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 3. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. 4. Nominal Size: 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm). B. Metal-Backed Butyrate Signs: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. Champion America. c. Marking Services, Inc. 2. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs, with 0.0396- inch (1-mm) galvanized-steel backing, punched and drilled for fasteners, and with colors, legend, and size required for application. 3. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. 4. Nominal Size: 10 by 14 inches (250 by 360 mm). C. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 7 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement a. Brady Corporation. b. Carlton Industries, LP. c. Marking Services, Inc. 2. Engraved legend. 3. Thickness: a. For signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm), minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. b. For signs larger than 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm), 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick. c. Engraved legend with white letters on a dark gray background. d. Self-adhesive. e. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment. 2.8 CABLE TIES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. HellermannTyton. 2. Ideal Industries, Inc. 3. Marking Services, Inc. 4. Panduit Corp. B. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, and Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F (23 Deg C) according to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi (82.7 MPa). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding. C. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, and Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F (23 Deg C) according to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi (82.7 MPa). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 4. Color: Black. D. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self-extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, and self-locking. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F (23 Deg C) according to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi (48.2 MPa). 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F (Minus 46 to plus 140 deg C). 5. Color: Black. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Retain paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior). B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 8 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Before applying electrical identification products, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification product. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Verify and coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. Use consistent designations throughout Project. B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. C. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. D. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. E. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. F. Install signs with approved legend to facilitate proper identification, operation, and maintenance of electrical systems and connected items. G. System Identification for Raceways and Cables under 600 V: Identification shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place identification of two-color markings in contact, side by side. 1. Secure tight to surface of conductor, cable, or raceway. H. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections. I. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer. J. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels, signs, and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. K. Accessible Fittings for Raceways: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1. "EMERGENCY POWER." 2. "POWER." 3. "UPS." L. Vinyl Wraparound Labels: 1. Secure tight to surface of raceway or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility. 2. Attach labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape, with adhesive appropriate to the location and substrate. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 9 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement M. Snap-around Labels: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility. N. Self-Adhesive Wraparound Labels: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility. O. Self-Adhesive Labels: 1. On each item, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and operation and maintenance manual. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high. P. Snap-around Color-Coding Bands: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility. Q. Heat-Shrink, Preprinted Tubes: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility. R. Marker Tapes: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility. S. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility. 1. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. T. Tape and Stencil: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application. U. Floor Marking Tape: Apply stripes to finished surfaces following manufacturer's written instructions. V. Underground Line Warning Tape: 1. During backfilling of trenches, install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above cable or raceway at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall. 2. Install underground-line warning tape for direct-buried cables and cables in raceways. W. Metal Tags: 1. Place in a location with high visibility and accessibility. 2. Secure using UV-stabilized cable ties. X. Nonmetallic Preprinted Tags: 1. Place in a location with high visibility and accessibility. 2. Secure using UV-stabilized cable ties. Y. Write-on Tags: 1. Place in a location with high visibility and accessibility. 2. Secure using UV-stabilized cable ties. Z. Baked-Enamel Signs: IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 10 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 1. Attach signs that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on minimum 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high sign; where two lines of text are required, use signs minimum 2 inches (50 mm) high. AA. Metal-Backed Butyrate Signs: 1. Attach signs that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high sign; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high. BB. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs: 1. Attach signs that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high sign; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high. CC. Cable Ties: General purpose, for attaching tags, except as listed below: 1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. 2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Install access doors or panels to provide view of identifying devices. B. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, pull points, and locations of high visibility. Identify by system and circuit designation. C. Accessible Raceways, Armored and Metal-Clad Cables, More Than 600 V: Vinyl wraparound labels. 1. Locate identification at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas. D. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits, More Than 30 A and 120 V to Ground: Identify with self-adhesive raceway labels. 1. Locate identification at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas. E. Accessible Fittings for Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive labels containing the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1. "EMERGENCY POWER." 2. "POWER." 3. "UPS." F. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use vinyl wraparound labels to identify the phase. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 11 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 1. Locate identification at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas. G. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive label] with the conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination. H. Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations, provide self-adhesive labels with the conductor designation. I. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source. J. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Self-adhesive vinyl tape that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. K. Locations of Underground Lines: Underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical-fiber cable. L. Workspace Indication: Apply floor marking tape or tape and stencil to finished surfaces. Show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces. M. Instructional Signs: Self-adhesive labels, including the color code for grounded and ungrounded conductors. N. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self- adhesive labels. 1. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 2. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Power-transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections. O. Arc Flash Warning Labeling: Self-adhesive labels. P. Operating Instruction Signs: Baked-enamel warning signs. Q. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Baked-enamel warning signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer. R. Equipment Identification Labels: 1. Indoor Equipment: Baked-enamel signs. 2. Outdoor Equipment: Laminated acrylic or melamine sign. 3. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be in the form of a engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 12 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Switchgear. e. Switchboards. f. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation indicated on Drawings for the transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. g. Substations. h. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. i. Motor-control centers. j. Enclosed switches. k. Enclosed circuit breakers. l. Enclosed controllers. m. Variable-speed controllers. n. Push-button stations. o. Power-transfer equipment. p. Contactors. q. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. r. Battery-inverter units. s. Battery racks. t. Power-generating units. u. Monitoring and control equipment. v. UPS equipment. END OF SECTION 26 05 53 LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR 26 23 00 - 1 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement SECTION 26 23 00 LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Work of This Section Includes: 1. Metal-enclosed, low-voltage switchgear, with power circuit breakers and metering and control accessories. 1. Switchgear structure. 2. Additional requirements for outdoor switchgear. 3. Circuit breakers. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. B. Preinstallation Coordination Meeting(s): For switchgear. Conduct meeting(s) at Project site before. 1. Attendees: Installers, fabricators, representatives of manufacturers, and administrants for field tests and inspections. Notify Architect, and Owner's Commissioning Authority of scheduled meeting dates. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for switchgear. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: 1. For low-voltage switchgear. 1. System Power One-Line Diagrams: Depict power sources, feeders, distribution components, and major loads. Include as-built data for low-voltage power switchgear and connections as follows: 1) Frame size of circuit breakers. 2) Trip rating for circuit breakers. 3) Conduit and wire size for feeders. LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR 26 23 00 - 2 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 2. Include plans, elevations, sections, shipping splits, and mounting details. 3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of field connections. 4. Wire Termination Diagrams and Schedules: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. Identify terminals and wiring designations and color-codes to facilitate installation, operation, and maintenance. Indicate recommended types, wire sizes, and circuiting arrangements for field-installed wiring, and show circuit protection features. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. 5. Block Diagram: Show interconnections between components specified in this Section and devices furnished with power distribution system components. Indicate data communication paths and identify networks, data buses, data gateways, concentrators, and other devices used. Describe characteristics of network and other data communication lines. 6. Indicate short-time and short-circuit current rating of switchgear assembly. 7. Include features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 8. Include mimic-bus diagram. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. System Power Riser Diagram: For switchgear, using non-fugitive ink on high-quality paper. Post on wall at switchgear location. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Indoor Switchgear Storage: Store in dry, clean location, placed on level surface to prevent strain and possible distortion. During construction period, provide protection against dust, dirt, falling objects, dripping water, water, excessive moisture, and other possible causes of damage to equipment. Temporary covering may not restrict ventilation and may not be removed until equipment is ready for installation. Take special precaution to keep equipment sufficiently warm with adequate ventilation to prevent condensation during storage period. Install temporary heating if necessary. B. When provisions for temporary power connection are provided as part of switchgear assembly, provisions must be included to prevent energization of primary buses. C. Ventilation openings must be left open to permit proper air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Eaton. LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR 26 23 00 - 3 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 2. Siemens Industry, Inc., Energy Management Division. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric USA. 2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Description: Metal-enclosed, low-voltage switchgear with power circuit breakers, with accessories and metering components. 1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70, by qualified electrical testing laboratory recognized by authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with IEEE C37.20.1. 3. Listed and labeled as complying with UL 1558. 4. Listed and labeled for use as service entrance equipment. 2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Capacities and Characteristics: 1. Nominal System Voltage: 480V, 3-phase, four wire, 60 Hz. 2. Rated Maximum Voltage: 600V. 3. Rated Power Frequency: 60 Hz. 4. Rated Insulation Level: Power frequency withstand must be not less than 2.2 kV(rms). 5. Rated Continuous Current: 1. Main-Bus Continuous: 400 A. 2. Vertical Section Bus Riser: Equal to frame size of low-voltage power circuit breaker connected to that riser. 6. Rated Short-Circuit Withstand Current: 42 000 A(sym). 7. Short-Time and Short-Circuit Current: Match rating of integrated short-circuit current rating. 2.4 SWITCHGEAR STRUCTURE A. Bus isolation barriers must be arranged to isolate line bus from load bus at main and tie circuit breaker. Extend section barriers between main and tie circuit breakers to rear of section. B. Allow the following circuit-breaker functions to be performed when compartment door is closed: 1. Operate manual charging system. 2. Open and close circuit breaker. 3. Examine and adjust trip unit. 4. Read breaker nameplate. C. Install instrument compartments when additional space is required for metering and instrumentation. Allow for routing of instrumentation, control and communications wires, and cables. D. Switchgear Bus: 1. Use bus bars to connect compartments and vertical sections. Cable connections are not permitted. LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR 26 23 00 - 4 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 2. Main Phase Bus: Uniform capacity entire length of assembly. 3. Neutral Bus: 100 percent of phase-bus ampacity unless otherwise indicated. Equip bus with pressure-connector terminations for outgoing circuit neutral conductors. Include braces for neutral-bus extensions for busway feeders. 4. Ground Bus: Uniform capacity entire length of assembly, with pressure connector terminations for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors, minimum size 1/4 by 2 inch. 5. Vertical Section Bus Size: Fully rated to system continuous current, equal to horizontal bus. 6. Bus Material and Connections: 1. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: 1) Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent minimum conductivity, with copper feeder circuit-breaker line connections. 2) Silver- or tin-plated, high-strength, electrical-grade aluminum alloy, with copper or tin-plated aluminum circuit-breaker line connections. 3) Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent minimum conductivity or tin-plated, high- strength, electrical-grade aluminum alloy. 2. Use copper for connecting circuit-breaker line to copper bus. 7. Neutral Disconnect Link: Bolted, uninsulated, bus, arranged to connect neutral bus to ground bus. E. Circuit-Breaker Compartment: 1. Primary Disconnect: Mount on stationary part of compartment. Disconnect must consist of set of contacts extending to rear through insulating support barrier, and of corresponding moving finger contacts on power circuit-breaker studs, which engage in only connected position. Assembly must provide multiple silver-to-silver full floating, spring-loaded, high-pressure-point contacts with uniform pressure on fingers. Load studs must connect to bus extensions that terminate in solderless terminals in rear cable compartment. F. Auxiliary Compartments: Match and align with basic switchgear assembly. Include the following: 1. Utility metering compartment that complies with utility-company requirements. 2. Incoming-line pull sections. 3. Hinged front panels for access to metering, accessory, and blank compartments. 2.5 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Drawout type, unfused, power operated, with electromechanical or electronic trip devices. Comply with IEEE C37.13, IEEE C37.13a, and UL 1066. B. Ratings: For continuous, interrupting, and short-time current ratings for circuit breakers; voltage and frequency ratings same as switchgear. Comply with IEEE C37.16. 1. Circuit breakers must have 30-cycle short-time withstand ratings equal to their symmetrical interrupting ratings through 85 000 A, whether or not equipped with instantaneous trip protection. C. Operator Display: Located on face of circuit breaker. LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR 26 23 00 - 5 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 1. Electrical operation buttons to open and close circuit breaker. Provide clear lockable cover over buttons. 2. Indicator to show position of circuit-breaker contacts, status of closing springs, and circuit-breaker position in its compartment. D. Padlocking Provisions: For installing at least three padlocks on circuit breakers to secure its enclosure. E. Mechanical Interlocking of Circuit Breakers: Uses mechanical tripping lever or equivalent design and electrical interlocks. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Tests and Inspections: Test and inspect low-voltage switchgear, by, or under supervision of, qualified electrical testing laboratory recognized by authorities having jurisdiction, in accordance with IEEE C37.20.1 before delivering to site. Affix label with name and date of manufacturer's certification of system compliance on control units. 1. Dielectric Tests: Perform power-frequency withstand tests to demonstrate ability of insulation system to withstand voltages listed in IEEE C37.20.1. Voltage must be increased gradually from zero to the required test value within 5 to 10 seconds and must be held at that value for one minute. 2. Perform mechanical operation tests to ensure proper functioning of operating mechanism, mechanical interlocks, and interchangeability of removable elements that are designed to be interchangeable. 3. Test effectiveness of grounding of metal-case instrument transformer frame or case. 4. Verify that control wiring is correct by verifying continuity. Perform electrical operation of component devices to ensure that they function properly and in intended sequence. 5. Perform control wiring insulation tests. 6. Verify correct polarity of connections between instrument transformers and meters and relays. B. Nonconforming Work: 1. Low-voltage switchgear assembly will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and space conditions for compliance with requirements for secondary unit substations and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in of conduits and grounding systems to verify the following: 1. Wiring entries comply with layout requirements. 2. Entries are within conduit-entry tolerances specified by manufacturer, and no feeders will have to cross section barriers to reach load or line lugs. LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR 26 23 00 - 6 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable conditions where switchgear will be installed. D. Verify that ground connections are in place and that requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance must be 10 Ω at switchgear location. E. On delivery of switchgear and prior to unloading, inspect equipment for damage. 1. Verify that tie rods and chains are undamaged and tight, and that blocking and bracing are tight. 2. Verify that there is no evidence of load shifting in transit, and that readings from transportation shock recorders, if equipped, are within manufacturer's published instructions. 3. Examine switchgear for external damage, including dents or scratches in doors and sill, and termination provisions. 4. Compare switchgear and accessories received with bill of materials to verify that shipment is complete. Verify that switchgear and accessories comply with manufacturer's published instructions and Shop Drawings. If shipment is incomplete or does not comply with Project requirements, notify manufacturer in writing immediately. 5. Unload switchgear, observing packing label warnings and handling instructions. 6. Open compartment doors and inspect components for damage or displaced parts, loose or broken connections, cracked or chipped insulators, bent mounting flanges, dirt or foreign material, and water or moisture. F. Handling: 1. Handle switchgear, in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions; avoid damage to enclosure, termination compartments, base, frame, tank, and internal components. Do not subject switchgear to impact, jolting, jarring, or rough handling. 2. Protect switchgear compartments against entrance of dust, rain, and snow. 3. Transport switchgear upright, to avoid internal stresses on equipment mounting assemblies. Do not tilt or tip switchgear. 4. Use spreaders or lifting beam to obtain vertical lift and to protect switchgear from straps bearing against enclosure. Lifting cable pull angles may not be greater than 15 degrees from vertical. 5. Do not damage structure when handling switchgear. G. Proceed with installation only after examinations are complete and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and NFPA 70. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Ground equipment in accordance with Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." B. Grounding Connections at Exterior Locations: LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR 26 23 00 - 7 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 1. Install tinned bare copper conductors not smaller than 4/0 AWG, for ground conductors buried not less than 30 inch below grade interconnecting grounding electrodes. 2. Bond surge arrester and neutrals directly to switchgear enclosure and then to grounding electrode system with bare copper conductors, sized as indicated. 3. Keep lead lengths as short as practicable with no kinks or sharp bends. 4. Make joints in grounding conductors and loops by exothermic weld or compression connector. C. Terminate grounding and bonding conductors on common equipment grounding terminal on switchgear enclosure. Install supplemental terminal bars, lugs, and bonding jumpers as required to accommodate number of conductors for termination. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Install warning signs as required to comply with OSHA 29 CFR 1910.269. B. Compartment Nameplates: Engraved, melamine plastic for compartments, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. C. Arc-Flash Warning Labels: 1. Label must have orange header with wording, "WARNING, ARC-FLASH HAZARD," and must include the following information taken directly from arc-flash hazard analysis: 1) Location designation. 2) Nominal voltage. 3) Flash protection boundary. 4) Hazard risk category. 5) Incident energy. 6) Working distance. 7) Engineering report number, revision number, and issue date. 2. Labels must be machine printed, with no field-applied markings. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Comply with provisions of "Testing and Test Methods" Chapter in NFPA 70B and NETA ATS. 2. After installing switchgear and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 3. Perform visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests stated in NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters. 4. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Verify that fuse and circuit-breaker sizes and types correspond to Drawings and coordination study. 2. Verify that current and voltage transformer ratios correspond to Drawings. 3. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following two methods: LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR 26 23 00 - 8 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 1) Use low-resistance ohmmeter to compare bolted-connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of lowest value. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer's published data or NETA ATS, Table 100.12. Bolt-torque levels must be in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In absence of manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS, Table 100.12. 4. Confirm correct operation and sequencing of electrical and mechanical interlock systems. 1) Attempt closure on locked-open devices. Attempt to open locked-closed devices. 2) Make key exchange with devices operated in off-normal positions. 5. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts and on moving and sliding surfaces. 6. Inspect insulators for evidence of physical damage or contaminated surfaces. 7. Verify correct barrier and shutter installation and operation. 8. Exercise active components. 9. Inspect mechanical indicating devices for correct operation. 10. Verify that filters are in place and that vents are clear. 11. Perform visual and mechanical inspection of instrument transformers in accordance with "Instrument Transformer Field Tests" Paragraph. 12. Inspect control power transformers. 1) Inspect for physical damage, cracked insulation, broken leads, tightness of connections, defective wiring, and overall general condition. 2) Verify that primary and secondary fuse or circuit-breaker ratings match Drawings. 3) Verify correct functioning of drawout disconnecting and grounding contacts and interlocks. B. Circuit-Breaker Field Tests: 1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. 2. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding. 3. Verify that maintenance devices are available for servicing and operating breaker. 4. Verify unit is clean. 5. Verify that arc chutes are intact. 6. Inspect moving and stationary contacts for condition and alignment. 7. Verify that primary and secondary contact wipe and other dimensions vital to satisfactory operation of breaker are correct. 8. Perform mechanical operator and contact alignment tests on both breaker and its operating mechanism in accordance with manufacturer's published data. 9. Verify cell fit and element alignment. 10. Verify racking mechanism operation. 11. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts and on moving and sliding surfaces. 12. Perform adjustments for final protective-device settings in accordance with coordination study provided by Owner. 13. Record as-found and as-left operation counter readings. LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR 26 23 00 - 9 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 2. Electrical Tests: 1. Perform insulation-resistance tests for one minute on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-to ground with switch closed, and across open poles. Apply voltage in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In absence of manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS, Table 100.1. Insulation-resistance values must be in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In absence of manufacturer's published data, comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.1. Values of insulation resistance less than Table 100.1 or manufacturer's published instructions must be investigated. 2. Measure contact resistance across power contacts of circuit breakers. Drop values for µΩ or mV(dc) may not exceed high levels of normal range as indicated in manufacturer's published data. In absence of manufacturer's published data, investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50 percent of lowest value. 3. Determine long-time pickup and delay by primary current injection. Long-time pickup values must be as specified, and trip characteristic may not exceed manufacturer's published time-current characteristic tolerance band, including adjustment factors. If manufacturer's curves are unavailable, trip times may not exceed value shown in NETA ATS, Table 100.7. 4. Determine short-time pickup and delay by primary current injection. Short-time pickup values must be as specified, and trip characteristic may not exceed manufacturer's published time-current tolerance band. 5. Determine ground-fault pickup and delay by primary current injection. Ground-fault pickup values must be as specified, and trip characteristic may not exceed manufacturer's published time-current tolerance band. 6. Determine instantaneous pickup value by primary current injection. Instantaneous pickup values must be as specified and within manufacturer's published tolerances. In absence of manufacturer's published data, comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.8. 7. Test functions of trip unit by means of secondary injection. Pickup values and trip characteristic must be as specified and within manufacturer's published tolerances. 8. Perform minimum pickup voltage tests on shunt trip and close coils in accordance with manufacturer's published data. Minimum pickup voltage of shunt trip and close coils must comply with manufacturer's published data. In absence of manufacturer's published data, comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.20. 9. Measure fuse resistance. Investigate fuse-resistance values that deviate from each other by more than 15 percent. 10. Verify correct operation of auxiliary features, such as trip and pickup indicators, zone interlocking, electrical close and trip operation, trip-free operation, antipump function, and trip-unit battery condition. Reset trip logs and indicators. Auxiliary features must operate in accordance with manufacturer's published data. 11. Verify operation of charging mechanism. Charging mechanism must operate in accordance with manufacturer's published data. 12. Perform polarity test on current transformers in accordance with IEEE C57.13.1. Polarity results must agree with transformer markings. C. Ground-Resistance Test: 1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Verify that ground system complies with Contract Documents and with Article 250, "Grounding and Bonding," in NFPA 70. 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Grounding system electrical and mechanical connections must be free of corrosion. LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR 26 23 00 - 10 Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement 3. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following two methods: 1) Use low-resistance ohmmeter to compare bolted-connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of lowest value. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer's published data or NETA ATS, Table 100.12. Bolt-torque levels must be in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In absence of manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS, Table 100.12. 4. Inspect anchorage. 2. Electrical Tests: 1. Perform fall-of-potential or alternative test in accordance with IEEE 81 on main grounding electrode or system. Resistance between main grounding electrode and ground must be no more than 10 Ω. 2. Perform point-to-point tests to determine resistance between main grounding system and major electrical equipment frames, system neutral, and derived neutral points. Investigate point-to-point resistance values that exceed 0.5 Ω. Compare equipment nameplate data with the Contract Documents. 3. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. 4. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following two methods: 1) Use low-resistance ohmmeter to compare bolted-connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of lowest value. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer's published data or NETA ATS, Table 100.12. Bolt-torque levels must be in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In absence of manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS, Table 100.12. D. System Function Tests: Perform system function tests after other field quality-control tests have been completed and components have passed specified tests. Verify correct interaction of sensing, processing, and action devices. 1. Develop test parameters and perform tests for purpose of evaluating performance of integral components and their functioning as complete unit within design requirements and manufacturer's published data. 2. Verify correct operation of interlock safety devices for fail-safe functions in addition to design function. 3. Verify correct operation of sensing devices, alarms, and indicating devices. E. Nonconforming Work: 1. Switchgear components will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 2. Remove and replace defective units and retest. END OF SECTION 26 23 00 Appendix A FLEET COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATION Bidder hereby acknowledges that they have reviewed the California Air Resources Board’s policies, rules and regulations and are familiar with the requirements of Title 13, California Code of Regulations, Division 3, Chapter 9, effective on January 1, 2024 (the “Regulation”). Bidder hereby certifies, subject to penalty for perjury, that the option checked below relating to the Bidder’s fleet, and/or that of their subcontractor(s) (“Fleet”) is true and correct: □The Fleet is subject to the requirements of the Regulation, and the appropriate Certificate(s) of Reported Compliance have been attached hereto. □The Fleet is exempt from the Regulation under section 2449.1(f)(2), and a signed description of the subject vehicles, and reasoning for exemption has been attached hereto. □Bidder and/or their subcontractor is unable to procure R99 or R100 renewable diesel fuel as defined in the Regulation pursuant to section 2449.1(f)(3). Bidder shall keep detailed records describing the normal refueling methods, their attempts to procure renewable diesel fuel and proof that shows they were not able to procure renewable diesel (i.e. third party correspondence or vendor bids). □The Fleet is exempt from the requirements of the Regulation pursuant to section 2449(i)(4) because this Project has been deemed an Emergency, as defined under section 2449(c)(18). Bidder shall only operate the exempted vehicles in the emergency situation and records of the exempted vehicles must be maintained, pursuant to section 2449(i)(4). □The Fleet does not fall under the Regulation or is otherwise exempted, and a detailed reasoning is attached hereto. Name of Bidder: Signature: Name: Title: Date: PWS25-3807FAC SCOPE OF WORK APPLICABLE CODES PROJECT DIRECTORY OWNER: ARCHITECT OF RECORD:IDS Group Irvine, California 92606 John Silber john.silber@idsgi.com 949.387.8500 John Silber - Principal Architect Tel: Email: Contact: MECHANICAL ENGINEER: ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: Tel: Email: Contact: IDS Group 1 Peters Canyon Road, Suite 130 Irvine, California 92606 949.387.8500 PLUMBING: Tel: Email: Contact: IDS Group 1 Peters Canyon Road, Suite 130 Irvine, California 92606 Darren Smith darren.smith@idsgi.com 949.387.8500 Darren Smith Darren Smith darren.smith@idsgi.com Darren Smith 1 Peters Canyon Road, Suite 130 STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: Tel: Email: Contact: IDS Group 1 Peters Canyon Road, Suite 130 Irvine, California 92606 949.387.8500 Rami Elhassan rami.elhassan@idsgi.com Rami Elhassan ·2022 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE, PART 1, TITLE 24 C.C.R. ·2022 CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE (CBC), PART 2, TITLE 24 C.C.R. ·2022 CALIFORNIA ELECTRICAL CODE (CEC), PART 3. ·TITLE 24 C.C.R. (2022 NEC) ·2022 CALIFORNIA FIRE CODE, PART 9, TITLE 24 C.C.R. ·2022 TITLE 19 C.C.R. PUBLIC SAFETY, STATE FIRE MARSHAL REGULATIONS. ·2022 CALIFORNIA GREEN STANDARD CODE. ·2022 CALIFORNIA ENERGY CODE. CBC 107.2.1 ·2022 CALIFORNIA MECHANICAL CODE (CMC) ·2022 CALIFORNIA PLUMBING CODE (CPC) ·2010 AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT. IDS Group 1 Peters Canyon Road, Suite 130 Irvine, California 92606 Tel: 949.387.8500 Email: Contact: steven.collins@idsgi.com Steven Collins Steven Collins City of Carlsbad Public Works Contracts Administration 1635 FARADAY AVE. CARLSBAD, CA 92008 Contact: Brian Bacardi Public Works Superintendent Tel: 442-339-2944 Email: brian.bacardi@carlsbadca.gov CITY OF CARLSBAD CARLSBAD POLICE AND FIRE HQ CHILLER REPLACEMENT 2560 ORION WAY, CARLSBAD, CA 92010 FACILITY MAP VICINITY MAP SHEET INDEX SHEET NAME PROJECT LOCATION M-001 NOTES, LEGEND AND ABBREVIATIONS M-002 SCHEDULES M-100 OVERALL SITE PLAN M-101 CHILLER YARD DEMOLITION PLAN M-201 CHILLER YARD PROPOSED PLAN M-501 DETAILS M-601 CONTROLS LEGEND AND ABBREVIATION M-602 CONTROLS RISER DIAGRAM AND SEQUENCE OF OPERATION M-603 CHILLED WATER SYSTEM P&ID M-701 TITLE 24 DOCUMENTATION ARCHITECTURAL ELECTRICAL MECHANICAL E-001 GENERAL NOTE, SYMBOLS LIST & SHEET INDEX E-002 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM - DEMOLITION & NEW E-100 OVERALL ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN E-200 ENLARGED ELECTRICAL PLAN - DEMOLITION & NEW E-300 ELECTRICAL DETAILS N N STRUCTURAL S-001 GENERAL NOTE S-002 GENERAL NOTE S-201 FOUNDATION PLAN S-501 SECTION AND DETAILS DEFERRED SUBMITTAL: NA P-001 NOTES, LEGEND, ABBREVIATIONS AND SCHEDULES P-201 PLUMBING PLAN PLUMBING G-001 COVER SHEET DRAWING No. REPLACE THE EXISTING 99.4 TON AIR-COOLED CHILLER WITH NEW TWO 50 TON AIR COOLED CHILLERS, UPGRADE CONTROLS AND TIE INTO EXISTING BMS AND UPGRADE FRONT END GRAPHICS TO NEW CONFIGURATION. REVISE SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS AS SHOWN TO SUPPORT TWO 50 TON AIR COOLED CHILLERS. ELECTRICAL UPGRADES AS PART OF THIS PROJECT ARE SHOWN ON THE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. PROVIDE (N) TRENCH DRAIN AND ASSOCIATED CONCRETE WORK FOR CHILLER YARD. 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 19 20 21 22 17 18 01 SHEET No. OCCUPANCY GROUP SAFETY CENTER - A3, B2, I3/ TYPE II; SPRINKLERED/ 2-STOREY EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURE: B2/ TYPE V; NOT SPRINKLERED SERVICE CENTER: H4/TYPE II; NOT SPRINKLERED VEHICLE WASH: B2/TYOE V; NOT SPRINKLERED TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION/ NO. OF STOREY SAFETY CENTER: TYPE II; SPRINKLERED/ 2-STOREY EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURE: TYPE V; NOT SPRINKLERED SERVICE CENTER: TYPE II; NOT SPRINKLERED VEHICLE WASH: TYPE V; NOT SPRINKLERED TOTAL BUILDING AREA SAFETY CENTER: 53,207 SF EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURE:1,820 SF SERVICE CENTER: 10,540 SF VEHICLE WASH: 3,560 SF OCCUPANCY AND BUILDING SUMMARY NOTE: THESE INFORMATION ARE FROM THE ORIGINAL DATA OF THE BUILDING 1 1 POLICE AND FIRE HQ - CHILLER REPLACEMENT DR A F T I M P R O V E M E N T P L A N S - C I T Y O F C A R L S B A D - P O L I C E A N D F I R E H Q - C H I L L E R R E P L A C E M E N T 2560 ORION WAY, CARLSBAD, CA 92010 1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130 IRVINE, CA. 92606 TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800 IDS IDS GROUP Project # 22X005.08 50% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS06/21/24 -- 90% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS07/23/24 -- PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/02/24 -- PLAN CHECK CORRECTIONS04/01/25 1 COVER SHEET G-001 5-15-25 5 DIAL BEFORE YOU DIG TWO WORKING DAYS BEFORE YOU DIG 2560 ORION WAY _____ .:,.._ CARLSBAD, CA 92010 ' .-·.:.-= oft ~,. Q .. ~ . • r ,..:, u - ,... \ ..,, FARADAY AVE J ;ti Q'. 0 z ~ J w fsREml ~ E==3~~~t===================~~==~==3~==t=~ ~APFPP~ROJVIVE~D:~~~~~~~~~;::;:::::::;::= JOHN MAASHOFF RCE 61909 EXP 9/30/25 CITY OF CARLSBAD rp, • PUBLIC WORKS MANAGER DAlE DA TE INITIAL DA TE INITIAL ENGINEER OF WORK REVISION DESCRIPTION OlHER APPROVAL DA TE INITIAL CITY APPROVAL DWN BY: CHKD BY: RVWD BY: PROJECT NO. A. GENERAL: 1. SCOPE OF WORK INCLUDES WORK SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS AND DESCRIBED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS, WHETHER SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS OR NOT. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE INTENDED TO COVER THE ENTIRE INSTALLATION OF A COMPLETE AND FUNCTIONAL SYSTEM TO OPERATE AS DESCRIBED. 2. THE CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS REPRESENT THE FINISHED WORK. THEY DO NOT INDICATE THE METHOD OF CONSTRUCTION. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUPERVISE AND DIRECT THE WORK AND SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL CONSTRUCTION MEANS AND METHODS, TECHNIQUES, SEQUENCES AND PROCEDURES. 3. THESE DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC. ALL TURNS, BENDS, AND ELEVATION CHANGES ARE NOT SHOWN ON THESE DRAWINGS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ASSUME FULL RESPONSIBILITY OF COORDINATION WITH VARIOUS TRADES AND INCLUDE ALL TURNS, BENDS, ADDITIONAL LENGTHS OF DUCTS, AND TRANSITIONS WITHOUT ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. 4. THE CONTRACTOR MUST EXAMINE ALL CONSTRAINTS AND THE AVAILABLE SPACE AT THE SITE THAT MAY REQUIRE CUSTOM FABRICATION. DISASSEMBLY AND RE-ASSEMBLY OF CERTAIN EQUIPMENT AT THE FINAL LOCATION OF THE JOB SITE. NO CHANGE ORDER WILL BE GRANTED TO MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR AFTER COMMENCING WORK DUE TO EXISTING CONDITION. 5. PROTECT ALL MATERIALS INCLUDING DUCTS AND PIPES FROM DUST AND DEBRIS AND KEEP OPEN END OF PIPES AND DUCTS COVERED AT ALL TIMES UNTIL READY FOR INSTALLATION OF NEXT SEGMENT OF WORK. 6. WORK DAMAGED OR CUT INTO DURING CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE PATCHED, REPAIRED, PAINTED AND FINISHED TO MATCH EXISTING ADJACENT SURFACES IN TEXTURE, COLOR, AND FINISH. 7. ALL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, AND INSTALLATION SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LATEST CALIFORNIA MECHANICAL CODE. 8. ALL INSULATION SHALL COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF TITLE 24 CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS IN ADDITION TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF SPECIFICATIONS. 9. INSTALL EQUIPMENT IN ACCESSIBLE LOCATION AND PROVIDE ADEQUATE SERVICE CLEARANCE FOR NORMAL MAINTENANCE WITHOUT REQUIRING REMOVAL OF ARCHITECTURAL, ELECTRICAL OR STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS. 10. FOR EQUIPMENT LOCATED ABOVE CEILING, INSTALL SUCH EQUIPMENT CLOSE ENOUGH TO THE CEILING ELEVATION TO FACILITATE READY ACCESS FOR MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING. 11. CUTTING, BORING, SAWCUTTING OR DRILLING THROUGH STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS TO BE DONE ONLY WHEN SO DETAILED ON THE DRAWINGS OR ACCEPTED BY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. 12. VERIFY ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS PRIOR TO BID AND MATERIAL PURCHASE. 13. COORDINATE TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND THERMOSTAT LOCATION WITH FLOOR PLANS AND ELEVATION WITH LIGHT SWITCH/FIRE ALARM DEVICES. TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND THERMOSTAT ELEVATION SHALL BE SAME ELEVATION AS LIGHT SWITCH/FIRE ALARM DEVICES. A, AMPS AMPERES ABV ABOVE AD ACCESS DOOR AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AMB AMBIENT AP ACCESS PANEL ARCH ARCHITECTURAL AUTO AUTOMATIC BD BACK DRAFT DAMPER BDD BACK DRAFT DAMPER BEL BELOW BHP BRAKE HORSEPOWER BTUH BRITISH THERMAL UNITS PER HOUR CAP CAPACITY CD CEILING DIFFUSER CDP CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPE CFM CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE CFSD COMBINATION FIRE SMOKE DAMPER CLG CEILING COMP COMPRESSOR COND CONDITION COP COEFFICIENT OF PERFORMANCE dB DECIBEL DB DRY BULB TEMPERATURE DDC DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL DEFL DEFLECTION DL DOOR LOUVER DN DOWN DPSW DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH DSW DISCONNECT SWITCH DWGS DRAWINGS E EXISTING EA EACH EER ENERGY EFFICIENCY RATIO EF EXHAUST FAN EFF EFFICIENCY EG EXHAUST GRILLE ELECT ELECTRICAL ELEV ELEVATION ENCL ENCLOSURE ENT ENTERING ESP EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE EVAP EVAPORATOR, EVAPORATIVE EXH EXHAUST °F DEGREES FAHRENHEIT FA FRESH AIR OR OUTSIDE AIR FC FAN COIL FLA FULL LOAD AMPS FLEX FLEXIBLE FS FLOOR SINK FSW FLOW SWITCH H HEIGHT HP HORSEPOWER HR HOUR HTG HEATING HVAC HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING HZ HERTZ IN WG INCHES WATER GAUGE ABBREVIATION IDENTIFICATION DROP IN DUCTWORK CEILING SUPPLY, TYPECD-2 200 FLOW (CFM) (IN DIRECTION OF AIR FLOW) RG-1 300 FIRE DAMPER AND ACCESS DOOR COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPER RISE IN DUCTWORK TERMINAL AIR UNIT W/ REHEAT COIL D UP SMOKE DAMPER (IN DIRECTION OF AIR FLOW) FD SD DUCT FLEXIBLE CONNECTION BACK DRAFT DAMPER TV DUCT FITTING RADIUS ELBOW DUCT TRANSITION OUTSIDE AIR DUCT VANED ELBOW (SUPPLY AIR OR FAN DISCHARGE) DUCT UNDER POSITIVE PRESSURE DUCT UNDER NEGATIVE PRESSURE DUCTWORK WITH ACOUSTIC LINING EXHAUST DUCT RETURN DUCT SINGLE LINE DUCTWORK, NEW SYMBOL DESCRIPTION BDD 300 EG-1 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPER CEILING RETURN, TYPE FLOW (CFM) CEILING EXHAUST, TYPE FLOW (CFM) GENERAL NOTES MECHANICAL SYMBOLS - DUCTWORKMECHANICAL SYMBOLS - PIPING KW KILOWATT L LENGTH LBS POUNDS LRA LOCKED ROTOR AMPERES LVG LEAVING MAX MAXIMUM MBH THOUSAND BRITISH THERMAL UNITS PER HOUR MCA MINIMUM CIRCUIT AMPACITY MCC MOTOR CONTROL CENTER MD MOTORIZED DAMPER MFGR MANUFACTURER MIN MINIMUM MOCP MAXIMUM OVERCURRENT PROTECTION N NEW NC NOISE CRITERIA NEMA NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION OBD OPPOSED BLADE DAMPER OC ON CENTER OPER OPERATING OPNG OPENING OP WT OPERATING WEIGHT PD PRESSURE DROP PH PHASE POC POINT OF CONNECTION PR PRESSURE PSI POUND PER SQUARE INCH QTY QUANTITY RA RETURN AIR REFR REFRIGERANT RH RELATIVE HUMIDITY RLA RATED LOAD AMPERES REL RELOCATED SA SUPPLY AIR SC SENSIBLE CAPACITY SCOP SENSIBLE COEFFICIENT OF PERFORMANCE SD SMOKE DETECTOR SF SQUARE FEET SHT SHEET SS STAINLESS STEEL SW SWITCH TAD TRANSFER DUCT TC TOTAL CAPACITY TEMP TEMPERATURE TSP TOTAL STATIC PRESSURE TYP TYPICAL UC UNDER CUT UL UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORY UON UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED UTR UP THRU ROOF V VOLTS W WIDTH W/ WITH WB WET BULB TEMPERATURE WT WEIGHT ABBREVIATION IDENTIFICATION SUSPENDED UTILITY SYSTEMS WHICH INCLUDE: · ELECTRICAL, MECHANICAL, AND PLUMBING EQUIPMENT AND ASSOCIATED CONDUIT, DUCTWORK, AND PIPING ARE REQUIRED TO HAVE SEISMIC RESTRAINT ATTACHMENTS DESIGNED TO RESIST THE TOTAL DESIGN SEISMIC FORCES PRESCRIBED IN SECTION 1613A. PROVIDE TYPICAL SEISMIC RESTRAINT DETAILS. DOCUMENTATION SUBSTANTIATING COMPLIANCE WITH SECTION 1613A OF THE 2022 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE (2022 CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE) TO INCLUDE SEISMIC RESTRAINT ASSEMBLY DETAILS. ANCHORAGE TO OVERHEAD STRUCTURES WITH SUPPORTING ENGINEERING STAMP BY A LICENSED CIVIL OR STRUCTURAL ENGINEER IS REQUIRED AT TIME OF INSPECTION. NONSTRUCTURAL COMPONENTS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND ATTACHMENTS · PROVIDE DETAILS ON THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND SUBSTANTIATING CALCULATIONS (WHEN NECESSARY) FOR THE SUPPORTS AND ATTACHMENTS OF NONSTRUCTURAL COMPONENTS AND EQUIPMENT UNLESS THEY ARE EXEMPTED FROM PLAN REVIEW BY 2022 CBC SECTIONS 1616A.1.18. THE SUPPORTS AND ATTACHMENTS DETAILS SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH THE CALCULATIONS AND THE MANUFACTURE'S LITERATURE. SKETCHES SHOWN IN THE CALCULATIONS FOR THE PURPOSE OF ILLUSTRATING THE ANALYTICAL METHOD ARE NOT ADEQUATE. EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND ATTACHMENTS · SUPPORTS AND ATTACHMENTS OF ALL EQUIPMENT TO BE INSTALLED AS A PART OF THIS PROJECT SHALL BE DETAILED ON CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS, EXCEPT THOSE EXEMPT BY THE 2022 CBC SECTION 1616A.1.18. · EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND ATTACHMENTS SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE APPROPRIATE DESIGN PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD AS A PART OF FIELD REVIEW/OBSERVATIONS. THE INSPECTOR OF RECORD (IOR) SHALL ASSURE THAT THE ABOVE REQUIREMENTS ARE ENFORCED. (2022 CBC SECTIONS 107 AND 1616A) PIPES, DUCTS, AND CONDUITS SUPPORTS, ATTACHMENTS, AND BRACING · PROVIDE CALCULATIONS AND DETAILS FOR SUPPORTS, ATTACHMENTS, AND BRACING OF ALL PIPES, DUCTS, AND CONDUITS. IF A PRE-APPROVED SYSTEM IS SPECIFIED (THE OPM NUMBERS FOR THE ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATIVES SHALL BE SPECIFIED ON THE DRAWINGS) CERTAIN CALCULATIONS AND DETAILS FOR THE SUPPORTING STRUCTURE ARE STILL REQUIRED. · (2022 CAC SECTIONS 7-115, 7-126, AND CBC 2022 SECTION 107) PRE-APPROVED PIPES, DUCTS, AND CONDUITS SEISMIC BRACING A. LAYOUT DRAWINGS OF THE SUPPORTS, ATTACHMENTS, AND BRACING SYSTEMS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PRE-APPROVED SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE REGISTERED DESIGN PROFESSIONAL (RDP) IN RESPONSIBLE CHARGE OF THE PROJECT FOR REVIEW TO VERIFY THAT THE DETAILS ARE IN CONFORMANCE WITH THE CODE REQUIREMENTS. THE LAYOUT DRAWINGS SHALL AS MINIMUM SATISFY THE REQUIREMENTS OF ASCE 7 SECTION 13.6 AS MODIFIED BY THE CBC 2022 SECTION 1616A. 1. THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OF RECORD (SEOR) SHALL VERIFY THAT THE SUPPORTING STRUCTURE IS ADEQUATE FOR THE FORCES IMPOSED ON IT BY THE SUPPORTS, ATTACHMENTS, AND BRACES INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PRE-APPROVAL IN ADDITION TO ALL OTHER LOADS. 2. THE SEOR SHALL FORWARD THE SUPPORTS, ATTACHMENTS, AND BRACING DRAWINGS (INCLUDED APPROVED AMENDED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FOR SUPPLEMENTARY FRAMING WHERE REQUIRED) TO THE DISCIPLINE IN RESPONSIBLE CHARGE WITH A NOTATION INDICATING THAT THE DRAWINGS HAVE BEEN REVIEWED AND ARE IN GENERAL CONFORMANCE WITH THE PRE-APPROVAL IN ADDITION TO ALL OTHER LOADS. 3. A “SHOP DRAWING STAMP” MAY BE USED TO INDICATE COMPLIANCE WITH THIS REQUIREMENT. 4. THE REGISTERED DESIGN PROFESSIONAL (RDP), OTHER THAN SEOR, MAY PROVIDE THE SHOP DRAWING. B. THE SEOR SHALL DESIGN ANY SUPPLEMENTARY FRAMING THAT IS NEEDED TO RESIST THE LOADS, MAINTAIN STABILITY AND/OR IS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION OF PRE-APPROVED SYSTEM. · THE SUPPLEMENTARY FRAMING SHALL BE SUBMITTED AS AN AMENDED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS (ACD). C.THE LAYOUT DRAWINGS (WITH THE SHOP DRAWING STAMP) SHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW: 1. STRUCTURE SUPPORTING THE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM HAS ADEQUATE CAPACITY, 2. SEISMIC DESIGN FORCES (FP) ARE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CBC 2022 D. THE LAYOUT DRAWINGS (WITH THE SHOP DRAWING STAMP) SHALL BE KEPT ON THE JOBSITE AND CAN THEN BE USED FOR INSTALLATION OF THE SUPPORT AND BRACING. E. A COPY OF THE CHOSEN BRACING SYSTEM(S) INSTALLATION GUIDE/OPM MANUAL SHALL BE ON THE JOBSITE PRIOR TO STARTING THE INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND/OR BRACES. · IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO OBTAIN COPIES OF OPM AND FURNISH THE IOR WITH ONE COPY EACH. F. COMPONENTS OF TWO OR MORE PRE-APPROVED BRACING SYSTEMS SHALL NOT BE MIXED. · ONLY ONE PRE-APPROVED BRACING SYSTEM MAY BE USED FOR A RUN OF PIPE, DUCT, OR CONDUIT. · ANY SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENT OF AN OPM SYSTEM SHALL REQUIRE REVIEW AND APPROVAL. (2022 CAC SECTIONS 7-115, 7-126, 7-153, AND CBC 2022 SECTION 107) 1. MINIMUM OF 50% OF NON HAZARDOUS CONSTRUCTION WASTE IS TO BE RECYCLE. CGC 5.713.8.1. 2. TESTING AND ADJUSTING OF NEW SYSTEMS SHALL COMPLY AS OUTLINED IN CGC SECTION 5.713.10.4.2. 3. OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (O&M) AS LISTED IN CGC SECTION 5.713.10.4.5 SHALL BE DELIVERED TO THE BUILDING OWNER OR REPRESENTATIVE AND THE FACILITIES OPERATOR. 4. DURING CONSTRUCTION, ENDS OF DUCT OPENING SHALL BE SEALED, AND MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE COVERED. CGC 5.714.4.3. 5. VOC'S MUST COMPLY WITH THE LIMITATIONS LISTED IN SECTION 5.504.4 AND TABLES 4.504.1, 5.504.4.1, 5.504.4.2, 5.504.4.3 AND 5.504.4.5 FOR: ADHESIVES, SEALANTS, PAINTS, AND COATINGS, CARPET AND COMPOSITION WOOD PRODUCTS. CGC 5.714.4.4 . 6. PRIOR TO FINAL APPROVAL OF THE BUILDING THE LICENSED CONTRACTOR, ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER IN RESPONSIBLE CHARGE OF THE OVERALL CONSTRUCTION MUST COMPLETE AND SIGN THE COUNTY APPROVED GREEN BUILDING STANDARDS CERTIFICATION FORM OR OTHER DOCUMENTATION REQUIRED BY THE COUNTY AND GIVEN TO THE BUILDING DEPARTMENT OFFICIAL PRIOR TO BUILDING FINAL APPROVAL TO BE FILED WITH THE APPROVED PLANS. SEISMIC BRACING CALGREEN BUILDING STANDARD NOTES POINT OF DISCONNECTP.O.D. POINT OF CONNECTIONP.O.C. FS XX YY EQUIPMENT TAG U/G UNDER GROUND THERMOSTAT / TEMPERATURE SENSORT CARBON DIOXIDE SENSORCO2 APPLICABLE CODES 2022 CALIFORNIA BUILDING STANDARDS ADMINISTRATIVE CODE, (TITLE 24 PART 1) 2022 CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE (CBC), (TITLE 24 PART 2) 2022 CALIFORNIA ELECTRICAL CODE (CEC), (TITLE 24 PART 3) 2022 CALIFORNIA MECHANICAL CODE (CMC), (TITLE 24 PART4) 2022 CALIFORNIA PLUMBING CODE (CPC), (TITLE 24 PART 5) 2022 CALIFORNIA ENERGY CODE, (TITLE 24 PART 6) 2022 CALIFORNIA FIRE CODE (TITLE 24 PART 9) 2022 CALIFORNIA GREEN BUILDING CODE (CGBC), (TITLE 24 11) SCOPE OF WORK MBTUH THOUSAND BRITISH THERMAL UNITS PER HOUR PRESS PRESSURE SQ FT SQUARE FEET REPLACE THE EXISTING 99.4 TON AIR-COOLED CHILLER WITH NEW TWO 50 TON AIR COOLED CHILLERS, UPGRADE CONTROLS AND TIE INTO EXISTING BMS AND UPGRADE FRONT END GRAPHICS TO NEW CONFIGURATION. REVISE SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS AS SHOWN TO SUPPORT TWO 50% CHILLERS. ELECTRICAL UPGRADES AS PART OF THIS PROJECT ARE SHOWN ON THE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. SHEET INDEX M-0011 SCHEDULESM-002 S.No.SHEET TITLE M-101 CHILLER YARD DEMOLITION PLAN M-201 CHILLER YARD PROPOSED PLAN M-501 DETAILS NOTES, LEGEND AND ABBREVIATIONS SHEET NUMBER 2 3 4 5 6 SCALE NO SCALE NO SCALE M-601 CONTROLS LEGEND AND ABBREVIATION NO SCALE7 1/4" = 1'-0" 1/4" = 1'-0" NO SCALE OVERALL SITE PLANM-100 1" = 30'-0" CHWS CHILLED WATER SUPPLY CHWR CHILLED WATER RETURN M-701 TITLE 24 DOCUMENTATION NO SCALE 8 M-602 CONTROLS RISER DIAGRAM AND SEQUENCE OF OPERATOIN NO SCALE 9 ABBREVIATIONS MANUAL AIR VENT TEST PLUG THERMOMETER AND WELL PRESSURE GAUGE VIBRATION ISOLATOR IN HANGER PRIMARY CHILLED WATER SUPPLY REFRIGERANT SUCTION REFRIGERANT LIQUIDRL RS PCWS THREE-WAY AUTOMATIC TWO-WAY AUTOMATIC SAFETY VALVE AUTOMATIC AIR VENT PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE PLUG VALVE CHILLED WATER RETURN CHILLED WATER SUPPLY CONDENSATE DRAIN DRAIN HEATING HOT WATER RETURN HEATING HOT WATER SUPPLY CHWR D HHWS HHWR CHWS CD SYMBOL DESCRIPTION CONTROL VALVE WITH NEEDLE VALVE CONTROL VALVE EXISTING DUCT/PIPING TO REMAIN EXISTING EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN EXISTING EQUIPMENT TO BE REMOVED EXISTING DUCT/PIPING TO BE REMOVED NEW PIPE WITH DIRECTION OF FLOW PIPE RISE PIPE DROP CONCENTRIC REDUCER FLANGED CONNECTION PITCH DOWN IN DIRECTION OF FLOW PITCH UP IN DIRECTION OF FLOW PIPE IN UNDERGROUND CONDUIT EXPANSION LOOP BALL JOINT PIPE EXPANSION JOINT GATE VALVE PIPE ANCHOR ANGLE GATE VALVE PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDE ANGLE VALVE DEAD END, SCREWED CAP CHECK VALVE U D UNION "Y" TYPE STRAINER VACUUM BREAKER SYMBOL DESCRIPTION ECCENTRIC REDUCER ACTUATED BUTTERFLY VALVE M-603 CHILLED WATER SYSTEM P&ID NO SCALE 10 RJ SS DS POLICE AND FIRE HQ - CHILLER REPLACEMENT DR A F T I M P R O V E M E N T P L A N S - C I T Y O F C A R L S B A D - P O L I C E A N D F I R E H Q - C H I L L E R R E P L A C E M E N T 2560 ORION WAY, CARLSBAD, CA 92010 1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130 IRVINE, CA. 92606 TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800 IDS IDS GROUP Project # 22X005.08 50% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS06/21/24 -- 90% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS07/23/24 -- PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/02/24 -- No. 30841 R EM S AT TE ET ER SIG ER PD L O A C N F H O C A AL I F C ANRI OEFOISS N ER EN I G E LAN I DAR R E N B. S M I T H Exp. 12/31/26 PLAN CHECK CORRECTIONS04/01/25 1 NOTES LEGEND AND ABBREVIATIONS M-001 0 :,: i5 0 .c "' {; (/J -,:,~"""""""'-----! JDEJ~I.loIBTh\T ·o =i ~ .c ~ 1/1 lo', m ,, :! 0 a: DIAL BEFORE YOU DIG TWO WORKING DAYS BEFORE YOU DIG TOLL FREE llllllliil 1-800-227-2600 A PUBLIC SERVICE BY UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERT ,----7 L ____ J 1/// ///h ~ :_) l -1: ----111 ------cJ-- [:--- _____f""""l__ ----E3-- -----QI--- ---I><)--~ ~ ------t----..J- C?- g -....l\91--- ----w- __£_ 4 ----[] ----[] ----[] ~- [2]-0- 0 0 ~ qi e ..___ _________ _JE::I::=1::::::::=~=====-=--=--=--=--=-=-=t=-~..____ ______ __J * * /'I, [====J~~=~j===============================f====~====l====jt===j APPROVED: JOHN MAASHOFF RCE 61909 EXP. 9/30/25 PUBLIC WORKS MANAGER CITY OF CARLSBAD DATE DA TE INITIAL ENGINEER OF WORK REVISION DESCRIPTION DATE INITIAL OlHER APPROVAL DATE INITIAL CITY APPROVAL DWN BY: ---1 CHKD BY: ___ PROJECT NO. RVWD BY: _ TAG STATUS MAKE MODEL TYPE LOCATION NOTES: CHILLER SCHEDULE SERVICE NOTES: CAP EFF KW/TON EER TONS WATER TEMP GPM EWT LWT MAX MIN PRESS. DROP MCA FUSEV / PH / HZ PHYSICAL OPERATING REFRIG L W H ANCHORAGE DETAIL MOCP (IN.) (IN.) (IN.) WEIGHT (LBS) REFRIG CHARGE (LBS) FT H2O 12 S-501 (E) AH-1 FIRST FLOOR (E) AH-2, AH-3 SECOND FLOOR POLICE & FIRE HQ BLDG. YORKDEMO YCAL0104EB46XCASB(E) CH-1 CH 1A NEW AIR COOLED SCROLL CHILLER 8378ON GRADE 460 / 3 / 60 UNIT POWER SUPPLY MCA FUSEV / PH / HZ MOCP UNIT CONTROL SUPPLY 203 225 115 / 1 / 60 20 30 407C - ELECTRICALCONDENSER TOTAL FAN KW FAN QTYCFMEAT DEG F 99 EVAPORATORPERFORMANCE 159 88.25 9698--- - - - - - - - -- CARRIER 30RC-0506620--003 AIR COOLED DIGITAL SCROLL CHILLER ON GRADE (E) AH-1 FIRST FLOOR (E) AH-2, AH-3 SECOND FLOOR POLICE & FIRE HQ BLDG. 50 10.531.14 54 44 119.4 43.92 4.39 2350460 / 3 / 60 108.8 125.0 - - - R-32 95 88 78259533,734 3 3.975 52.92 COMPRESSORS TOTAL KW CH 1B 1. ENERGY MANAGEMENT MODULE. 2. EVAPORATIVE HEATER (FREEZE PROTECTION) 3. 10 kA SCCR 4. SUCTION LINE INSULATION. 5. DIGITAL SCROLL COMPRESSOR (INCLUDES SOUND BLANKETS). 6. MICRO CHANNEL CONDENSER COIL WITH E-COAT. 7. GREENSPEED INTELLIGENCE : HIGH EFFICIENCY VARIABLE CONDENSER FANS. 8. NON FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH. 9. BRAZED PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER. 10. SINGLE POINT POWER. 11. FULL HAIL GUARDS. 12. LOW SOUND - INCLUDE AERO-ACOUSTIC FANS. 13. CONNECT TO EXISTING CARRIER I-VU CONTROLS 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 12 S-501NEW CARRIER 30RC-0506620--003 AIR COOLED DIGITAL SCROLL CHILLER ON GRADE (E) AH-1 FIRST FLOOR (E) AH-2, AH-3 SECOND FLOOR POLICE & FIRE HQ BLDG. 50 10.531.14 54 44 119.4 43.92 4.39 2350460 / 3 / 60 108.8 125.0 - - -R-32 95 88 78259533,734 3 3.975 52.92 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 TAG STATUS MAKE MODEL TYPE LOCATION PERFORMANCE GPM FT NPSH EXISTING ARMSTRONG EXISTING PUMP SCHEDULE (FOR REFERENCE ONLY) ELECTRICAL PHYSICAL SERVICE SUCTION NOTES: RPM BHP EFF % HP V PH TYPE FRAME DISCH IMP DIA.L W H WEIGHT 4302 0410 005.0 BOILER ROOM CHILLED 232 48.0 10.2 1672 4.23 62.13 5 460 3 184TC 4" 4" 8.31" 30 33.01 36.54 INVERTER DUTY 888 VERTICAL INLINE DUALARM PUMP WATER BUILDINGDESIGN ENVELOPE (E)P 1 (E)P 2 EXISTING TO REMAIN AND RE-USED. RJ SS DS POLICE AND FIRE HQ - CHILLER REPLACEMENT DR A F T I M P R O V E M E N T P L A N S - C I T Y O F C A R L S B A D - P O L I C E A N D F I R E H Q - C H I L L E R R E P L A C E M E N T 2560 ORION WAY, CARLSBAD, CA 92010 1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130 IRVINE, CA. 92606 TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800 IDS IDS GROUP Project # 22X005.08 50% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS06/21/24 -- 90% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS07/23/24 -- PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/02/24 -- No. 30841 R EM S AT TE ET ER SIG ER PD L O A C N F H O C A AL I F C ANRI OEFOISS N ER EN I G E LAN I DAR R E N B. S M I T H Exp. 12/31/26 PLAN CHECK CORRECTIONS04/01/25 1 SCHEDULES M-002 ~ 6 I 0 :,: ~ .., C 0 G ,2 0 a. .., 0 i1 'C 8 OJ 0 ui 0 0 X ~ .., ~ 0 .s= ,. ~ 0 € "' cl "' ~ ] 0 .s= ,. ~ J, C ;;::: 8 0 .s= "' {; (/J -.,~"""""""'-----! JDEJ~I.loIBTh\T ·o =i ~ .s= ~ 1/1 lo', m .., :! 0 a: DIAL BEFORE YOU DIG TWO WORKING DAYS BEFORE YOU DIG TOLL FREE llllllliil 1-800-227-2600 A PUBLIC SERVICE BY UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERT e e * * 8 8 ~=t~===---==+=+=t==±~ fSHml CITY OF CARLSBAD fsHEET5l t-1-==t=jt======------====t==+=~==i=~ ;::~~3 ~~~~P~U~BL=:IC=:::::W::::O::::R:=KS~D~E~PA~R~TM~E~NT!:::==~l___E_J~~ 2=:! f-I IMPROVEMENT PLANS FOR: /'I, ~==~t~~t====================~===E===i===t=~ fAAFFPPiR(RO~VEEDD~: JnJO~HN~M~A~S~~~~======= I-A HOFF RCE 61909 EXP. 9/30/25 PUBLIC WORKS MANAGER CITY OF CARLSBAD DATE DA TE INITIAL ENGINEER OF WORK REVISION DESCRIPTION DATE INITIAL OlHER APPROVAL DATE INITIAL CITY APPROVAL DWN BY: ---1 CHKD BY: ___ ~ROJECT NO. RVWD BY: (E ) 50'-0" 20 ' - 0 " 20'-0" 15 0 ' - 0 " R1 5 ' - 0 " R1 5 ' - 0 " 1 M-201 1 M-101 (E)POLICE & FIRE SAFETY BUILDING RJ SS DS POLICE AND FIRE HQ - CHILLER REPLACEMENT DR A F T I M P R O V E M E N T P L A N S - C I T Y O F C A R L S B A D - P O L I C E A N D F I R E H Q - C H I L L E R R E P L A C E M E N T 2560 ORION WAY, CARLSBAD, CA 92010 1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130 IRVINE, CA. 92606 TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800 IDS IDS GROUP Project # 22X005.08 50% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS06/21/24 -- 90% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS07/23/24 -- PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/02/24 -- No. 30841 R EM S AT TE ET ER SIG ER PD L O A C N F H O C A AL I F C ANRI OEFOISS N ER EN I G E LAN I DAR R E N B. S M I T H Exp. 12/31/26 PLAN CHECK CORRECTIONS04/01/25 1 11" = 30'-0"OVERALL SITE PLAN OVERALL SITE PLAN M-100 TRUE NORTH N 0 I "' "' 0 "' 0 8 -I :::; .;; [ C ...J DIAL BEFORE YOU DIG TWO WORKING DAYS BEFORE YOU DIG D 0 /JiillJ ~ C ID D 0 □ 0 ~==3E~~t====================~===E==l===t=~ fAAJ3FppiR(Ro~VEEDD~: ~JO~HN~M~A~AS~~~============:::;:===::! I-HOFF RCE 61909 EXP. 9/30/25 PUBLIC WORKS MANAGER CITY OF CARLSBAD DATE DA TE INITIAL ENGINEER OF WORK DATE INITIAL REVISION DESCRIPTION OlHER APPROVAL DATE INITIAL CITY APPROVAL DWN BY: CHKD BY: RVWD BY: PROJECT NO. 11 DRAWING NO.I DEMOLITION KEYNOTES (E) BOILER TO REMAIN AND REUSED. (E) PIPING AND PIPING APPURTENANCES TO REMAIN AND REUSED. DEMOLISH AND REMOVE (E) CHILLER INCLUDING ALL APPURTENANCE. (E) CHW PUMPS TO REMAIN AND REUSED. (E) HHW PUMPS TO REMAIN AND REUSED. (E) 8" FLUE UP THROUGH ROOF TO REMAIN AND REUSED. (E) EXPANSION TANK TO REMAIN AND REUSED. (E) CHW AIR SEPARATOR TO REMAIN AND REUSED . (E) CHEMICAL FEEDERS TO REMAIN AND REUSED. (E) MCC (MOTOR CONTROL CENTER). REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. (E) HHW AIR SEPARATOR TO REMAIN AND REUSED. (E) FLOOR SINK TO REMAIN AND REUSED. (E) (2) COMBUSTION AIR LOUVERS TO REMAIN AND REUSED. HI AND LOW. (E) DISCONNECT SWITCH FOR CHILLER. REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. (E) CONCRETE PAD TO REMAIN AND REUSED. (E) ±1" DIA WALL OPENING FOR DRAIN. DEMOLISH AND REMOVE (E) CHWS AND CHWR PIPES. 1 (E ) 2 " H H W R (E ) 4 " C H W R (E ) 4 " C H W S (E) 4" CHWR (E) 4" CHWS (E ) 2 " H H W S 4" C H W S 4" C H W R 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 8(E) AS-1 (E) B-1 6 7(E) ET-2 7(E) ET-1 4(E) P-1 (E) P-2 2 2 12(E) FD 9(E) CPF-2 2 11(E) AS-2 5(E) P-3 (E) P-4 13 10 9 (E) CPF-1 3 (E) CH-1 (E) 4" CHWS&R TO BUILDING (E) 2" HHWS&R TO BUILDING 14 14 15 15 2 POD (E) ELECTRICAL TRANSFORMER (E) GENERATOR ROOM (E) BOILER ROOM (E) TRASH (E) CHILLER YARD (E) GENERATOR SET 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 17 17 RJ SS DS POLICE AND FIRE HQ - CHILLER REPLACEMENT DR A F T I M P R O V E M E N T P L A N S - C I T Y O F C A R L S B A D - P O L I C E A N D F I R E H Q - C H I L L E R R E P L A C E M E N T 2560 ORION WAY, CARLSBAD, CA 92010 1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130 IRVINE, CA. 92606 TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800 IDS IDS GROUP Project # 22X005.08 50% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS06/21/24 -- 90% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS07/23/24 -- PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/02/24 -- No. 30841 R EM S AT TE ET ER SIG ER PD L O A C N F H O C A AL I F C ANRI OEFOISS N ER EN I G E LAN I DAR R E N B. S M I T H Exp. 12/31/26 PLAN CHECK CORRECTIONS04/01/25 1 11/4"=1'-0"CHILLER YARD DEMOLITION PLAN TRUE NORTHN CHILLER YARD DEMOLITION PLAN M-101 L .!! ,: <J 0 :,: "' "' 0 "' a a -I :::; -" ~ 0 ...J 0 ,: "' ~ 'C ~ 0 a: DIAL BEFORE YOU DIG TWO WORKING DAYS BEFORE YOU DIG - (_ - I : :--,,,.ir,!Y l::. -• • -.d 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 I I 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 I I 11 11 I I 11 11 11 11 11 11 I I 11 11 11 11 11 11 ,Y // II II 1111 II II I 111 II II f-lH 11 ~ l;fi II A ffff I I I I f I If I I 11 / / f I I I 11 / f f I I I 11 ff f I ~~f;ff l!f!f/f/ ffff/ff/ f/ f/ If f / f/ f; f; f / I/ if I; f / I f; -;r--,'L..,. I/ f/ I I I/ if I I I I I; if I I f I f/f;lfl/ i/f;l;f; I/ I/ I; I/ I/ If I I I I i/f;lff/ 1/f;lff/ I/ f/ I; I/ ~)L)Jjj_r I I ,------------- 1 I I I 7 I I I I I I L _____________ _J o~-------------- 0 ◊ ◊ ◊ ◊ ◊ ◊ ◊ ◊ ◊ ◊ ◊ ◊ ◊ ◊ ◊ ◊ ◊ [sHms] LE_J [====J~~=~j===============================f====~====l====jt===j APPROVED: JOHN MAASHOFF RCE 61909 EXP. 9/30/25 PUBLIC WORKS MANAGER CITY OF CARLSBAD DATE DA TE INITIAL ENGINEER Of WORK DWN BY: PROJECT NO. REVISION DESCRIPTION DATE INITIAL OlHER APPROVAL DA TE INITIAL CITY APPROVAL CHKD BY: RVWD BY: II DRAWING NO.I KEYNOTES 1 (E ) 2 " H H W R (E ) 4 " C H W R (E ) 4 " C H W S (E) 4" CHWR (E) 4" CHWS (E ) 2 " H H W S 4" C H W S 4" C H W R (E) AS-1 (E) B-1 (E) ET-2 (E) ET-1 (E) P-1 (E) P-2 (E) FD (E) CPF-2 (E) AS-2 (E) P-3 (E) P-4 (E) CPF-1 (E) 4" CHWS&R TO BUILDING (E) 2" HHWS&R TO BUILDING (E) BOILER TO REMAIN AND REUSED. (E) PIPING AND PIPING APPURTENANCES TO REMAIN AND REUSED. PROVIDE (N) CHILLER. SEE SCHEDULE ON SHEET M-002. (E) CHW PUMPS TO REMAIN AND REUSED. (E) HHW PUMPS TO REMAIN AND REUSED. (E) 8" FLUE UP THROUGH ROOF TO REMAIN AND REUSED. (E) EXPANSION TANK TO REMAIN AND REUSED. (E) CHW AIR SEPARATOR TO REMAIN AND REUSED . (E) CHEMICAL FEEDERS TO REMAIN AND REUSED. SEE DETAIL 1 / M-501 FOR CHILLER DIMENSIONS AND SERVICE CLEARANCES. (E) HHW AIR SEPARATOR TO REMAIN AND REUSED. (E) FLOOR SINK TO REMAIN AND REUSED. (E) (2) COMBUSTION AIR LOUVERS TO REMAIN AND REUSED. HI AND LOW. (N) 3" BUTTERFLY ISOLATION VALVE WITH ACTUATOR. INSTALL ON CHILLED WATER RETURN PIPE. (E) CONCRETE PAD TO REMAIN AND REUSED. (N) CONCRETE PAD EXTENSION TO (E) CONCRETE PAD. SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR DETAIL. PROVIDE FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS AT CHILLER 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 12 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 8 9 11 12 13 15 9 2 2 2 CH 1A POC 3" CHWR ABOVE 3" CHWS BELOW 3 CH 1B 16 16 17 10 (E) ELECTRICAL TRANSFORMER (E) GENERATOR ROOM (E) BOILER ROOM (E) TRASH (E) CHILLER YARD (E) GENERATOR SET 10 10 (TYP.) 3 M-501 (TYP.) 6 M-501 (E) ±1" DIA WALL OPENING FOR DRAIN. (TYP.6) INSULATED PIPE WITH ALUMINUM JACKET PER SPECIFICATIONS. 3" CHWR ABOVE 3" CHWS BELOW 16 14 14 (N) 4" CHWR (N) 4" CHWS 1517 17 RJ SS DS POLICE AND FIRE HQ - CHILLER REPLACEMENT DR A F T I M P R O V E M E N T P L A N S - C I T Y O F C A R L S B A D - P O L I C E A N D F I R E H Q - C H I L L E R R E P L A C E M E N T 2560 ORION WAY, CARLSBAD, CA 92010 1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130 IRVINE, CA. 92606 TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800 IDS IDS GROUP Project # 22X005.08 50% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS06/21/24 -- 90% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS07/23/24 -- PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/02/24 -- No. 30841 R EM S AT TE ET ER SIG ER PD L O A C N F H O C A AL I F C ANRI OEFOISS N ER EN I G E LAN I DAR R E N B. S M I T H Exp. 12/31/26 PLAN CHECK CORRECTIONS04/01/25 1 11/4"=1'-0"CHILLER YARD NEW PLAN TRUE NORTHN CHILLER YARD NEW PLAN M-201 C> 3 ,, ,. G 'i 0 "' I ~ ~ u:i 0 0 X "' 5J- .s= u G :::; ~ ~ u "' 0 ~ ii E ~ C a. G "' 0 :,: "' "' 0 "' 0 ~ 0 "' I :::; -" ~ C ...J ,:,~"""""""'-----! na~~IBiT ·a =i ~ .s= ~ 1/1 lo'. m DIAL BEFORE YOU DIG TWO WORKING DAYS BEFORE YOU DIG TOLL FREE 111111111 1-800-227-2600 A PUBLIC SERVICE BY UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERT ~ - II I I I I II 1111 II II I 111 II II f-lH 11 ~ l;fi II A ffff I I I I f I If I I 11 / / f I I I 11 / f f I I I 11 ff f I ~~f;ff l!f!f/f/ ffff/ff/ f/ f/ If f / f/ f; f; f / I/ if I; f / I f; -w c"--7.,. I/ f/ I I I/ if I I I I I; if I I f I lif;if// i/f;l;f; I/ I/ I; I/ I/ If I I I I i/f;lff/ 1/f;lff/ I/ f/ I; I/ ~JLJJ}}r - - I I rY"I-· /\~ J_ _ _J_ I 7 I I I I I I I I I eccc C- Ccc -\ _J ~========-----~ \_jlccc \ ~-------_J ,-----------------1 --------7 I I I I I I I I L____________ I _____________ _J o~-------------- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ~=t~===---==+=+=t==±~f"SHml CITY OF CARLSBAD~ t-1-==t=jt======------====t==+=~==i=~ ~ PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT l____E_j f-IMPRO\IEMENT PLANS FOR: * * /\ [====J~~=~j===============================f====~====l====jt===j APPROVED: JOHN MAASHOFF RCE 61909 EXP. 9/30/25 PUBLIC WORKS MANAGER CITY OF CARLSBAD DA TE DA TE INITIAL ENGINEER Of WORK REVISION DESCRIPTION DATE INITIAL OlHER APPROVAL DA TE INITIAL CITY APPROVAL DWN BY: I PROJECT NO. II CHKD BY DRAWING NO~I RVWD BY; ---.. _ 6NO SCALEPIPE SUPPOR AT SLAB9NO SCALEDETAIL 10NO SCALEDETAIL 11NO SCALEDETAIL 3NO SCALESTAKED PIPE SUPPORT 1.1 31.744.0 1.1 11.244.035.8 47.0 28.6 CH 1A CH 1B CGy CGx PLAN VIEW COIL SIDE SEE NOTE #4 COIL SIDE SEE NOTE #4 PANEL SIDE SEE NOTE #4 SERVICE CLEARANCE BORDER AIR FLOW AIR FLOW 42.00 MIN 42.00 MIN 48.00 MIN 48.00 MIN SEE DETAIL A 1.00 TYP. SEE NOTE #4 0.99 TYP. SEE NOTE #4 Ø2.25 TYP. 2.68 TYP. 3.50 TYP. 1.00 TYP. 1.5 TYP. FRONT VIEW CONTROL BOX HINGED ACCESS MAIN POWER SHUT OFF DISCONNECT FORK TRUCK POCKETS CIRCUIT B COMPRESSOR ACCESS CIRCUIT A COMPRESSOR ACCESS DETAIL A DETAIL A BOTTOM VIEW MOUNTING HOLE TYP. SEE NOTE #4 AIR FLOW AIR FLOW 87.99 78.43 LWz EWz EWy & LWy REAR VIEW WATER-OUT SEE NOTE #8 WATER-INSEE NOTE #8 AIR FLOW AIR FLOW 3X4.61 27.98 23.98 21.98 4.13 1.48 TYP. SEE NOTE #4 1.50 TYP. SEE NOTE #4 94.80 33.98 92.01 78.43 CGz EWx & LWx SEE NOTE #8 97.76 RIGHT SIDE VIEW LEFT SIDE VIEW VFD ACCESS GRILL 2-1/2" GROOVED MACHINE OPTIONS PUMP GREENSPEED COIL TYPECGx CGy CGz CENTER OF GRAVITY INCH ENTERING WATER (EW) INCH LEAVING WATER (LW) INCH X Y Z X Y Z CONNECTION TYPE: MCHX ±.25 ±.25 ±.25 ±.25 ±.25 ±.25 1NO SCALECHILLER DETAIL 7/8 DIA. KNOCK-OUT FIELD POWER ENTRYSEE NOTE #2 7/8 DIA. KNOCK-OUT FIELDCONTROL WIRING ENTRY - NOTES: 1. DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN INCHES. 2. DO NOT CAP OR OTHERWISE OBSTRUCT THE LIQUID LINE TEMPERATURE RELIEF. 3. 7/8 DIAM. PILOT HOLE PROVIDED FOR LOCATION FIELD POWER WIRING ACTUAL HOLE REQUIRED DEPENDS ON FIELD WIRING SIZING. 4. Ø 0.5 HOLE AND 0.8 X 0.4 SLOT USED FOR MOUNTING UNIT ON FRONT AND REAR BASE RAIL. 5. UNIT MUST HAVE SERVICE CLEARANCES AS FOLLOWS: TOP - DO NOT RESTRICT. COIL SIDE - 42 FROM SOLID SURFACE. PANEL SIDE - 48 PER NEC. 6. CARRIER DOES NOT RECOMMEND INSTALLATION IN A PIT. 7. UNIT CAN BE HANDLED USING THE FORK TRUCK LIFT POCKETS (MINIMUM OF 60 FORK LENGTH). 8. WATER CONNECTIONS RECESSED INSIDE UNIT. ALL WATER DRAIN AND VENTING HOLES ARE 1/4" NPT. EQ EQ EQ SECTION A-AAA EQ (4)3/8" DIA. HILTI KB-TZ2 SS304 PER MFGR. (ICC ESR 4266) (2-3/4" NOMINAL EMBED) HSS 2-1/2 x 2-1/2 x 1/4 TYP. @ 4'-0" O.C. MAX. SPACING 1/4 TYP. 1/4" CAP PLATE (TYP.) 1-1/2" TYP 9" 9" 3/8" PLATE (E) 4" CONCRETE SLAB 48"MAX. L 2x2x1/4 INSULATED PIPE WITH ALUMINUM JACKET AND "U" BOLTS SEE PLAN FOR SIZE 3/8" DIA. HILTI KB-TZ2 SS304 PER MFGR. (ICC ESR 4266) (2-3/4" NOMINAL EMBED) UNISTRUT P1000 (E) 4" CONCRETE SLAB 3/16 INSULATED PIPE WITH ALUMINUM JACKET. SEE PLAN FOR SIZE NOTE: MAX. PIPE SUPPORT SPACING 4'-0" O.C. RJ SS DS POLICE AND FIRE HQ - CHILLER REPLACEMENT DR A F T I M P R O V E M E N T P L A N S - C I T Y O F C A R L S B A D - P O L I C E A N D F I R E H Q - C H I L L E R R E P L A C E M E N T 2560 ORION WAY, CARLSBAD, CA 92010 1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130 IRVINE, CA. 92606 TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800 IDS IDS GROUP Project # 22X005.08 50% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS06/21/24 -- 90% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS07/23/24 -- PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/02/24 -- No. 30841 R EM S AT TE ET ER SIG ER PD L O A C N F H O C A AL I F C ANRI OEFOISS N ER EN I G E LAN I DAR R E N B. S M I T H Exp. 12/31/26 PLAN CHECK CORRECTIONS04/01/25 1 DETAILS M-501 0 :,: "' "' ::al i5 ,, :! 0 a: DIAL BEFORE YOU DIG TWO WORKING DAYS BEFORE YOU DIG • • J'H----....1..1_1 ' " ' 7 .. < .. I I t ' ' i--I I I I I-- I-- I/ ~ . .. . . . . . . . ·--. • • = I I I I I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I.. --I I-l~L u • • = . • . ·c; . .. • = / ~,.__ . . . 00 I-/ I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I • ' ' I I I I ~ . ·--. . . . . u I • : 1§1 . ' • . • . . :·rn:i· . . . .. • = . . . . ~ L,=l ~_\_ 0 0 7 . . . ' • -• . - . . . □ b .... I.. ' . . . 00 -I 0 ~ 7 J I-- i I I I L ___ l ✓ 7 7 _J 00 ~=3==t==============~==t==E==1=~ ~ CITY OF CARLSBAD fsHErnl t-1-==t=jt======------====t==+=~==i=~ ~ PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT L___E_j f-~==t==t====---------===+==+==t==t=j ~IM~P~RO~VE~M~EN~T~PLA~N~S~F~OR~:=::::::::::=:::=:~~~~~=~_!::::~~~ ~====jt~=~j===============================i====]====j=====t===j ~AAfP~PiRR:00VJVEfcD>:': ==sJ~OH~N~MfjA~A~S~HO~F=;:F:=R;;;C;;;E:=';;'61;=;:9:=:::0=:::=9=:E==x=P=.9::::;/3=0=;=2=5 PUBLIC WORKS MANAGER CITY OF CARLSBAD DATE DA TE INITIAL ENGINEER OF WORK REVISION DESCRIPTION DATE INITIAL OlHER APPROVAL DATE INITIAL CITY APPROVAL DWN BY: CHKD BY: ___ PROJECT NO. RVWD BY: II DRAWING NO.I USED WITH NUMBERS AS WIRING REFERENCE POINTS TO SIMPLIFY WIRING DIAGRAM LINE VOLTAGE WIRING LINE VOLTAGE (120 VOLT) WIRING LOW VOLTAGE (30 VOLT AND LESS) A.C. WIRING LOW VOLTAGE (30 VOLT AND LESS) D.C. WIRING INDICATES CONTROL PANEL TERMINAL CONTACTS NC NO NO - NORMALLY OPEN NOHC - NORMALLY OPEN NC - NORMALLY CLOSED NCHO - NORMALLY CLOSED CONTROL RELAYCR HAS CLOSED HAS OPENED 120 VAC, 1PH, 60Hz120V 480VAC, 3PH, 60Hz480V, 3PH I INTERLOCK POWER SUPPLY FOR DC DEVICESPS ABBR. / SYMBOL DESCRIPTION 4. 5. 3. 2. V M E CONTROL PANELS REQUIRE 120VAC POWER. SEE THE CONTROL CONTRACTOR'S CONTROL SUBMITTAL DRAWINGS FOR QUANTITY AND LOCATION OF 120V POWER & DISCONNECT. FIRE SMOKE DAMPERS ARE ELECTRICALLY OPERATED. OPERATION AND MONITORING MUST BE COORDINATED WITH THE LIFE SAFETY CONTRACTOR. SEE THE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS. WIRING DIAGRAMS ARE SHOWN FOR CONTROL SEQUENCE AND FUNCTION ONLY. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO INSURE THAT THE ELECTRICAL PORTION OF THIS WORK IS INSTALLED PER CODE. LOW VOLTAGE CONDUIT & WIRE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. LINE VOLTAGE CONDUIT & WIRE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. REFER TO ELECTRICAL PLANS FOR COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS IDENTIFIED ON DRAWING COMMUNICATION CABLE IS BY CONTROL CONTRACTOR. FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. FURNISHED, INSTALLED & TERMINATED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. FURNISHED BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR WIRED AND TERMINATED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. FURNISHED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WIRED AND TERMINATED BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. FURNISHED BY EQUIPMENT VENDOR. ME EM F FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR. C FURNISHED, INSTALLED AND WIRED BY CONTROL CONTRACTOR. I ANALOG BINARY INTERLOCK FIRST LETTER SECOND LETTER MEASURED OR INITIATING VARIABLE MODIFIER READOUT OR PASSIVE FUNCTION OUTPUT FUNCTION MODIFIER A B C D E ANALYSIS BURNER COMBUSTION CARBON DIOXIDE USER CHOICE VOLTAGE -ALARM -- USER CHOICEUSER CHOICEUSER CHOICE- CLOSEDCONTROL-- ---DIFFERENTIAL (PRIMARY ELEMENT) SENSOR--- F FLOW RATE RATIO (FRACTION)--- USER CHOICEG -GLASS VIEWING DEVICE -- HANDH ---HIGH ELECTRICAL CURRENTI -INDICATE -- POWERJ SCAN --- TIME, TIME SCHEDULEK TIME, RATE OF CHANGE -CONTROL STATION - LEVELL -LIGHT -LOW USER CHOICEM MOMENTARY --MIDDLE USER CHOICEN -USER CHOICE USER CHOICE INTERMEDIATE OCCUPANCYO -ORIFICE, RESTRICTION -OPEN PRESSURE, VACUUMP POINT (TEST CONNECTION) --- QUANTITYQ INTEGRATE, TOTALIZE --- RADIATIONR -RECORD -- SPEED, FREQUENCYS SAFETY -SWITCH STOP TEMPERATURET -MULTIFUNCTION TRANSMIT - MULTIVARIABLEU --MULTIFUNCTION MULTIFUNCTION VIBRATIONV -POINT (TEST CONNECTION) -- MECHANICAL ANALYSIS W WEIGHT, FORCE -WELL -- STATUSX X-AXIS UNCLASSIFIED EVENT STATE OR PRESENCEY Y-AXIS -- POSITION, DIMENSIONZ Z-AXIS -DRIVER ACTUATOR,- UNCLASSIFIED UNCLASSIFIED RELAY COMPUTE, CONVERT UNCLASSIFIED FINAL CONTROL ELEMENT PRIMARY LOCATION ***NORMALLY ACCESSIBLE TO OPERATOR FIELD MOUNTED AUXILIARY LOCATION ***NORMALLY ACCESSIBLE TO OPERATOR DISCRETE INSTRUMENT SHARED DISPLAY, SHARED CONTROL COMPUTER FUNCTION PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER ***NORMALLY INACCESSIBLE OR BEHIND-THE-PANEL DEVICES OR FUNCTIONS MAY BE DEPICTED BY USING THE SAME SYMBOL BUT WITH DASHED HORIZONTAL BARS, I.E. DESCRIPTION LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL ANALOG SIGNAL LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL BINARY SIGNAL OR POWER HYDRAULIC OR PNEUMATIC SIGNAL ELECTRICAL POWER NETWORK COMMUNICATION CABLE 480V, 3Ø SOLENOID CONTROL RELAY XXCR XXMS MOTOR STARTER/CONTACTOR XXTR TIMER RELAY XXESCR ESTOP CONTROL RELAY PILOT LIGHTX A-AMBER B-BLUE C-CLEAR G-GREEN R-RED W-WHT Y-YELLOW X PILOT LIGHT PUSH TO TEST M PANEL WIRING FIELD WIRING FILED ENCLOSURE CONNECTION XXX NO CONNECTION X WIRE CONTINUATION X-DRAWING SECTION XXX-LINE NUMBER SLIP RING DETACHABLE CONNECTOR FUSED TERMINAL BLOCK EARTH GROUND CHASSIS GROUND MCC/FIELD TERMINAL GENERAL PURPOSE TERMINAL DIN TERMINAL BLOCK DEVICE SPECIFIC TERMINAL BLOCK DISCONNECT CIRCUIT BREAKER FUSIBLE DISCONNECT THERMAL OVERLOAD MAGNETIC OVERLOAD 3 PHASE MOTORM CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER 1.CONTROL'S CONSTRUCTOR TO COORDINATE WITH CITY OF CARLSBAD AND SAFETY CENTER BUILDING MANAGEMENT FOR SELECTION OF FIELD, EQUIPMENT CONTROLLERS AND INTEGRATION WITH EXISTING BAS. ABBREVIATIONS SYSTEM SCHEMATIC IDENTIFICATION LETTERSWIRING SYMBOLS POWER SYMBOLS PROCESS DEVICES WIRING DIAGRAM SYMBOLS GENERAL NOTES INSTRUMENT LINE SYMBOL BAI BACNET ANALOG INPUT BAO BACNET ANALOG OUTPUT BBI BACNET BINARY INPUT BBO BACNET BINARY OUTPUT BI BINARY INPUT BO BINARY OUTPUT CHW CHILLED WATER CHWP CHILLED WATER PUMP CHWR CHILLED WATER RETURN CHWS CHILLED WATER SUPPLY DA DISCHARGE AIR DI DIGITAL INPUT DO DIGITAL OUTPUT EA EXHAUST AIR EF EXHAUST FAN EVAP EVAPORATOR F FAHRENHEIT FCU FAN COIL UNIT HP HEAT PUMP HRU HEAT RECOVERY UNIT HTEX HEAT EXCHANGER MAX MAXIMUM MIN MINIMUM MISC MISCELLANEOUS OA OUTDOOR AIR RA RETURN AIR RF RETURN FAN RH RELATIVE HUMIDITY RTU ROOFTOP UNIT SA SUPPLY AIR SF SUPPLY FAN SP STATIC PRESSURE TEMP TEMPERATURE VAV VARIABLE AIR VOLUME VAVTU VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINAL UNIT VVT VARIABLE VOLUME & TEMPERATURE W/ WITH W/O WITHOUT DUCT TEMP SENSORHEATINGCOOLING SUPPLY FANRETURN FAN STATIC PRESSURE SENSOR DIFF. PRESSURE SENSOR ENTHALPY OR HUMIDITY SPACE SENSOR FILTERMANUAL DAMPER BAROMETRIC RELIEF DOOR CONTACT CEILING MOUNT MOTION SENSOR WIRE NUT HORIZONTAL ECONOMIZER VERTICAL ECONOMIZER WELL TEMP SENSOR LIQUID FLOW METER LIQUID DIFF PRESSURE SENSOR 2-WAY VALVE 3-WAY VALVE COMMUNICATION BUS SPECIFICATION 1. A 24 AWG 2-CONDUCTOR-SHIELDED-STRANDED CABLE (PLENUM RATED AS REQUIRED) MUST BE DAISY CHAINED FROM CONTROLLER TO CONTROLLER. IT SHOULD BE COLOR CODED (RED, BLACK, WHITE). 2. THE COMMUNICATION CABLE OPERATES AT UP TO 5 VDC. VERIFY WITH THE LOCAL CODE AUTHORITY AND SPECS REGARDING CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS. 3. NO "T" TAP OR "STAR" TYPE CONNECTIONS ARE PERMITTED. 4. TERMINATE THE SHIELDS ON THE DESIGNATED TERMINAL AT EACH DEVICE. 5. 30 CONTROLLER’S MAXIMUM PER COMMUNICATION BUS SEGMENT. 60 CONTROLLER’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’S LITERATURE PUMP ALTERNATING CURRENT ACKNOWLEDGE ANALOG INPUT ALARM AUTO-MANUAL ANALOG OUTPUT AID SUPPLY BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM CLOSE COMMON ALARM CATEGORY 5 CABLING CONTROL RELAY CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT CONSTANT SPEED PUMP CARRIER COMFORT NETWORK DIRECT CURRENT DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM END OF LINE ELECTRIC SUPPLY ELAPSED TIME METER FLOW METER GAS SUPPLY HAND-AUTO HIGH-LOW HIGH-LOW-OFF-REMOTE HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE HAND-OFF-AUTO HYDRAULIC SUPPLY HARDWIRED INPUT/OUTPUT INSTRUMENT AIR INSTRUMENT S.O.A. INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROL INPUT/OUTPUT JAVA APPLICATION CONTROL ENGINE LOCAL CONTROL PANEL LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE LOCK-OUT-STOP MOTOR CONTROL CENTER NETWORK POINT NORMALLY OPEN NORMALLY CLOSED NITROGEN SUPPLY PLANT AIR POWER SUPPLY PROPORTIONAL INTEGRAL DERIVATIVE PROCESS & INSTRUMENT DIAGRAM PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE REGIONAL ENERGY EFFICIENCY PROJECT FACILITY REMOTE I/O START-STOP STEAM SUPPLY TRANSFER CONTROL PROTOCOL/INTERNET PROTOCOL TOTALIZATION TIME PROPORTIONAL CONTROL TWISTED SHIELDED PAIR UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE WATER SUPPLY DATAHIWAY DATAHIWAY PLUS MODBUS MODBUS PLUS PANEL VIEW AC ACK AI AL AM AO AS BAS C CA CAT5 CR CEP CSP CNN DC DCS EOL ES ETM FM GS HA HL HLOR HMI HOA HS HW IA ISA I&C I/O JACE LCP LOR LOS MCC NET N.O. N.C. NS PA PS PID P&ID PLC PRV REEP RIO S/S SS TCP/IP TOT TPC TSP UPS VFD WS DH DH+ MB MB+ PV GENERAL INFORMATION SYMBOL LEGEND RJ SS DS POLICE AND FIRE HQ - CHILLER REPLACEMENT DR A F T I M P R O V E M E N T P L A N S - C I T Y O F C A R L S B A D - P O L I C E A N D F I R E H Q - C H I L L E R R E P L A C E M E N T 2560 ORION WAY, CARLSBAD, CA 92010 1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130 IRVINE, CA. 92606 TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800 IDS IDS GROUP Project # 22X005.08 50% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS06/21/24 -- 90% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS07/23/24 -- PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/02/24 -- No. 30841 R EM S AT TE ET ER SIG ER PD L O A C N F H O C A AL I F C ANRI OEFOISS N ER EN I G E LAN I DAR R E N B. S M I T H Exp. 12/31/26 PLAN CHECK CORRECTIONS04/01/25 1 CONTROLS LEGEND AND ABBREVIATION M-601 0 I ~ i,_ ,, C C ~ '-0 a. C u CXJ a "' a a ~ ,, "' "' a "' 0 0 <O I ::; ..; [ C ...J C .c "' ~ ~ ~ = = @+- ~ Jm ~ w ~I~ [!]\ /\ /\ ,r,r, g;J t!l ...... ,..,. ...... ,..,. la w ! c::::J GiJ \"j\7\ ,r,r, ,..,., ...... ,..,. ...... ,..,. □ D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 --------- -·-- -- - - - 0 □ □ o-0--o . ' l ( I- I-- ' + o-0--o ---- o-0--o t o-0--o ~ o-0--o .. .. o--Q-o -- 181 o--Q-o II ' r:: -----o-r 0---' -----o--<o- ' hf' ,~ ) ( ____,,;.--0--- ----I ,-( ---0: 0--- ' ,..,.,_ ---0: 0---------1 ' r-.. 8 --0 0---8 0 ' r:: -----o-r o---[I]]- ' □ 8 t> -----o--< o---[I])-a ' ____,,;.--o---[I])- ► e 0 e ----o(X'o-- ----o(X'o-- ----o(X'o-- B □ B ----o"-,o--- ----o"-,o--- ----o"-,o---3) 8 ~ e § fSHml CITY OF CARLSBAD ~ 1-----1--+---------------t----t--+----i----t ~ PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT L.E_j t=====t====t================================t====~~====t====~====~ IMPRO\IEMENT PLANS FOR: * * /\. ] DIAL TWO WORKING PUBLIC WORKS MANAGER CITY OF CARLSBAD DA TE ! ,:;;:, • .:::: M~ '""~ RE~SION DESCRIPSON M~ ,.,_ :; ... ==~ !~ '~-=--=-=== I PROJECT NO, II DRAWING NO.I APPROVED: JOHN MAASHOFF RCE 61909 EXP. 9/30/25 ~a:Go l.::;~~t&~~J~~=j __________________________________________________________ JL _______________________ J.::EN:G:IN~EE~R~OF~WO=Rl,K __ _:~.:=~=:::._:::, ___ _J~o:TH!E:.R_:A:::PP:::R::;ov:AL:.J~~,:::::;::::,~:;:::;:::;::::::::::::::::!.!:· ========;!!::====:J ~ A PUBLIC SERVICE BY UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERT 1NO SCALECONTROLS RISER DIAGRAM ADMIN BLDG EXISTING PC OR INTERNET DEVICE WITH STANDARD WEB BROWSER SOFTWARE AND LAN ACCESS, SUPPLIED BY OTHERS 1 PC CU S T O M E R L O C A L A R E A N E T W O R K ON GRADE 1 WS EXISTING I-VU APPLIANCE WEB SERVER 1A CH CHILLER BACNET INTERFACE 1B CH CHILLER BACNET INTERFACE 1 1 CP CHILLER PLANT CONTROL LOCAL AREA NETWORK 042007DB WIRE LEGEND BACNET MS/TP NETWORK WIRING BURIAL BACNET MS/TP NETWORK WIRING 042002-S PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OTHERS 24 AWG 2 COND SHIELDED, PLENUM, ORANGE 24 AWG 2 COND SHIELDED, BURIAL, BLACK LINE STYLE WIRE TYPE PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION I/O NETWORK WIRING 043009AL 22 AWG 2 COND SHIELDED, PLENUM, BLUE VRF NETWORK WIRING 001320-S 16 AWG 2 COND SHIELDED, PLENUM, WHITE BACNET MSTP NETWORK GUIDELINES: A MSTP NETWORK SHALL NOT EXCEED 10,000 FEET OVERALL LENGTH, CONSISTING OF UP TO FIVE 2000 FOOT SEGMENTS WITH NO GREATER THAN 30 DEVICES PER SEGMENT. EACH 2000 FOOT SEGMENT SHALL BE JOINED TO THE NEXT SEGMENT USING A BACNET REPEATER WITH APPROPRIATE TERMINATION. NO MORE THAN 4 REPEATERS CAN BE USED ON A SINGLE BACNET MSTP NETWORK. EACH SEGMENT WILL HAVE TERMINATION AT THE BEGINNING AND END OF THE SEGMENT. EXISTING CARRIER EQUIPMENT INSTALLED IN PHASE 1 OF PROJECT ON CARRIER BACNET MS/ TP NETWORK. NOT INCLUDED IN CURRENT PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK. 1 NOTES: 1. NETWORK TOPOLOGY MAY VARY BASED UPON FIELD CONDITIONS 2. CONTROLS ROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY RUSSELL SIGLER INC CONTROLS GROUP SEQUENCE OF OPERATION CHILLED WATER SYSTEM - RUN CONDITIONS: THE EQUIPMENT WILL RUN ACCORDING TO THE FOLLOWING USER SELECTABLE MODES: ·OFF: THE EQUIPMENT WILL NOT RUN AND ALL OUTPUTS WILL REMAIN IN THEIR OFF POSITION. ·REMOTE OR MANUAL START/STOP: THE EQUIPMENT WILL RUN WHENEVER THE "REMOTE" BINARY INPUT OR "MANUAL" START/STOP IS ENABLED. ·OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE: THE EQUIPMENT WILL RUN WHENEVER THE OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE IS GREATER THAN ITS USER DEFINABLE SETPOINT (ADJ.) ·SCHEDULE: THE EQUIPMENT WILL RUN WHENEVER SCHEDULED. ·COOLING REQUESTS & OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE: O THE EQUIPMENT WILL RUN WHENEVER A DEFINABLE NUMBER OF CHILLED WATER COILS NEED COOLING; AND THE OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE IS GREATER THAN ITS USER DEFINABLE SETPOINT (ADJ.). O OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE AND SCHEDULE OR MANUAL START/STOP: THE EQUIPMENT WILL RUN WHENEVER THE OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE ITS USER DEFINABLE SETPOINT (ADJ.) AND WHENEVER IT IS SCHEDULED. BOTH CONDITIONS MUST BE TRUE FOR THE UNIT TO RUN. THE EQUIPMENT WILL ALSO RUN IF THE "REMOTE" BINARY INPUT OR "MANUAL" START/STOP IS ENABLED. POWER-UP START-UP DELAY: THERE WILL BE A 60 SECOND (ADJ.) DELAY IN ENABLING THE EQUIPMENT ON INITIAL START-UP OR AFTER A POWER LOSS. FREEZE PROTECTION: THE CHILLED WATER PUMPS WILL ALSO RUN FOR FREEZE PROTECTION WHENEVER OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE IS LESS THAN 38 °F (ADJ.). CHILLED WATER PUMPS - LEAD/STANDBY OPERATION: ONE OF THE TWO CHILLED WATER PUMPS WILL RUN ANYTIME A CHILLER IS CALLED TO RUN. THE LEAD PUMP WILL START PRIOR TO THE CHILLER BEING ENABLED AND WILL STOP ONLY AFTER THE CHILLER IS DISABLED. THE PUMPS WILL THEREFORE HAVE: ·A USER ADJUSTABLE DELAY ON START. ·AND A USER ADJUSTABLE DELAY ON STOP. THE DELAY TIMES WILL BE SET APPROPRIATELY TO ALLOW FOR ORDERLY CHILLED WATER SYSTEM START-UP, SHUTDOWN, AND SEQUENCING. THE TWO PUMPS WILL OPERATE IN A LEAD/STANDBY FASHION. ·THE LEAD PUMP WILL RUN FIRST. ·ON FAILURE OF THE LEAD PUMP, THE STANDBY PUMP WILL RUN AND THE LEAD PUMP WILL TURN OFF. THE DESIGNATED LEAD PUMP WILL ROTATE UPON ONE OF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS (USER SELECTABLE): ·MANUALLY THROUGH A SOFTWARE SWITCH ·IF PUMP RUNTIME (ADJ.) IS EXCEEDED ·DAILY ·WEEKLY ·MONTHLY ALARMS WILL BE PROVIDED AS FOLLOWS: ·CHILLED WATER PUMP 1 O FAILURE: COMMANDED ON, BUT THE STATUS IS OFF. O RUNNING IN HAND: COMMANDED OFF, BUT THE STATUS IS ON. O RUNTIME EXCEEDED: STATUS RUNTIME EXCEEDS A USER DEFINABLE LIMIT. O VFD FAULT. ·CHILLED WATER PUMP 2 O FAILURE: COMMANDED ON, BUT THE STATUS IS OFF. O RUNNING IN HAND: COMMANDED OFF, BUT THE STATUS IS ON. O RUNTIME EXCEEDED: STATUS RUNTIME EXCEEDS A USER DEFINABLE LIMIT. O VFD FAULT. CHILLED WATER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE CONTROL: THE CONTROLLER WILL MEASURE CHILLED WATER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE AND MODULATE THE CHILLED WATER PUMP VFD TO MAINTAIN THE CHILLED WATER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT. THE FOLLOWING SETPOINTS ARE RECOMMENDED VALUES. ALL SETPOINTS WILL BE FIELD ADJUSTED DURING THE COMMISSIONING PERIOD TO MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF ACTUAL FIELD CONDITIONS. THE CONTROLLER WILL MODULATE CHILLED WATER PUMP SPEEDS TO MAINTAIN A CHILLED WATER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE OF 10 PSID (ADJ.). THE VFDS MINIMUM SPEED WILL NOT DROP BELOW 20% (ADJ.). ALARMS WILL BE PROVIDED AS FOLLOWS: ·HIGH CHILLED WATER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE: IF THE CHILLED WATER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE IS 25% (ADJ.) GREATER THAN SETPOINT. ·LOW CHILLED WATER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE: IF THE CHILLED WATER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE IS 25% (ADJ.) LESS THAN SETPOINT. CHILLED WATER BYPASS VALVE -VARIABLE PRIMARY FLOW CONTROL: THE CONTROLLER WILL MEASURE SYSTEM CHILLED WATER FLOW AND MODULATE THE CHILLED WATER BYPASS VALVE OPEN TO MAINTAIN THE SYSTEM CHILLED WATER FLOW MINIMUM SETPOINT OF 45 GPM (ADJ.) FOR SINGLE CHILLER OPERATION AND 90 GPM (ADJ.) FOR DUAL CHILLER OPERATION. ONCE THE MINIMUM FLOW SETPOINT IS EXCEEDED BY 10% THE BYPASS SHOULD BE FULLY CLOSED. ALARMS WILL BE PROVIDED AS FOLLOWS: ·LOW CHILLED WATER FLOW: IF THE CHILLED WATER FLOW IS 25% (ADJ.) LESS THAN SETPOINT. CHILLERS - LEAD/LAG OPERATION: THE TWO CHILLERS WILL OPERATE IN A LEAD/LAG FASHION. THE FOLLOWING SETPOINTS ARE RECOMMENDED VALUES. ALL SETPOINTS WILL BE FIELD ADJUSTED DURING THE COMMISSIONING PERIOD TO MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF ACTUAL FIELD CONDITIONS. THE CHILLERS WILL BE STAGED AS FOLLOWS: ·THE LEAD CHILLER WILL RUN FIRST. ·ON FAILURE OF THE LEAD CHILLER, THE LAG PUMP WILL RUN AND THE LEAD PUMP WILL TURN OFF. ·THE LAG CHILLER WILL STAGE ON WHEN THE CHILLER DEMAND LOAD REACHES 85% (ADJ.) OF THE LEAD CHILLER CAPACITY FOR 10 MINUTES (ADJ.) OR IF THE MAIN CHILLED WATER SUPPLY TEMPERATURE RISES 2°F (ADJ.) ABOVE SETPOINT FOR 5 MINUTES (ADJ.). THE LEAD AND LAG CHILLERS WILL RUN IN UNISON MAINTAIN CHILLED WATER SUPPLY TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. ·THE LAG CHILLER WILL STAGE OFF WHEN THE CHILLER DEMAND LOAD FOR BOTH CHILLERS REACHES 30% (ADJ.) OF CHILLER CAPACITY FOR 10 MINUTES (ADJ.) OR IF THE MAIN CHILLED WATER SUPPLY TEMPERATURE DROPS 2°F (ADJ.) BELOW SETPOINT FOR 5 MINUTES (ADJ.). THE LEAD CHILLER WILL CONTINUE TO RUN TO MAINTAIN CHILLED WATER SUPPLY TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. TO PREVENT SHORT CYCLING, THERE WILL BE A USER DEFINABLE DELAY (ADJ.) BETWEEN STAGING UP OR DOWN, UNLESS SHUTDOWN ON SAFETIES OR FAILURE. EACH CHILLER WILL RUN SUBJECT TO ITS OWN INTERNAL SAFETIES AND CONTROLS. THE DESIGNATED LEAD PUMP WILL ROTATE UPON ONE OF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS (USER SELECTABLE): ·MANUALLY THROUGH A SOFTWARE SWITCH ·IF PUMP RUNTIME (ADJ.) IS EXCEEDED ·DAILY ·WEEKLY ·MONTHLY ALARMS WILL BE PROVIDED AS FOLLOWS: ·CHILLER 1 O FAILURE: COMMANDED ON, BUT THE STATUS IS OFF. O RUNNING IN HAND: COMMANDED OFF, BUT THE STATUS IS ON. O RUNTIME EXCEEDED: STATUS RUNTIME EXCEEDS A USER DEFINABLE LIMIT. ·CHILLER 2 O FAILURE: COMMANDED ON, BUT THE STATUS IS OFF. O RUNNING IN HAND: COMMANDED OFF, BUT THE STATUS IS ON. O RUNTIME EXCEEDED: STATUS RUNTIME EXCEEDS A USER DEFINABLE LIMIT. ·LEAD CHILLER FAILURE: THE LEAD CHILLER IS IN FAILURE AND THE LAG CHILLER IS ON. ·HIGH MAIN CHILLED WATER SUPPLY TEMP: IF THE MAIN CHILLED WATER SUPPLY TEMPERATURE IS GREATER THAN 65 °F (ADJ.). ·LOW MAIN CHILLED WATER SUPPLY TEMP: IF THE MAIN CHILLED WATER SUPPLY TEMPERATURE IS LESS THAN 38 °F (ADJ.). CHILLER ISOLATION VALVES: THE CHILLER ISOLATION VALVE WILL OPEN ANYTIME THE CHILLER IS CALLED TO RUN AND SHALL CLOSE ONLY AFTER THE CHILLER IS DISABLED. THE CHILLER ISOLATION VALVE WILL THEREFORE HAVE: ·A USER ADJUSTABLE DELAY FOR THE CHILLER UPON ENABLE. ·AND A USER ADJUSTABLE DELAY ON CLOSE. THE DELAY TIMES SHALL BE SET APPROPRIATELY TO ALLOW FOR ORDERLY CHILLED WATER SYSTEM START-UP, SHUTDOWN, AND SEQUENCING. ALARMS WILL BE PROVIDED AS FOLLOWS: ·CHILLER 1 ISOLATION VALVE O FAILURE: COMMANDED OPEN, BUT THE STATUS IS CLOSED. O OPEN IN HAND: COMMANDED CLOSED, BUT THE STATUS IS OPEN. ·CHILLER 2 ISOLATION VALVE O FAILURE: COMMANDED OPEN, BUT THE STATUS IS CLOSED. O OPEN IN HAND: COMMANDED CLOSED, BUT THE STATUS IS OPEN. 2NO SCALESEQUENCE OF OPERATION RJ SS DS POLICE AND FIRE HQ - CHILLER REPLACEMENT DR A F T I M P R O V E M E N T P L A N S - C I T Y O F C A R L S B A D - P O L I C E A N D F I R E H Q - C H I L L E R R E P L A C E M E N T 2560 ORION WAY, CARLSBAD, CA 92010 1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130 IRVINE, CA. 92606 TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800 IDS IDS GROUP Project # 22X005.08 50% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS06/21/24 -- 90% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS07/23/24 -- PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/02/24 -- No. 30841 R EM S AT TE ET ER SIG ER PD L O A C N F H O C A AL I F C ANRI OEFOISS N ER EN I G E LAN I DAR R E N B. S M I T H Exp. 12/31/26 PLAN CHECK CORRECTIONS04/01/25 1 CONTROLS RISER DIAGRAM AND SEQUENCE OF OPERATION M-602 ~ G .s= u I 0 I ~ "tJ C C -~ 0 a. "tJ C -" w -;: C u CXJ a .,; g ~ "tJ ~ C .s= '.!), "' "' ~ ~ ~ 0 "' ~ "tJ ~ C .s= '.!), 1ii "- I (/) 0 ~ ~ <O I ::; ..; [ C ...J C .s= "' ti (/) "tJ t:"':"""""""' ______ _ i JDJIO~rloIBiT ·a c= ~ .s= Jl l', a, DIAL BEFORE YOU DIG TWO WORKING DAYS BEFORE YOU DIG TOLL FREE 1-800-227-2600 A PUBLIC SERVICE BY UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERT ('( I ,__ ___ --- 0 * * 7 _) B B B B / / / / / / 9 , J l I I I I I l I ! ) ~=t=j====---===+=+=t==t~fSHml CITY OF CARLSBAD ~ t"l-==t=jt=======-----====t==+==l==i=~ ;::~~9 ~~~~P~U~BL::IC::::::::W:::O::::R:::KS::::::D:::E:::PA~R~TM~E~NT!::::=!JLE._j~~ 2::::! I-I IMPROVEMENT PLANS FOR: /'I, ~==~E~~t====================~===E==l===t=~ fAAPFPPiR(Ro~VEEDD~: ~JO~HN~M~A~AS~~~==============;:===::! I-HOFF RCE 61909 EXP. 9/30/25 PUBLIC WORKS MANAGER CITY OF CARLSBAD DATE DA TE INITIAL ENGINEER OF WORK REVISION DESCRIPTION DATE INITIAL OTHER APPROVAL DA TE INITIAL CITY APPROVAL DWN BY: ---I PROJECT NO. RCVHWKDD BY: __ _ BY: . 1NO SCALECHILLED WATER SYSTEM P&ID - EXISTING / DEMOLITION KEYNOTES: DRAIN PI AAV DRAIN CHWR CHWS AHU-1 CHW COIL TT FC ZT AAV DRAIN DCW WM PRV DRAIN DRAIN PI FILLQUICK PRV FQ RPB 1" CW VFD PI FS TIT FLEX CP TIT FLEX DIDO AO PULSE MA K E U P W A T E R CO N S U M P T I O N CH - 1 A L A R M CH - 1 T E M P . S E T P O I N T CH - 1 S T A R T / S T O P NE T W O R K C O N . DO CH W P - 2 S T A R T / S T O P XC SC AO PH W P - 2 S P E E D SI G N A L 460V/3p PDT AI CH W D I F P R E S S U R E AHU-2 TT FC ZT CHW COIL 1 CH (D) CHILLER FC ZT AI VA L V E S I G N A L VA L V E P O S I T I O N AO RS485 BACNET MS/TP FIT AI CH W W A T E R F L O W MM VFD XC SC460V/3p DO CH W P - 1 S T A R T / S T O P AO PH W P - 1 S P E E D SI G N A L P 2 P 1 4" 3" 3" 2-1/2" 2-1/2" EXTERNAL CONTROLLER TIT TIT AI CH W R T E M P . AI CH W S T E M P . 4" 4" ET 1 AS 1 4" 4" 3" 4" 6.3 GAL AHU-3 TT FC ZT CHW COIL 1" 1" 1-1/2" 3"4" 4" 1-1/2" CPF 1 DRAIN PI AAV DRAIN CHWR CHWS AHU-1 CHW COIL TT FC ZT AAV DRAIN DCW WM PRV DRAIN DRAIN PI FILLQUICK PRV FQ RPB 1" CW VFD PI FS TIT TIT PULSE MA K E U P W A T E R CO N S U M P T I O N NE T W O R K C O N . DO CH W P - 2 S T A R T / S T O P XC SC AO PH W P - 2 S P E E D SI G N A L 460V/3p PDT AI CH W D I F P R E S S U R E AHU-2 TT FC ZT CHW COIL FC ZT AI VA L V E S I G N A L VA L V E P O S I T I O N AO RS485 BACNET MS/TP 5 FIT AI CH W W A T E R F L O W MM VFD XC SC460V/3p DO CH W P - 1 S T A R T / S T O P AO PH W P - 1 S P E E D SI G N A L P 2 P 1 4"CHWS 3" 3" 2-1/2" 2-1/2" 22 1EXTERNAL CONTROLLER 6 TIT TIT AI CH W R T E M P . AI CH W S T E M P . 4 4 4" 4" 3 7 ET 1 AS 1 99 5 5 4" 4"CHWR 3" 4" 6.3 GAL AHU-3 TT FC ZT CHW COIL 1" 1" 2 1-1/2" 3"4" 4" 1-1/2" CPF 1 2NO SCALECHILLED WATER SYSTEM P&ID - NEW 3 4 2 1 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 222 4 1 5 4 3 9 55 68 6 9 7 DEMOLISH AND REMOVE (E) CARRIER i VU COMPATIBLE CONTROLLER (E) 2-WAY VALVE CONTROLLED FROM AHU CONTROLLER (E) SETRA 230 0-100 PSID, 3 VALVE MANIFOLD, 4-20 mA, CALIBRATION CERTIFICATE AH5. CONNECT LOW PRESSURE TO UPSTREAM SIDE OF PUMP. BI-DIRECTIONAL ± 25 PSID. (E) TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER NEMA 4. 4.20 mA, PROBE LENGTH TO CENTER OF PIPE. STAINLESS STEEL WELL WITH 2" EXTENSION FOR INSULATION. (E) NETWORK CONNECTION (E) SENSORS TO BE REPLACED. (E) ONICON F 4600 INLINE FLOW METER. 4", 1.5 PSIG @ 110 GPM. 0.5 GPM MINIMUM FLOW. FLANGE CONNECTION. 4.20 mA. USED FOR BYPASS VALVE CONTROL AND ENERGY TRENDING (E) FLOW SWITCH TO BE REMOVED. (E) VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE PROVIDED BY PUMP MANUFACTURER ORDER WITH BACnet MS/TP NETWORK PROTOCOL DEMOLISH AND REMOVE (E) CHILLER. KEYNOTES: (N) CARRIER i VU COMPATIBLE CONTROL PANEL. CONTROL PANEL SHALL CONFORM TO UL 508A STANDARDS. (E) 2-WAY VALVE CONTROLLED FROM AHU CONTROLLER (E) SETRA 230 0-100 PSID, 3 VALVE MANIFOLD, 4-20 mA, CALIBRATION CERTIFICATE AH5. CONNECT LOW PRESSURE TO UPSTREAM SIDE OF PUMP. BI-DIRECTIONAL ± 25 PSID. (E) TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER NEMA 4. 4.20 mA, PROBE LENGTH TO CENTER OF PIPE. STAINLESS STEEL WELL WITH 2" EXTENSION FOR INSULATION. (E) NETWORK CONNECTION NEW SENSORS . (E) ONICON F 4600 INLINE FLOW METER. 4", 1.5 PSIG @ 110 GPM. 0.5 GPM MINIMUM FLOW. FLANGE CONNECTION. 4.20 mA. USED FOR BYPASS VALVE CONTROL AND ENERGY TRENDING TRANSMITTER WITH LOCAL DISPLAY. (E) VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE PROVIDED BY PUMP MANUFACTURER ORDER WITH BACnet MS/TP NETWORK PROTOCOL 3" BUTTERFLY ISOLATION VALVE WITH ACTUATOR. 10 10 1A CH POC POD POD POC FLEX FLEX 4" 4" 3" C H W S 3"CHWS 3" CHWR 24 VAC AI CH W S T E M P . AI CH W R T E M P . PDT 1B CH FLEX FLEX PDT TITTIT FS AI CH - 1 B C H W S T E M P . AIDIAIAI CH - 1 B C H W D I F P R E S S U R E 3" C H W S 3" C H W R 3" C H W R 10 1010 119 GPM119 GPM 88 88 240 GPM MAX. 44 GPM MIN. 45 G P M M A X . S I N G L E C H I L L E R 90 G P M M A X . D U A L C H I L L E R S DI CH - 1 B S T A T U S CH - 1 B I S O P O S AO 6 AO CH - 1 A C H W S T S E T P O I N T DI CH - 1 A A L A R M CH - 1 A S / S DO CH - 1 A C H W S T E M P . CH - 1 A C H W D I F P R E S S U R E CH - 1 A S T A T U S AO CH - 1 B C H W S T S E T P O I N T DI CH - 1 B A L A R M CH - 1 B S / S DO CH - 1 B I S O F B AI CH - 1 A I S O P O S AO CH - 1 A I S O F B AI RJ SS DS POLICE AND FIRE HQ - CHILLER REPLACEMENT DR A F T I M P R O V E M E N T P L A N S - C I T Y O F C A R L S B A D - P O L I C E A N D F I R E H Q - C H I L L E R R E P L A C E M E N T 2560 ORION WAY, CARLSBAD, CA 92010 1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130 IRVINE, CA. 92606 TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800 IDS IDS GROUP Project # 22X005.08 50% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS06/21/24 -- 90% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS07/23/24 -- PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/02/24 -- No. 30841 R EM S AT TE ET ER SIG ER PD L O A C N F H O C A AL I F C ANRI OEFOISS N ER EN I G E LAN I DAR R E N B. S M I T H Exp. 12/31/26 PLAN CHECK CORRECTIONS04/01/25 1 CHILLED WATER SYSTEM P&ID M-603 "' ~ ,, e -C 0 ~ co I ~ CX) 0 ~ ~ "' ~ .s:: u m "' §, 0 < u "' ~ ij ~ u 0 a. m "' ~ m .s:: u 0 I ~ ,, C 0 -~ 0 a. ,, 0 -" w -;: 0 u CX) 0 .,; g ~ ,, ~ 0 .s:: '.!), "' "' ~ ~ ~ 0 "' ~ ,, ~ 0 .s:: '.!), 1ii "-I (/) 0 ~ ;;] co I "' ..; [ 0 ...J 0 .s:: "' ~ ·a .s:: DIAL Jl BEFORE l'. YOU DIG a, I I I I I I I I L 7 I I \ I I I~ \ I µ.t::::==::::1..1::::::==:::L. \ l 00 b?O 0 e TWO WORKING DAYS BEFORE YOU DIG " TOLL FREE 1-800-227-2600 :/! A PUBLIC SERVICE BY ff. UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERT 1 L 7 e T I I I /----,a~ ~r 0 T I I I I 0 0 0 0 e l oe-------I ~ ~ ~ 1 ( ) - -_J 0 e I QI 0 __________ _J I ◊ ◊ Pt l oe-------I ~o~-~, s;) __ _J e 0 I QI 0 __________ _J 0 ◊ 0 0 T 0 T co co 0 0 0 ◊ 0 0 l l 0 l ◊ l l ◊ l = 0 0 l l 0 0 l l ◊ ◊ l l l l 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ◊ ◊ ◊ ◊ ◊ ◊ ◊ ◊ ◊ ◊ fSHml CITY OF CARLSBAD ~ 1---+---+--------------+---+---+---+----1 ~ PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT L..E_j l---+---+--------------+---+---+---+----1 1---+---+--------------+---+---+---+----t IMPRO\IEMENT PLANS FOR: 1---4-< ........ +--------------+---+---+---+----1 APPROVED: JOHN MAASHOFF RCE 61909 EXP. 9/30/25 1---+---+--------------+---+---+---+----1 PUBLIC WORKS MANAGER CITY OF CARLSBAD DATE t---=-:-=--+=,=.,,.-+--------------+---+---+---+----t DWN BY: __ DATE INITIAL >--DA_TE~I_Nlll_AL---+-_DA_TE~I_Nlll_A__,L CHKD BY: __ ENGINEER OF WORK REVISION DESCRIPTION OTHER APPROVAL CITY APPROVAL RVWD BY: PROJECT NO. II DRAWING NO.I POLICE AND FIRE HQ - CHILLER REPLACEMENT DR A F T I M P R O V E M E N T P L A N S - C I T Y O F C A R L S B A D - P O L I C E A N D F I R E H Q - C H I L L E R R E P L A C E M E N T 2560 ORION WAY, CARLSBAD, CA 92010 1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130 IRVINE, CA. 92606 TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800 IDS IDS GROUP Project # 22X005.08 50% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS06/21/24 -- 90% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS07/23/24 -- PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/02/24 -- No. 30841 R EM S AT TE ET ER SIG ER PD L O A C N F H O C A AL I F C ANRI OEFOISS N ER EN I G E LAN I DAR R E N B. S M I T H Exp. 12/31/26 PLAN CHECK CORRECTIONS04/01/25 1 TITLE 24 DOCUMENTATION M-701 CONDUIT CAP-OFF MIN. 3/4"C- HOMERUN TO PANELBOARD RACEWAY TURNED DOWN 1/2"C, 2#12 AND 1#12 GND - TYPICAL U.N.O. RACEWAY TURNED UP 1/2"C, 2#12 AND 1#12 GND - TYPICAL U.N.O. RACEWAY CONCEALED IN WALL OR CEILING 1/2"C, 2#12 AND 1#12 GND - TYPICAL U.N.O. CONDUIT ROUTED EXPOSED A AMPERE AB ABOVE BACK SPLASH ADA AMERICANS W/DISABILITIES ACT A.F.F. ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AF ARC FAULT AHU AIR HANDLING UNIT AMP FUSE AFG ABOVE FINISHED GRADE AIC AMPERE INTERRUPTING CAPACITY AL ALUMINUM ARCH'L ARCHITECTURAL AS AMP SWITCH ATS AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH AWG AMERICAN WIRE GAUGE BC BARE COPPER BLDG BUILDING BLDG C CONDUIT CAB CABINET CAT CATALOG/CATEGORY CB CIRCUIT BREAKER CKT CIRCUIT CLG CEILING CO CONDUIT ONLY CC COMM COMMUNICATION CU COPPER CTEP CALIFORNIA TYPE EVALUATION PROGRAM DEMO,(D) DEMOLITION/DEMOLISH DISC. DISCONNECT DN DOWN DWG DRAWING EA EACH EF EXHAUST FAN EG EQUIPMENT GROUND ELEC. ELECTRICAL ELEV ELEVATOR EM EMERGENCY EMT ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING EQUIP EQUIPMENT (E) EXISTING TO REMAIN EVCS ELECTRICAL VEHICLE CHARGING STATION FACP FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL FBO FURNISHED BY OTHERS FF FINISHED FLOOR FIXT FIXTURE FLA FULL LOAD AMPS FLEX FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT (STEEL) FT FEET OR FOOT GFA GROUND FAULT ALARM GFCI GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER GND GROUND HP HORSEPOWER HVAC HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING IBC INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE IMC INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT IN INCH(ES) IRC INTERNATIONAL RESIDENTIAL CODE ISC SHORT CIRCUIT AMPERES JB, J-BOX JUNCTION BOX KCMIL& MCM THOUSAND CIRCULAR MILS KVA KILOVOLT AMPERE KW KILOWATT LCP LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL LRA LOCK RUNNING AMPS LOTO LOCK OUT TAG OUT LTG LIGHTING MAX. MAXIMUM MCA MAXIMUM CIRCUIT AMP MCB MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER MCC MOTOR CONTROL CENTER MECH. MECHANICAL MIN. MINIMUM MLO MAIN LUGS ONLY MTD MOUNTED NC NORMALLY CLOSED NEC NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE NECA NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR'S ASSOCIATION NEMA NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION NEUT NEUTRAL NFC NATIONAL FIRE CODE NF NON-FUSIBLE NFPA NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NIC NOT IN CONTRACT NO NORMALLY OPEN NTS NOT TO SCALE OCPD OVER CURRENT PROTECTION DEVICE P POLE PH PHASE PNL PANEL PV PHOTOVOLTAIC PVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PWR POWER QTY QUANTITY (R) RELOCATE RECEP RECEPTACLE REQ'D REQUIRED RGS RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL RSC RIGID STEEL CONDUIT SCHED SCHEDULE SECT SECTION SP SINGLE POLE SN SOLID NEUTRAL SPEC SPECIFICATION SW SWITCH SWBD SWITCHBOARD SWGR SWITCH GEAR SYS SYSTEM TEMP TEMPORARY TELE TELEPHONE T-STAT THERMOSTAT TTB TELEPHONE TERMINAL BACKBOARD TTC TELEPHONE TERMINAL CABINET TYP. TYPICAL UBC UNIFORM BUILDING CODE UL UNDERWRITERS LABORATORY U.N.O. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE V VOLT OR VOLTAGE VA VOLT AMPERE VD VOLTAGE DROP VFD VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE VP VAPOR PROOF W WATT, WIRE WP WEATHERPROOF, NEMA 3R XFMR TRANSFORMER - A - - B - - C - - D - - E - - F - - G - - H - - I - - J - - K - - L - - M - - N - - O - - P - - Q - - R - - S - - T - - U - - V - - W - - X - WIRING MISCELLANEOUS SIGNALPOWER 2022 CALIFORNIA ELECTRICAL CODE (CEC) PART 3, TITLE 24, CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS (CCR) 2020 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NEC) NFPA 70 2022 CALIFORNIA ADMINISTRATIVE CODE (CAC) PART 1, TITLE 24, CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS (CCR) 2022 CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE (CBC) PART 2, TITLE 24, CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS (CCR) 2022 CALIFORNIA MECHANICAL CODE (CMC) PART 4, TITLE 24, CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS (CCR) 2022 CALIFORNIA PLUMBING CODE (CPC) PART 5, TITLE 24, CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS (CCR) 2022 CALIFORNIA ENERGY CODE (CEC) PART 6, TITLE 24, CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS (CCR) 2022 CALIFORNIA FIRE CODE (CFC) PART 9, TITLE 24, CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS (CCR) 2022 CALIFORNIA GREEN BUILDING CODE (CGBC) PART 11, TITLE 24, CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS (CCR) APPLICABLE CODES REVISION SYMBOL FEEDER SCHEDULED EQUIPMENT KEYNOTE PLAN SYMBOL # SHEET UNIT # 1 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT TAG DIAGRAM TAG 1 1 CONDUIT ROUTED UNDER FLOOR/UNDERGROUND DEMOLITION KEYNOTE PLAN SYMBOL ELECTRICAL SYMBOL LIST STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS PUSH BUTTON CONTROL STATION DUAL CHANNEL RACEWAY WITH COVER, DUPLEX AND DATA RECEPTACLES AS NOTED JUNCTION BOX JUNCTION BOX - FLUSH FLOOR MOUNT AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH NON-FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH (WITH SEALTITE RACEWAY CONNECTION FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH MOTOR CONTROLLER OR STARTER METER SERVICE PEDESTAL SWITCHBOARD OR DISTRIBUTION BOARD LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARD - FLUSH MOUNT LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARD - SURFACE MOUNT PULLBOX - EXTERIOR OR INTERIOR AS INDICATED POWER FLOOR OUTLET WITH DEVICE AS INDICATED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE NEMA 5-20R, 15A, 125V - FLUSH MOUNT CEILING DEDICATED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, NEMA 5-20R, 20A, 125V RATED MOUNT CENTER OF OUTLET AT 18" AFF UON DUPLEX RECEPTACLE / HALF-SWITCHED "C" INDICATES CONTROLLED VIA MOTION SENSOR/TIME CLOCK, MOUNT CENTER OF OUTLET AT 18" AFF UON QUADPLEX RECEPTACLE, NEMA 5-15R, 20A, 125V, MOUNT CENTER OF OUTLET AT 18" AFF UON DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, NEMA 5-15R, 20A, 125V RATED, MOUNT CENTER OF OUTLET AT 18" AFF UON SINGLE RECEPTACLE, NEMA 5-15R, 20A, 125V, MOUNT CENTER OF OUTLET AT 18" AFF UON PB J J ATS F J JUNCTION BOX - WALL MOUNT SPECIAL RECEPTACLE 480V RATED w/GROUND AS NOTED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE NEMA 5-20R, 15A, 125V GFCI TYPE, MOUNTED 6" ABOVE COUNTER SPLASH C VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVEVFD COMBINATION USB/DUPLEX NEMA 5-15R, 125V, MOUNTED 18" AFF UON DUPLEX RECEPTACLE NEMA 5-15R 125V RATED MOUNTED 6" ABOVE COUNTER SPLASH M SINGLE MANUAL MOTOR RATED SWITCH (1HP) COMBINATION USB/DUPLEX NEMA 5-15R, 125V, MOUNTED 6" ABOVE COUNTER DEDICATED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, NEMA 5-20R, 20A, 125V, GFCI TYPE, RATED MOUNT CENTER OF OUTLET AT 18" AFF UONG DUPLEX RECEPTACLE NEMA 5-20R, 15A, 125V - FLUSH MOUNT CEILING COMBINATION POWER / DATA FLOOR OUTLET NOTED SUITABLE FOR CONCRETE FLOORS NOTED SUITABLE FOR TYPE 5 CONSTRUCTION UTILITY COMPANY SERVICE CABLE TERMINATION CIRCUIT BREAKER FUSE FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH SWITCH TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSOR CURRENT TRANSFORMER (CT) POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER GROUNDING ELECTRODE UTILITY COMPANY POWER METER MOTOR (# INDICATED HP) GENERATOR MOTOR GROUND FAULT PROTECTION DEVICE TRANSFER SWITCH ATS OR MTS AND NUMBER OF POLES AS NOTED ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKER RELAY CONTACTOR (NORMALLY OPEN) CONTACTOR (NORMALLY CLOSED) CONTROL SWITCH PUSH BUTTON R N EM L M G TVSS # M CUSTOMER OWNED POWER METER T AC-1 GFPD THERMOSTAT OUTLET AT +54" (HVAC UNIT DESIGNATION) F05 1. SYMBOLS ARE NOT NECESSARILY USED IN THIS PROJECT. 2. IT IS THE INTENT OF THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS TO ESTABLISH A STANDARD OF QUALITY. THE ENGINEER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO ALLOW OTHER METHODS AND MATERIALS NOT REFLECTED HEREIN. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO REQUEST THE ENGINEER WAIVE THE STANDARDS TO ALLOW ALTERNATE MEANS AND METHODS PRIOR TO BEGINNING THE PROJECT. CONTRACT DOCUMENT REVISIONS TO ACCOMMODATE INSTALLED CONDITIONS, WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVAL, WILL RESULT IN ADDITIONAL DESIGN CHARGES TO THE CONTRACTOR. 3. ELECTRICAL WORK SHALL BE PERFORMED IN A WORKMANLIKE MANNER IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NECA INSTALLATION STANDARDS TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER. 4. WORK, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT SHALL CONFORM TO THE CURRENTLY ACCEPTED EDITION OF APPLICABLE NATIONAL, STATE AND CITY CODES AND ORDINANCES. 5. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM COMPONENTS SHALL BE LISTED OR LABELED BY UL OR OTHER RECOGNIZED TESTING FACILITY AS ALLOWED BY AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. 6. WHERE AN APPARENT DISCREPANCY EXISTS BETWEEN THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE GENERAL NOTES AND INFORMATION PORTRAYED IN THE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INCLUDE IN HIS BID THE COST OF THE GREATER QUALITY OR QUANTITY. 7. CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT JOB SITE PRIOR TO BID AND VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS. CONTRACTOR SHALL INCLUDE IN BASE BID COSTS REQUIRED FOR PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS. 8. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY, WITH OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE PRIOR TO SUBMITTING BID, ALLOWABLE WORKING HOURS, EMPLOYEE PARKING AREAS, MATERIAL DELIVERY, STORAGE REQUIREMENTS, DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL OF CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS, AS WELL AS DAILY CLEAN UP REQUIREMENTS. INCLUDE COSTS IN BID FOR DUST BARRIERS, DUMPSTERS ETC. AS REQUIRED FOR THE DURATION OF THE PROJECT. PERFORM WORK AS DIRECTED BY OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE AND ARCHITECT. 9. ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SHALL BE TESTED FOR PROPER OPERATION. IF TESTS SHOW THAT WORK IS DEFECTIVE, CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE NECESSARY CORRECTIONS. 10. CONTRACTOR SHALL GUARANTEE WORK AGAINST DEFECTS IN MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP WHICH MAY OCCUR UNDER NORMAL USE FOR A PERIOD OF ONE YEAR AFTER OWNER'S ACCEPTANCE. DEFECTS SHALL BE PROMPTLY CORRECTED BY CONTRACTOR WITHOUT ADDITIONAL CHARGE TO OWNER. 11. DO NOT SCALE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION OF ALL DEVICES, JUNCTION BOXES, LIGHTING FIXTURES, WITH ARCHITECTURAL AND INTERIOR DESIGN DRAWINGS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THE EXACT LOCATION OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND OTHER EQUIPMENT REQUIRING ELECTRICAL CONNECTION PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. EVERY OUTLET HEIGHT SHALL BE VERIFIED ON EACH WALL WITH THE INTERIOR PLANNING AND DESIGN DRAWINGS. COORDINATE WITH CABINET SHOP DRAWINGS TO ENSURE PROPER HEIGHT AND LOCATION WITH RESPECT TO MILLWORK, EQUIPMENT. 12. RACEWAY SYSTEMS ARE SHOWN DIAGRAMMATICALLY. ACTUAL LOCATION AND ROUTING SHALL BE DETERMINED BY CONTRACTOR TO SUIT FIELD CONDITIONS. 13. MINIMUM RACEWAY SIZE SHALL BE 3/4"". MINIMUM HOMERUN SIZE SHALL BE 3/4". MINIMUM CONDUCTOR SIZE SHALL BE #12 AWG U.N.O. TYPICAL. POWER RELATED CONDUITS SHALL HAVE A CODE SIZE GROUND WIRE INSTALLED IN EACH RUN. 14. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE RACEWAY SYSTEMS INDICATED ON THE DRAWING PER CEC REQUIREMENTS AND GENERAL NOTES. ANY DEVIATION FROM THE WIRING METHODS INDICATED SHALL BE ALLOWED ONLY BY SPECIFIC WRITTEN APPROVAL FROM EITHER THE ARCHITECT, ENGINEER OR OWNER. CONTRACTOR'S BID SHALL INCLUDE COSTS FOR RACEWAY SYSTEMS AS SPECIFIED UNLESS SPECIFIC WRITTEN APPROVAL FOR AN ALTERNATIVE WIRING METHOD IS OBTAINED FROM EITHER THE ARCHITECT, ENGINEER OR OWNER AND IS SUBMITTED AS PART OF CONTRACTOR'S FORMAL BID PROPOSAL. 15. PRIOR TO INSTALLATION, CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW THE COMPLETE SET OF CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FOR CONFLICTS WITH OTHER TRADES. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO COORDINATE WORK WITH OTHER TRADES TO AVOID CONFLICT DURING INSTALLATION. CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE MINOR ADJUSTMENTS IN EQUIPMENT LOCATION AND ROUTING AS NECESSARY. 16. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO PROPERLY CUT AND PATCH EXISTING CONSTRUCTION AS REQUIRED TO INSTALL NEW ELECTRICAL WORK PATCHING SHALL BE OF THE SAME MATERIALS, WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH AS THE EXISTING WORK AND SHALL ACCURATELY MATCH SURROUNDING WORK TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE ARCHITECT. 17. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SHALL HAVE SUFFICIENT GUTTER SPACE AND LUGS TO ACCOMMODATE QUANTITY AND SIZE OF CONDUCTORS REQUIRED. CONTRACTORS SHALL PROVIDE EQUIPMENT WITH OVERSIZED ENCLOSURES WHERE REQUIRED. 18. NEW PANELBOARDS SHALL HAVE LOCKING DOORS AND BE KEYED THE SAME U.N.O. 19. PROVIDE TYPE WRITTEN UPDATED PANEL DIRECTORY TO BE MOUNTED ON INSIDE OF PANEL DOOR COVERS. DIRECTORY SHALL REFLECT ADDITIONS OR MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING PANELS AND SHALL REFLECT ACTUAL "AS-BUILT" CONDITIONS. 20. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS TO ARCHITECT FOR REVIEW OF THE FOLLOWING EQUIPMENT: a. ELECTRICAL SWITCHGEAR: SWITCHBOARDS, WITH PANELS, MOTOR CONTROL b. OVERCURRENT DEVICES: CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND FUSES INCLUDING c. TIME/CURRENT TRIP CURVES. d. LIGHT FIXTURES, WIRE DEVICES, CONDUIT & CONDUCTORS. e. MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND ASSOCIATED STARTERS. 34. EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL TERMINATIONS TO UNDERGO A TORQUE TEST. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED TORQUE DOCUMENTATION AND TOOLS TO PERFORM TORQUE TEST. 35. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE MOUNTED ON A 6" HIGH CONCRETE PAD. 36. ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE LABELED, LISTED, OR CERTIFIED BY A NATIONALLY RECOGNIZED TESTING LABORATORY ACCREDITED BY THE UNITED STATES OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY HEALTH ADMINISTRATION. 37. CONTRACTOR SHALL REPAIR ANY DAMAGED IRRIGATION LINES TO MATCH EXISTING CONDITIONS. FIELD VERIFY AND COORDINATE PRIOR ANY EXCAVATION WORK. GENERAL ELECTRICAL NOTES E-001 GENERAL NOTES, SYMBOL LIST & SHEET INDEX POLICE AND FIRE HQ - CHILLER REPLACEMENT DR A F T I M P R O V E M E N T P L A N S - C I T Y O F C A R L S B A D - P O L I C E A N D F I R E H Q - C H I L L E R R E P L A C E M E N T 2560 ORION WAY, CARLSBAD, CA 92010 1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130 IRVINE, CA. 92606 TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800 IDS IDS GROUP Project # 22X005.08 50% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS06/21/24 -- 90% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS07/23/24 -- PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/02/24 -- PLAN CHECK CORRECTIONS04/01/25 1 SHEET INDEX Sheet Number Sheet Title E-001 GENERAL NOTES, SYMBOL LIST & SHEET INDEX E-002 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM - DEMOLITION & NEW E-100 OVERALL ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN E-200 ENLARGED ELECTRICAL PLAN - DEMOLITION & NEW E-300 ELECTRICAL DETAILS SPECIAL RECEPTACLE. 250V RATED WITH GROUND AS NOTED COMBINATION POWER / DATA FLOOR OUTLET AS INDICATED 1. WORK INCLUDED: LABOR, MATERIAL, APPLIANCES, TOOLS, EQUIPMENT, FACILITIES, TRANSPORTATION AND SERVICES NECESSARY AND INCIDENTAL TO PERFORMING OPERATIONS IN CONNECTION WITH THE DEMOLITION, DISPOSAL, TRANSPORTATION AND RECONNECTION OF EXISTING REMAINING EQUIPMENT/DEVICES. COMPLETE AS INDICATED IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AS SPECIFIED HEREIN. 2. THE FOLLOWING IS INTENDED TO COVER THE COMPLETE DEMOLITION, DISPOSAL, TRANSPORTATION AND RECONNECTION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. THE OMISSION OF EXPRESSED REFERENCE TO ANY ITEM OF LABOR OR MATERIAL FOR THE PROPER EXECUTION OF THE WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH PRESENT PRACTICE OF THE TRADE SHALL NOT RELIEVE THE CONTRACTOR FROM PROVIDING SUCH ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MATERIALS. 3. REFER TO THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR ADDITIONAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS WHICH AFFECT THE PROPER EXECUTION OF THIS WORK. DIAGRAMS AND SYMBOLS SHOWING ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC ONLY. WIRING DIAGRAMS DO NOT NECESSARILY SHOW THE EXACT PHYSICAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE EQUIPMENT. 4. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VISIT THE SITE AND BECOME THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR WITH FEATURES OF THE BUILDING AND SITE WHICH MAY AFFECT THE PROPER PERFORMANCE OF THIS WORK. 5. PORTIONS OF THESE PLANS HAVE BEEN DERIVED FROM INFORMATION TAKEN FROM ORIGINAL ELECTRICAL PLANS. THE INTENT OF THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS IS TO PROVIDE FOR THE REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, LIGHTING FIXTURES, DEVICES, OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT, WIRING AS DEFINED HEREIN AND AS INDICATED ELSEWHERE IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. 6. IT IS UNDERSTOOD AND AGREED THAT THIS CONTRACT DOES NOT CONTEMPLATE THE HANDLING OF ASBESTOS, PCB OR ANY HAZARDOUS WASTE MATERIAL. IF ASBESTOS, PCB OR ANY HAZARDOUS WASTE MATERIAL IS ENCOUNTERED, NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY. DO NOT DISTURB, HANDLE OR ATTEMPT TO REMOVE. 7. THE SCOPE OF DEMOLITION WORK SHALL INCLUDE, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO THE FOLLOWING: a. SUBMIT PROPOSED OUTAGE SCHEDULE. PROVIDE A SEQUENCE OF DEMOLITION TO INSURE THE UNINTERRUPTED USE OF OCCUPIED PORTIONS OF THE FACILITY WHICH ARE TO REMAIN OPERATIONAL DURING THE CONTRACT PERIOD. b. SYSTEM OUTAGES SHALL BE PERMITTED ONLY AT TIMES APPROVED BY OWNER, IN WRITING. WORK WHICH COULD RESULT IN A ACCIDENTAL OUTAGE (BEYOND BRANCH CIRCUITS) SHALL BE PERFORMED WITH THE OWNER'S MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL ADVISED OF SUCH WORK. c. COORDINATE WITH THE OWNER AND DESIGNATE A PORTION OF THE FACILITY FOR SAFELY STORING REMOVED AND SALVAGED MATERIALS. d. REMOVED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT WHICH IN THE OPINION OF THE OWNER/ARCHITECT ARE SALVAGEABLE, SHALL REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF THE OWNER. DELIVER SUCH SALVAGED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ON PREMISES AS DIRECTED, NEATLY PILE OR STORE THEM AND PROTECT FROM DAMAGE. DO NOT REUSE MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INDICATED ON PLANS OR SPECIFIED. REMOVE FROM PREMISES AND DISPOSE OF MATERIALS CONSIDERED BY THE OWNER/ARCHITECT TO BE SCRAP. e. PERFORM CUTTING AND PATCHING OF THE CONSTRUCTION WORK WHICH MAY BE REQUIRED FOR THE PROPER DEMOLITION OF THE ELECTRICAL WORK. PATCHING SHALL BE OF THE SAME MATERIAL, THICKNESS, WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH AS EXISTING AND ACCURATELY MATCH SURROUNDING WORK TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE ARCHITECT. CUTTING OF STRUCTURAL MEMBERS SHALL NOT BE DONE WITHOUT FIRST OBTAINING APPROVAL FROM THE ARCHITECT AND/OR STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OF RECORD. f. PATCHING OF OPENINGS IN RATED PARTITIONS, BARRIERS, FLOORS, CEILINGS SHALL BE EXECUTED USING UL AND NFPA FIRE STOP MATERIAL EQUAL TO THE FIRE RATINGS OF THE PENETRATED SURFACE. g. WHERE MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT HAVE BEEN REMOVED AND NOT REPLACED THE EXPOSED SURFACE SHALL BE PAINTED TO MATCH SURROUNDING SURFACE COLOR. h. AS INDICATED, DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, DISCONNECT SWITCHES, RECEPTACLES, MOUNTING HARDWARE AND ASSOCIATED RACEWAYS, CONDUCTORS AND OUTLET BOXES. WHERE OUTLET BOXES ARE FLUSH AND CONDUITS ARE CONCEALED IN EXISTING REMAINING WALLS, REMOVE WIRING AND ABANDON CONDUIT IN PLACE. i. PANEL BATTERIES ARE FUNCTIONAL AND FULLY CHARGED 8. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY EXISTING EQUIPMENT, DEVICES, AND/OR CIRCUITS THAT ARE REMAINING. CIRCUITS SHALL BE RECONNECTED TO NEW OR EXISTING POWER DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT AND FUNCTION IN THE MANNER THEY WERE ORIGINALLY DESIGNED. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT, DEVICES, OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT, WIRING AS REQUIRED TO RESTORE CONTINUITY TO THESE CIRCUITS. 9. WHERE FIXTURES, EQUIPMENT, DEVICES ARE SPECIFIED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR REMOVAL, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS/CABLING BACK TO THE NEAREST REMAINING JUNCTION BOX AND/OR POINT OF TERMINATION. 10. RELOCATE EXISTING CONDUITS AND/OR CONDUCTORS/CABLING ROUTING THROUGH AREAS WHERE NEW PLENUMS AND/OR ROOF OPENINGS ARE SPECIFIED. 11. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL CONDUIT, CONDUCTORS, CABLING, OUTLET BOXES AS REQUIRED FOR THE RELOCATION OF ELECTRICAL APPARATUS. 12. RELOCATION AND/OR REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT, DEVICES, OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT, WIRING MAY AFFECT THE OPERATION OF EXISTING, REMAINING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT/DEVICES. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ADDITIONAL MATERIALS AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN AND/OR RESTORE CONTINUITY OF SERVICE TO EXISTING, REMAINING ELECTRICAL/DEVICES. 13. PROVIDE NECESSARY DEMOLITION TO REMOVE EXISTING UNUSED RACEWAYS, CONDUCTORS, CABLING, OUTLET BOXES, RECEPTACLES, SWITCHES, EQUIPMENT. 14. WHERE IT IS NOT FEASIBLE TO REMOVE UNUSED FLUSH MOUNTED OUTLET BOXES AND CONCEALED RACEWAYS IN EXISTING, REMAINING WALLS AND/OR CEILINGS REMOVE WIRING AND PROVIDE BLANK COVER PLATES OVER OUTLET BOXES. 15. COVER UNUSED AND/OR ABANDONED OUTLETS WITH BLANK COVER PLATES. 16. SEAL ABANDONED FLOOR PENETRATIONS IN A MANNER ACCEPTABLE TO THE ARCHITECT. 17. DISCONNECT ABANDONED CIRCUITS AT EXISTING PANELBOARDS AND REMOVE WIRE TO LAST REMAINING DEVICE. LABEL ABANDONED CIRCUIT BREAKERS "SPARE". 18. PROVIDE NEW TYPEWRITTEN DIRECTORIES FOR RE-USED PANELBOARDS THAT ARE ALTERED AS PART OF THE DEMOLITION. 19. EXISTING CIRCUITS THAT ARE REMOVED AND ARE NOT RE-USED SHALL BE IDENTIFIED ON THE PANEL DIRECTORY AS 'SPARE'. 20. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE CIRCUIT NUMBERS AND LOADS FOR ALL EXISTING REMAINING EQUIPMENT. PRIOR TO RECONNECTION, REASSIGN CIRCUITS AS REQUIRED. TO BALANCE LOADS EVENLY ACROSS PHASES WHEN RECONNECTED. PROVIDE COMPLETE 'AS-BUILT' DRAWINGS. DEMOLITION GENERAL NOTES AL BK SC SCOPE OF WORK PROJECT WILL REPLACE AN EXISTING MOTOR CONTROL CENTER WITH A NEW POWER PANEL. EXISTING FEEDER WILL BE SPLICED IN A NEW PULL AND AND EXTENDED TO NEW ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. PROVIDE UPDATED CIRCUITRY FOR TWO NEW 50 TON OUTDOOR CHILLERS. INTERCEPT EXISTING CHILLER PUMPS AND EXTEND TO NEW POWER PANEL. UPDATE BUILDING GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM TO ACCOMMODATED NEW POWER PANEL. REPLACE CHILLER OUTDOOR RECEPTACLE WITH A NEW GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTING TYPE. 12 DIAL BEFORE YOU DIG TWO WORKING DAYS BEFORE YOU DIG TOLL FREE 1-800-227-2600 A PUBLIC SERVICE BY UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERT -e =@ fl 0 f() [Q] ■ ■ ■ ■ I □ -----~ □ □ II""] H_o] QJ [2<J - -----4'o-- ----l I<~ ---=-- __c-0 0--- I -FA- 0_) rr _L 0 ;(Ji □ ;(Ji I M -H- -+- • • • • • • • • • _L 0 1-"'d □ e 8 0 0 6 CJ DATE INlllAL ENGINEER OF WORK DATE INITIAL DATE INITIAL REVISION DESCRIPTION OTHER APPROVAL CITY APPROVAL APPROVED: JOHN MAASHOFF RCE 61909 EXP. 9/30/25 PUBLIC WORKS MANAGER DWN BY: ---I 1 CHKD BY: ---I RVWD BY: _ CITY OF CARLSBAD PROJECT NO. DATE II DRAWING NO.I POLICE AND FIRE HQ - CHILLER REPLACEMENT DR A F T I M P R O V E M E N T P L A N S - C I T Y O F C A R L S B A D - P O L I C E A N D F I R E H Q - C H I L L E R R E P L A C E M E N T 2560 ORION WAY, CARLSBAD, CA 92010 1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130 IRVINE, CA. 92606 TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800 IDS IDS GROUP Project # 22X005.08 50% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS06/21/24 -- 90% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS07/23/24 -- PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/02/24 -- PLAN CHECK CORRECTIONS04/01/25 1 DEMOLITION KEYNOTES SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM NOTES 1. OVER-CURRENT DEVICES IN AN INDIVIDUAL PIECE OF EQUIPMENT SHALL HAVE AN A.I.C RATING EQUAL TO THE OVERALL RATING OF THE EQUIPMENT. SERIES RATING IS PROHIBITED. 2. TERMINATIONS AND ENCLOSURES SHALL BE RATED FOR USE WITH 75 DEGREE CELSIUS CONDUCTORS. 3. SERVICE ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT METERED SWITCHBOARDS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A MAIN OVER-CURRENT DEVICE AND CONTINUOUS BUSSING IN ACCORDANCE WITH SDGE STANDARDS. 4. MAIN, FEEDER OR BRANCH CIRCUIT BREAKERS SHALL BE 100% RATED. 5. BUSSING: a. BUSSING SHALL BE TINNED COPPER CLAD CONSTRUCTION. HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL BUSSING SHALL BE FULL CAPACITY IN SWITCHBOARD SECTIONS. b. HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL BUSSING SHALL BE FULL LENGTH. BUSSING SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM WITHSTAND RATING EQUAL TO THE AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT INDICATED, BUT IN NO CASE SHALL THE RATING BE LESS THAN 65,000 AMPS, SYMMETRICAL. 7. UNDERGROUND AND ABOVE GROUND CONDUCTORS IN EXPOSED CONDUIT SHALL BE THWN-2, TEMPERATURE RATING OF 90 DEGREES. 8. PROVIDE EXOTHERMIC WELD CONNECTIONS FOR SERVICE GROUND ELECTRODE CONNECTION IN ACCORDANCE WITH PUBLIC WORK STANDARDS. 9. CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL SERVICE ENTRANCE CONDUITS IN ACCORDANCE WITH UTILITY COMPANY APPROVED PLANS.(E) UTILITY XFMR #1 M (E) COMB. PULL METER SECTION A V AS VS 1600A 3P (E) 350A 3P (E) (E) MAIN SERVICE BOARD "MSDA" 1600A, 480/277V, 3Ø, 4W, 30KAIC (D) (D) MCC 600A, 480V, 3Ø, 3W (D) CHILLER F(D) E-002 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM - DEMOLITION & NEW 1NO SCALEPARTIAL SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM - DEMOLITION 60A 3P (E)100A 3P (E)400A 3P (E)50A 3P (E)175A 3P (E)50A 3P (E) 2NO SCALEPARTIAL SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM - NEW (D)(D) (E) SDGE PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMER M (E) SDGE WALL MOUNTED METER SECTION A V AS VS 1600A 3P (E) 350A 3P (E) (E) MAIN SWITCHBOARD "MSDA" 1600A, 480/277V, 3Ø, 4W, 30KAIC 60A 3P (E)100A 3P (E)400A 3P (E)50A 3P (E)175A 3P (E)50A 3P (E) TO (E) LOAD (E) CHWP-1 (E) HHWP-2 F(N) TO (E) LOAD TO (E) LOAD TO (E) LOAD TO (E) LOADTO (E) LOAD TO (E) LOAD TO (E) LOAD TO (E) LOAD TO (E) LOAD REFER TO 2/E-002 (D) (D) (D) 15A 3P (N)15A 3P (N)200A 3P (N) (N) (N) (N) F06F05F04 (N) (N) (N) F(N) 200A 3P (N) (N) F03 1 E-300 400A BUS (N) POWER PANEL 'PP' 400A, 480V, 3Ø, 3W, 30KAIC F02 (N) PULL BOX 'PP' NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE, SCREW COVER TYPE 30" X 30" X 8" (FEEDER SPLICE) SCOPE OF WORK 4 E-300 400A 3P (N) MCB G REMOVE FEEDER AND RACEWAY BACK TO NEW JUNCTION/PULL BOX AND SAFE OFF. REFER TO REMODEL SLD FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND REQUIREMENTS. 1 1 (D) AL BK SC CH 1A (N)CH 1B 3 E-300 F(N)F(N)200AS 175AF 3P 200AS 175AF 3P VFD VFD(E)(E) VFD VFD(E)(E) 30AS 15AF 3P 30AS 15AF 3P PB(D) (E) CHWP-1 (E) HHWP-2 (E) 3 1/2" C. WITH (3) #500 MCM & (1) #2 GND.F01 (E) XFMR ETB 120/208V~277/480V 9KVA PANEL EPB (E) (E) PANEL EL1A (E) (E) 175A 3P (E)150A 3P (E) (E) (E) LOAD 60A 3P (E) (E) LOAD 70A 3P (E) (E) LOAD N EM L (E)(E)(E) (E) (E) 400A 3P (E) 450A 3P (E) (E) G (E) 30A 3P (E) (E) DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARD "EDBA" 400A, 480/277V, 3Ø, 4W (E) ATS1 600A, 4P, 480V, 3Ø (E) 400A BUS (E) (E) 300KW GENERATOR 277/480V, 3Ø, 4W (E) DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARD "EDBB" 600A, 480/277V, 3Ø, 4W (E) 600A BUS HACR HACR HACR HACR (E)TO ATS#2 (1))#6 THWN-3/4"C. (E)GROUND BAR (E) UFER 108.8 MCA 108.8 MCA 13 A104 5 A103 1 A303 1 (E ) A102 4 A102 3 50'-0" 20 ' - 0 " 20'-0" 15 0 ' - 0 " R1 5 ' - 0 " R1 5 ' - 0 " A102 1 A102 2 (E)MAIN SWITCHBOARD 'MSDA' LOCATED IN MAIN ELEC. ROOM (E)GEN SET (E)POLICE & FIRE SAFETY BUILDING (E) F01 (E) POLICE AND FIRE HQ - CHILLER REPLACEMENT DR A F T I M P R O V E M E N T P L A N S - C I T Y O F C A R L S B A D - P O L I C E A N D F I R E H Q - C H I L L E R R E P L A C E M E N T 2560 ORION WAY, CARLSBAD, CA 92010 1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130 IRVINE, CA. 92606 TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800 IDS IDS GROUP Project # 22X005.08 50% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS06/21/24 -- 90% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS07/23/24 -- PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/02/24 -- PLAN CHECK CORRECTIONS04/01/25 1 GENERAL NOTES 11" = 30'-0"OVERALL ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN E-100 OVERALL ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN TRUE NORTH N 1 E-200 2 E-200 AL BK SC 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ALL ELECTRICAL OUTAGES TWO WEEKS PRIOR TO DE-ENERGIZING THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. 2. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING PORTABLE TEMPORARY POWER TO SUSTAIN BUILDING OPERATIONS. FIELD COORDINATE STAGING REQUIRED EQUIPMENT AND POWER OUTAGES. 3. THE EXISTING UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL CONDUIT AND FEEDER SHALL REMAIN AND PROTECTED IN PLACE. 14 DIAL BEFORE YOU DIG TWO WORKING DAYS BEFORE YOU DIG TOLL FREE 1-800-227-2600 A PUBLIC SERVICE BY UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERT 0 + D □ ~ 0 ID rnrnrn D ' □ -. '/ {· -' ofESS; 'i,\\ M. C --z. "' No. E22808 rn ~ m cP l~=~==t=============~==f=~==t==l ~I SH~EE~T I ~C~IT~Y=O~F~CA~R~LS~B~A=D ~I ~I f-PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT 2 lt.lPROVEMENT PLANS FOR: APPROVED: JOHN MAASHOFF RCE 61909 EXP. 9/30/25 PUBLIC WORKS MANAGER CITY OF CARLSBAD DATE DATE INITIAL ENGINEER OF WORK REVISION DESCRIPTION DATE INITIAL DATE INITIAL DWN BY: CHKD BY: RVWD BY: PROJECT NO. OlHER APPROVAL CITY APPROVAL II DRA\\1NG NO.I T WP (E ) O L D G E N . S E T T(E) XFMR 'ETB' (E) PANEL 'EPB' (D) CHILLER DISCONNECT SWITCH T (D) 1KVA 480-208/120V CP (D) (D) (E) METER VFD VFD VFD VFD (E)(E) (D) MCC PB (D) J (E) 1 (D) (D) 2 (E) 3 (E) TEMP. POWER DISC. SW. (E) TEMP. POWER PULL BOX INCOMING FROM 'MSDA' (E)(E) (E) (E) (D) (E) GENERATOR ROOM (E) BOILER ROOM (E) TRASH (E) CHILLER YARD (E) GENERATOR SET 4 6 E-200TYP 5 E-200 4 E-200 (D) PULLBOX (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) PANEL 'EPB' (E) BOILER 'B-1' SM (E) GROUND ROD (E) ELECTRICAL TRANSFORMER (E) IRRIGATION CONTROLLER T WP (E ) O L D G E N . S E T T (E) PANEL 'EPB' VFD VFD WP (N) CP (E) IRRIGATION CONTROLLER (E) METER VFD VFD (E) (E) (N) POWER PANEL 'PP' INCOMING FROM 'MSDA' F01 1 CPCP J F05 F06 (E) TEMP. POWER PULL BOX (E) TEMP. POWER DISC. SW. 1 E-300 2 E-300 CH 1B CH 1A (E) ELECTRICAL TRANSFORMER (E) GENERATOR ROOM (E) BOILER ROOM (E) TRASH (E) CHILLER YARD (E) GENERATOR SET 3 E-200 (N) PULL BOX 'PP'30x30x8"D PULL BOX 1 E-300 F F FF F03 F04 J SM (E) F02 (N)(E) (E) (E) (E) (N)(N) J F04 6 E-200 TYP (E) XFMR 'ETB' (E) GROUND BAR 4 E-300 (N) 5 E-300 GROUND BOND WATER PIPE 6 E-300 6 E-300 POLICE AND FIRE HQ - CHILLER REPLACEMENT DR A F T I M P R O V E M E N T P L A N S - C I T Y O F C A R L S B A D - P O L I C E A N D F I R E H Q - C H I L L E R R E P L A C E M E N T 2560 ORION WAY, CARLSBAD, CA 92010 1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130 IRVINE, CA. 92606 TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800 IDS IDS GROUP Project # 22X005.08 50% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS06/21/24 -- 90% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS07/23/24 -- PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/02/24 -- PLAN CHECK CORRECTIONS04/01/25 1 GENERAL NOTES 11/8" = 1'-0"ENLARGED ELECTRICAL PLAN - DEMOLITION 21/8" = 1'-0"ENLARGED ELECTRICAL PLAN - NEW TRUE NORTH N TRUE NORTH N E-200 ENLARGED ELECTRICAL PLAN - DEMOLITION & NEW DEMOLITION KEYNOTES DISCONNECT & REMOVE EXISTING RECEPTACLE. EXISTING BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING TO BE JUNCTIONED / SAFED OFF FOR FUTURE CONNECTION TO NEW RECEPTACLE. REFER TO REMODEL PLAN FOR REQUIREMENTS. DISCONNECT, REMOVE, TRANSPORT AND DISPOSE EXISTING MOTOR CONTROL. CONTRACTOR SHALL PRESERVE EXISTING CONDUCTORS FOR EXISTING CIRCUIT TO REMAIN. DISCONNECT, REMOVE, TRANSPORT, AND DISPOSE EXISTING OUTDOOR DISCONNECT SWITCH AND ASSOCIATED CONDUIT TO EXISTING CHILLER. DISCONNECT EXISTING MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND PREPARE TO CIRCUIT TO BE ROUTED TO NEW DISTRIBUTION BOARD. 1 KEYNOTE 1 PROVIDE A NEW GFCI, 125V, 20A WEATHERPROOF RECEPTACLE WITH AN 'IN-USE' COVER. 2 3 4 1. REFER TO GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES ON SHEET E-001 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 2. REFER TO FEEDER SCHEDULE ON E-002 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 3. REFER TO SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM SHEET E-002 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. AL BK SC 3NO SCALEPHOTO DETAIL 4NO SCALEPHOTO DETAIL 5NO SCALEPHOTO DETAIL 6NO SCALEPHOTO DETAIL DISCONNECT, REMOVE, TRANSPORT, AND DISPOSE EXISTING OUTDOOR DISCONNECT SWITCH AND ASSOCIATED CONDUIT TO EXISTING CHILLER. DISCONNECT, REMOVE, TRANSPORT AND DISPOSE EXISTING MOTOR CONTROL CONTROL. CONTRACTOR SHALL PRESERVE EXISTING CONDUCTORS FOR EXISTING CIRCUIT TO REMAIN. EXISTING VFD'S TO REMAIN AND BE DISCONNECTED AND RECIRCUITED TO NEW DISCONNECT SWICTH (TYP). NEW POWER PANEL 'PP' LOCATION 15 POLICE AND FIRE HQ - CHILLER REPLACEMENT DR A F T I M P R O V E M E N T P L A N S - C I T Y O F C A R L S B A D - P O L I C E A N D F I R E H Q - C H I L L E R R E P L A C E M E N T 2560 ORION WAY, CARLSBAD, CA 92010 1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130 IRVINE, CA. 92606 TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800 IDS IDS GROUP Project # 22X005.08 50% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS06/21/24 -- 90% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS07/23/24 -- PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/02/24 -- PLAN CHECK CORRECTIONS04/01/25 1 E-300 ELECTRICAL DETAILS 2NO SCALECONDUIT SUPPORT TO CMU WALL DETAIL 3NO SCALECOLD SHRINK SPLICE KIT DETAIL 4NO SCALEGROUNDING DETAIL 1NO SCALEEQUIPMENT MOUNTING DTAIL 5NO SCALEGROUND WELL DETAIL 6NO SCALECONDUIT PENETRATION DETAIL 6' - 0 " MA X . 3" 4" MIN. ELECTRICAL PANEL MAX WT. = 175 LBS. MAX SIZE = 72"H X 20"W X 5.75D P-1000 ASTM A1011 UNISTRUT FULL PANEL LENGTH TOP AND BOTTOM 12"Ø HILTI KB-TZ2 (ICC ESR 1917) @ 16" O.C., TYP. (E) BLOCK WALL FINISHED FLOOR METALLIC COLD WATER SERVICE ENTRANCE (PROVIDE SIMILAR CONNECTION TO FIRE PROTECTION WATER SERVICE ENTRANCE), (CEC 252-52(A)(1) (IF AVAILABLE) BOND WITHIN 5 FEET OF COLD WATER PIPE EXITING UNDERGROUND ENTRANCE. (1) #3/0 THWN GREEN GROUND TO POWER PANEL 'PP' (E) BUILDING STRUCTURAL STEEL CEC 250-52(A)(2) NOTES: 1. ALL GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTORS SHALL SIZED PER CEC TABLE 250.66 2. ALL GROUNDING SHALL BE INSTALLED WITH ACCORDANCE WITH CEC ARTICLE 250 OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE. (E) CADWELD SUPPLY SIDE CADWELD AL BK SC 2 E-200 A PLAN VIEW OF GROUND CLAMP TO RIDGED CONDUIT PROVIDE ADDITIONAL GROUND RODS IN CONCRETE BOXES 72" O.C. AS NEEDED TO MEET 25 OHM REQUIREMENT EXTENDING SAME CONDUIT AND WIRE AND USING SAME CLAMPS. 25 OHM RESISTANCE TO GROUND MAXIMUM SHALL BE PROVIDED USING SAME GROUND RODS ONLY. PRIOR TO THE CONNECTION OF CONDUIT AT ROD OR PANEL OR OTHER GROUND PATH. 8" DIA. CLAY SOIL PIPE FILL WITH BENDENITE CLAY 3/4"P.V.C-1 3/0 COPPER GND TO (E) GROUND BAR CAST IRON LOCKING COVER 3/4" X 10'-0" COPPER CLAD GROUND ROD COPPER ALLOY GROUND CLAMPS BY BURNDY OR EQUALGROUND ROD RIGID CONDUIT GROUND CONNECTOR BURNDY TYPE GKP COPPER WIRE SIZE AS REQUIRED GROUND CONNECTOR CONDUIT TO ROD WITH FEED THRU PRE CAST CONCRETE BOX (19" X 14") BROOKS #3600 OR EQUAL GROUND CLAMP, SEE DETAIL A FINISH GRADE CAST IRON FRAME CAST IRON BOLT DOWN COVER GROUND WIRE A 2' - 0 " M I N . 4 E-300 2" EMT SHALL BE SECURELY FASTENED IN PLACE AT LEAST EVERY 3 m (10 FT). TABLE 344.30(B) (2) SUPPORT FOR RIGID METAL CONDUIT CONDUIT SIZE MAXIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN RIGID METAL CONDUIT SUPPORTS METRIC DESIGNER TRADE SIZE METERS FEET 16-21 1/2-3/4 3 10 27 1 3.7 12 35-41 1 1/4 - 1 1/2 4.3 14 53-63 2 - 2 1/2 4.9 16 CONDUIT TRADE SIZE SIZE AND EMBEDMENT OF ANCHOR BOLTS 12"C - 2 12"C 14" X 1 38 3"C - 4"C 516" X 1 12" HEX NUT & BOLT UNISTRUT P1000 S.S. ASTM A101 (E) 8" CMU BLOCK WALL (E) GROUND BAR (E) (N) 3/4"x10' GROUND ROD (CEC 250-52(A)(5)) CADWELL TO (E) TRANSFORMER 'ETB' (E) (1) #6 THWN-3/4"C (1 ) # 3 / 0 - 3 / 4 " C (1 ) # 3 / 0 - 3 / 4 " C (N) #3/0 THWN GREEN GROUND TO POWER PANEL 'PP' THIS MATERIAL WAS EXTRACTED AND DRAWN BY 3M FIRE PROTECTION PRODUCTS FROM THE 2007 EDITION OF THE UL FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY. System No. W-L-1001 F Ratings – 1, 2, 3 and 4 Hr (See Items 2 and 3) T Ratings – 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4 Hr (See Item 3) L Rating At Ambient – less than 1 CFM/sq ft L Rating At 400 F – less than 1 CFM/sq ft OMEGA FLEX INC TITEFLEX CORP A BUNDY CO WARD MFG INC +When copper pipe is used, T Rating is 0 hr. 3M COMPANY – CP 25WB+ caulk or FB-3000 WT sealant, Max Pipe or Conduit F Rating T Rating Diam In. (mm)Hr Hr 1 (25)1 or 2 0+, 1 or 2 1 (25)3 or 4 3 or 4 4 (102)1 or 2 0 6 (152)3 or 4 0 12 (305)1 or 2 0 1. WALL ASSEMBLY – THE 1, 2, 3 OR 4 HR FIRE-RATED GYPSUM WALLBOARD/STUD WALL ASSEMBLY SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF THE MATERIALS AND IN THE MANNER DESCRIBED IN THE INDIVIDUAL U300 OR U400 SERIES WALL OR PARTITION DESIGNS IN THE UL FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY AND SHALL INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING CONSTRUCTION FEATURES: A. STUDS – WALL FRAMING MAY CONSIST OF EITHER WOOD STUDS (MAX 2 HR FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES) OR STEEL CHANNEL STUDS. WOOD STUDS TO CONSIST OF NOM 2 BY 4 IN. (51 BY 102 MM) LUMBER SPACED 16 IN. (406 MM) OC WITH NOM 2 BY 4 IN. (51 BY 102 MM) LUMBER END PLATES AND CROSS BRACES. STEEL STUDS TO BE MIN 3-5/8 IN. (92 MM) WIDE BY 1-3/8 IN. (35 MM) DEEP CHANNELS SPACED MAX 24 IN. (610 MM) OC. B. GYPSUM BOARD* – NOM 1/2 OR 5/8 IN. (13 OR 16 MM) THICK, 4 FT. (122 CM) WIDE WITH SQUARE OR TAPERED EDGES. THE GYPSUM WALLBOARD TYPE, THICKNESS, NUMBER OF LAYERS, FASTENER TYPE AND SHEET ORIENTATION SHALL BE AS SPECIFIED IN THE INDIVIDUAL U300 OR U400 SERIES DESIGN IN THE UL FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY. MAX DIAM OF OPENING IS 26 IN. (660 MM). 2. THROUGH PENETRANT – ONE METALLIC PIPE, CONDUIT OR TUBING INSTALLED EITHER CONCENTRICALLY OR ECCENTRICALLY WITHIN THE FIRESTOP SYSTEM. THE ANNULAR SPACE BETWEEN PIPE, CONDUIT OR TUBING AND PERIPHERY OF OPENING SHALL BE MIN OF 0 IN. (0 MM) (POINT CONTACT) TO MAX 2 IN. (51 MM). PIPE, CONDUIT OR TUBING TO BE RIGIDLY SUPPORTED ON BOTH SIDES OF WALL ASSEMBLY. THE FOLLOWING TYPES AND SIZES OF METALLIC PIPES, CONDUITS OR TUBING MAY BE USED: A. Steel Pipe – Nom 24 in. (610 mm) diam (or smaller) Schedule 10 (or heavier) steel pipe. B. Iron Pipe – Nom 24 in. (610 mm) diam (or smaller) service weight (or heavier) cast iron soil pipe, nom 12 in. (305 mm) diam (or smaller) or Class 50 (or heavier) ductile iron pressure pipe. C. Conduit – Nom 6 in. (152 mm) diam (or smaller) steel conduit or nom 4 in. (102 mm) diam (or smaller) steel electrical metallic tubing D. Copper Tubing – Nom 6 in. (152 mm) diam (or smaller) Type L (or heavier) copper tubing E. Copper Pipe – Nom 6 in. (152 mm) diam (or smaller) Regular (or heavier) copper pipe. F. Through Penetrating Product* – Flexible Metal Piping – The following types of steel flexible metal gas piping may be used: 1. NOM 2 IN. (51 MM) DIAM (OR SMALLER) STEEL FLEXIBLE METAL GAS PIPING. PLASTIC COVERING ON PIPING MAY OR MAY NOT BE REMOVED ON BOTH SIDES OF FLOOR OR WALL ASSEMBLY. 2. NOM 1 IN. (25 MM) DIAM (OR SMALLER) STEEL FLEXIBLE METAL GAS PIPING. PLASTIC COVERING ON PIPING MAY OR MAY NOT BE REMOVED ON BOTH SIDES OF FLOOR OR WALL ASSEMBLY. 3. NOM 1 IN. (25 MM) DIAM (OR SMALLER) STEEL FLEXIBLE METAL GAS PIPING. PLASTIC COVERING ON PIPING MAY OR MAY NOT BE REMOVED ON BOTH SIDES OF FLOOR OR WALL ASSEMBLY. 3. FILL, VOID OR CAVITY MATERIAL* – CAULK OR SEALANT – MIN 5/8. 1-1/4,1-7/8 AND 2-1/2 IN. (16, 32, 48 AND 64 MM) THICKNESS OF CAULK FOR 1, 2, 3 AND 4 HR RATED ASSEMBLIES, RESPECTIVELY, APPLIED WITHIN ANNULUS, FLUSH WITH BOTH SURFACES OF WALL. MIN 1/4 IN. (6 MM) DIAM BEAD OF CAULK APPLIED TO GYPSUM BOARD/PENETRANT INTERFACE AT POINT CONTACT LOCATION ON BOTH SIDES OF WALL. THE HOURLY F RATING OF THE FIRESTOP SYSTEM IS DEPENDENT UPON THE HOURLY FIRE RATING OF THE WALL ASSEMBLY IN WHICH IT IS INSTALLED, AS SHOWN IN THE FOLLOWING TABLE. THE HOURLY T RATING OF THE FIRESTOP SYSTEM IS DEPENDENT UPON THE TYPE OR SIZE OF THE PIPE OR CONDUIT AND THE HOURLY FIRE RATING OF THE WALL ASSEMBLY IN WHICH IT IS INSTALLED, AS TABULATED BELOW: *Bearing the UL Classification Marking This material was extracted and drawn by 3M Fire Protection Products from the 2007 edition of the UL Fire Resistance Directory. 16 DIAL BEFDRE YOU DIG TWO WORKING DAYS BEFORE YOU DIG TOLL FREE 1-800-227-2600 A PUBLIC SERVICE BY UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERT 3 0 1 • .,-----.._ 3 r 0 r 8 8 ,- L )- ( t2:::22::~7t:1 3M™ Cold Shrink Quick Splice Low Voltage QSL V-M Series Data Sheet July 2018 ~ s .... 1ng Maslic Con~tor SealingMaslic ~ 3M"' Quick Splice Low Vottage QSLV-M C1m1;rCorQ Product Series Cable Size Range AWG or kcmil * Cable Insulation 0.0. Range Inches mm Max Connector O.D. Inches mm Max Connector Length Inches mm QSLV-M-8-2/0 8 -2/0 0 20 -0 75 5 -19 0 687 17 25 63 QSLV-M-2-500 2 -500 0.40-1.60 10-41 1.500 38 4.25 108 ~Insulator may be used on cable sizes outside of the recommended range, provided both cables are within the insulation 0 .0. range and the connector meets the dimensional requirements shown above. Description Agency Approvals & Self Certifications 3M™ Cold Shrink Quick Splice Low Voltage QSLV-M are open-ended tubular rubber sleeves with sealing mastic on each end which are factory expanded and assembled onto a unique three-core system. Two cores, one on each end, are removed after the 3M QSLV-M insulator has been centered over an inline connector, allowing the ends of the tube to shrink and form a water-resistant seal. The third, center segment of the core remains inside the cold shrink tube, acting as a support structure. Sizing of the cores and tube, along with the sealing mastic on each end, is designed to accommodate the variance in connectors and connector crimping techniques and final dimensions without degrading the seal and insulating characteristics of the EPDM rubber tube, while making core removal easy. Two diameter sizes will cover a range of 1000 volt or less cable from 8 AWG through 500 kcmil, copper and aluminum conductors with crimped connectors. In aerial applications where intense UV radiation will be common and visual inspection is not possible, it is recommended to overwrap the tubing with Scotch® Super 33+ TM Vinyl Electrical Tape or Scotch® Self-Fusing Silicone Rubber Electrical Tape 70 • Simple hand installation, no tools required • No heat source, eg. heat guns or torches • Accommodates wide range of cable sizes, including street lighting • Excellent wet electrical properties • Good thermal stability during storage and shipping • Seals tight, retains resiliency and pressure, even after years of aging and exposure • Resists acids and alkalies • Water resistant. Meets water seal requirements of ANSI C119.1 RoHS 2011/65/EU "RoHS 2011/65/EU" means that the product or part does not contain any of the substances in excess of the maximum concentration values ("MCVs") in EU Ro HS Directive 2011 /65/EU. The MCVs are by weight in homogeneous materials. This information represents 3M's knowledge and belief, which may be based in whole or in part on information provided by third party suppliers to 3M. 1 of 3 - rESS/ 1" M. C 3NI Y} No. E22808 ~ (t'. ,:J F CA I I I I I I I l-----+---+------------+---+--+---1-----11 SHEET I CITY OF CARLSBAD ~2 PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT ~ ~IM=P=R=o=VE=M=EN~T=P=L=A=Ns==Fo=R=, ============-=====: APPROVED: JOHN MAASHOFF RCE 61909 EXP-9/30/25 PUBUC WORKS MANAGER CITY OF CARLSBAD DATE DATE INITIAL ENGINEER OF WORK REVISION DESCRIPTION DATE INITIAL DATE INITIAL OTHER APPROVAL CITY APPROVAL DWN BY: CHKD BY: __ _ RVWD BY: PROJECT NO. DRAWING NO. APPLICABLE CODES SCOPE OF WORK REPLACE THE EXISTING 99.4 TON AIR-COOLED CHILLER WITH NEW. PROVIDE (N) TRENCH DRAIN FOR CHILLER YARD. SHEET INDEX P-0011 S.No.SHEET TITLE P-201 PLUMBING PLAN NOTES, LEGEND AND ABBREVIATIONS, AND SCHEDULES SHEET NUMBER 2 A. OMISSIONS AND OR CONFLICTS BETWEEN THE VARIOUS ELEMENTS OF THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF AND RESOLVED WITH THE ARCHITECT PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH ANY OF THE AFFECTED WORK. B. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP SHALL CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF CBC AND CPC. C. THE PLUMBING CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS REPRESENT THE INTENT OF PLUMBING AND PIPING SYSTEMS, NOT THE METHOD OF CONSTRUCTION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL LABOR, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES NECESSARY TO ACHIEVE THE FINISHED SYSTEMS. D. FIELD VERIFY AND COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS INSTALLER EXACT ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS OF PLUMBING PRODUCTS REQUIRING POWER. E. ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTIONS SHALL BE MADE BY ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS INSTALLER UNDER PROVISIONS OF DIVISION 26. PROJECT NOTES YB CFH CUBIC FEET PER HOUR YARD BOX HWR (E)W SOV IN YB S OR W S OR W ABBREVIATION DN BEL ABV W/ CLG FLR CONN I.E. AP POC VTR COTG GC CV SOV COYB WCO (E) G G HWR (E) G G FCO HW CD CW CD V SYMBOL DOWN BELOW ABOVE WITH CEILING FLOOR VENT THRU ROOF POINT OF CONNECTION CONNECTION INVERT ELEVATION ACCESS PANEL CLEANOUT TO GRADE WALL CLEANOUT CLEANOUT IN YARDBOX SHUT-OFF VALVE IN YARD BOX CHECK VALVE SHUT-OFF VALVE GAS COCK HOT WATER RETURN GAS (LOW PRESSURE) EXISTING GAS HOT WATER FLOOR CLEANOUT EXISTING SOIL OR WASTE SANITARY VENT COLD WATER CONDENSATE DRAIN SOIL OR WASTE (BELOW GRADE) DESCRIPTION SOIL OR WASTE (ABOVE GRADE) LEGEND (E) CW (E) CW EXISTING COLD WATER (E) HW (E) HW EXISTING HOT WATER (E) HWR (E) HWR EXISTING HOT WATER RETURN (E) CD (E) CD EXISTING CONDENSATE DRAIN (E) V (E) V EXISTING VENT (E) W (E) W EXISTING WASTE POD POINT OF DISCONNECTION UP UP PIPING DOWN DOWN PIPING GPM GALLON PER MINUTE MEP AHJ AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION MECHANICAL ELECTRICAL PLUMBING WHA WATER HAMMER ARESTOR TP TRAP PRIMER DEMO DEMOLITION BV BALL VALVE ESW EMERGENCY SHOWER EYEWASH F F FIRE SPRINKLER LINE 2022 CALIFORNIA HISTORICAL BUILDING CODE, PART 8, CBSC 2022 CALIFORNIA PLUMBING CODE (CPC), PART 5, CBSC 2022 CALIFORNIA MECHANICAL CODE (CMC), PART 4, CBSC 2022 CALIFORNIA ELECTRICAL CODE (CEC), PART 3, CBSC 2022 CALIFORNIA FIRE CODE, PART 9, CBSC 2022 CALIFORNIA ENERGY CODE, PART 6, CBSC 2022 CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE (CBC), PART 2, CBSC 2022 CALIFORNIA BUILDING STANDARDS ADMINISTRATIVE CODE, PART 1, CBSC 2022 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS, PART 12, CBSC 2022 CALIFORNIA GREEN BUILDING CODE. SCHEDULE TRENCH GRATE & FRAME NEENAH MODEL 4996-A1, TYPE M TRENCH FRAME WITH GRATED COVER CAST IRON 12" WIDE x 84 " LONG . POLICE AND FIRE HQ - CHILLER REPLACEMENT DR A F T I M P R O V E M E N T P L A N S - C I T Y O F C A R L S B A D - P O L I C E A N D F I R E H Q - C H I L L E R R E P L A C E M E N T 2560 ORION WAY, CARLSBAD, CA 92010 1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130 IRVINE, CA. 92606 TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800 IDS IDS GROUP Project # 22X005.08 RPM SS DS 50% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS06/21/24 -- 90% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS07/23/24 -- PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/02/24 -- No. 30841 R EM S AT TE ET ER SIG ER PD L O A C N F H O C A AL I F C ANRI OEFOISS N ER EN I G E LAN I DAR R E N B . S M I T H Exp. 12/31/26 PLAN CHECK CORRECTIONS04/01/25 1 NOTES, LEGEND AND ABBREVIATIONS, AND SCHEDULES P-001 ij = _,: u I 0 I ~ ,, C C ~ .2 0 n. ,, C .a 0 8 OJ 0 ~ X "' ~ ,, ~ C g. I !!J 0 "' ~ ~ C _,: ~ ~ J, Cl :::: 0 8 d. .;; [ C ...J - ,:,~"""""""'-------! mo~~IBIR:T ·a c:::I ~ _,: Jl l', "' DIAL BEFORE YOU DIG TWO WORKING DAYS BEFORE YOU DIG il TOLL FREE 1111111111 1-800-227-2600 15 A PUBLIC SERVICE BY ii: UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERT * * ' ~=t=j====---===+=+=t==t~fSHml CITY OF CARLSBAD ~ t"l-==t=jt=======-----====t==+==l==i=~ ;::~~7 ~~~~P~U~BL::IC::::::::W:::O::::R:::KS::::::D:::E:::PA~R~TM~E~NT!::::=!JLE._j~~ 2::::! I-I IMPROVEMENT PLANS FOR: /'I, ~==3E~~t====================~===E==l===t=~ fAAPFPPiR(Ro~VEEDD~: ~JO~HN~M~A~AS~~~==============;:===::! I-HOFF RCE 61909 EXP. 9/30/25 PUBLIC WORKS MANAGER CITY OF CARLSBAD DATE DA TE INITIAL ENGINEER OF WORK REVISION DESCRIPTION DATE INITIAL DA TE INITIAL OTHER APPROVAL CITY APPROVAL DWN BY: ---I PROJECT NO. RCVHWKDD BY: __ _ BY: . 3"W SCHEDULE 40 PVC PIPE BELOW GRADE. FLOOR SAWCUT REFER TO STRUCTURAL DETAIL TRENCH SEE 7 S-501 7'- 0 " 1'-0" CONTRACTOR TO CORE THE CURB AND TERMINATE PIPE AT CENTER OF THE CURB (E) GRADE (E) ELECTRICAL TRANSFORMER (E) GENERATOR ROOM (E) BOILER ROOM (E) TRASH (E) CHILLER YARD (E) GENERATOR SET 2% S L O P E (E) FINISH ASPHALT PAVING (E) CONCRETE GUTTER (E) CURB SLOPE POLICE AND FIRE HQ - CHILLER REPLACEMENT DR A F T I M P R O V E M E N T P L A N S - C I T Y O F C A R L S B A D - P O L I C E A N D F I R E H Q - C H I L L E R R E P L A C E M E N T 2560 ORION WAY, CARLSBAD, CA 92010 1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130 IRVINE, CA. 92606 TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800 IDS IDS GROUP Project # 22X005.08 RPM SS DS 50% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS06/21/24 -- 90% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS07/23/24 -- PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/02/24 -- No. 30841 R EM S AT TE ET ER SIG ER PD L O A C N F H O C A AL I F C ANRI OEFOISS N ER EN I G E LAN I DAR R E N B. S M I T H Exp. 12/31/26 PLAN CHECK CORRECTIONS04/01/25 1 11/4"=1'-0"CHILLER YARD PLUMBING PLAN TRUE NORTHN PLUMBING PLAN P-201 ~ ,, i 'i 0 "' I "l ~ ui 0 0 X "' ;:!, -" E ~ a: ~ Cl ~ ! C G E G u 0 e- "' Ii = _,:: u I 0 I ~ ,, C 0 G .2 0 "-,, 0 -" ~ 1i u CXl 0 ~ X "' ;:!, ,, ~ 0 g, I !'l 0 "' ~ ~ 0 _,:: ~ ~ J, Cl :;:; "' g: "' 0 .:, i 0 ...J -,,~~-------! mo~~IBiT ·a c= ~ _,:: Jl :,:, ID DIAL BEFORE YOU DIG TWO WORKING DAYS BEFORE YOU DIG il TOLL FREE 111111111 1-800-227-2600 1i A PUBLIC SERVICE BY ii: UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERT ,,---_-_-_-_-_JI--------~ -.,____I., 1 It ~)l L. ~j 1~ _.=....:_,j () '-,,_ C't -8 IT 7l ! ., ':' :;c:, ~ " .... b b ~======== _____ __Jb ~------_J ' . I!/ I~ I 11 11 -~ 0 0 ------------ ~ _/ * * - ~=t=j====---===+=+=t==t~ fSHml CITY OF CARLSBAD ~ t"l-==t=jt=======-----====t==+=~==i=~ ;::~~B~~~~P~U~BL::IC::::::::W:::O:::R:::KS::::::D:::E:::PA~R~TM~E~NT!::::=~LE._j~~ 2 ::::! I-I IMPRO'IEMENT PLANS FOR: /'\ ~==~E~~t====================~===E===i===t=~ fAAPFPPiR(Ro~VEEDD~: ~JO~HN~M~A~AS~~~=====:;;::::::=::==:::;:= I-HOFF RCE 61909 EXP. 9/30/25 PUBLIC WORKS MANAGER CllY OF CARLSBAD DATE DA TE INITIAL ENGINEER OF WORK REVISION DESCRIPTION DATE INITIAL DATE INITIAL OlHER APPROVAL CITY APPROVAL DWN BY: ---I PROJECT NO. CHKD BY: __ _ RVWD BY: . GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK TOLERANCE 1. PERMITTED TOLERANCE SHALL BE ACCORDING TO THE CBC. DESIGN CRITERIA DESIGN CONFORMS TO THE 2022 CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE. 1. SEISMIC ANALYSIS: EQUIVALENT LATERAL FORCE PROCEDURE ·SITE CLASS = D - DEFAULT ·SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY = D ·RISK OCCUPANCY CATEGORY = IV ·Ie = 1.5 ·Ss = 0.948 ·S1 = 0.348 ·Fa = 1.2 ·Sds = 0.759 FOR CHILLER UNIT ·Ap = 1.00 ·Rp = 2.50 ·Ω = 2.00 ·Fp = 0.342 2. WIND ANALYSIS: WIND LOADS ARE BASED ON CBC WITH THE FOLLOWING FACTORS: ·EXPOSURE CATEGORY = C ·V = 107 MPH ·Vasd = 82.88 MPH ·KZ = 0.85 ·Kzt = 1.0 ·KE = 1.0 ·RISK CATEGORY IV CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE THE SCOPE OF WORK FOR THIS PROJECT ARE: - REPLACE THE EXISTING CHILLER AND ANCHORAGE - REMOVE AND REPLACE PORTION OF THE EXISTING SLAB ON GRADE AND ADJUST THE SLOPE FOR DRAINAGE NON-SHRINK GROUT 1. NON- SHRINK GROUT SHALL BE SIKA SIKAGROUT 212, OR APPROVED EQUAL. 2.SURFACE PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION SHALL FOLLOW MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS. PROPER SURFACE CLEANING AND MOIST CURING ARE ESSNTIAL. 3. FOR POURABLE GROUT, CONSTRUCT FORMS TO RETAIN GROUT WITHOUT LEAKAGE. FORMS SHALL BE LINED OR COATED WITH BOND-BREAKER FOR EASY REMOVAL. 4. NON-SHRINK GROUT SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF 7,000 PSI AT 28 DAYS. 5. GROUT SHAL BE NON-SHRINK GROUT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.. 6. REPAIR UNUSED CORED OR DRILLED HOLES BY FILLING WITH NON-SHRINK GROUT AT CONCRETE AND MASONRY, FINISH SURFACE TO MATCH THE ADJACENT CONDITION. 1. PORTLAND CEMENT SHALL BE ASTM C150 TYPE V UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 2. ALL CONCRETE SHALL BE NORMAL WEIGHT (145 PCF) HARD ROCK TYPE ASTM C33. 3. CONCRETE SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (f'c) AT 28 DAYS AS FOLLOWS, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED: A. EQUIPMENT PAD FOOTING FOOTING: 4,000 PSI UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. B. SLAB-ON-GRADE: 4,000 PSI UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 4. CONCRETE MIXES SHALL BE DESIGNED BY A QUALIFIED TESTING LABORATORY, BEARING A REGISTERED CALIFORNIA CIVIL ENGINEER'S STAMP, AND REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY THE SEOR PRIOR TO USE. 5. MAXIMUM RATIO OF WATER TO CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS, BY WEIGHT, SHALL BE 0.45 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. USE MINIMUM 6 SACKS OF CEMENT PER CUBIC YARD OF CONCRETE. 6. ALL CONSTRUCTION JOINTS SHALL BE KEYED AND SHALL BE THOROUGHLY CLEANED. SEE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE NOTE 10. 7. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT THE PROPOSED LOCATION OF ALL CONSTRUCTION JOINTS TO THE ENGINEER FOR REVIEW PRIOR PLACING OF CONCRETE. POUR JOINTS SHALL BE LOCATED TO MINIMIZE EFFECTS OF SHRINKAGE AS WELL AS PLACED AT POINTS OF LOW STRESS. REFER TO ACI 318, SEC. 26.5.6. 8. CONCRETE COVERAGE OF REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED: A. CONCRETE CAST AGAINST AND PERMANENTLY EXPOSED TO EARTH: 3" B. CONCRETE EXPOSED TO EARTH OR WEATHER: ·#6 THROUGH #18 REBAR: 2” ·#5 REBAR, W31 OR D31 WIRE, AND SMALLER: 1 1/2" C. CONCRETE NOT EXPOSED TO WEATHER OR IN CONTACT WITH GROUND: ·SLABS, WALLS AND JOISTS (#11 REBAR AND SMALLER): 1" ·BEAMS AND COLUMNS: 1-1/2" D. SLABS-ON-GRADE: MID-DEPTH 9. ALL EXPOSED CONCRETE EDGES SHALL BE FORMED WITH A 3/4" CHAMFER UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 10. ALL NEW CONCRETE PLACED AGAINST HARDENED CONCRETE SHALL BE PREPARED PER THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE: A. ROUGHEN HARDENED SURFACE TO AN AMPLITUDE OF 1/4" WITH BUSH HAMMER, SAND BLASTING, OR OTHER APPROVED METHOD. B. CLEAN SURFACES OF DUST AND DEBRIS USING CLEAN COMPRESSED AIR AND WATER. C. THE SURFACE OF ALL HORIZONTAL CONSTRUCTION JOINTS SHALL BE CLEANED AND ROUGHED BY EXPOSING CLEAN AGGREGATE SOLIDLY EMBEDDED IN MORTAR MATRIX. IN THE EVENT THAT THE CONTACT SURFACE BECOMES COATED WITH EARTH, SAWDUST, ETC., AFTER BEING CLEANED, THE ENTIRE SURFACE SO COATED SHALL BE RECLEANED. D. REFER TO OTHER NOTES FOR DUST CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION. E. BONDING AGENTS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE OR A SUBSTITUTE FOR PROCEDURES A, B. AND C. 11. BONDING AGENT WHEN SPECIFIED SHALL BE CHEMREX CONCRESIVE LIQUID LPL, OR SIKA ARMATEC 110 EPOCEM, OR APPROVED EQUAL AND SHALL BE APPLIED FOLLOWING THE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. 12. THE NOMINAL MAXIMUM SIZE OF COARSE AGGREGATES SHALL BE 1" UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 13. ALL CRACKS WIDER THAN 1/64" IN NEW CONCRETE APPEARING WITHIN 6 MONTHS OF CONCRETE PLACEMENT SHALL BE REPAIRED USING EPOXY ADHESIVE INJECTION BY THE CONTRACTOR AT NO COST TO THE OWNER. 14. CONCRETE SHALL BE MIXED, PLACED AND CURED PER ACI 318, LATEST EDITION AND PROJECT SPECIFICATION. 1. ALL CONCRETE AND MASONRY SHALL BE REINFORCED. REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE NEW DEFORMED STEEL BARS CONFORMING TO ASTM A615, GRADE 60 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 2. REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE ACCURATELY PLACED AND FIRMLY SUPPORTED DURING CONCRETE POUR. 3. COMPLETE REINFORCING STEEL PLACEMENT DRAWINGS SHALL BE PREPARED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ACI 315 BY THE CONTRACTOR AND REVIEWED BY THE SEOR AND SHALL BE AVAILABLE ON THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO INSPECTION AND THE PLACING OF CONCRETE. 4. ANCHOR BOLTS, DOWELS AND OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMS SHALL BE SECURELY ANCHORED AND/OR TIED IN PLACE BEFORE CONCRETE IS PLACED. 5. ALL REINFORCING STEEL TO BE WELDED SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A706, GRADE 60. DEFORMATIONS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM A615. 6. ALL WELDING OF REINFORCING STEEL SHALL CONFORM TO AWS D1.4 AND SHALL BE PERFORMED BY CERTIFIED WELDERS USING AWS A5.5 E80XX FOR ASTM A706 GRADE 60 (TABLE 7.1 AWS D1.4) LOW HYDROGEN MOISTURE RESISTING ELECTRODES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 7. NO HEATING SHALL BE ALLOWED FOR BENDING OF REINFORCING STEEL UNLESS APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER. 8. ALL MECHANICAL SPLICES SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE SEOR AND INSPECTED DURING CONSTRUCTION AND SHALL HAVE AN ICC-ES/IAPMO NUMBER. 9. ALL HEADED BAR SYSTEMS (TERMINATORS) SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE SEOR AND INSPECTED DURING CONSTRUCTION AND SHALL HAVE AN ICC-ES/IAPMO NUMBER. 10. ALL REINFORCING STEEL INTERRUPTED BY STRUCTURAL STEEL SHALL TERMINATE WITHIN 1" OF STEEL SURFACE WITH A 90° STANDARD HOOK UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 11. ALL REINFORCING BEND SHALL BE MADE COLD. RE-BENDING OR PREVIOUSLY BENT REINFORCING IS NOT PERMITTED. REINFORCING STEEL ADHESIVE ANCHOR SYSTEM FOR THREADED ROD OR REBAR IN CONCRETE MINIMUM EMBEDMENT DEPTH (U.N.O.) #5 THREAD ROD DIAMETER (Ø) #4 9,300 LB6" 412" 5,600 LB TESTING FORCE AN EQUIVALENT PRODUCT ACCEPTABLE TO ENGINEER HILTI HIT - RE 500 V3 SIMPSON - SET-XP ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS ESR-3814 ESR-2508 ICC-ES EVALUATION REPORT REBAR SIZE ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS HILTI - KWIK BOLT TZ2 SIMPSON - STRONG-BOLT 2 DEPTH (U.N.O.) 212" AN EQUIVALENT PRODUCT ACCEPTABLE TO ENGINEER ICC-ES EVALUATION REPORT ESR-4266 ESR-3037 HILTI KWIK BOLT TZ2 338" BOLT DIAMETER (Ø)EFFECTIVE MIN. DEPTH , U.N.O. 3 8"30 12"50314" INSTALLATION TORQUE (FT-LB)* SIMPSON STRONG-TIE STRONG-BOLT 2 ANCHORS MUST ATTAIN SPECIFIED TORQUE WITHIN 1/2 TURN OF THE NUT. INSTALLATION TORQUE APPLIES TO CARBON STEEL ANCHORS. REFER TO ICC REPORT FOR INSTALLATION TORQUE REQUIRED FOR STAINLESS STEEL ANCHORS. ANCHORS MUST ATTAIN SPECIFIED TORQUE WITHIN 1/2 TURN OF THE NUT. INSTALLATION TORQUE APPLIES TO CARBON STEEL ANCHORS. REFER TO ICC REPORT FOR INSTALLATION TORQUE REQUIRED FOR STAINLESS STEEL ANCHORS. 312" 7" 8" 9" #3 #6 #7 #8 3,400 LB 13,450 LB 16,800 LB 22,600 LB 412" 5" 58" 34" 4" 434" 40 110 2" BOLT DIAMETER (Ø) 3 8" 12" 58" 34" 38" DIA 12" DIA 5 8" DIA 3 4" DIA 7 8" DIA 1" DIA 1. REFER TO PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS FOR PROJECT REQUIREMENTS. 2. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SAFETY OF WORK AREA DURING CONSTRUCTION PERIOD. THE CONTRCTOR SHALL PROTECT ADJACENT PROPERTY AND UTILITIES IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL NATIONAL, STATE, AND LOCAL SAFETY ORDINANCES. 3. DRAWINGS INDICATE GENERAL AND TYPICAL DETAILS OF CONSTRACTION. WHERE CONDITIONS ARE NOT SPECIFICALLY INDICATED BUT ARE OF SIMILAR CHARACTER TO DETAILS SHOW, SIMILAR DETAILS OF CONSTRACTION SHALL BE USED SUBJECT TO PRIOR REVIEW BY THE SEOR. 4. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUPERVISE AND DIRECT THE WORK, AND SHALL BE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL CONSTRUCTION MEANS, METHODS, TECHNIQUES, SEQUENCES AND PROCEDURES. THE SUPPORTING SERVICES BY THE SEOR, WHETHER PERFORMED PRIOR TO, DURING, OR AFTER CONSTRUCTION, ARE PERFORMED SOLELY FOR THE PURPOSE OF ASSISTING IN QUALITY CONTROL AND IN ACHIEVING CONFORMANCE WITH CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS; BUT THEY DO NOT GUARANTEE THE CONTRACTOR'S PERFORMANCE AND SHALL NOT BE CONSIDERED AS SUPERVISION OF CONSTRUCTION. 5. SHOP DRAWINGS REQUIRED BY THE PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE SEOR FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO FABRICATION. DRAWINGS ARE REVIEWED BY THE SEOR FOR GENERAL CONFORMANCE TO THE DESIGN. REGARDLESS OF THE SEOR'S REVIEW, THE CONTRACTOR IS FULLY AND SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLETE AND SATISFACTORY SUBMITTAL AND CONFORMANCE TO THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. SHOP DRAWINGS WILL BE REJECTED FOR INCOMPLETENESS, LACK OF CALCULATIONS (IF REQUIRED) OR CHANGES WITHOUT PRE-APPROVAL. ALL STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS AND DRAWINGS AS PART OF THE SHOP DRAWINGS SUBMITTAL SHALL BE SIGNED AND STAMPED BY A CALIFORNIA REGISTERED STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. 6. ANY PARTS OF WORK AREA WHICH ARE TO BE BARRRICATED OR SEALED TO NON-CONSTRUCTION INDIVIDUALS MUST BE COORDINATED WITH AND APPROVED BY THE OWNER BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK. 7. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL EXERT EVERY EFFORT TO PREVENT DUST AND CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS FROM CONTAMINATING THE WORK AREA. THESE EFFORTS SHALL INCLUDE BUT NOT BE LIMITED TO PROVIDING A DAILY CLEANUP OF THE CONSTRUCTION AREA. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER TO THE PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. 8. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO SECURE THE CONSTRUCTION SITE. 9. CUTTING, BORING, SAW-CUTTING OR DRILLING THROUGH NEW STRUCTURAL MEMBERS OTHER THAN THOSE DETAILED ON STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS SHALL NOT BE DONE WITHOUT THE SEOR'S APPROVAL. 10. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL: - CHECK DIMENSIONS. - BE RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATING THE WORK OF ALL TRADES ALL DISCREPANCIES SHALL BE CALLED TO THE ATTENTION OF THE SEOR AND SHALL BE RESOLVED BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK. 11. ALL MATERIALS, FEATURES OR CONDITION NOT IDENTIFIED AS (E) WHICH MEANS "EXISTING, SHALLBE BE CONSIDERED AS NEW AND PART OF THE PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK. 12. THE CONTRACTOR IS FULLY AND SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL SHORING REQUIRED IN ORDER TO SAFELY ACHIEVE THE FINAL CONSTRUCTION SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. THIS INCLUDES, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO, ANY TYPES OF SHORING REQUIRED FOR SOILS EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL WORK; SUPPORT OF STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS UNTIL THEY HAVE ACHIEVED THE NECESSARY STRENGTH TO PERFORM IN THE FINAL POSITION AND MANNER SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS; AND SUPPORT OF STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS THAT ARE MODIFIED AND THEREBY REDUCED IN STRENGTH IN ANY WAY DURING CONSTRUCTION AS REQUIRED TO ACHIEVE THE FINAL CONSTRUCTION AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. ALL SHORING CALCULATIONS AND DRAWINGS SHALL BE STAMPED BY A CALIFORNIA REGISTERED ENGINEER AND SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO PERFORMING THE WORK. 13. WHERE NOT INDICATED OTHERWISE, THE LATEST EDITION OF ALL CITED DOCUMENTS SHALL GOVERN. 14. THE TERM CBC IN THESE DRAWINGS MEANS 2022 CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE. CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS, TITLE PARTS AND VOLUMES AND ALL CITY OF CARLSBAD AMMENDMENTS. 15. ALL CONTRUCTIONS AND WORKMANSHIP, INCLUDING MATERIALS, SHALL CONFORM TO THE DRAWINGS, PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS, AND THE CBC. 16. PROVIDE ALL MEASURES NECESSARY TO PROTECT THE STRUCTURE AND ADJACENT STRUCTURE(S),AND THEIR FINISHES AND UTILITIES, DURING CONSTRUCTION. 17. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ALL UTILITY LOCATIONS WITH OTHER DRAWINGS AND SHALL CONDUCT A DETAILED SURVEY OF EXISTING UTILITIES TO IDENTIFY INTERFERENCES WITH THE NEW CONSTRUCTION. PROMPTLY NOTIFY THE SEOR OF ANY INTERFERENCES PRIOR TO PERFORMING THE WORK. 18. CORING, TRENCHING & EXCAVATIONS: - PRIOR TO CORING, TRENCHING, AND EXCAVATIONS, THE CONTRACOR ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR AND IS REQUIRED TO USE AN INDEPENDENT UTILITY LOCATING SERVICE TO LOCATION ALL UTILITIES WITHIN THE IMPACTED AREA(S) THE INDEPENDENT UTILITY LOCATING SERVICE SHALL PROVIDE CERTIFICATION THAT IT HAS LOCATED ALL UTILITIES IN THE IMPACTED AREA(S) AND THE CONTRACTOR MUST DEPICT ALL DISCOVERED UTILITIES ACCURATELY ON REDLINES/AS-BUILT PLANS FOR SUBMISSION TO THE CITY OF CARLSBAD FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF CORING, TRENCHING, OR EXCAVATIONS, IN ADDITION, FOR UTILITIES REQUIRING EXTERNAL AGENCY NOTIFICATION, COORDINATION AND APPROVALS, THE CONTRACTOR MUST PROVIDE PROOF OF NOTIFICATION, COORDINATION AND REVIEWS BY EXTERNAL AGENCIES. 19. ALL SPECIAL/DEPUTY INSPECTION REPORTS AND TEST SHALL INCLUDE: JOB NAME AND JOB NUMBER, SITE LOCATION PLAN PAGE AND DETAILS ANY RFI AND REFERENCES. AS-BUILT CONDITIONS 1. CONTRACTOR MUST FULLY MEASURE THE (E) STRUCTURE BEFORE FABRICATING/CUTTING ANY NEW STEEL OR WOOD MEMBERS TO BE INSTALLED INTO STRUCTURE PER THESE DRAWINGS. 2. ALL NEW STEEL AND WOOD MEMBERS MUST BE FABRICATED/CUT TO THE ACTUAL AS-BUILT STRUCTURE DIMENSIONS IN ORDER TO ASSURE PROPER FIT-UP AND INSTALLATION AS SHOWN IN THE CONNECTION, SUPPORT AND OTHER DETAILS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. 3. MODIFICATION OF THE DESIGN OR DETAILS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS IN ORDER TO ACCOMODATE IMPROPER FIT-UP DUE TO LACK OF AS-BUILT MEASUREMENTS AND/OR FABRICATION ERRORS WILL NOT BE ALLOWED AND WILL BE THE BASIS FOR REJECTION OF THE INSTALLATION. 4. CONDITIONS SHOWN OR NOTES AS EXISTING ARE BASES ON THE INFORMATION AVAILABLE AT THE TIME OF THE PREPARATION OF THESE DRAWINGS. NO WARRANTY IS IMPLIED AS TO ACCURACY OF EXISTING CONDITIONS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER TO THE ORIGINAL CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS (IF ANY) FOR INFORMATION REGARDING EXISTING CONSTRUCTION AND SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL CONDITIONS. IF CONDITIONS BECOME APPARENT WHICH DIFFER FROM THE CONDITIONS SHOWN HEREIN, THEY SHALL BE BROUGHT THE IMMEDIATE ATTENTION OF THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. DIMENSIONS TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER SCALE OF DRAWING, HOWEVER, SIGNIFICANT CONFLICTS SHALL BE RESOLVED AS NOTED. 30 40 60 125 CARBON STEEL STAINLESS STEEL 30 50 40 110 30 40 60 125 INSTALLATION TORQUE (FT-LB) CARBON STEEL STAINLESS STEEL INSTALLATION TORQUE (FT-LB)* POST-INSTALLED ANCHORAGE INTO CONCRETE 1. ANCHORAGE SHALL BE INSTALLED PER MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS, AND SHALL COMPLY WITH ACI 318 CHAPTER 17 AND CBC. 2. ADHESIVE ANCHOR INSTALLERS SHALL BE CERTIFIED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ACI-CRSI ADHESIVE ANCHOR INSTALLER CERTIFICATION PROGRAM. 3. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARE A WRITTEN PROCEDURE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION FOR AN INSTALLATION METHOD TO AVOID DRILLING INTO OR CONTACTING IN ANY WAY REINFORCING STEEL AND OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMS. APPROVED METHODS COULD INCLUDE PLASTIC MARKINGS FORMED INTO THE CONCRETE SURFACE, OR USE OF GROUND PENETRATING RADAR EQUIPMENT SUCH AS HILTI FERROSCAN PS300. ANCHORS SHALL CLEAR EXISTING REBAR BY 1" MIN. 4. CONFORM WITH ICC RECOMMENDED VALUES FOR ANCHOR SPACING AND EDGE DISTANCE TO DEVELOP FULL (100%) ALLOWABLE TENSION/SHEAR LOADS LISTED IN ICC REPORTS. DO NOT USE REDUCED SPACING AND EDGE DISTANCE UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE BY THE DETAILS. 5. ANCHORS SHALL BE INSTALLED ACCORDING TO THE ANCHORING SYSTEM'S SPECIFICATIONS. DO NOT DAMAGE REINFORCING STEEL OR OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMS. FILL UNUSED HOLES WITH NON-SHRINK GROUT. 6. DRILLED HOLE SHALL BE CLEANED WITH A BRUSH AND CLEAN COMPRESSED AIR IN COMPLIANCE WITH ICC ESR REQUIREMENTS. 7. CONTRACTOR SHALL DETERMINE LOCATION OF EXISTING REINFORCING STEEL PRIOR TO DRILLING FOR ANCHORS, AND DRILL THE ANCHOR HOLES TO CLEAR THE REINFORCING STEEL PER THESE NOTES. NO REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE NICKED, CUT OR DAMAGED IN ANY WAY. DAMAGED REINFORCING WILL BE REPLACED BY THE CONTRACTOR AT NO ADDITIONAL COST. IF THE LOCATION OF ANCHORS MUST BE MOVED SLIGHTLY TO ACCOMMODATE THE LOCATION OF EXISTING REINFORCING STEEL, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARED A SLIGHTLY MODIFIED DESIGN OF THE ITEM TO BE ANCHORED AND SUBMIT TO THE ENGINEER FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO FABRICATION. THE MODIFIED DESIGN SUGGESTED BY THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INVOLVE THE ABSOLUTE MINIMUM RELOCATION OF ANCHORS TO MEET THE DETAILS AND REQUIREMENTS HEREIN, AND SHALL BE BASED ON A TEMPLATE BY THE CONTRACTOR WHICH ACCURATELY PORTRAYS THE POSITION OF THE ANCHORS. 8. WHILE ANCHORING STEEL MEMBERS AGAINST CONCRETE, PROVIDE LOCK-WASHER AND NUT AT EACH ANCHOR ROD. 9. CONCRETE SCREW ANCHORS MAY BE HILTI KH-EZ S.S. 316 (ICC ESR-3027), SIMPSON TITEN HD S.S. 316 SCREW ANCHORS (ICC ESR-2713), RED HEAD TAPCON+ SCREW ANCHOR (ICC ESR-3699), OR AN EQUIVALENT PRODUCT ACCEPTABLE TO ENGINEER. AT ENDS OF LATERAL SEISMIC BRACING, USE EXPANSION BOLTS IN LIEU OF SCREW ANCHORS. 10. TEST POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS IN CONCRETE PER CBC. TENSION-TEST BOLTS TO TWICE THE ALLOWABLE TENSION VALUE LISTED IN THE APPLICABLE ICC REPORT FOR BOLTS OF THE SAME DIAMETER. TEST 100-PERCENT OF BOLTS USED FOR STRUCTURAL APPLICATIONS. TEST 50-PERCENT OF BOLTS USED FOR NON-STRUCTURAL APPLICATIONS SUCH AS EQUIPMENT ANCHORAGE, INCLUDING HALF OF THE BOLTS IN EACH GROUP. TEST 10-PERCENT OF BOLTS USED FOR SILL-PLATE BOLTING APPLICATIONS. 11. ALL BOLTS AND ANCHORS (INCLUDING NUTS AND WASHERS) EXPOSED TO WEATHER SHALL BE STAINLESS STEEL.. 12. THE EMBEDMENT DEPTH OF POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS SPECIFIED IN THE INDIVIDUAL DRAWING DETAILS SHALL GOVERN OVER THE MINIMUM EMBEDMENTS SHOWN IN THE TABLES ABOVE. WHERE THE INDIVIDUAL DRAWING DETAIL SPECIFIES A CERTAIN PRODUCT AND THE CONTRACTOR WISHES TO USE AN ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATIVE PRODUCT, THE EMBEDMENT DEPTH FOR THAT ALTERNATIVE PRODUCT SHALL BE INCREASED AS REQUIRED BEYOND THE EMBEDMENT DEPTH SHOWN FOR THE SPECIFIED PRODUCT IN ORDER TO ACHIEVE THE SAME CAPACITIES IN SHEAR AND TENSION AS PUBLISHED IN THE ICC-ESR REPORT FOR THE PRODUCT AND EMBEDMENT DEPTH SPECIFIED IN THE DETAIL. IF THE EMBEDMENT DEPTH OF THE ALTERNATIVE PRODUCT MUST BE INCREASED TO MATCH THE CAPACITIES OF THE PRODUCT SPECIFIED IN THE DETAIL, THE LIMITATION ON CONCRETE THICKNESS SPECIFIED IN THE ICC-ESR REPORT FOR THE ALTERNATIVE PRODUCT MAY NOT BE VIOLATED. THE EMBEDMENT DEPTH FOR THE ALTERNATIVE PRODUCT MAY NOT BE LESSENED BELOW THE VALUE SHOWN IN THE DETAIL.. SOILS AND FOUNDATIONS 1. ALLOWABLE FOUNDATION AND LATERAL PRESSURE TAKEN FROM 2022 CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE TABLE 1806.2 (NO SOILS REPORT). 2. SOIL BEARING CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDATIONS: A. ALLOWABLE SOIL BEARING PRESSURES: 1,500 PSF 3. EXCAVATION AND COMPACTION SHALL BE APPROVED PRIOR TO PLACING ANY REINFORCING STEEL AND CONCRETE BY A SPECIAL INSPECTOR APPROVED BY CITY OF CARLSBAD. THE IOR TO SUBMIT A LETTER OF COMPLIANCE TO OWNER. 4. ALL ABANDONED FOOTINGS, UTILITIES, ETC., THAT INTERFERE WITH NEW CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE REMOVED. DRAWING INDEX S-001 GENERAL NOTES S-002 GENERAL NOTES S-201 FOUNDATION PLAN S-501 SECTION AND DETAILS POLICE AND FIRE HQ - CHILLER REPLACEMENT DR A F T I M P R O V E M E N T P L A N S - C I T Y O F C A R L S B A D - P O L I C E A N D F I R E H Q - C H I L L E R R E P L A C E M E N T 50% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS6/21/24 - 2560 ORION WAY, CARLSBAD, CA 92010 1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130 IRVINE, CA. 92606 TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800 IDS IDS GROUP Project # 22X005.08 CK EL VM N A S N GI ALONSI EL E RPO EF M.T RE DE S E E R S IA O RFIAL LRAUT N RGER I TE OF CRTS US AT C No. 3930 S N AH A M I 90% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS7/23/24 DATE SIGNED: 04-01-2025 PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/02/24 PLAN CHECK CORRECTIONS04/01/25 - - 1 GENERAL NOTE S-001 I ~ ! I I ! I I I a :c E 'D & J l I s 8 ' I .. " 5 I 5 i ! I D 2 3i ! ~~-------1 ma~~ IB i T !DIAL = ~ if BEFORE TWO WORKING 11, YOU DIG DAYS BEFORE 11-,, YOU DIG I TOLL FREE ---1-800-227-2600 A PUBLIC SERVICE BY UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERT I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I i--==+~=+~============-_-_-_=::=::7=+::~=+::~=+::~t~:::j(siiffill CITY OF CARI.SHAD IISILE,JI I-L.!!...J ! PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT _ 22 E==t==i==================~==l==t==:l=::j lll'RIMIIEtlT PUNS FIii: ''-~===t~~~t:::::::::==============~::::E::3E:::t::j I APPROVED: JOHN MAASHOFF RCE 81909 EXP. 9/J0/251 DA1E N1W. = MlRKS MANAGER. aTY OF CARLSBAD DAlE=! EN!ll FR a, IIDRIC REVISION DESCRIPTION :: AFF= ~ AFF= = 13 ~ --I PRO.ECT NO. II DRAWING NO.I CBC 2022 TABLE 1705.3: REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTS OF CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION 4. INSPECT ANCHORS POST-INSTALLED IN HARDENED CONCRETE MEMBERSb. a. ADHESIVE ANCHORS INSTALLED IN HORIZONTAL OR UPWARDLY INCLINED ORIENTATIONS TO RESIST SUSTAINED TENSION LOADSc. b. MECHANICAL ANCHORS AND ADHESIVE NOT DEFINED IN 4.a. 6. PRIOR TO AND DURING CONCRETE PLACEMENT, FABRICATE SPECIMENS FOR STRENGTH TESTS, PERFORM SLUMP AND AIR CONTENT TESTS, AND DETERMINE THE TEMPERATURE OF THE CONCRETE. 7. INSPECT CONCRETE FOR PROPER APPLICATION TECHNIQUES. 8. VERIFY MAINTENANCE OF SPECIFIED CURING TEMPERATURE AND TECHNIQUES. -X -X -X -X X X AWS D1.4, ACI 318: Ch. 19, 26.4, 26.13.3.2 ACI 318: 26. 3, 26.13, ACI 506: 3.4 ACI 318: 26.5.3-26.5.5, 26.13.3.3 TYPE CONTINUOUS SPECIAL INSPECTION PERIODIC SPECIAL INSPECTION REFERENCE STANDARD a CBC REFERENCE 10.INSPECT ERECTION OF PRECAST CONCRETE MEMBERS. X X - - ACI 318: 26.10.2, 26.13.1, 26.13.3.2 1705A.3.4 - 3. INSPECT ANCHORS CAST IN CONCRETE. 9. INSPECT PRESTRESSED CONCRETE FOR: a. APPLICATION OF PRESTRESSING FORCES, AND b. GROUTING OF BONDED PRESTRESSING TENDONDS. X- X X X-5. VERIFY USE OF REQUIRED DESIGN MIX. ACI 318: Ch. 26.9, 26.13.1, 26.13.3.3X -- X 14. INSPECT FORMWORK FOR SHAPE, LOCATION AND DIMENSIONS OF THE CONCRETE MEMBER BEING FORMED. a. WHERE APPLICABLE, SEE ALSO CBC SECTION 1705.13. b. SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIAL INSPECTION SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THE RESEARCH REPORT FOR THE ANCHOR ISSUED BY AN APPROVED SOURCE IN ACCORDANCE WITH 17.8.2. IN ACI318 OR OTHER QUALIFICATIONS PROCEDURES. WHERE SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS ARE NOT PROVIDED, SPECIAL INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS SHALL BE SPECIFIED BY THE REGISTERED DESIGN PROFESSIONAL AND SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE BUILDING OFFICIAL PRIOR TO THE COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK. c. INSTALLATION OF ALL ADHESIVE ANCHORS IN HORIZONTAL AND UPWARDLY INCLINED POSITION SHALL BE PERFORMED BY AN ACI/CRSI CERTIFIED ADHESIVE ANCHOR INSTALLER, EXCEPT WHERE THE FACTORED DESIGN TENSION ON THE ANCHORS IS LESS THAN 100 POUNDS AND THOSE ANCHORS ARE CLEARLY NOTED ON THE APPROVED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS OR WHERE THE ANCHORS ARE SHEAR DOWELS ACROSS COLD JOINTS IN SLAB ON GRADE WHERE THE SLAB IS NOT A PART OF THE LATERAL FORCE-RESISTING SYSTEM. X- - ACI 318: 26.13.1.3 ACI 318: 26.13.1.3X - - 1. INSPECT AND TEST REINFORCEMENT, INCLUDING PRESTRESSING TENDONS, AND VERIFY PLACEMENT. a. REINFORCEMENT IN SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES, BOUNDARY ELEMENTS OF SPECIAL STRUCTURAL WALLS AND COUPLING BEAMS. b. ALL OTHER REINFORCEMENT ACI 318: Ch. 20, 25.2, 25.3, 25.5.1, 26.6.1–26.6.3, 26.13.1, 26.13.3.2, 26.13.3.3 X 1705A.3.9, 1908A.1, 1910A.2, 1910A.3; [DSA-SS/CC] 1909.2.4, 1909.2.5, 1909.4.1 2. REINFORCING BAR WELDING: a. VERIFY WELDABILITY OF REINFORCING BARS OTHER THAN ASTM A706; b. INSPECT SINGLE-PASS FILLET WELDS, MAXIMUM 516"; NOT DEFINED IN 2.d OR 2.e. c. INSPECT ALL OTHER WELDS. d. REINFORCING STEEL RESISTING FLEXURAL AND AXIAL FORCES IN INTERMEDIATE AND SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES, AND BOUNDARY ELEMENTS AND COUPLING BEAMS OF SPECIAL STRUCTURAL WALLS OF CONCRETE AND SHEAR REINFORCEMENT. e. SHEAR REINFORCEMENT. X - - X - - ACI 318: 18.2.8, 25.5.7, 26.6.4, 26.13.1.4, 26.13.3.2, 26.13.3.3 1705A.3.1, 1903A.8 ACI 318: 17.8.2, 26.7.2, 26.8.2, 26.13.1, 26.13.3.3 - - ACI 318: 17.8.2.4 26.7.2, 26.13.1, 26.13.3.2 ACI 318: 17.8.2 26.7.2, 26.13.1, 26.13.3.3 1705A.3.8, 1910A.5, [DSA-SS/CC] 1909.2.7 1705A.3.8, 1910A.5, [DSA-SS/CC] 1909.2.7 1903A.5, 1903A.6, 1903A.7, 1904A.1, 1904A.2, 1910A.1, [OSHPD 1 & 4] 1908A.1, [DSA-SS/CC] 1909.2.1, 1909.2.2, 1909.2.3 ASTM C31, ASTM C172, ACI 318: 26.4, 26.5, 26.12 1705A.3.5, 1705A.3.6, 1705A.3.9, 1905A.1.17, [DSA-SS/CC] 1909.3.9 1705A.3.9, 1905A.1.15, 1905A.1.16, [DSA-SS/CC] 1909.3.7, 1909.3.8 11.FOR PRECAST CONCRETE DIAPHRAGM CONNECTIONS OR REINFORCEMENT AT JOINTS CLASSIFIED AS MODERATE OR HIGH DEFORMABILITY ELEMENTS (MDE OR HDE) IN STRUCTURES ASSIGNED TO SEISMIC DESIGN CATE-GORY D, E OR F, INSPECT SUCH CONNECTIONS AND REINFORCEMENT IN THE FIELD FOR: a. INSTALLATION OF THE EMBEDDED PARTS b. COMPLETION OF THE CONTINUITY OF REINFORCEMENT ACROSS JOINTS. c. COMPLETION OF CONNECTIONS IN THE FIELD. 12. INSPECT INSTALLATION TOLERANCES OF PRECAST CONCRETE DIAPHRAGM CONNECTIONS FOR COMPLIANCE WITH ACI 550.5. 13. VERIFY IN-SITU CONCRETE STRENGTH, PRIOR TO STRESSING OF TENDONS IN POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE AND PRIOR TO REMOVAL OF SHORES AND FORMS FROM BEAMS AND STRUCTURAL SLABS. ACI 318: 26.10.2, 26.11.2, 26.13.3.3- - X X ACI 318: 26.11.1.2(b), 26.13.3.3 ACI 550.5 1908A.3, [DSA-SS/CC] 1909.4.3 FOR SI: 1 inch = 25.4 mm. - X X X - - - - - ABBREVIATIONS @ AT &AND A.B.ANCHOR BOLT ABV.ABOVE ADD'L. (ADDL.) ADDITIONAL ADJ.ADJACENT ALT.ALTERNATE ALUM.ALUMINUM APPRX. (APPROX.) APPROXIMATE(LY) ARCH.ARCHITECT(URAL) BLDG.BUILDING BLKG.BLOCKING BLW.BELOW BM.BEAM B.N.BOUNDARY NAILING BNDRY.BOUNDARY B.O.C.BOTTOM OF CONCRETE B.O.F.BOTTOM OF FOOTING BOT. (B)BOTTOM BRCG.BRACING BRDG.BRIDGE (ING) BRG.BEARING BTWN.BETWEEN CAMB. (C)CAMBER(ED) CBC CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE CANT.CANTILEVER(ED) C.F.CUBIC FEET (FOOT) C.I.P.CAST-IN-PLACE C.I.D.H.CAST-IN-DRILLED HOLE C.J.CONTROL JOINT; CONSTRUCTION JOINT C.L. (℄)CENTER LINE CLG.CEILING CLR.CLEAR COL.COLUMN CONC.CONCRETE CONN.CONNECTION CONST.CONSTRUCTION CONT.CONTINUOUS C.P.COMPLETE- PENETRATION CTSK.COUNTERSINK CTR.CENTER(ED) C.P.CUBIC YARD d d PENNY NAIL DBA DEFORMED BAR ANCHOR DBL.DOUBLE DEPT.DEPARTMENT D.F.DOUGLAS FIR DIA. (Ø)DIAMETER DIAG.DIAGONAL DIAPH.DIAPHRAGM DIM.DIMENSION DN.DOWN DO DITTO (REPEAT) DWG. (DWGS.) DRAWING(S) DWL.DOWEL EA.EACH E.F.EACH FACE E.J.EXPANSION JOINT EL.ELEVATION ELEC.ELECTRICAL ELEV.ELEVATOR EMB.EMBED(MENT) E.N.EDGE NAIL ENG.ENGINEER EQ.EQUAL EQPT.EQUIPMENT EQUIV.EQUIVALENT EXP.EXPANSION EXIST. (E)EXISTING EXT.EXTERIOR FDN.FOUNDATION FIN.FINISH(ED) FLR.FLOOR F.N.FIELD NAIL; FACE NAIL F.O.C.FACE OF CONCRETE F.O.M.FACE OF MASONRY F.O.S.FACE OF STUD F.O.W.FACE OF WALL F.P.FULL PENETRATION FRP FIBER REINFORCED POLYMER F.S.FAR SIDE FT. (')FOOT (FEET) FTG.FOOTING F.V.FIELD VERIFY GA.GAUGE GALV.GALVANIZE(D) GLB.GLUED LAMINATED BEAM (GLU-LAM) GRD.GRADE GYP.GYPSUM HD.HOLDOWN; HAND HDR.HEADER HGR.HANGER HORIZ.(H) HORIZONTAL H.S.HEADED STUD H.S.B.HIGH STRENGTH BOLT HT.HEIGHT I.D.INSIDE DIAMETER IN.(") INCH(ES) INFO.INFORMATION JST.JOIST JT.JOINT K KIPS; 1000 K.P.KING POST LAT.LATERAL L.B.LAG BOLT LB (#)POUND L.F.LINEAL FEET (FOOT) LLH LONG LEG HORIZONTAL LLV LONG LEG VERTICAL LT.WT.LIGHT WEIGHT MAX.MAXIMUM M.B.MACHINE BOLT MECH.MECHANICAL M.E.P.MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING MEZZ.MEZZANINE MFR.MANUFACTURER MIN.MINIMUM MISC.MISCELLANEOUS MTL.METAL (N)NEW N.O.(#) NUMBER N.S.NEAR SIDE N.T.S.NOT TO SCALE O/C (O.C.)ON CENTER O.D.OUTSIDE DIAMETER O.H.OPPOSITE HAND OPNG.OPENING OPP.OPPOSITE ORTH.ORTHOGONAL O.W.J.OPEN WEB JOIST PC PILE CAP PCF POUNDS PER CU.FT. PL.PLATE PLYWD.PLYWOOD P.P.PARTIAL- PENETRATION P.S.F.POUNDS PER SQUARE FOOT P.S.I.POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH PT PRETENSIONED P.T.PRESSURE TREATED QTY.QUANTITY RAD.(R) RADIUS RBS REDUCED BEAM SECTION REF.REFERENCE REINF.REINFORCEMENT (ING) REQ'D. (REQD.) REQUIRED RF.ROOF R.O.ROUGH OPENING S.A.D.SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS SC SLIP-CRITICAL S.C.D.SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS SCH.SCHEDULE SEP.SEPARATION SHT.SHEET SIM.SIMILAR SKW.SKEW(ED) S..G.SLAB-ON-GRADE SPEC.SPECIFICATION SQ.SQUARE ST SNUG-TIGHTENED STD.STANDARD STAGG.STAGGER(ED) STIFF.STIFFENER STIR.STIRRUP STL.STEEL STRUC(T).STRUCTURAL SUSP.SUSPENDED SYMM.SYMMETRICAL T&B TOP AND BOTTOM T&G TONGUE AND GROOVE TEMP.TEMPORARY THK.THICK(NESS) T.N.TOE NAIL T.O.TOP OF T.O.C.TOP OF CONCRETE T.O.S.TOP OF STEEL; TOP OF SHEATHING T.O.W.TOP OF WALL TRANS.TRANSVERSE T.S.G.TAPERED STEEL GIRDER TYP.TYPICAL U.N.O.UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED UTL.UTILITY VERT. (V) VERTICAL V.I.F.VERIFY IN FIELD W/WITH (W)WIDE; WIDTH WD.WOOD W.P.WORK POINT WT.WEIGHT W.W.F.WELDED WIRE FABRIC X-STG EXTRA STRONG XX-STG DOUBLE EXTRA STRONG STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION PROGRAM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION IS REQUIRED FOR THE STRUCTURAL SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CBC 2022, SECTION 1704.6. STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION IS THE VISUAL OBSERVATION AT THE CONSTRUCTION SITE OF THE ELEMENTS AND CONNECTIONS OF THE STRUCTURAL SYSTEM AT SIGNIFICANT CONSTRUCTION STAGES, AND THE COMPLETE STRUCTURE FOR GENERAL CONFORMANCE TO THE APPROVED PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION DOES NOT INCLUDE OR WAIVE THE RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE INSPECTIONS IN SECTION 110 OR THE SPECIAL INSPECTIONS IN 1705 OR OTHER SECTIONS OF THIS CODE. THE OWNER SHALL EMPLOY A STATE OF CALIFORNIA REGISTERED CIVIL OR STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OR LICENSED ARCHITECT TO PERFORM THE STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION. THE CITY OF CARLSBAD DEPARTMENT OF BUILDING AND SAFETY REQUIRES THE USE OF THE ENGINEER OR ARCHITECT, OR HIS/HER DESIGNEE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE STRUCTURAL DESIGN WHO ARE INDEPENDENT OF THE CONTRACTOR. NAME OF SE: RAMI ELHASAN THE STRUCTURAL OBSERVER SHALL PROVIDE EVIDENCE OF EMPLOYMENT BY THE OWNER OR THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. A LETTER FROM THE OWNER, THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE, OR A COPY OF THE AGREEMENT FOR SERVICES SHALL BE SENT TO THE BUILDING INSPECTOR BEFORE THE FIRST SITE VISIT. THE OWNER OR OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE SHALL COORDINATE AND CALL FOR A MEETING BETWEEN THE ENGINEER OR ARCHITECT RESPONSIBLE FOR THE STRUCTURAL DESIGN, STRUCTURAL OBSERVER, CONTRACTOR, AFFECTED SUBCONTRACTORS AND DEPUTY INSPECTORS. THE PURPOSE OF THE MEETING SHALL BE TO IDENTIFY THE MAJOR STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS AND CONNECTIONS THAT AFFECT THE VERTICAL AND LATERAL LOAD SYSTEMS OF THE STRUCTURE AND TO REVIEW SCHEDULING OF THE REQUIRED OBSERVATIONS. A RECORD OF THE MEETING SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THE FIRST OBSERVATION REPORT SUBMITTED TO THE BUILDING INSPECTOR. THE STRUCTURAL OBSERVER SHALL PERFORM SITE VISITS AT THOSE STEPS IN THE PROGRESS OF THE WORK THAT ALLOW FOR CORRECTION OF DEFICIENCIES WITHOUT SUBSTANTIAL EFFORT OR UNCOVERING OF THE WORK INVOLVED. AT A MINIMUM, THE LISTED SIGNIFICANT CONSTRUCTION STAGES ON THE "STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION/SIGNIFICANT CONSTRUCTION STAGES" FORM REQUIRE A SITE VISIT AND AN OBSERVATION REPORT FROM THE STRUCTURAL OBSERVER. THE STRUCTURAL OBSERVER SHALL PREPARE A REPORT OF THE "STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION REPORT FORM" FOR EACH SIGNIFICANT STAGE OF CONSTRUCTION OBSERVED. THE ORIGINAL OF THE STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION REPORT SHALL BE SENT TO THE BUILDING INSPECTOR'S OFFICE AND SHALL BE SIGNED AND SEALED (WET STAMP) BY THE RESPONSIBLE STRUCTURAL OBSERVER OF RECORD. ONE COPY OF THE OBSERVATION REPORT SHALL BE ATTACHED TO THE APPROVED PLANS. THE COPY ATTACHED TO THE PLANS SHALL BE SIGNED AND SEALED (WET STAMP) BY THE RESPONSIBLE STRUCTURAL OBSERVER OR THEIR DESIGNEE. COPIES OF THE REPORT SHALL ALSO BE GIVEN TO THE OWNER, CONTRACTOR, AND DEPUTY INSPECTOR. ANY DEFICIENCY NOTED ON THE OBSERVATION REPORT WILL BECOME THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OR ARCHITECT OF RECORD TO VERIFY ITS COMPLETION BY THE STRUCTURAL OBSERVER. A FINAL OBSERVATION REPORT MUST BE SUBMITTED WHICH SHOWS THAT ALL OBSERVED DEFICIENCIES WERE RESOLVED AND STRUCTURAL SYSTEM GENERALLY CONFORMS WITH THE APPROVED PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. THE CITY OF CARLSBAD DEPARTMENT OF BUILDING SAFETY WILL NOT ACCEPT THE STRUCTURAL WORK WITHOUT THE FINAL OBSERVATION REPORT AND THE CORRECTION OF SPECIFIC DEFICIENCIES NOTED DURING NORMAL BUILDING INSPECTION. THE STRUCTURAL OBSERVER OF RECORD SHALL PROVIDE THE ORIGINAL STAMPED AND SIGNED "STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION REPORT FORM" TO THE THE CITY OF CARLSBAD DEPARTMENT OF BUILDING AND SAFETY BUILDING INSPECTOR. THE ENGINEER OR ARCHITECT OF RECORD SHALL DEVELOP ALL CHANGES RELATING TO THE STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS. THE BUILDING DEPARTMENT SHALL REVIEW AND APPROVE ALL CHANGES TO THE APPROVED PLANS AND APPROVE ALL CHANGES TO THE APPROVED PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. AT THE CONCLUSION OF THE WORK INCLUDED IN THE PERMIT, THE STRUCTURAL OBSERVER OF RECORD SHALL SUBMIT TO THE BUILDING OFFICIAL A WRITTEN STATEMENT THAT THE SITE VISITS HAVE BEEN MADE AND IDENTIFY ANY REPORTED DEFICIENCIES THAT, TO THE BEST OF THE STRUCTURAL OBSERVER'S KNOWLEDGE HAVE NOT BEEN RESOLVED. CONSTRUCTION STAGE ELEMENTS / CONNECTIONS TO BE OBSERVED; A. SLAB ON GRADE: DEPTH OF SLAB ON GRADE; REINFORCING PLACEMENT, SIZE AND GRADE OF REINFORCING STEEL. NOTE: 1. THE SPECIAL INSPECTION SHALL BE PERFORMED BY CERTIFIED DEPUTY INSPECTORS. 2. THE TEST OF SOIL AND CONCRETE SHALL BE PERPORMED BY AN APPROVED LABORATORY. 3. THE CERTIFIED DEPUTY INSPECTORS AND THE APPROVED LABORATORY SHALL BE HIRED BY THE OWNER OR THE PROJECT CONSULTANT AND NOT THE CONTRACTOR. 1. STRUCTURAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS SHALL BE ACCORDING TO 2022 CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE AND, PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS. 2. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE THE WORK AND SCHEDULE WITH THE OWNERS INSPECTOR TO ASSURE THAT ADEQUATE NOTICE IS GIVEN FOR INSPECTION TO OCCUR WHILE MAINTAINING PROJECT SCHEDULE. 3. CONTINUOUS OR PERIODIC INSPECTION BY THE PROJECT OR SPECIAL INSPECTOR HIRED BY THE OWNER ARE REQUIRED FOR THE FOLLOWING TYPES OF WORK WHERE OCCURS: A. POST-INSTALLED ANCHOR IN CONCRETE B. EPOXY ANCHOR IN CONCRETE 4. THE TESTING TORQUES FOR POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS SHALL BE BASED ON THE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED INSTALLATION TORQUE AS APPROVED IN AN ICC-ES EVALUATION REPORT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. (CONFORM TO REQUIREMENTS OF CBC 2022, SECTION 1901.3.4.4). 5. THE TESTING FORCES FOR POST-INSTALLED ADHESIVE ANCHORS SHALL BE BASED ON ONE AND A QUARTER (1¼) TIMES THE MAXIMUM DESIGN STRENGTH OF ANCHORS AS PROVIDED IN AN APPROVED TEST REPORT USING CRITERIA ADOPTED IN THIS CODE OR DETERMINED IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPENDIX D OF ACI 318. TENSION TEST LOAD NEED NOT EXCEED 80 PERCENT OF THE NOMINAL YIELD STRENGTH OF THE ANCHOR ELEMENT (=0.8Asefya). (CONFORM TO REQUIREMENTS OF CBC 2022, SECTION 1901.3.4.4) 6. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR POST INSTALLED ANCHORS SHALL BE BASED ON ICC-ESR OR MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTION. FIELD TEST SHALL SATISFY THE MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS PER CBC 2022, SECTION 1901.3.4.3 AND 1901.3.4.5. 7. ALL SPECIAL/DEPUTY INSPECTION REPORTS AND TESTS SHALL INCLUDE: JOB NAME AND JOB NUMBER, SITE LOCATION, PLAN PAGE AND DETAILS, ANY RFI, AND CODE REFERENCES. STRUCTURAL TEST AND INSPECTION POLICE AND FIRE HQ - CHILLER REPLACEMENT DR A F T I M P R O V E M E N T P L A N S - C I T Y O F C A R L S B A D - P O L I C E A N D F I R E H Q - C H I L L E R R E P L A C E M E N T 50% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS6/21/24 - 2560 ORION WAY, CARLSBAD, CA 92010 1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130 IRVINE, CA. 92606 TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800 IDS IDS GROUP Project # 22X005.08 CK EL VM N A S N G I ALONSI EL E RPO EF M.T RE DE S E E R S IA O RFIAL LRAUT N RGER I TE OF CRTS US AT C No. 3930 S N AH A M I 90% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS7/23/24 DATE SIGNED: 04-01-2025 PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/02/24 PLAN CHECK CORRECTIONS04/01/25 - - 1 GENERAL NOTE S-002 I r I I I I J s I I I I a :i:: E ... & .I l I : ' ', OI i i .. 6 I • 6 i § J, 1 .. ... [:;:] I CITY OF CARLSBAD II SHEElS I , PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT 22 M'IIIMIIENTPUNSFIII: IDJIO~llDIBiT ~ = ~ DIAL TWO WORKING BEFORE DAYS BEFORE YOU DIG YOU DIG * !I\ * TO LL FREE 1-800-227-2600 '" A PUBLIC SERVICE BY !APPROVED: JOHN MMSHOFF RCE 81909 EXP. 9/30/251 UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERT DA1E N1IAL PIIIIJC WllRKS MANAGER. a1Y CF CARLSBAD DAlE D• FF r, MRC REVISION DESCRIPTION DA1E N1IAL DA1E N1IAL 1=~ II ~CT NO. 11DRA•G NO.I 01IER ll'fWNIL CIIY APPROVAL 11/2"= 1'-0"CHILLER YARD NEW PLAN (E) WALL 12 S-501 CHILLER CH-1B MAX OPERATED WEIGHT 3,000 LBS SEE (E) WALL (E) WALL 15'-4"36'-0" D C B 1 1 21 ' - 0 " 8 S-501 3" (E) 8" CMU WALL W/ #5 @ 24" O.C. EA. WAY TO REMAIN TYP. 7 S-501 (E) PUMP TO REMAIN (E) CHEMICAL FEEDERS TO REMAIN (E) BOILER TO REMAIN (E) EXPANSION TANK TO REMAIN (E) PUMP TO REMAIN (E) CHILLER YARD (E) 4" CONCRETE PAD W/ #4 @ 18" O.C. EA WAY 9 1 / 2 " NOTE: - CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS W/ MEP & ARCH. DWG. PRIOR TO ANY CONSTRUCTION. 1B S-501 (E) 4" S.O.G. W/ #4 @ 18" O.C. EA WAY (E) WEEP HOLE TO REMAIN TYP. 12 S-501 TYP 1A S-501 9 1 / 2 " 10 S-501 DEEP TRENCH PER PLUMBING DRAWING 3"Ø DRAIN PIPE. SEE MEP/CIVIL FOR LOCATION (E) 14" WIDE CONT' FOOTING. TYP. SIM' 10 S-501 (E) DRIVE WAY 5 S-501 11 S-501 4 S-501 12 S-501 CHILLER CH-1A MAX OPERATED WEIGHT 3,000 LBS SEE (E) GENERATOR SET 11 " ±7 ' - 5 " 8"8" 8" SEE MEP DWG 4" 4"Ø CHWR AND ANCHOR PER MEP DWG. 4"Ø CHWS AND ANCHOR PER MEP DWG. POLICE AND FIRE HQ - CHILLER REPLACEMENT DR A F T I M P R O V E M E N T P L A N S - C I T Y O F C A R L S B A D - P O L I C E A N D F I R E H Q - C H I L L E R R E P L A C E M E N T 50% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS6/21/24 - 2560 ORION WAY, CARLSBAD, CA 92010 1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130 IRVINE, CA. 92606 TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800 IDS IDS GROUP Project # 22X005.08 CK EL VM N A S N G I ALONSI EL E RPO EF M.T RE DE S E E R S IA O RFIAL LRAUT N RGER I TE OF CRTS US AT C No. 3930 S N AH A M I 90% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS7/23/24 DATE SIGNED: 04-01-2025 PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/02/24 PLAN CHECK CORRECTIONS04/01/25 - - 1 FOUNDATION PLAN S-201 TRUE NORTHN 2N.T.S.TYP. BENDS AT REINF. D D D D 12 d D D 135° 6 d (3" MIN.) 4d (212" MIN.) 135° STD. HOOK 6 1 180° STD. HOOK LEGEND: d - BAR DIAMETER D - 6d FOR #3 THROUGH #8 D - 8d FOR #9 THROUGH #11 90° STD. HOOK (E) CONC. SLAB-ON-GRADE CONC. SLAB-ON-GRADE PER PLAN 4" TYP EQ . EQ . HILTI HIT-RE 500 V3 TYP. (ICC ESR-3814) 4N.T.S.TYP. CONC. S.O.G. TO (E) CONC. S.O.G. #4 DOWEL @ 18" O.C. TYP.2'-0" PRESATURATION TO 110% OF OPTIMUM MOISTURE CONTENT 4" THK. (MIN.) BASE OF 12" CLEAN AGGREGATE 15 MIL VAPOR BARRIER W/ JOINTS LAPPED NOT LESS THAN 6" & SEALED W/ MFR. SEAM TAPE (3) #4 REBAR 24" MIN. STAGGER LAP SPLICE SEE SCH. LAP SPLICE SEE SCH. B db B DIAGRAM AT STAGGERED SPLICES BAR SPACING DIAGRAM SPLICE OR LAPPING BAR A NOTES: 1. THE SCHEDULED LAP SPLICE LENGTHS ARE FOR EITHER OF THE FOLLOWING CASES: 1.1 CLEAR SPACING OF BARS BEING DEVELOPED OR SPLICED NOT LESS THAN (2db), AND CLEAR COVER NOT LESS THAN (db). 1.2 CLEAR SPACING OF BARS BEING DEVELOPED OR SPLICED SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN (db), CLEAR COVER NOT LESS THAN (db), AND STIRRUPS/TIES THROUGHOUT LAP SPLICE NOT LESS THAN CODE PRESCRIBED MAXIMUM. 2. MULTIPLY LAP SPLICE LENGTHS BY 1.5 FOR CASES NOT MEETING THE CONDITIONS AS DESCRIBED IN NOTE 1. 3. USE CLASS "B" SPLICES FOR VERTICAL & HORIZONTAL BARS TYP. U.O.N. 4. TOP BARS ARE HORIZONTAL BARS PLACED SO THAT 12-INCHES OR MORE OF CONCRETE IS CAST IN THE MEMBER BELOW THE BAR. 5. VALUES SHOWN ARE FOR NORMAL WEIGHT CONCRETE. IF LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE, MULTIPY LAP SPLICE LENGTHS BY 1.3. (REFER TO NOTE 2 FOR ANY ADDITIONAL INCREASES IN LAP SPLICE LENGTHS). 6. VALUES SHOWN ARE FOR UNCOATED GRADE 60 REINFORCEMENT. 3N.T.S.TYP. BENDS AT REINF. A A #10 #5 #9 #8 #7 #6 BAR SIZE #3 #4 TOP BARBASIC BASIC CLASS OF LAP SPLICE CLASS "B" fc' = 4,000 PSI fy = 60,000 PSI CLASS "A" TOP BAR STRENGTH 15" 19" 24" 29" 42" 48" 54" 61" 20" 25" 31" 38" 55" 62" 70" 79" 20" 25" 31" 38" 55" 62" 70" 79" 26" 33" 41" 50" 71" 81" 91" 103" 8" MI N . 6" 3" CL R . 3" CLR. CONC. SLAB-ON-GRADE 1 1TYP. REINF. #4 CONT. FINISH GRADE SUBGRADE 51"=1'-0"TYP. EDGE OF CONC. SLAB-ON-GRADE DRAINAGE PIPE PER PLAN ROUGHEN SURFACE TO 1/4" AMPLITUDE AND PROVIDE BONDING AGENT. TYP. 1N.T.S.CONCRETE PAD EXTENSION 2" EFF. EMBED #4 HORIZ. DOWEL W/ 90° HOOK @ 18" O.C. W/ HILTI HIT RE 500 V3 EPOXY INSTALL PER ICC ESR 38142" CLR TYP (E) DOWEL WHERE OCCURS (E) SLAB ON GRADE PER PLAN (E) CONC. PAD PER PLAN 2" ±6 " F . V . A - A (E) REBAR TO REMAIN #4 HOR. DOWEL W/ 90° HOOK W/ HILTI HIT RE 500 V3 INSTALL PER ICC ESR 3814 #4 "U" DOWEL @ 18" O.C. W/ HILTI HIT RE 500 V3 INSTALL PER ICC ESR 3814 (E) DAMAGE AREA (E) CONC. PAD PER PLAN 7N.T.S.NEW S.O.G. TO (E) FOOTING 14" F.V. (E) 8" CMU WALL TO REMAIN (E) #5 @ 24" O.C. EA. WAY S.O.G. PER PLAN (E) CONC. FOOTING PER ELEV. NOTE: ·CONTRACTOR TO LOCATE EXISTING REBAR/DOWEL THAT NEED TO BE PROTECTED IN PLACE PRIOR TO ANY DEMOLITION. 8N.T.S.NEW S.O.G. TO (E) FOOTING 14" F.V. SLOPE PER ARCH'L.S.O.G. PER PLAN SLAB EDGE PER 5 -(E) FOOTING TO REMAIN NOTE: ·CONTRACTOR TO LOCATE EXISTING REBAR/DOWEL THAT NEED TO BE PROTECTED IN PLACE PRIOR TO ANY DEMOLITION. (E) 8" CMU WALL TO REMAIN (E) #5 @ 24" O.C. EA. WAY RE-SURFACE T.O. FOOTING TO MATCH NEW SLOPE (14" MAX.) (E) #4 DOWEL @ 24" O.C. TO REMAIN 12" 24" PORTION OF (E) #4 SLAB REBAR TO BE REMOVED 3" MIN. 4" MAX. 5' - 0 " 12" MIN6" 6" MIN 3" MIN.(E) #4 DOWEL @18" O.C. EA WAY (E) #4 DOWEL @18" O.C. EA WAY (E) 4" S.O.G. PER PLAN B - B HILTI HIT RE 500 V3 EPOXY INSTALL PER ICC ESR 3814 2 34" E F F EM B E D #4 DOWEL @ 18" O.C. EA WAY W/ 90° HOOD W/ HILTI HIT RE 500 V3 EPOXY. INSTALL PER ICC ESR 3814 #4 @ 18" O.C. EA WAY 4" CONC. EXTENSION PAD PER PLAN(E) CONC. PAD PER PLAN SLOPE PER CIVIL/ARCH'L. 8" RE-SURFACE T.O. FOOTING TO MATCH NEW SLOPE (14" MAX.) 2" MIN. 4" MAX. 1'-0"1'-2"#4 REBAR AS SHOWN W/ 90º HOOK AT CORNER #4 @ 18" O.C. 3" CLR. TYP. EPOXY DOWEL PER 4 - 3"Ø DRAINAGE PIPE PER PLAN L2X2X316" (SS316) W/ 12"X4" NELSON WELDED HEADED STUD @ 16" O.C. AND 4" MAX FROM EA. END. TYP. DEEP TRENCH PER 1 P-001 1 12" THK. DEEP TRENCH COVER PER SCHEDULE ON P-001 DRAINAGE PIPE PER PLAN #4 @ 18" O.C. EPOXY PER 4 - 24" MIN. 2" C L R TY P . 2" CLR TYP 2" CLR TYP. ROUGHEN SURFACE TO 1/4" AMPLITUDE AND PROVIDE BONDING AGENT TYP. ROUGHEN SURFACE TO 1/4" AMPLITUDE AND PROVIDE BONDING AGENT TYP. 4" EMBED ROUGHEN SURFACE TO 1/4" AMPLITUDE AND PROVIDE BONDING AGENT TYP. HILTI HIT RE 500 V3 EPOXY INSTALL PER ICC ESR 3814 (2) #4 ADDITIONAL REBAR (E) #4 DOWEL @ 24" O.C. TO REMAIN #4 DOWEL @ 18" O.C. W/HILTI HIT RE 500 V3 EPOXY INSTALL PER ICC ESR 3814 W/ 4" EMEBD WHERE THE DOWEL HAS BEEN CUT (4) #4 AS SHOWN SLOPE PER CIVIL/ARCH'L. EPOXY DOWEL PER 7 - DRAIN PIPE PER PLAN REBAR/DOWEL PER 7 - DEEP TRENCH PER 1 P-001 NOTE: - FOR INFORMATION NOT SHOWN SEE DETAIL 7 - 10N.T.S.DRAINAGE PIPE PENETRATION 11N.T.S.NEW S.O.G. TO (E) FOOTING 14" F.V. SLOPE PER ARCH'L.S.O.G. PER PLAN SLAB EDGE PER 5 - (E) FOOTING TO REMAIN NOTE: ·CONTRACTOR TO LOCATE EXISTING REBAR/DOWEL THAT NEED TO BE PROTECTED IN PLACE PRIOR TO ANY DEMOLITION. 5' - 0 " DRAINAGE PIPE PER PLAN 24" MIN. (E) #4 DOWEL @ 24" O.C. TO REMAIN DRIVE WAY S.O.G THICKNESS AND REINFORCING TO MATCH THE EXISTING CORE DRILL 5"Ø FOR DRAINAGE PIPE. (DO NOT DAMAGE (E) REBAR) REBAR PER 8 - SLAB EDGE TO MATCH (E) IF OCCURS #4 DOWEL @ 18" O.C. W/HILTI HIT RE 500 V3 EPOXY INSTALL PER ICC ESR 3814 W/ 4" EMEBD WHERE THE DOWEL HAS BEEN CUT PROVIDE METAL SLEEVES W/ I.D. 2" LARGER THAN THE O.D. OF THE PIPE. 10 " 12N.T.S.CHILLER ANCHOR DETAIL 4" MIN. (E) S.O.G. PER PLAN CHILLER UNIT PER PLAN (E) CONC. PAD PER PLAN 38"Ø HILTI KB TZ2 SS316 W/ 2" EFF. EMBED, @ 24" O.C. (MIN. 4 EA. SIDES TOTAL 8" ANCHORS MIN.) INSTALL PER ICC ESR 4266 PAD EXTENSION PER 1A -11" CLR.9 1/2" CLR TYP. POLICE AND FIRE HQ - CHILLER REPLACEMENT DR A F T I M P R O V E M E N T P L A N S - C I T Y O F C A R L S B A D - P O L I C E A N D F I R E H Q - C H I L L E R R E P L A C E M E N T 50% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS6/21/24 - 2560 ORION WAY, CARLSBAD, CA 92010 1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130 IRVINE, CA. 92606 TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800 IDS IDS GROUP Project # 22X005.08 CK EL VM N A S N G I ALONSI EL E RPO EF M.T RE DE S E E R S IA O RFIAL LRAUT N RGER I TE OF CRTS US AT C No. 3930 S N AH A M I 90% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS7/23/24 DATE SIGNED: 04-01-2025 PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/02/24 PLAN CHECK CORRECTIONS04/01/25 - - 1 SECTION AND DETAILS S-501 Exhibit 3 June 10, 2025 Item #9 Page 7 of 7 Docusign Envelope ID: 3200D42E-7261-4E41-96CF-D60758B844E5